all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
USERS MANUAL 1 OF 2 | Users Manual | 3.44 MiB | April 12 2013 / February 06 2014 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
USERS MANUAL 2 OF 2 | Users Manual | 3.65 MiB | April 12 2013 / February 06 2014 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.80 MiB | December 09 2014 / November 03 2015 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | December 09 2014 / November 03 2015 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Internal Photos | December 09 2014 / November 03 2015 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | December 09 2014 / November 03 2015 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | December 09 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Internal Photos | April 12 2013 / February 06 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | April 12 2013 / February 06 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | April 12 2013 / February 06 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | April 12 2013 / February 06 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | April 12 2013 / February 06 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | April 12 2013 / February 06 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | April 12 2013 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | April 12 2013 |
1 2 3 4 5 6 | USERS MANUAL 1 OF 2 | Users Manual | 3.44 MiB | April 12 2013 / February 06 2014 |
Users Guide Learn how to use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PC Guide dutilisation Dcouvrez comment utiliser votre ordinateur portable Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T904 Users Guide Learn how to use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PC 1 -
Copyright and Trademark Information Fujitsu America, Inc. has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document; however, as ongoing development efforts are continually improving the capabilities of our products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes. Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo, and LIFEBOOK are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited. Intel, Intel Core, and Centrino are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Atheros is a registered trademark of Atheros Communications, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., USA. OmniPass is a trademark of Softex, Inc. PowerDirector, PowerDVD, MakeDisc, and YouCam are trademarks of CyberLink Corp. Adobe and Adobe Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Norton and Norton Internet Security are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation in the United States and other countries. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Boost is a trademark of DTS (BVI) Limited (in Hong Kong and China) and DTS, Inc. (outside of Hong Kong and China). DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Copyright 2012 Fujitsu America, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated, without prior written consent of Fujitsu. No part of this publication may be stored or transmitted in any electronic form without the written consent of Fujitsu. B5FK-0871-01ENZ0-00 1 WARNING: HANDLING THE CORD ON THIS PRODUCT WILL EXPOSE YOU TO LEAD, A CHEMICAL KNOWN TO THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE BIRTH DEFECTS OR OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING. USER GUIDE FOR WIRELESS BROADBAND CONNECTION IF YOU HAVE THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS WAN (WWAN) DEVICE INSTALLED IN YOUR TABLET PC, THE WWAN USERS GUIDE IS LOCATED AT:
http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/mobile/support_notices PLEASE CLICK 3G MINI-CARD GOBI3000 REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION TO OPEN THE FULL USER GUIDE CONTAINING WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH RF SAFETY WHEN USING THE WWAN DEVICE. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Declares that product:
Fujitsu America, Inc. 1250 E. Arques Avenue Sunnyvale, CA 94085
(408) 746-6000 Base Model Configuration: LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations are subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. 2 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Use only UL Listed I.T.E. Adapters with an output rating of 19 VDC, with a current of 4.22 A (80 W). AC adapter output polarity:
When using your Tablet PC equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
The bottom of this Tablet PC computer can become hot when used for long periods of time. When using this Tablet PC, take caution to limit long term or continuous use while resting it on exposed skin, such as the lap. Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions on the next page. For Authorized Repair Technicians Only SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF LITHIUM (CLOCK) BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTION. FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE AND RATING FUSE. 3 Recycling your battery Over time, the batteries that run your mobile computer will begin to hold a charge for a shorter amount of time; this is a natural occurrence for all batteries. When this occurs, you may want to replace the battery with a fresh one*. If you replace it, it is important that you dispose of the old battery properly because batteries contain materials that could cause environmental damage if disposed of improperly. Fujitsu is very concerned with environmental protection, and has enlisted the services of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation
(RBRC)**, a non-profit public service organization dedicated to protecting our environment by recycling old batteries at no cost to you. RBRC has drop-off points at tens of thousands of locations throughout the United States and Canada. To find the location nearest you, go to www.RBRC.org or call 1-800-822-8837. If there are no convenient RBRC locations near you, you can also go to the EIA Consumer Education Initiative website (http://EIAE.org/) and search for a convenient disposal location. Remember protecting the environment is a cooperative effort, and you should make every effort to protect it for current and future generations.
* To order a new battery for your Fujitsu mobile computer, go to the Fujitsu shopping site at www.shopfujitsu.com in the US or www.fujitsu.ca/products/notebooks in Canada.
** RBRC is an independent third party to which Fujitsu provides funding for battery recycling; RBRC is in no way affiliated with Fujitsu. 4 Contents Chapter 1 About This Guide . 8 Conventions Used in the Guide. 8 Fujitsu Contact Information . 9 Getting to Know Your LIFEBOOK Overview . 11 Locating the Controls and Connectors . 12 Top Components . 15 Left-Side Panel Components. 17 Right-Side Panel Components . 19 Back Panel Components . 21 Bottom Components . 22 Status Indicator Panel . 24 Power Indicator . 24 Battery Charging Indicators . 25 Battery Level Indicator . 25 Display Panel . 27 Opening the Display Panel . 27 Using the System as a Tablet . 28 Changing Auto Rotation Feature . 29 Adjusting Display Panel Brightness . 30 Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor . 31 1 Keyboard. 33 Using the Keyboard. 33 Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen. 36 Using the Touchpad . 36 Active Digitizer Display . 39 Using the Capacitive Touchscreen . 43 Navigating Using Gestures . 43 Installing a Pen Tether . 45 Volume Control. 46 Controlling the Volume. 46 Modular Bay Devices . 47 Removing and Installing Modular Devices . 47 LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons. 49 Security Button Functions. 49 Post-logon button functions. 51 Changing Tablet PC Button Functions . 52 Setting up LIFEBOOK Security Panel. 53 Passwords . 53 Using Your LIFEBOOK Security Panel . 55 Precautions . 55 Uninstalling/Re-installing the Security Panel Application . 56 2 -
Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Getting Started with Your LIFEBOOK Power Sources . 58 Connecting the Power Adapters . 58 Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 60 Power On . 60 Boot Sequence . 61 Hard Disk Drive Passwords . 62 BIOS Setup Utility . 62 Booting the System. 63 Starting Windows the First Time. 63 Power Management . 65 Power and Suspend/Resume Slide . 65 Sleep Mode . 65 Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) Feature. 67 Windows Power Management . 67 Restarting the System. 67 Power Off. 68 ENERGY STAR Compliance. 69 User-Installable Features Lithium ion Battery . 70 Recharging the Batteries . 71 Replacing the Battery . 73 Secure Digital Cards. 75 Installing SD Cards . 76 Removing an SD Card . 76 Memory Upgrade Module . 77 Installing Memory Upgrade Modules. 77 Removing a Memory Upgrade Module . 79 Checking the Memory Capacity . 79 3 -
Device Ports . 80 Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack . 80 Port Replicator Connector . 80 Universal Serial Bus Ports . 81 Information About Anytime USB Charge Utility. 82 Headphone Jack . 82 Microphone Jack . 82 HDMI Port.. 83 External Video Port . 83 Port Replicator . 84 Port Replicator Components. 85 Attaching the Port Replicator . 87 Detaching Port Replicator. 87 Troubleshooting Your LIFEBOOK Troubleshooting. 88 Identifying the Problem . 88 Specific Problems . 90 Power On Self Test Messages . 99 Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) . 100 Saving and Recovering Your Factory and System Images . 100 Backing Up a System Image . 102 Recovery and Utility tabs . 106 Using Windows 7 Recovery DVD on Windows 8 64-bit system . 107 Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility . 107 Downloading Driver Updates . 109 Chapter 4 4 -
Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) . 110 Saving and Recovering Your Factory and System Images . 110 Backing Up a System Image . 112 Recovery and Utility tools . 116 Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility . 118 Changing BIOS settings between Windows 8 32-bit and 64-bit . 119 Downloading Driver Updates . 120 Care and Maintenance Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 121 Cleaning your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 122 Cleaning the dust filter . 124 Storing your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 125 Traveling with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 125 Batteries . 126 Media Care . 127 System Specifications Specifications . 129 Microprocessor . 129 Chipset. 129 Memory . 129 Video . 130 Digitizer. 130 Audio . 130 Mass Storage Device Options . 130 Modular Bay Devices. 131 Features. 131 Device Ports. 132 Keyboard . 133 Power. 133 5 -
Dimensions and Weight . 134 Environmental Requirements. 134 Popular Accessories. 134 Pre-Installed Software . 135 Learning About Your Software . 135 Glossary/Regulatory Glossary. 138 Regulatory Information . 151 Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN. 155 Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document . 155 Characteristics of the WLAN Device . 155 Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device. 156 Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device. 158 Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch . 159 Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar. 159 Activating the WLAN Device . 159 Configuring the Wireless LAN. 160 Connection to the network . 160 Troubleshooting the WLAN. 161 Troubleshooting . 161 WLAN Specifications . 163 Specifications . 163 Using the Bluetooth Device . 164 What is Bluetooth . 164 6 -
Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device . 166 Getting Started . 167 Installing OmniPass . 167 User Enrollment . 169 Using OmniPass . 172 Configuring OmniPass . 177 OmniPass Control Center . 178 Troubleshooting . 179 Appendix C: Using Intel Wireless Display Using the Wireless Display technology . 181 Starting the WiDi application . 182 Index . 183 7 -
Preface About This Guide The LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PC from Fujitsu America is a powerful convertible computer. It can be used either as a standard notebook using keyboard input, or in tablet configuration using pen input. It is powered by the new 3rd Generation Intel Core Processor, has a built-in color display with a dual digitizer, and brings the computing power of desktop personal computers (PCs) to a portable and versatile environment. The LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PC is designed to support Microsoft Windows 8 Pro or Windows 7 Professional. This manual explains how to operate your LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PCs hardware and pre-installed system software. Conventions Used in the Guide Keyboard and on-screen keys appear in brackets. Example: [Fn], [F1], [ESC], [ENTER] and [CTRL]. Pages with additional information about a specific topic are cross-referenced within the text. For example: (See Installation Procedure on page 43.) Note that all cross-references are linked to the referenced items, so by clicking the link, you will automatically go to the referenced item or page. On-screen menu items appear in bold. Example: Click Fujitsu Menu, and select your choice. THE INFORMATION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT WILL ENHANCE YOUR UNDERSTANDING OF THE SUBJECT MATERIAL. 8 THE CAUTION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT IS IMPORTANT TO THE SAFE OPERATION OF YOUR COMPUTER, OR TO THE INTEGRITY OF YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL CAUTION INFORMATION CAREFULLY. THE WARNING ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO EITHER YOU, YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC, OR YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL WARNING INFORMATION CAREFULLY. Fujitsu Contact Information Service and Support You can contact Fujitsu Service and Support in the following ways:
Toll free: 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Website:
U.S.A. - us.fujitsu.com/solutions Canada - www.fujitsu.ca Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:
Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any 9 - About This Guide Fujitsu Shopping Online You can go directly to the online by going to the website at: www.shopfujitsu.com. Maintaining Latest Configuration To ensure that you always have the most current driver updates related to your system, you should occasionally access the Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility. The FSDM utility is available to allow you to download the latest drivers, utilities, and applications from the Fujitsu Support site. If you have a Windows 7 operating system, you will need to go to the Support Site (http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS). Limited Warranty Your LIFEBOOK notebook is backed by a Fujitsu International Limited Warranty. Check the service kit that came with your notebook for the Limited Warranty period and terms and conditions. 10 - About This Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your LIFEBOOK Overview This section describes the components of your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PC. We strongly recommend that you read it before using your Tablet PC even if you are already familiar with notebook computers. Figure 1. Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T90 Tablet PC 11 Locating the Controls and Connectors Connectors and peripheral interfaces on the LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PC and the optional port replicator allow you to connect a variety of devices. Specific locations are illustrated in Figures 2 through 6. The table below provides a short description of each icon on the LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PC and/or optional port replicator. Each of the icons is either molded into or printed on the Tablet PC or port replicator chassis. Connection Tablet PC Icon SD/SDHC/SDXC slot Smart Card Slot USB Port USB Port with Anytime USB Charge Microphone Jack Headphone Jack HDMI Port Purpose The Secure Digital (SD)/SDHC/SDXC card slot allows you to insert a flash memory card for data storage. Flash memory cards allow you to transfer data to and from a variety of different digital devices. A dedicated Smart Card slot allows you to insert a Smart Card on which you can store such data as medical information or electronic cash. Connect Universal Serial Bus devices to the Tablet PC. Note that USB ports with a black tab in the center are for 2.0 or 1.1 compliant USB devices; those with a blue tab are for USB 3.0 devices.
Connect Universal Serial Bus 2.0 or 1.1 compliant USB devices. This port can also be used to charge USB devices whether the system is powered on or not. Connect an external microphone. The internal microphone is disabled when you plug in an external microphone. Connect stereo headphones or powered external speakers. The internal speaker is disabled when you plug in external headphones or powered speakers. The HDMI port allows you to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as a high-definition television or AV receiver). 12 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Connection Tablet PC Icon Purpose Security lock slot The security slot allows you to secure the Tablet PC using compatible locking devices. Suspend/
Resume slide Local Area Network
(LAN) Wireless Device On-
Off Switch External Video port Digital Video Interface DisplayPort The Suspend/Resume slide allows you to suspend Tablet PC activity without powering off, resume your Tablet PC from suspend mode, and power on the system when it has been shut down from Windows. The LAN (RJ-45) jack is used to connect the internal 10/100/1000* Base-T/Tx Ethernet to a Local Area Network (LAN) in your office or home, or broadband devices such as a cable modem, DSL, or satellite Internet.
*1000 Mbps, commonly referred to as Gigabit Ethernet. The Wireless Device switch allows you to turn power to the optional wireless devices on and off. The external video port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector to your computer. The DVI-D port on the optional port replicator allows you to connect a flat-panel LCD monitor or television that is equipped with a DVI-D port for ultra-crisp digital images and graphics.
The DisplayPort on the optional port replicator lets you to connect DisplayPort-compatible digital display devices such flat panel displays and digital projectors using a DisplayPort cable. 13 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Optional Web Cam Web Cam Access LED Display Panel Windows Button LIFEBOOK Security/
Tablet PC Buttons Power/Suspend/
Resume Slide Built-in Microphone Ambient Light Sensor Keyboard Status Indicator Panel Built-in Microphone Fingerprint Sensor Stereo Speaker Status Indicator Panel Wireless Device On/Off Switch SD/SDHC/SDXC Card Slot Stereo Speaker Touchpad Cursor Control Figure 2. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC with display open 14 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Top Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs top components. Web Camera The optional FHD (1920 x 1080 pixel) digital web camera can be used to take pictures of yourself to send over the internet. Web Cam Access LED The web cam access LED indicates when the web camera is activated. Display Panel The display panel is a color LED panel with backlighting for the display of text and graphics. The display has an active digitizer that is used with a stylus, and a dual digitizer that can be used with either a stylus or your fingers. Windows Button After you log on, the Windows button can be used to perform two functions. When pressed alone, it opens up the Start menu. If you press the power slide while the Windows button is being pressed, it acts the same as if pressing [Ctl] + [Alt] +
[Del]. LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons The LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons provide password security for your system, as well as one-touch application launch capability. See LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons on page 49. Power/Suspend/Resume Slide The Power/Suspend/Resume slide allows you to suspend Tablet PC activity without powering off, resume your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from sleep mode, and power on your Tablet PC when it has been shut down from Windows. See Power and Suspend/Resume Slide on page 65. Dual Built-in Microphones The built-in microphones allows you to record voice and annotations. 15 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Keyboard A full-size keyboard with dedicated Windows keys. See Keyboard on page 33. Dual Stereo Speakers The built-in dual speakers provide stereo sound. Touchpad Cursor Control The touchpad cursor control offers an additional method for moving the cursor. See Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen on page 36. SD/SDHC/SDXC Card Slot The SD/SDHC/SDXC card slot allows you to install a Secure Digital (SD) card for data storage. This architecture allows you to transfer data from a variety of different digital devices. See Installing SD Cards on page 76. Wireless Device On/Off Switch The wireless device on/off switch is used to turn on and off the optional wireless devices. Switching it off when not in use will help to extend battery life. See Activating the WLAN Device on page 159. Status Indicator Panels The Status Indicator Panels display symbols that correspond to specific components of your Tablet PC. Status indicators are located in two locations: on the front edge of the system (system status indicators) and below the application buttons (button status indicators). See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Fingerprint Sensor The fingerprint sensor device allows you to log onto your system and password-protected websites and applications by swiping your finger over the sensor. See Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device on page 166. Ambient Light Sensor The ambient light sensor measures the light in which the computer is operating and automatically adjusts the brightness of the display to suit the lighting conditions. See Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor on page 31. 16 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Air Vents HDMI Port Smart Card Slot DC Power Jack External Video Port USB 3.0 Port with Anytime USB Charge Headphone Jack Microphone Jack Figure 3. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC left-side panel USB 3.0 Port Left-Side Panel Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs left-side components. Air Vents The air vents are used to cool the system to prevent overheating. TO PROTECT YOUR TABLET PC FROM DAMAGE AND TO OPTIMIZE PERFORMANCE, BE SURE TO KEEP ALL AIR VENTS UNOBSTRUCTED, CLEAN, AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS. THIS MAY REQUIRE PERIODIC CLEANING, DEPENDING UPON THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THE SYSTEM IS USED. DO NOT OPERATE THE TABLET PC IN AREAS WHERE THE AIR VENTS CAN BE OBSTRUCTED, SUCH AS IN TIGHT ENCLOSURES OR ON SOFT SURFACES LIKE A BED OR CUSHION. HDMI Port The HDMI port is used to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as a high-definition television or AV receiver). See HDMI Port. on page 83. 17 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Smart Card Slot A dedicated Smart Card slot is provided on your Tablet PC. Smart Cards are the same size and shape as a credit card, but they contain embedded integrated circuits. To use the embedded Smart Card Reader, you must purchase optional third-party software for installation. Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to connect headphones. See Headphone Jack on page 82. Microphone Jack The microphone jack allows you to connect an external stereo microphone. See Microphone Jack on page 82. USB 3.0 Port with Anytime USB Charge The USB 3.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 3.0 transfers data at up to 5Gbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 and 2.0 devices, which transfer data at up to 12 Mbps and 480 Mbps, respectively. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 81. Note that this USB 3.0 port has Anytime USB Charge capability, which allows you to charge a USB device whether or not the system is powered on. USB 3.0 Port The USB 3.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 3.0 transfers data at up to 5Gbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 and 2.0 devices, which transfer data at up to 12 Mbps and 480 Mbps, respectively. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 81. External Video Port The external monitor port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector. See External Video Port on page 83. DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and charge the internal Lithium ion battery. 18 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Modular Bay Device USB 2.0 Port Pen Tether Attachment Point Modular Bay Eject Lever Figure 4. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC right-side panel Anti-theft Lock Slot Pen Garage Right-Side Panel Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs right-side components. Modular Bay The Modular Bay can accommodate one of the following devices. See Modular Bay Devices on page 47. Modular Blu-ray RW Drive. Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer Modular Lithium ion battery Weight Saver USB 2.0 Port The USB 2.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 2.0 transfers data at up to 480 Mbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices, which transfer data at up to 1 2Mbps. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 81. Pen Tether Attachment Point The pen tether attachment point is designed to securely hold a pen tether to prevent loss of the pen. See Installing a Pen Tether on page 45 for additional information. 19 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Pen Garage The pen garage is used to store the pen (also called a stylus) when not in use.The pen is used as the interface with the active digitizer display. Anti-theft Lock Slot The anti-theft lock slot allows you to attach an optional physical lock down device. Modular Bay Eject Lever The Modular Bay Eject Lever allows you to release the modular bay device so that it can be removed. See Modular Bay Devices on page 47. 20 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack Figure 5. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC back panel USB 2.0 Port Back Panel Components Following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs back panel components. Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for an internal Gigabit (10Base-T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T) Ethernet LAN connection. See Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack on page 80. USB 2.0 Port The USB 2.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 2.0 transfers data at up to 480 Mbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices, which transfer data at up to 1 2Mbps. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 81. 21 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Cleanable Dust Filter Air Vents
(multiple locations) Memory Upgrade Compartment Wireless WAN Module Compartment Battery Latch Battery Latch Port Replicator Connector Lithium ion Battery Figure 6. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC bottom panel Bottom Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs bottom panel components. Memory Upgrade Compartment Your Tablet PC comes with high speed Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic RAM (DDR3 1600 MHz SDRAM). The memory upgrade compartment allows you to expand the system memory capacity of your Tablet PC, thus improving overall performance. See Memory Upgrade Module on page 77. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary to open this compartment. 22 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Air Vents The air vents allow air to circulate through the system to cool down the components. TO PROTECT YOUR TABLET PC FROM DAMAGE AND TO OPTIMIZE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, BE SURE TO KEEP ALL AIR VENTS UNOBSTRUCTED, CLEAN, AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS. THIS MAY REQUIRE PERIODIC CLEANING, DEPENDING UPON THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THE SYSTEM IS USED. DO NOT OPERATE THE TABLET PC IN AREAS WHERE THE AIR VENTS CAN BE OBSTRUCTED, SUCH AS IN TIGHT ENCLOSURES OR ON SOFT SURFACES LIKE A BED OR CUSHION. Wireless WAN Module Compartment The Wireless WAN module compartment contains the WWAN device. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary to open this compartment. Battery Latches The battery latches are used to secure the Lithium ion battery in the battery bay. Lithium ion Battery Bay The battery bay contains the internal Lithium ion battery. It can be opened for the removal of the battery when stored over a long period of time or for swapping a discharged battery with a charged Lithium ion battery. See Lithium ion Battery on page 70. Cleanable Dust Filter The dust filter is used to help remove dust and dirt fin your system. See Cleaning the dust filter on page 124. Port Replicator Connector This connector allows you to connect the optional Port Replicator to your Tablet PC. 23 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Power Indicator Battery 1 Level Optical/Hard Drive Access Battery Charging Battery 2 Level NumLk ScrLk CapsLk Security Figure 7. Status Indicator Panel Status Indicator Panel There are two Status Indicator Panels on your notebook: on the left front and under the display. The Status Indicator Panels display symbols and associated LEDs that correspond to specific components of your Tablet PC. These symbols tell you how each of those components is operating.(Figure 7) Power Indicator The Power indicator symbol shows whether your system is operational. It has several different states, each of which tells you what mode your Tablet PC is in at that time. 24 - Status Indicator Panel Steady On (Blue): This means that there is power to your Tablet PC and that it is ready for use. Flashing: This means that your Tablet PC is in Sleep mode. Steady Off: This means that your system is either in Hibernate mode, or that your tablet has been turned off. If you are charging your battery, the Power indicator symbol will remain on even if your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is shut off. Even if the system was shut down from Windows, the Power indicator symbol will remain on if you have an adapter connected. Battery Charging Indicators The Battery Charging and Battery Level indicators state whether the Lithium ion battery (Battery 1) or the optional modular battery (Battery 2) are installed and charging. 111 2 Battery Level Indicator The Battery Level indicators display the charge level of the indicated battery pack, as follows:
Green, solid: Battery is between 51% and 100% charged. Orange, solid: Battery is between 13% and 50% charged. Red, solid: Battery is between 0% and 12% charged. Orange, blinking: Blinks during battery status measurement (Four seconds after the battery is installed). Red, blinking: There is a problem with the battery. Off: There is no battery installed. IF THE BATTERY PACK IS INSTALLED WHILE THE POWER IS TURNED OFF, THE BATTERY LEVEL INDICATOR WILL DISPLAY THE CHARGE LEVEL FOR FIVE SECONDS AFTER IT BLINKS ORANGE. IF THE AC ADAPTER IS NOT CONNECTED OR THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT FULLY CHARGED WHEN THE COMPUTER IS SWITCHED TO SLEEP MODE, THE INDICATOR WILL BLINK. THE LED BLINKS AT THE RATE OF ONE SECOND ON/FIVE SECONDS OFF. BATTERIES SUBJECTED TO SHOCKS, VIBRATION OR EXTREME TEMPERATURES CAN BE PERMANENTLY DAMAGED. A SHORTED BATTERY IS DAMAGED AND MUST BE REPLACED. 25 - Status Indicator Panel Hard Drive/Optical Drive Access Indicator The Hard Drive/Optical Drive Access indicator shows whether your internal hard drive or optical drive are being accessed is being accessed. Security Indicator The Security Indicator flashes (if a password was set) when the system resumes from Off or Sleep modes. You must enter the password that was set in the Security Panel before your system will resume operation. NumLk Indicator The NumLk indicator states that the integral keyboard is set in ten-key numeric keypad mode. CapsLock Indicator The CapsLock indicator states that your keyboard is set to type in all capital letters. ScrLk Indicator The ScrLk indicator states that your scroll lock is active. 26 - Status Indicator Panel Display Panel Figure 8. Opening the Display Panel Display Panel Your LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PC contains an LED display panel that is backlit for easier viewing in bright environments. The convertible design of your Tablet PC allows you to open the display fully, rotate it in either direction 180 degrees, and lay it face up on the keyboard. This allows you to use the system as a tablet, much as you would a pad of paper. Opening the Display Panel Simply lift the display up and backwards, (being careful not to touch the screen with your fingers), until it is at a comfortable viewing angle. (Figure 8) 27 - Display Panel Using the System as a Tablet If you would like to use the system as a tablet, perform the following steps. THE DISPLAY CAN BE ROTATED IN EITHER DIRECTION, BUT WHEN RETURNING THE SYSTEM TO NOTEBOOK MODE, BE SURE TO TURN IT BACK TO ITS ORIGINAL POSITION (I.E., THE REVERSE OF HOW YOU TURNED IT WHEN YOU OPENED IT. TURNING THE DISPLAY IN THE INCORRECT DIRECTION COULD CAUSE HINGE DAMAGE. IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, BE SURE TO POSITION THE DISPLAY PERPENDICULAR TO THE KEYBOARD, OTHERWISE THE KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY COVER COULD GET SCRATCHED. 1 Lift the display until it is perpendicular to the keyboard. (Figure 9). 2 When the display is perpendicular to the keyboard, rotate it 180 degrees in either direction (Figure 10) so that it is facing backwards. 3 Holding the top edge of the display panel, pull it forward until it is lying nearly atop the keyboard. 4 To return the system to notebook configuration, repeat steps 3 and 2. C A B D Figure 9. Fully Open Display Figure 10. Rotating Display Figure 11. Tablet Mode 28 - Display Panel Holding the Tablet PC Your computer can be used in tablet configuration in four different orientations: 0o, 90o, 180o, and 270o.
(Figure ). Letters associated with each orientation refer to the position of the system when the arrow is facing up.
(A) Portrait Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned vertically with the web camera on the
(B) 2nd Portrait Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned vertically with the web camera on
(C) Landscape Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned horizontally with the web camera on left. the right. the top. IF YOU HAVE A SYSTEM WITH A WIRELESS WAN MODULE INSTALLED, PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING: WHILE HOLDING THE SYSTEM HORIZONTALLY WITH THE WEB CAMERA AT THE BOTTOM (2ND LANDSCAPE ORIENTATION, AS NOTED BELOW) WWAN MUST NOT BE OPERATED WITH THE ANTENNA OPEN. OPERATING IN THIS POSITION COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE WWAN ANTENNA.
(D) 2nd Landscape Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned horizontally with the web camera on the bottom. Changing Auto Rotation Feature Your Tablet PC has an Auto Rotation utility that allows you to determine how you would like the display to act when the tablet is rotated. When Auto Rotation is enabled, the display will automatically rotate in the same direction as the screen. When you receive your Tablet PC, Pause and Automatic Pause are set as the defaults for the Auto Rotation utility. When Pause is enabled, the system will not enter Auto Rotate until it is enabled. When Automatic Pause state is enabled, the screen will not rotate automatically if it has been rotated by a means other than Auto Rotation (such as when using the rotate button on the tablet). If the system is in Automatic Pause state, there are several ways to resume Auto Rotate:
Position the display and screen in the same orientation. When the system wakes from standby or hibernate mode. When the system is rebooted or a logoff/logon is performed. 29 - Display Panel When the system is in Pause state, there are several ways to enable it:
Go to the Start menu > All Programs > Auto Rotation Utility, and click Resume. Right-click on the Auto Rotation Utility icon in the system tray and click Resume. Open the Fujitsu Menu by pressing the [A] button or by clicking the Fujitsu Menu icon in the system tray, then clicking the [AutoRotation Resume] button on the second page of the Fujitsu Menu. Note: If you have Windows 8 Pro installed, pressing and holding the rotation button also turns off Auto Rotate. Adjusting Display Panel Brightness Once you have turned on your Tablet PC, you may want to adjust the brightness level of the screen to a more comfortable viewing level. There are three ways to adjust the brightness: keyboard, power management utility, and Fujitsu Menu. Using Keyboard to Adjust Brightness Adjusting the brightness using the keyboard changes the system setting (i.e., the settings you make via the function keys automatically changes the brightness settings in the systems Pen and Tablet Settings).
[Fn+F6]: Pressing repeatedly will lower the brightness of your display.
[Fn+F7]: Pressing repeatedly will increase the brightness of the display. Using Power Management to Adjust Brightness To adjust brightness with the power management utility:
Click Start -> Control Panel. In View by:, select one of the icon views. Select Display, then click Adjust brightness in the left pane. Drag the Screen brightness: slider to the left or right, depending upon your preference. Using the Fujitsu Menu to Adjust Brightness To adjust brightness using the Fujitsu menu, click on the Fujitsu Menu icon in the system tray in the lower right corner of the screen. (You can also open the Fujitsu menu by pressing the [A] button.) Scroll down to the Windows Mobility Center and double-click it, then double-click the icon adjacent to Display brightness. Set the screen brightness sliders for On battery and Plugged in scenarios. You can also use the Fujitsu Menu as a quick way to reduce the brightness to a minimum or increase it to a maximum. This is done by clicking the corresponding button in the Fujitsu Menu: LCD Brightness Min or LCD Brightness Max. 30 - Display Panel IF USING AC POWER, YOUR BRIGHTNESS SETTING IS SET TO ITS HIGHEST LEVEL BY DEFAULT. IF USING BATTERY POWER, YOUR BRIGHTNESS SETTINGS IS SET TO APPROXIMATELY MID-LEVEL BY DEFAULT. THE HIGHER THE BRIGHTNESS LEVEL, THE MORE POWER THE TABLET PC WILL CONSUME AND THE FASTER YOUR BATTERIES WILL DISCHARGE. FOR MAXIMUM BATTERY LIFE, MAKE SURE THAT THE BRIGHTNESS IS SET AS LOW AS POSSIBLE. Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor This system has an ambient light sensor (just below the Tablet buttons) that automatically senses the light conditions in which the computer is operating. If the lighting is very bright, the brightness of the LCD will increase to make it easier to see the display. Conversely, if it is used in a darkened room, the display will automatically dim. NOTE THAT WHEN YOU FIRST START YOUR SYSTEM, THE AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR IS DISABLED. YOU WILL INITIALLY NEED TO ENABLE IT USING THE FOLLOWING STEPS. The light sensor can be enabled or disabled from the Control Panel as follows:
Windows 7:
1 Open the system Control Panel and click in the View by: field, select either large or small icons. 2 Click on the Location and Other Sensors icon. 3 To enable or disable the Light Sensor utility, check or uncheck the box in the Enabled column. 4 For more information about the light sensor, click on Light Sensor in the Sensor column to open the Sensor Properties window. 5 From the Sensor Properties window, you can change the sensors description, uninstall the sensor, or enable or disable selected users. To change the sensors description, click the [Change description] button, enter the new description, and click the [OK] button. 31 - Display Panel To limit who can access the sensors, click Change who can access sensors, then check or uncheck the box adjacent to the individual you would like to grant or prohibit access. To uninstall the sensor, click Uninstall this sensor. Windows 8:
In Windows 8 systems, there are two ways to enable or disable the light sensor. 1. From the Modern Start Screen go to Change PC Settings -> General -> Screen. There you will find Adjust my screen brightness automatically. You can use the switch to turn the light sensor on/off. 2. From the desktop, go to the Control Panel -> All Control Panel Items -> Power Options. Select the plan in which you want to adjust the light sensor. Then go to Change Plan Settings -> Change Advanced power settings ->
Display. Under Enable adaptive brightness you can set on/off On battery or Plugged in. 32 - Display Panel Keyboard Function Keys Fn Key Start Key Numeric Keypad
(surrounded by heavy line) Figure 12. Keyboard Application Key Cursor Keys Using the Keyboard Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has an integral 84-key keyboard. The keys perform all the standard functions of a 101-key keyboard, including the Windows keys and other special function keys. This section describes the following keys (Figure 12):
Numeric keypad: Your Tablet PC allows certain keys to serve dual purposes, both as standard characters and as numeric and mathematical keys. The ability to toggle between the standard character and numeric keys is controlled through the [NumLk] key. 33 - Keyboard Cursor keys: Your keyboard contains four arrow keys for moving the cursor or insertion point to the right, left, up, or down within windows, applications and documents. Function keys: The keys labeled [F1] through [F12], are used in conjunction with the [Fn] key to produce special actions that vary depending on what program is running. Windows keys: These keys work with your Windows operating system. These keys switch between desktop and Modern Start screen modes and open the Application bar on the bottom of the screen. Numeric Keypad Certain keys on the keyboard perform dual functions as both standard character keys and numeric keypad keys. NumLk can be activated by pressing the [NumLk] keys. Turning off the NumLk feature is done the same way. Once this feature is activated you can enter numerals 0 through 9, perform addition ( + ), subtraction ( - ), multiplication
( * ), or division ( / ), and enter decimal points ( . ) using the keys designated as ten-key function keys. The keys in the numeric keypad are marked on the front edge of the key to indicate their secondary functions. Windows Keys Your LIFEBOOK notebook has two Windows keys, consisting of a Windows key and an Application key. The Windows key switches between the Modern Start screen and the desktop. The Application key opens the Application bar located at the bottom of the screen. (Please refer to your Windows documentation for additional information regarding the Windows keys.) Cursor Keys The cursor keys are the four arrow keys on the keyboard which allow you to move the cursor up, down, left and right in applications. In programs such as Windows File/Explorer, it moves the focus (selects the next item up, down, left, or right). 34 - Keyboard Function Keys Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has 12 function keys, F1 through F12. Functions assigned to these keys differ for each application. You should refer to your software documentation to find out how these keys are used. The [Fn] key provides extended functions for the Tablet PC and is always used in conjunction with another key.
[Fn+F2]: On backlit computers, pressing [F2] while holding [Fn] will toggle the backlit keyboard on (darker), on (brighter), and off.
[Fn+F3]: Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Audio Mute on and off.
[Fn+F4]: Pressing [F4] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Quick Point feature on and off. Note that the [Fn+F4]
combination only works if Manual Setting is selected in the BIOS. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 62)
[Fn+F6]: Pressing [F6] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will lower the brightness of your display.
[Fn+F7]: Pressing [F7] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the brightness of the display.
[Fn+F8]: Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will decrease the volume of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.
[Fn+F9]: Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.
[Fn+F10]: Pressing [F10] while holding [Fn] allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the combination of keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order, are:
built-in display panel only, external monitor only, and both built-in display panel and external monitor. 35 - Keyboard Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Left Button Cursor Control Right Button Figure 13. Touchpad pointing device Using the Touchpad The touchpad is built into your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. It is used to control the movement of the cursor to select items on your display panel. The touchpad is composed of a cursor control below the center of the keyboard and two buttons below it. The left button functions the same as a left mouse button while the right button has the same function as a right mouse button. The actual functionality of the buttons may vary depending on the application that is being used. 36 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Clicking Clicking means pushing and releasing a button. To left-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button once, and then immediately release it. To right-click, move the mouse cursor to the item you wish to select, press the right button once, and then immediately release it. You also have the option to perform the clicking operation by tapping lightly on the touchpad once. Figure 14. Clicking with button Figure 15. Clicking with Touchpad Figure 16. Right-clicking with button Double-Clicking Double-clicking means pushing and releasing the left button twice in rapid succession. This procedure does not function with the right button. To double-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button twice, and immediately release it. You can also perform a double-click operation by tapping lightly on the pad twice. Figure 17. Double-clicking with button Figure 18. Double-clicking with Touchpad 37 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen IF THE INTERVAL BETWEEN CLICKS IS TOO LONG, THE DOUBLE-CLICK WILL NOT BE EXECUTED. PARAMETERS FOR THE QUICK POINT CAN BE ADJUSTED FROM THE MOUSE DIALOG BOX LOCATED IN THE WINDOWS CONTROL PANEL. Dragging Dragging means pressing and holding the left button, while moving the cursor. To drag, move the cursor to the item you wish to move. Press and hold the left button while moving the item to its new location and then release it. Dragging can also be done using the Touchpad. First, tap the Touchpad twice over the item you wish to move making sure to leave your finger on the pad after the final tap. Next, move the object to its new location by moving your finger across the Touchpad, and then release your finger. Figure 19. Dragging with button Figure 20. Dragging with Touchpad Touchpad Control Adjustment The Windows Control Panel allows you to customize your touchpad with selections made from within the Mouse Properties dialog box. There are three aspects of operation which you can adjust:
Buttons: This tab lets you set up the buttons for right or left handed operation, in addition to setting up the time interval allowed between clicks in double-clicking. 38 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Pointers: This tab lets you set up the scheme for the cursor depending on its functionality. Pointer Options: This tab lets you set up a relation between the speed of your finger motion and the speed of the cursor. It also allows you to enable a Pointer Trail for the cursor arrow. Active Digitizer Display NOTE: Your system has a capacitive touch panel that responds to finger touch and gestures. (This configuration is called a Dual Digitizer.) For more information about the touchscreen, refer to Using the Capacitive Touchscreen on page 43. The integrated active digitizer allows you to use the included stylus as a pointing device. You can use the stylus to click, double-click, right-click, drag items and icons, write text, or to draw and erase like a pen or pencil in applications that support this behavior, such as drawing or painting programs. The front half of the barrel button works the same as a right-click button. The back half of the barrel button and the eraser button on the end of the pen both act as erasers. If using the eraser button, be sure to depress it by pressing it on the display in order to activate the eraser function. Figure 21. Using Active Digitizer Display 39 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Right-Click Toggle Eraser Button Eraser Toggle Pen Tether Attachment Point Figure 22. Stylus Features DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING OR WRITING ON THE SCREEN WITH THE STYLUS. EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR ACTIVE DIGITIZER. TO PURCHASE ADDITIONAL OR REPLACEMENT STYLUSES, VISIT THE FUJITSU ACCESSORIES WEBSITE AT: WWW.SHOPFUJITSU.COM. Clicking on Active Digitizer Display To left-click, touch the object you wish to select and then lift the stylus tip immediately (Figure 23). Right-Clicking on Active Digitizer Right-click can be accomplished by holding the front of the toggle button down while tapping on the screen
(Figure 24). To turn off the right-click feature, go to Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Pen and Touch. 40 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Figure 23. Clicking on the Active Digitizer Display Figure 24. Right-clicking Active Digitizer Double-Clicking To double-click, touch the item twice, and then immediately remove the stylus tip (Figure 25). Figure 25. Double-clicking the Display 41 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Dragging Dragging means moving an item with the stylus by touching the screen, moving and then lifting the stylus. To drag, touch the Active Digitizer Display with your stylus on the item you wish to move. While continuing to touch the screen with the stylus, drag the item to its new location by moving the stylus across the screen, and then lifting the stylus to release it (Figure 26). Calibrating the Active Digitizer Display In order to ensure accurate tracking between the stylus and cursor, you must run the Calibration Utility before you use the system for the first time, or after you change the display resolution. Figure 26. Dragging on the Display THE FIRST TIME YOU PERFORM A CALIBRATION, THE SYSTEM DISPLAY SHOULD BE IN LANDSCAPE MODE. SUBSEQUENT CALIBRATIONS CAN BE PERFORMED IN LANDSCAPE OR PORTRAIT MODE. THE FIRST TIME YOU CALIBRATE, THERE WILL BE 16 CALIBRATION POINTS; SUBSEQUENT CALIBRATIONS WILL REQUIRE ONLY FOUR CALIBRATION POINTS. To run the calibration utility:
1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Click Hardware and Sound, then select Tablet PC Settings 3 Under the Display tab, click the [Calibrate] button.(Note: If you have the optional capacitive touchscreen, you will need to click on either Pen input or Touch input, depending upon which method you want to calibrate.) 4 Adjust the display of your Tablet PC to a comfortable angle and find the (+) symbol in the upper-left corner of the display. 42 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING ON THE SCREEN DURING CALIBRATION. USE OF EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR TOUCH PANEL. 5 Depending upon whether you are calibrating pen input or touch input, firmly touch the screen with the stylus or your finger directly on the (+) symbol. Lift the stylus or your finger from the screen and the target will move to a different location on the screen. 6 Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the (+) symbols. 7 Once you have selected all the symbols, press the [OK] button. 8 Touch the stylus or your finger to various points on the screen to verify that the screen is correctly calibrated. If you are not satisfied with the screens calibration, press the [Calibrate]) button to begin again. Using the Capacitive Touchscreen This Tablet PC has a dual digitizer that allows you to use either the stylus or your finger(s) as a pointing device. This type of display also allows you to use gestures to perform such actions as scroll, zoom, and rotate. GESTURE SUPPORT IS DETERMINED BY THE APPLICATION IN USE. WHEN ONE FINGER IS USED ON THE TOUCHSCREEN, IT BEHAVES IN THE SAME MANNER AS A STYLUS. THE STYLUS TAKES PRECEDENCE OVER FINGER TOUCH. IF THE STYLUS IS WITHIN ACTIVE RANGE OF THE SCREEN, FINGER TOUCH WILL BE DISABLED. Navigating Using Gestures The touchpad allows you to use gestures to zoom in or out on a page, scroll quickly through large documents, toggle the charms, toggle the application commands bar, and switch to last application. Scrolling Up/Down:
To scroll up or down, slide two fingers up or down (Figure 27). 43 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Scrolling Right/Left:
To scroll right or left, slide two fingers right or left (Figure 27). Zooming In/Out:
To zoom in or out on a page using the touchpad, place two fingers in a pinch position and open the pinch to zoom in, or close to zoom out (Figure 28). Toggling the charms To toggle the charm swipe one finger from the right edge of touch pad (Figure 29). Toggling the application commands bar To toggle the application commands bar swipe one finger down from the top edge of the touchpad (Figure 30). Switching to last application To switch to last application swipe in one finger from the left edge.place two fingers in a pinch position and open the pinch to zoom in, close to zoom out (Figure 31). Figure 27. Scroll Figure 28. Zoom Figure 29. Toggle charms Figure 30. Toggle apps Figure 31. Last app 44 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen
. Installing a Pen Tether To prevent dropping or losing your pen, you should attach it to your system using the pen tether that is included with the system. To attach the pen tether to your Tablet PC, perform the following steps:
1 Attach the end of the pen tether with the smaller loop to your pen. To do so, push the end of the tether through the hole in the pen, then thread the opposite end of the tether through the loop. 2 Attach the end of the pen tether with the larger loop to the attachment point on your tablet. To do so, insert the end of the pen tether through the attachment point, then feed the pen through the large loop in the tether. Figure 32. Installing a Pen Tether 45 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Volume Control Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has multiple volume controls which interact with each other. ANY SOFTWARE THAT CONTAINS AUDIO FILES WILL ALSO CONTAIN A VOLUME CONTROL OF ITS OWN. IF YOU INSTALL AN EXTERNAL AUDIO DEVICE THAT HAS AN INDEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL, THE HARDWARE VOLUME CONTROL AND THE SOFTWARE VOLUME CONTROL WILL INTERACT WITH EACH OTHER. IT SHOULD BE NOTED THAT IF YOU SET YOUR SOFTWARE VOLUME TO OFF, YOU WILL OVERRIDE THE EXTERNAL VOLUME CONTROL SETTING. Controlling the Volume The volume can be controlled in several different ways:
Volume can be changed or muted from within the Volume Control in the system tray. Volume can be controlled using the Volume Up and Volume Down buttons on the button panel Volume can be controlled with the F8 and F9 functions keys. Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will decrease the volume of your Tablet PC. Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your Tablet PC. Volume can be changed by opening the Control Panel and selecting Windows Mobility Center. From there, you can either mute or adjust the sound in the Volume area. Volume can be muted by pressing the [F3] key while holding down the [Fn] key. To restore audio, repeat the
[Fn+F3] procedure. Volume can be controlled by many volume controls that are set within individual applications. Certain external audio devices you might connect to your system may have hardware volume controls. Each source discussed above puts an upper limit on the volume level that must then be followed by the other sources. We recommend that you experiment with the various volume controls to discover the optimal sound level. 46 - Volume Control Modular Bay Figure 33. Modular Bay Modular Bay Devices Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC contains a Modular Bay. The Modular Bay can house an optical drive, a Lithium ion battery, and a weight saver. Your Modular Bay will have one of the following devices installed. Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer: This allows you to access movies, software, and audio DVD/CDs and record to DVD, CD, and DVD-RAM discs. Modular Blu-ray RW Drive. This drive allows you to read from and write to Blu-ray discs. Modular Lithium ion battery: This is a rechargeable battery that can be used to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC when an adapter is not connected. Weight Saver: This is used to fill the bay when no device is needed. YOU SHOULD NEVER LEAVE YOUR MODULAR BAY EMPTY WHEN THE TABLET PC IS IN OPERATION. IF LEFT EMPTY, DUST OR FOREIGN MATTER MAY ACCUMULATE INSIDE THE TABLET PC. Removing and Installing Modular Devices There are two ways to remove and install modular devices in the Modular Bay:
Cold-swapping: swapping devices while your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is powered off. Hot-swapping: swapping devices while your system is active using the Safely Remove Hardware icon from your system tray. 47 - Modular Bay Devices Cold-swapping To cold-swap modular devices in your Modular Bay follow these easy steps:
1 Close any open files and shut down your LifeBook notebook. 2 Pull out the Flexible Bay release latch. This will push your device out slightly, allowing you to remove it. 3 Slide your device out until it is clear of the bay. This will require light force. 4 Slide the device you are installing into your notebook until it clicks into place. 5 It is now safe to turn your notebook back on. 6 You can now access and use the device. Your Tablet PC will automatically detect the device and activate it within your system. The drive letters associated with the device will be created and listed under My Computer and Windows File/Explorer. Hot-swapping Hot-swapping is provided through the Safely Remove Hardware utility. The icon for the utility appears in the system tray. Click on the icon and follow the on-screen instructions. 48 - Modular Bay Devices Modular Bay Release Latch Figure 34. Removing/Installing Modular Device Modular Bay Device Windows Button Power Button shown for reference only) Figure 35. LIFEBOOK T90Tablet PC Security/Tablet PC Buttons LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons A unique feature of your LIFEBOOK T904 Tablet PC is the array of Security and Tablet PC buttons as well as a standalone Windows button. These buttons allow you to secure your Tablet PC from unauthorized use and to launch specific applications and functions with the touch of a button. Security Button Functions If the security system is activated, upon starting your Tablet PC or resuming from Hibernate or shutdown mode, the security system will require you to enter a password code using the security buttons. After you enter the correct password, your system will resume operation. The five security/Tablet PC buttons are located on the bottom right-hand side of the display when it is configured to be used as a notebook. All five buttons are used when implementing security functions. Four of the buttons are used to enter the password;
the fifth is used as an Enter button. See Table 3 for information about each Security button. 49 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Button Icon System State Security Panel Function System is pre-boot or resuming from suspend Security Button 1 Security Button 2 Security Button 3 Security Button 4 Security Enter Button Table 3. Security Panel Button Functions 50 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Post-logon button functions All six buttons can be used after logging on. See Table 3 for information about each of the post-logon functions. Button Icon System State Tablet PC Function System is post-logon (Windows desktop is displayed) Windows Button has two functions. Primary action: opens up the Start menu
[Windows] button + [Power] button: Opens up CTRL+ALT+DEL screen Volume Down Volume Up Pauses and resumes the rotation lock feature. Opens the Fujitsu Menu utility Opens the Windows Journal application. Table 3. Post-logon Tablet PC Button Functions Windows Button In post-logon, the Windows button can be used to perform two functions. When pressed alone, it opens up the Start menu. If you press the power slide while the Windows button is being pressed, it acts the same as if pressing [Ctl] + [Alt] +
[Del]. 51 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Volume Down/Volume Up Buttons The Volume Down and Volume Up buttons allow you to decrease and increase the volume. Rotation Lock The rotation lock feature is used to Pause or Resume the auto rotation feature. When the system is in tablet mode, if the auto rotation feature is resumed, the display rotates automatically when the system is rotated. When the auto rotation feature is paused, the display doesn't rotate automatically when the tablet is rotated. Button A When Button A is pressed post-logon, the Fujitsu Menu utility opens. When Button A is pressed, the Battery LED shows the remaining capacity of the battery (See Status Indicator Panel on page 24.) Five seconds after releasing the button, the LED will turn off automatically. Note: The battery capacity confirmation feature functions only when the system is in off mode (S3/S4/S5). Button B When Button B is pressed post-logon, the Windows Journal opens. Changing Tablet PC Button Functions The Application A and B buttons can be changed to launch a program or perform an action you select. By default, the Application A button launches the Fujitsu Menu, and the Application B button launches MS Journal. To launch different applications or cause the Application A or B buttons to perform a specific action:
1 Double-click on the Tablet PC Settings icon in the Control Panel. 2 Select the Buttons tab and select the button you would like to change from the list. 3 Click [Change] and open the drop down list in the Press: field. 4 Select the action you would like the button to perform. If you want to launch a program, click on Start a Program, then browse to the location of the program. 5 Click [OK], then click [OK] again. The buttons will now perform the actions you have assigned to them. 52 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Setting up LIFEBOOK Security Panel When you receive your Tablet PC, the security panel application is pre-installed without any passwords. The following sections provide detailed information on your security panel, how to set, change or remove passwords. Numbered Buttons Use these buttons to enter your password. Enter Button After entering the button strokes, push this button to enter the password into the Tablet PC. Passwords The user and supervisor password may be set on this Tablet PC. A supervisor password is typically the same for all tablets and notebooks in a work group, office, or company to allow for system management. Individual computers in a group environment should not use a common password. A password consists of one to five button strokes plus the enter button. A valid stroke consists of pushing one or up to four buttons simultaneously. The following are valid button strokes:
Pushing [4] by itself Pushing [2] and [3] at the same time Pushing [1], [2], and [4] at the same time Pushing [1], [2], [3], and [4] at the same time The following are valid passwords. The numbers within braces ({ }) are button strokes using more than one button.
{[2]+[3]}, [1], [Enter]
[4], [enter]
{[1]+[3]}, {[2]+[3]+[4]}, [1], [4], [2], [Enter]
Setting Passwords When shipped from the factory, no passwords are set. You have a choice of having no password or setting a supervisor and user password. You must set the supervisor password before the user password. 53 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons THE PURPOSE OF SUPERVISOR PASSWORD IS TO BE ABLE TO BYPASS THE USER PASSWORD IN CASE THE USER PASSWORD IS FORGOTTEN. THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD ALONE WILL NOT LOCK THE SYSTEM. YOU MUST SET THE SUPERVISOR AND USER PASSWORDS FOR THE SECURITY PANEL TO WORK. Setting Supervisor Password You must have set a supervisor password before setting any user passwords. The supervisor password can bypass the user password. 1 Windows 7: Go to the Start menu. WIndows 8: Click on the Modern start screen, then right-click on "All Apps". 2 Click on Run. 3 Type in: C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\Security Panel Application\Supervisor\ FJSECS.EXE, then press [Enter]
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set the Supervisor password. Setting User Password 1 Go to the Start menu. 2 Click on All Programs. 3 Click on Security Panel Application -> Security Panel Application. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set the user password. YOU MAY CHANGE OR REMOVE THE SUPERVISOR OR USER PASSWORD BY REPEATING THE STEPS DEFINED ABOVE. 54 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Using Your LIFEBOOK Security Panel The security lock feature is in effect both when the system resumes from Off or Hibernation state. You always need to push the Security Panel buttons to input the user password. Your system will not begin the boot sequence until you enter your supervisor/user password. From Off State 1 Turn on your system. 2 When the Security Indicator flashes, enter the password and press Enter button (e.g., if the password is 22222, first press Button 2 five times, then press the Enter button). The Tablet PC will boot to normal operation. From Hibernation State 1 Press your Suspend/Resume slide. 2 When the Security Indicator flashes, enter the password and press Enter button.The Tablet PC should resume normal operation. Incorrect Password Entry If an invalid supervisor or user password is entered three times in succession, the system will beep for about one minute. If a valid password is entered within a minute (while system beeps), the beeping will stop and the Tablet PC will resume normal operation. If no password is entered or an invalid password is entered while the system beeps, the system will return to its previous locked state (off) and the Security Indicator will go off. To reactivate the Tablet PC after a password failure, you must press the Suspend/Resume slide, then enter a correct password. REMEMBER THE USER PASSWORD YOU SPECIFIED ON THE SECURITY PANEL APPLICATION. IF YOU FORGET THE PASSWORD YOU WILL NOT BE ABLE TO USE YOUR COMPUTER. THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD CAN OVERRIDE THE USER PASSWORD. Precautions Opening and Closing the Cover To change what the system does when the cover is closed:
55 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons 1 Open the system Control Panel. If the display is in Category view, click one of the icon selections in the View by:
field. Click on Power Options. 2 Click Choose what closing the lid does in the left pane. 3 Select the desired action for When I close the lid, then click the [Save changes] button. Low Battery Operations If your Tablet PC has a low battery, pushing the suspend/resume slide only turns on the Security Indicator. Your Tablet PC does not unlock, the Security Indicator turns off after one minute. To resume normal operation, first attach a power supply to the Tablet PC. Then you may unlock the Tablet PC. Uninstalling/Re-installing the Security Panel Application You have two options when uninstalling the security panel application:
Remove passwords and uninstall the security panel application software. This will disable all security features. Uninstall the security panel application with password still active. This will not allow any changes to the password. Uninstalling the Security Panel Application Software Remove passwords when User wants no password protection whatsoever and doesnt want to give anybody the utility to set a password on their computer. In this case, if passwords (supervisor, user, or both) are set, the passwords must first be cleared BEFORE removing the application. To clear passwords, follow same procedure in SETTING PASSWORD CODES except this time, select REMOVE, enter current password then click Next. When asked to confirm select Yes. Removing Security Panel Application with Passwords Still Active Using this feature will not allow any changes to the password. REMOVING THE APPLICATIONS DOES NOT REMOVE THE PASSWORD. IT SIMPLY REMOVES THE ABILITY TO CHANGE/ADD/REMOVE PASSWORDS. TO CHANGE YOUR PASSWORD YOU MUST REINSTALL THE APPLICATION. 56 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons User:
1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Open Programs and Features in the Control Panel. 3 Select Security Panel for User in the list, and click Uninstall/Change. 4 When User Account Control box appears, click Continue. Supervisor:
1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Open Add or Remove Programs Properties in the Control Panel. 3 Select the Security Panel for Supervisor in the list, and click Uninstall/Change. 4 When User Account Control box appears, click Continue. Reinstalling the Security Panel Application To reinstall the supervisor or user security application, you will need to access the Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility. The FSDM utility allows you to download the latest drivers, utilities, and applications from the Fujitsu Support site. To access the FSDM utility, you will need to go to the Support Site at
<http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS>tal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS. The Security/Application Panel software consists of two software packages: Security Application Panel/Supervisor and Security Application Panel/User. 1 Download both software packages to your system from the support website. 2 Double-click setupS.exe in the Security Application Panel\Supervisor package. The Installing Security Panel Application window will appear. Follow the instructions on the screen. 3 Double-click setup.exe from Security Application Panel\User package. The Installing Security Panel Application window will appear. Follow the instructions on the screen. 57 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Chapter 2 Getting Started with Your LIFEBOOK Power Sources Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has four possible power sources: a primary Lithium ion battery, a secondary modular bay battery, an AC adapter or an optional Auto/Airline adapter. Connecting the Power Adapters The AC adapter or optional Auto/Airline adapter provides power for operating your Tablet PC and charging the batteries. Connecting the AC Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 2 Plug the AC adapter into an AC electrical outlet. Connecting the Optional Auto/Airline Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack on your Tablet PC. 2 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the cigarette lighter of an automobile, or, 3 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the DC power jack on an airplane seat. 58 DC Power Jack AC Adapter Figure 36. Connecting the AC Adapter Switching from AC Adapter Power or the Auto/Airline Adapter to Battery Power 1 Be sure that you have at least one charged battery installed. 2 Remove the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter. THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED UPON PURCHASE. INITIALLY, YOU WILL NEED TO CONNECT EITHER THE AC ADAPTER OR THE AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER TO USE YOUR TABLET PC. 59 - Power Sources Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Power On Power/Suspend/Resume Slide The Power and Suspend/Resume slide is used to power on your LIFEBOOK notebook, to resume from Sleep or Save-to-
Disk mode or to place your notebook in Sleep or Save-to-Disk mode. (You can also use the slide to power down the system by holding it for approximately five seconds. This can be useful if the system is hung up. This shouldnt be used as the normal means of shutdown, however.) You can also turn off your notebook by using the following method: from Modern Start screen, open Charms ([Windows] + C or mouse over [-] in the bottom right corner of the screen), then click [Settings] -> [Power] Select Shutdown from the list. WHEN YOU TURN ON YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC BE SURE YOU HAVE A POWER SOURCE. THIS MEANS THAT AT LEAST ONE BATTERY IS INSTALLED AND CHARGED, OR THAT THE AC OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER IS CONNECTED AND HAS POWER. Once you have connected your AC adapter or charged the internal Lithium ion Battery, you can press this slide to power up your notebook. (Figure 37) Power/Suspend/Resume Slide Figure 37. Starting the Tablet PC 60 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC DO NOT CARRY YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC AROUND WITH THE POWER ON OR SUBJECT IT TO SHOCKS OR VIBRATION, AS YOU RISK DAMAGING YOUR TABLET PC. When you power on your LIFEBOOK, it will perform a Power On Self Test (POST) to check the internal parts and configuration for correct functionality. If a fault is found, your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC will emit an audio warning and/or an error message will be displayed. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 99. Depending on the nature of the problem, you may be able to continue by starting the operating system or by entering the BIOS setup utility and revising the settings. After satisfactory completion of the POST, your Tablet PC will load your operating system. NEVER TURN OFF YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC DURING THE POWER ON SELF TEST (POST) OR IT WILL CAUSE AN ERROR MESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED WHEN YOU TURN YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC ON THE NEXT TIME. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 99. Boot Sequence The procedure for starting-up your notebook is termed the Bootup sequence and involves your notebooks BIOS. When your notebook is first turned on, the main system memory is empty, and it needs to find instructions to start up your notebook. This information is in the BIOS program. Each time you power up or restart your notebook, it goes through a boot sequence which displays a Fujitsu logo until the operating system is found. During booting, your notebook is performing a standard boot sequence including a Power On Self Test (POST). When the boot sequence is completed without a failure and without a request for the BIOS Setup Utility, the system displays the operating systems opening screen. The boot sequence is executed when:
You turn on the power to your LIFEBOOK notebook. You restart your LIFEBOOK notebook from [Settings]->[Power] menu. The software initiates a system restart; for example, when you install a new application. 61 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Hard Disk Drive Passwords To provide additional security for your data, you can assign passwords to your hard disk drive(s). This feature is managed in the system BIOS Setup Utility. See BIOS Setup Utility below for information about accessing the utility. REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORDS. IF YOU SET AND FORGET YOUR USER AND MASTER HARD DISK PASSWORDS, FUJITSU AMERICA WILL NOT BE ABLE TO RESET IT. YOU MAY LOSE DATA AND HAVE TO REPLACE YOUR SYSTEM BOARD OR HARD DISK DRIVE. BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS Setup Utility sets up the operating environment for your notebook. Your BIOS is set at the factory for normal operating conditions, therefore there is no need to set or change the BIOS environment to operate your notebook. The BIOS Setup Utility also allows you to configure such features as the System Data Security feature parameters, such as passwords. Entering the BIOS Setup Utility To enter the BIOS Setup Utility do the following:
1 Turn on or restart your LIFEBOOK notebook. 2 To enter the BIOS Setup Utility, press the [F2] key once the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. This will open the main menu of the BIOS Setup Utility with the current settings displayed. Press the right or left arrow keys key to scroll through the other setup menus to review or alter the current settings. BIOS Guide A guide to your notebooks BIOS is available online at our service and support Website at:
http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php. Once there, select Users Guides under Online Support. Select your Product, Series, and Model, then click [Go]. IF YOUR DATA SECURITY SETTINGS REQUIRE IT, YOU MAY BE ASKED FOR A PASSWORD BEFORE THE BIOS MAIN MENU WILL APPEAR. 62 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Booting the System We strongly recommend that you not attach any external devices or put a DVD/CD in your drive until you have gone through the initial power on sequence. When you turn on your LIFEBOOK notebook for the first time, it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen. If you do nothing the system will load the operating system, and then the Windows Welcome will begin. Starting Windows the First Time After you boot up the system the first time and follow the instructions on the screen, you will eventually come to the Welcome window. After sign-in, it takes less then a minute for the computer to boot to Windows; during that time the progress bar and interactive messages are displayed on the screen. During the course of the first start up, you will need to read and accept the End User License Agreements (EULAs) for Microsoft and Fujitsu. YOU CANNOT USE YOUR NOTEBOOK UNTIL YOU HAVE ACCEPTED THE LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU STOP THE PROCESS YOUR NOTEBOOK WILL RETURN TO THE BEGINNING OF THE WINDOWS WELCOME PROCESS, EVEN IF YOU SHUT YOUR NOTEBOOK DOWN AND START IT UP AGAIN. Several additional windows will appear, prompting you to enter a name and description for your computer, an Administrator password, and a domain name. Read the instructions on the screens carefully and fill in the information as directed. Following first boot, you will arrive at the Modern start screen. Some useful shortcuts for your reference: Press the Windows + D keys to go to traditional Windows desktop or press Windows + M keys to load the traditional Windows desktop and minimize all applications. Installing Bonus Apps After you have started your system the first time, you will see a Bonus Apps icon on your desktop. Click on the icon to see which additional applications are available for you to install. You can also access Bonus Apps by opening the Charms panel from the Modern Start screen and searching for "Fujitsu BonusApps". Applications that are already installed appear in grey; those that are available for installation appear in blue. 63 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Select the applications you wish to install by selecting the checkbox adjacent to your selection, or click [Select All] if you would like to install all available applications. Once you have made your selections, click [Install]. Note that in some cases (depending upon which application was selected for installation) after installation completes, the system will prompt you to reboot. There are also cases in which if multiple applications are selected to install but one of them needs a reboot, the system will reboot and continue installing the rest of the selected applications. Registering your LIFEBOOK with Fujitsu You can register your notebook by going to our website at: http://www.us.fujitsu.com/computers. You will need to be set up with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to register online. 64 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Power Management Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has many options and features for conserving battery power. Some of these features are automatic and need no user intervention. However, others depend on the parameters you set to best suit your operating conditions, such as those for the display brightness. Internal power management for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC may be controlled from settings made in your operating system. Besides the options available for conserving battery power, there are also some things that you can do to prevent your battery from running down as quickly. For example, you can create an appropriate power saving profile, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode when it is not performing an operation, and you can limit the use of high power devices. As with all mobile, battery powered computers, there is a trade-off between performance and power savings. In Windows 7, when you have a second battery installed you can select the battery discharge settings by going to Start -> Battery Utility -> Battery Discharge Settings. Power and Suspend/Resume Slide When your Tablet PC is active, the Power and Suspend/Resume slide can be used to manually put it into Sleep mode. Push the Power and Suspend/Resume slide when your Tablet PC is active, but not actively accessing anything, and immediately release the slide. Your system will enter Sleep mode. If your Tablet PC is suspended, pushing the Power and Suspend/Resume slide will return your Tablet PC to active operation. You can tell whether or not your system is in Sleep mode by looking at the Power indicator which is part of the Suspend/Resume slide. (See figure 2 on page 11 for location) If the indicator is visible and not flashing, your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is fully operational. If the indicator is both visible and flashing, your Tablet PC is in Sleep mode. If the indicator is not visible at all, the power is off or your Tablet PC is in Save-to-Disk (Hibernation) mode. See Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) Feature on page 67. Sleep Mode Sleep mode saves your Tablet PCs system memory contents during periods of inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts. This mode will turn off the CPU, the display, the hard drive, and all of the other internal components except those necessary to maintain system memory and allow for restarting. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC can be put in Sleep mode by:
Pressing the Power/Suspend/Resume slide when your system is turned on. 65 - Power Management Clicking the power icon on the lock menu. Selecting Sleep from the [Settings]->[Power] menu. Timing out from lack of activity. Allowing the battery to reach the Dead Battery Warning condition. Your Tablet PCs system memory typically stores the files on which you are working, open application information, and any other data required to support the operations in progress. When you resume operation from Sleep mode, your Tablet PC will return to the point where it left off. You must use the Power and Suspend/Resume slide to resume operation, and there must be an adequate power source available, or your Tablet PC will not resume. IF YOU ARE RUNNING YOUR TABLET PC ON BATTERY POWER, BE AWARE THAT THE BATTERY CONTINUES TO DISCHARGE WHILE YOUR TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, THOUGH NOT AS FAST AS WHEN FULLY OPERATIONAL. DISABLING THE SUSPEND/RESUME SLIDE PREVENTS IT FROM BEING USED TO PUT YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC IN SLEEP OR SAVE-TO-DISK MODE. THE RESUME FUNCTION OF THE SLIDE CANNOT BE DISABLED. THE SLEEP OR HIBERNATION (SAVE-TO-DISK) MODE SHOULD NOT BE USED WITH CERTAIN PC CARDS. CHECK YOUR PC CARD DOCUMENTATION FOR MORE INFORMATION. WHEN PC CARDS OR EXTERNAL DEVICES ARE IN USE, HIBERNATION (SAVE-TO-DISK) MODE CANNOT RETURN TO THE EXACT STATE PRIOR TO SUSPENSION BECAUSE ALL OF THE PERIPHERAL DEVICES WILL BE RE-INITIALIZED WHEN THE SYSTEM RE-STARTS. IF YOUR TABLET PC IS ACCESSING INFORMATION WHEN YOU ENTER SLEEP OR HIBERNATION (SAVE-TO-DISK) MODE, CHANGES TO OPEN FILES ARE NOT LOST. THE FILES ARE LEFT OPEN AND MEMORY IS KEPT ACTIVE DURING SLEEP MODE, OR THE MEMORY IS TRANSFERRED TO THE INTERNAL HARD DRIVE DURING HIBERNATION MODE. THE MAIN ADVANTAGE OF USING THE HIBERNATION (SAVE-TO-DISK) FUNCTION IS THAT POWER IS NOT REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN YOUR DATA. THIS IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT IF YOU WILL BE LEAVING YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC IN A SUSPENDED STATE FOR A PROLONGED PERIOD OF TIME. THE DRAWBACK OF USING HIBERNATION MODE IS THAT IT LENGTHENS THE POWER DOWN AND POWER UP SEQUENCES AND RESETS PERIPHERAL DEVICES. YOUR SYSTEM IS SET TO USE THE MAX BATTERY POWER SCHEME WHEN RUNNING ON BATTERY POWER. IF YOU CHANGE THE POWER SCHEME TO A DIFFERENT PROFILE, YOUR BATTERY LIFE MAY VARY. 66 - Power Management Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) Feature The Hibernation feature saves the contents of your Tablet PCs system memory to the hard drive as a part of the Suspend/Resume mode. You can enable or disable this feature. Enable or Disable the Hibernation Feature To enable or disable the Hibernation feature follow these steps:
1 From the Modern Start screen, press [Windows]+[X].Select Control Panel from the menu, then select Power Options. 2 Select Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing the lid does, then make your selections (Do Nothing, Sleep, Hibernate, or Shut Down). Windows Power Management The Power Options icon located in the Windows Control Panel allows you to configure some of the power management settings. For example, you can use the Power Options to set the timeout values for turning off the display and hard disks whether you are running the Tablet PC on battery power or one of the adapters. Restarting the System If your system is on and you need to restart it, be sure that you use the following procedure. 1 From the Modern Start screen, open Charms ([Windows]+C) or mouse over [-] in the bottom right corner of the screen), then click [Settings]-> [Power]. 2 Select Restart from the list. TURNING OFF YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC WITHOUT EXITING WINDOWS OR TURNING ON YOUR TABLET PC WITHIN 10 SECONDS OF THE TABLET PC BEING SHUT OFF MAY CAUSE AN ERROR WHEN YOU START THE NEXT TIME. 67 - Power Management Power Off Before turning off the power, check that the hard drive/optical drive access indicator is off. If you turn off the power while accessing a disk there is a risk of data loss. To ensure that your Tablet PC shuts down without error, use the Windows shut down procedure. ALWAYS POWER OFF THE COMPUTER BEFORE TRANSPORTING AND/OR PACKAGING IT. AFTER SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM, WAIT UNTIL THE STATUS LED PANEL INDICATES POWER OFF CONDITION (I.E., NO LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED). IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE UNIT MAY NOT AUTOMATICALLY GO TO POWER OFF OR HIBERNATE MODE WHEN YOU CLOSE THE LID. THIS SITUATION MAY OCCUR DUE TO PRE-OS BOOT PASSWORD SECURITY SETTINGS OR SOME OTHER APPLICATION RUNNING ON THE COMPUTER. ATTEMPTING TO TRANSPORT THE COMPUTER WHILE POWER IS ON MAY DAMAGE THE TABLET PC DUE TO SHOCK OR OVERHEATING SINCE THE AIR VENTS MAY BE BLOCKED OR RESTRICTED. BE SURE TO CLOSE ALL FILES, EXIT ALL APPLICATIONS, AND SHUT DOWN YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM PRIOR TO TURNING OFF THE POWER. IF FILES ARE OPEN WHEN YOU TURN THE POWER OFF, YOU WILL LOSE ANY CHANGES THAT HAVE NOT BEEN SAVED, AND MAY CAUSE DISK ERRORS. Using the correct procedure to shut down from Windows allows your Tablet PC to complete its operations and turn off power in the proper sequence to avoid errors. The proper sequence is:
From the Modern Start screen, open Charms ([Windows] + C) or mouse over [-] in the bottom right corner of the screen), then click [Settings] -> [Power]. Select Shut down from the list. If you are going to store your Tablet PC for a month or more see the Care and Maintenance Section. 68 - Power Management ENERGY STAR Compliance Your Fujitsu system is an ENERGY STAR qualified mobile PC. By choosing a computer with the latest energy-saving technology, youre helping to preserve our environment for future generations. ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, U.S. Department of Energy, Natural Resources Canada, and other governments around the world helping us save money while protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. With energy costs and global warming top-of-mind for consumers, Fujitsu is committed to offering solutions that help consumers conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. Sleep Mode:
If you are powering your system with a power adapter, you will notice that your computer is initially set so that the display turns off after 15 minutes of user inactivity, and the computer goes into Sleep mode after 20 minutes of user inactivity. If you are powering your system with the battery, your computer is initially set so that the display turns off after 10 minutes of user inactivity, and the computer goes into Sleep mode after 20 minutes of user inactivity. When going into Sleep mode, the computer also reduces the speed of any active Ethernet network links. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, press the Suspend/Resume slide. Energy saving benefits:
Fujitsu ENERGY STAR qualified mobile PCs use about half as much electricity as standard equipment saving half in utility costs. But more than that, ENERGY STAR also makes a difference for the environment. Did you know that the average house can be responsible for twice the greenhouse gas emissions as the average car? Thats because every time you flip on a light switch, run your dishwasher, or turn on your PC, you use energy, which means more greenhouse gas emissions from power plants. So the more energy we can save through energy efficiency, the more we help to reduce greenhouse gases and the risks of global warming. To learn more about the important ENERGY STAR program, visit: www.energystar.gov. To read about how Fujitsu is supporting Sustainable Management along with several other environmental activities, visit the Fujitsu Corporate Citizenship page at:
http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/aboutus/environmental/environment.php 69 - Power Management Chapter 3 User-Installable Features Lithium ion Battery Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has a Lithium ion battery that provides power for operating your Tablet PC when no external power source is available. The battery is durable and long lasting, but should not be exposed to extreme temperatures, high voltages, chemicals or other hazards. The Lithium ion battery operating time may become shorter if it is used under the following conditions:
When used at temperatures that exceed a low of 5C or a high of 35C (41 to 95 F). Extreme temperatures not only reduce charging efficiency, but can also cause battery deterioration. The Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when you try to charge a battery that is outside its operating temperature range. When using a high current device such as a modem, external optical drive, or the hard drive, using the AC adapter will conserve your battery life. DO NOT LEAVE A FAULTY BATTERY IN YOUR TABLET PC. IT MAY DAMAGE YOUR AC ADAPTER, OPTIONAL AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER, ANOTHER BATTERY OR YOUR TABLET PC ITSELF. IT MAY ALSO PREVENT OPERATION OF YOUR TABLET PC BY DRAINING ALL AVAILABLE CURRENT INTO THE BAD BATTERY. 70 ACTUAL BATTERY LIFE WILL VARY BASED ON SCREEN BRIGHTNESS, APPLICATIONS, FEATURES, POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGS, BATTERY CONDITION AND OTHER CUSTOMER PREFERENCES. OPTICAL DRIVE OR HARD DRIVE USAGE MAY ALSO HAVE A SIGNIFICANT IMPACT ON BATTERY LIFE. THE BATTERY CHARGING CAPACITY IS REDUCED AS THE BATTERY AGES. IF YOUR BATTERY IS RUNNING LOW QUICKLY, YOU SHOULD REPLACE IT WITH A NEW ONE. UNDER FEDERAL, STATE, OR LOCAL LAW IT MAY BE ILLEGAL TO DISPOSE OF BATTERIES BY PUTTING THEM IN THE TRASH. PLEASE TAKE CARE OF OUR ENVIRONMENT AND DISPOSE OF BATTERIES PROPERLY. CHECK WITH YOUR LOCAL GOVERNMENT AUTHORITY FOR DETAILS REGARDING RECYCLING OR DISPOSING OF OLD BATTERIES. IF YOU CANNOT FIND THIS INFORMATION ELSEWHERE, CONTACT YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE AT 1-800-
8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Recharging the Batteries If you want to know the condition of the primary Lithium ion battery, check the Battery Level indicator located on the Status Indicator panel. The indicator changes as the battery level changes. The Lithium ion battery is recharged internally using the AC adapter or Auto/Airline adapter. To recharge the battery make sure the battery that needs to be charged is installed in your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and connect the AC or Auto/Airline adapter. WHEN BUTTON A IS PRESSED WHILE THE SYSTEM IS IN OFF MODE, THE BATTERY LED SHOWS THE REMAINING CAPACITY OF THE BATTERY (SEE STATUS INDICATOR PANEL ON PAGE 24.) FIVE SECONDS AFTER RELEASING THE BUTTON, THE LED WILL TURN OFF AUTOMATICALLY. MAKE SURE THAT THE PERCENTAGE CHARGE IS INDICATED BY THE BATTERY CHARGING INDICATOR ON THE STATUS INDICATOR PANEL. WHEN THE [PUSH] MARK ON THE BATTERY ITSELF IS PRESSED, THE LED BESIDE THE [PUSH] MARK SHOWS THE REMAINING CAPACITY OF THE BATTERY (GREEN: 50-100%, ORANGE: 11-49%, RED: 1-10%). There is no memory effect on the Lithium ion battery therefore you do not need to discharge the battery completely before recharging. The charge times will be significantly longer if your Tablet PC is in use while the battery is charging. If you want to charge the battery more quickly, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode, or turn it off while the adapter is charging the battery. (See Power Management on page 65 for more information on Sleep mode and shutdown procedure) 71 - Lithium ion Battery USING HEAVY CURRENT DEVICES OR FREQUENT EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ACCESSES MAY PREVENT CHARGING COMPLETELY. Low Battery State When the battery is running low, a low battery notification message will appear. If you do not respond to the low battery message, the batteries will continue to discharge until they are too low to operate. When this happens, your Tablet PC will go into Sleep mode. There is no guarantee that your data will be saved once the Tablet PC reaches this point. ONCE THE LOW BATTERY NOTIFICATION MESSAGE APPEARS, YOU NEED TO SAVE ALL YOUR ACTIVE DATA AND PUT YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC INTO SLEEP MODE UNTIL YOU CAN PROVIDE A NEW POWER SOURCE. YOU SHOULD PROVIDE A CHARGED BATTERY, AN AC POWER ADAPTER, OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. WHEN YOU ARE IN SLEEP MODE THERE MUST ALWAYS BE AT LEAST ONE POWER SOURCE ACTIVE. IF YOU REMOVE ALL POWER SOURCES WHILE YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, ANY DATA THAT HAS NOT BEEN SAVED TO THE HARD DRIVE WILL BE LOST. Dead Battery Suspend mode shows on the Status indicator just like the normal Sleep mode. Once your Tablet PC goes into Dead Battery Suspend mode you will be unable to resume operation until you provide a source of power either from an adapter, or a charged battery. Once you have provided power, you will need to press the Power/Suspend/Resume slide to resume operation. In the Dead Battery Suspend mode, your data can be maintained for some time, but if a power source is not provided promptly, the Power indicator will stop flashing and go out, meaning that you have lost the data that was not stored. Once you provide power, you can continue to use your Tablet PC while an adapter is charging the battery. Shorted Batteries The Status Indicator panel indicator associated with the Battery Level indicator displays the operating level available in that battery. If this display shows a flashing red LED, it means the battery is damaged and must be replaced so it does not damage other parts of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 72 - Lithium ion Battery Replacing the Battery With the purchase of an additional battery, you can have a fully charged spare to swap with one that is not charged. There are two ways to swap batteries, cold-swapping and hot-swapping:
Cold-swapping Batteries To cold-swap batteries in your battery bay, follow these easy steps:
1 Have a charged battery ready to install. 2 Shut down your Tablet PC and disconnect the AC adapter. 3 Turn the system upside down and orient it as shown in Figure 38. 4 While pushing the battery lock towards the battery, slide the batter release latch to the right, then lift the battery out of the bay as in Figure 39. 5 Insert a new battery into the bay, and press it in firmly so that the latches click into place. 6 Plug in the AC adapter and turn the power on. Hot-swapping Batteries To hot-swap batteries in your battery bay follow these easy steps:
BE SURE TO PLUG IN AN AC ADAPTER PRIOR TO REMOVING THE BATTERY. THERE IS NO BRIDGE BATTERY PRESENT TO SUPPORT THE SYSTEM WHILE THE BATTERY IS BEING REPLACED. IF YOU DO NOT USE AN AC ADAPTER YOU WILL LOSE ANY UNSAVED FILES. 1 Plug an AC Adapter into the system and connect it to a power outlet. 2 Follow steps 3 through 6 in Cold Swapping Batteries. IF THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY CONNECTOR IS NOT FULLY SEATED, YOU MAY NOT BE ABLE TO USE YOUR TABLET PC OR CHARGE YOUR BATTERY. 73 - Lithium ion Battery s Battery lock Battery pack Battery release latch Figure 38. Unlatching a Battery Figure 39. Removing a Battery 74 - Lithium ion Battery SD Card Figure 40. Installing an SD Card Secure Digital Cards Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC supports Secure Digital (SD), Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC), and Secure Digital eXtended Capacity (SDXC) cards, on which you can store and transfer data to and from a variety of digital devices. These cards use flash memory architecture, which means they dont need a power source to retain data. Secure Digital (SD) Cards are flash memory technology that allows you to record, transfer and share digital content, such as digital pictures, movies, music, voice, and computer data and applications. SD Cards allow portable storage among a variety of devices, such as cell phones, GPS systems, digital cameras, and PDAs. SD Cards transfer data quickly, with low battery consumption. SD cards use flash memory architecture. 75 - Secure Digital Cards Installing SD Cards SD Cards are installed in the SD Card slot. To install an SD Card, follow these steps:
INSTALLING OR REMOVING AN SD CARD DURING YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PCS SHUTDOWN OR BOOTUP PROCESS MAY DAMAGE THE CARD AND/OR YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC. DO NOT INSERT A CARD INTO A SLOT IF THERE IS WATER OR ANY OTHER SUBSTANCE ON THE CARD AS YOU MAY PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE CARD, YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC, OR BOTH. 1 See your specific card manual for instructions on the installation of your card. Some cards may require that your Tablet PC is off while installing them. 2 Make sure there is no card currently in the slot. If there is, see Removing an SD Card below. 3 Insert your card into the slot with the product label facing up. 4 Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in the connector. Removing an SD Card To remove an SD Card, follow these easy steps:
SEE YOUR CARD MANUAL FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS ON THE REMOVAL OF YOUR CARD. SOME CARDS MAY REQUIRE YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC TO BE IN SLEEP MODE OR OFF WHILE REMOVING THEM. 1 Select Safely Remove Hardware from the System Tray. Highlight the card in the list, then click [Stop]. 2 Push the SD Card in until it unlatches. It will then eject from the slot for removal. 76 - Secure Digital Cards Memory Upgrade Module Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC comes with a minimum of 2GB of high speed Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic RAM (DDR3-1600 SDRAM) factory installed. To increase your Tablet PCs memory capacity, you may install an additional memory upgrade module. The memory upgrade must be a dual-in-line (DIMM) SDRAM module. To ensure 100%
compatibility, purchase the SDRAM module only from the Fujitsu web store at www.shopfujitsu.com. DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS FROM THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE COMPARTMENT EXCEPT THE ONES SPECIFICALLY SHOWN IN THE DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLING AND REMOVING THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE. THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE MODULE, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:
BEFORE HANDLING A MEMORY MODULE, TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MEMORY MODULE, HOLD IT BY THE EDGE SO AS NOT TO TOUCH ANY CONTACTS OR CHIPS. BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH ANY INTERNAL COMPUTER TERMINALS OR COMPONENTS; THE OIL FROM YOUR FINGERS COULD CAUSE A SHORT TO THE COMPONENTS. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING MEMORY MODULES. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR THE MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. Installing Memory Upgrade Modules 1 Turn off power to your Tablet PC, remove any power adapter (AC or auto/airline). Remove the battery. 2 Make sure that all the connector covers are closed. 3 Turn the Tablet PC bottom side up, and remove the screw from the memory upgrade module compartment. 4 Lift and remove the cover from the memory module compartment (Figure 41). 5 Remove the memory upgrade module from the static guarded sleeve. 6 Align the memory upgrade module with the part side up. Align the connector edge of the memory upgrade module with the connector slot in the compartment.(Figure 42) 77 - Memory Upgrade Module Figure 41. Opening Memory Compartment 7 Insert the memory upgrade module at a 45 angle. Press the connector edge of the module firmly down and into the connector until it lodges under the retaining clip. Youll hear a click when it is properly in place. 8 Replace the cover and reinstall the screws. THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE IS NOT SOMETHING YOU ROUTINELY REMOVE FROM YOUR TABLET PC. ONCE IT IS INSTALLED, YOU CAN LEAVE IT IN PLACE UNLESS YOU WANT TO CHANGE SYSTEM MEMORY CAPACITY. Figure 42. Installing a Memory Module 78 - Memory Upgrade Module Removing a Memory Upgrade Module 1 Perform steps 1 through 4 of Installing a Memory Upgrade Module. 2 Pull the clips sideways away from each side of the memory upgrade module at the same time. 3 While holding the clips out, remove the module by lifting it up and pulling it away from your Tablet PC. 4 Store the memory upgrade module in a static guarded sleeve. 5 Replace the cover and reinstall the screws. Figure 43. Removing a Memory Module Checking the Memory Capacity Once you have changed the system memory capacity by replacing the installed module with a larger one, be sure to check that your notebook has recognized the change. Check the memory capacity by doing the following: from Modern Start screen press [Windows]+[X], then select Control Panel> System. The amount of memory is displayed next to Installed Memory (RAM): The amount of memory displayed should be approximately the total of all memory modules installed. There may be a discrepancy which is allocated for fixed video memory. IF THE TOTAL MEMORY DISPLAYED IS INCORRECT, CHECK THAT YOUR MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED. (IF THE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED AND THE CAPACITY IS STILL NOT CORRECTLY RECOGNIZED, SEE TROUBLESHOOTING ON PAGE 88. 79 - Memory Upgrade Module Device Ports Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and the optional Port Replicator come equipped with multiple ports to which you can connect external devices including: disk drives, keyboards, printers, etc. Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for a Gigabit (10Base-
T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T) Ethernet LAN connection. You may need to configure your Tablet PC to work with your particular network. (Please refer to your network administrator for information on your network configuration.) To connect the LAN cable follow these easy steps:
1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 3 Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN outlet. Port Replicator Connector The port replicator connector is used for the connection of your Tablet PC to an optional port replicator. In order to connect your Tablet PC to this device, refer to Port Replicator on page 84. Figure 44. Connecting the LAN 80 - Device Ports Universal Serial Bus Ports The Universal Serial Bus ports (USB) allow you to connect USB devices such as external game pads, pointing devices, keyboards and/or speakers. There are four USB ports on your Tablet PC; on the left-hand side are two USB 3.0 ports, one of which is an Anytime USB Charge port (See Information About Anytime USB Charge Utility. on page 82) and there are USB 2.0 ports on the right side and rear. In order to connect a USB device follow these steps:
1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. USB 2.0 Port Figure 45. Connecting a USB Device DUE TO THE ONGOING CHANGES IN USB TECHNOLOGY AND STANDARDS, NOT ALL USB DEVICES AND/OR DRIVERS ARE GUARANTEED TO WORK. 81 - Device Ports Information About Anytime USB Charge Utility. The Anytime USB Charge feature can be disabled and enabled from the BIOS Setup Utility; the feature is enabled by default. The settings for the Anytime USB Charge feature can be changed by performing the following steps. Windows 7: Start > All Programs > Anytime USB Charge Utility and clicking on Settings. Windows 8: Go to Modern Start screen and right-click. Select All Apps and select Anytime USB charge utility. There are three possible settings for this feature: Disable Anytime USB Charge function, Only enable Anytime USB Charge function with AC Adapter, and Enable Anytime USB Charge function with AC Adapter or battery. Note that if the setting is selected, the function will eventually drain the battery if the AC Adapter is not plugged in. Certain USB devices may require that a driver be installed in order for this feature to work. Check the documentation for your USB device to ensure proper charging with the Anytime USB Charge utility. Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to connect headphones or powered external speakers to your Tablet PC. Your headphones or speakers must be equipped with a 1/8 (3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug. In order to connect headphones or speakers, align the connector with the port opening, then push the connector into the port until it is seated. Microphone Jack The microphone jack allows you to connect an external stereo microphone. Your microphone must be equipped with a 1/8(3.5 mm) mini-plug in order to fit into the microphone jack of your Tablet PC. In order to connect a microphone, align the connector with the port opening, then push the connector into the port until it is seated. 82 - Device Ports HDMI Port. The High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) port is a digital audio/video interface over which uncompressed streams can be transmitted. HDMI is used to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as big-
screen TVs and video recorders). To connect an HDMI device:
1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. External Video Port The external video port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector. In order to connect an external video device, follow these easy steps:
1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 3 Tighten the two hold-down screws, located on each end of the connector. Figure 46. Connecting an HDMI Device Figure 47. Connecting an External Video Device PRESSING THE [FN] + [F10] KEYS ALLOWS YOU TO CHANGE YOUR SELECTION OF WHERE TO SEND YOUR DISPLAY VIDEO. EACH TIME YOU PRESS THE KEY COMBINATION, YOU WILL STEP TO THE NEXT CHOICE, STARTING WITH THE BUILT-IN DISPLAY PANEL ONLY, MOVING TO THE EXTERNAL MONITOR ONLY, FINALLY MOVING TO BOTH THE BUILT-IN DISPLAY PANEL AND AN EXTERNAL MONITOR. 83 - Device Ports Port Replicator The port replicator extends the functionality of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC by providing ports to connect an external VGA monitor, a LAN (RJ-45) cable, four USB 3.0 devices, a DVI device, a DisplayPort device, headphones, and DC power. The port replicator connects to the bottom of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Docking Connector Power Button Moveable Bar Latch/Unlatch Button USB 3.0 Ports (Qty. 4) DC Power Jack DVI-D Port DisplayPort External VGA Port Security Lock Slot Headphone Jack LAN (RJ-45) Figure 48. Port Replicator - Rear 84 - Port Replicator Port Replicator Components The following is a brief description of the port replicators back panel components. (Figure 48) Power Slide The power slide allows you to power the port replicator on and off. Docking Connector The docking connector allows you to connect the Port Replicator to your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. THE SYSTEM CONTAINS COMPONENTS THAT CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE COMPONENTS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:
BEFORE DOCKING OR UNDOCKING YOUR LIFEBOOK WHEN USING A PORT REPLICATOR, YOU SHOULD TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. DVI-D Port The DVI-D port lets you to connect digital display devices such flat panel displays and digital projectors using a DVI-
D cable. DVI-D is primarily used to connect a computer with a home theater system. DisplayPort The DisplayPort lets you to connect DisplayPort-compatible digital display devices such flat panel displays and digital projectors using a DisplayPort cable. ALTHOUGH DISPLAYPORT AND DVI-D DEVICES ARE SUPPORTED BY THE PORT REPLICATOR, ONLY ONE CAN BE USED AT ANY TIME. AN INTERNAL SWITCH RECOGNIZES WHICH TYPE OF DEVICE IS CONNECTED. IF BOTH ARE CONNECTED AT THE SAME TIME, DISPLAYPORT HAS THE HIGHER PRIORITY. A DISPLAYPORT OR DVI-D DEVICE CAN BE USED CONCURRENTLY WITH AN EXTERNAL VIDEO DEVICE THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE ANALOG EXTERNAL VGA PORT. HOT PLUG IS NOT SUPPORTED BY THE DISPLAYPORT OR DVI-D PORTS. IF A DISPLAYPORT-TO-HDMI CONVERTER IS CONNECTED TO THE DISPLAYPORT, SOUND WILL NOT BE OUTPUT FROM THE HDMI DEVICE. TO USE AN HDMI DEVICE, PLUG IT INTO THE HDMI PORT ON THE SYSTEMS LEFT SIDE. 85 - Port Replicator USB 3.0 Ports (Qty. 4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) 3.0 ports allow you to connect USB devices. USB 3.0 ports are backward-compatible with USB 2.0 and 1.1 devices. Moveable Bar Latch/Unlatch Button The moveable bar latch/unlatch button allows you to adjust the moveable bar in order to align your system so that it aligns properly with the port replicator connector. Viewing the port replicator from the front, the moveable bar should be moved as far to the left side of the port replicator as possible. External VGA Port The external VGA port lets you connect an external monitor or projector. Note that if a Port Replicator is attached, you must use the external VGA port on the Port Replicator, not the one on your system. Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to listen to stereo sound from your Tablet PC with portable headphones. LAN (RJ-45) Jack The LAN jack allows you to connect a LAN to the Port Replicator. Note that when the system is attached to the Port Replicator, the LAN Jack on the Port Replicator should be used, not the one on the system. Security Lock Slot The security lock slot allows you to attach an optional physical lock down device. DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter to power your Tablet PC and charge the internal Lithium ion battery. 86 - Port Replicator Attaching the Port Replicator To attach the Port Replicator, align the Port Replicator connector on the bottom of your Tablet PC with the connector on the Port Replicator and push the corners down simultaneously. (Figure 49) Detaching Port Replicator To detach the Port Replicator:
1 Pull the Port Replicators release latch away from the Port Replicator to release it from your Tablet PC.
(Figure 50) 2 Lift the Tablet PC away from the Port Replicator to Docking Connector detach it. (Figure 51) Figure 49. Attaching the Port Replicator Release Latch Figure 50. Unlatching the Port Replicator Figure 51. Removing the System 87 -
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Your LIFEBOOK Troubleshooting There may be occasions when you encounter simple setup or operating problems that you can solve on the spot, or problems with peripheral devices that can be solved by replacing the device. The information in this section helps you isolate and resolve some of these straightforward issues and identify failures that require service. Identifying the Problem If you encounter a problem, go through the following procedure before pursuing complex troubleshooting:
1 Turn off your LIFEBOOK notebook. 2 Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into your notebook and to an active AC power source. 3 Make sure that any card installed in the PC Card slot is seated properly. You can also remove the card from the slot, thus eliminating it as a possible cause of failure. 4 Make sure that any devices connected to the external connectors are plugged in properly. You can also disconnect such devices, thus eliminating them as possible causes of failure. 5 Turn on your notebook. Make sure it has been off at least 10 seconds before you turn it back on. 6 Go through the boot sequence. 7 If the problem has not been resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Table, that follows, for more detailed troubleshooting information. 88 IF YOU KEEP NOTES ABOUT WHAT YOU HAVE TRIED, YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE MAY BE ABLE TO HELP YOU MORE QUICKLY BY GIVING ADDITIONAL SUGGESTIONS OVER THE PHONE. 8 If you have tried the solutions suggested in the Troubleshooting Table without success, contact your support representative:
Toll free: 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Web site: http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php. Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:
Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any See the Configuration Label on the bottom of your notebook for configuration and serial numbers. 89 - Troubleshooting Specific Problems Using the Troubleshooting Table When you have problems with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC, try to find the symptoms under the Problem column of the troubleshooting table for the feature giving you difficulty. You will find a description of common causes for that symptom under the column Possible Cause and what, if anything, you can do to correct the condition under Possible Solutions. All possible causes or solutions may not apply to your Tablet PC. Troubleshooting Table ProblemPage ProblemPage Audio Problems . page 91 USB Device Problems. page 93 Optical Drive Problems . page 91 Power Failures . page 94 Port Replicator Problems . page 92 Shutdown and Startup Problems. page 96 Hard Drive Problems . page 92 Video Problems . page 97 Keyboard or Mouse Problems . page 92 Miscellaneous Problems . page 98 Memory Problems . page 93 90 - Troubleshooting Problem Audio Problems There is no sound coming from the built-in speaker. Possible Cause Possible Solutions The volume is turned too low. Adjust the volume control on your Tablet PC and operating system. Use the
[Fn+F9] key combination on your keyboard. Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your Tablet PC. The software volume control is set too low. Manually adjusting the volume (i.e., keyboard "hot keys") should dynamically adjust the volume of the operating system (see above). If that doesnt work, adjust the sound volume control settings in your software or application. Headphones are plugged into your Tablet PC. Plugging in headphones disables the built-in speakers. Remove the head-
phones. Software driver is not configured correctly. The audio driver may be installed or reinstalled using the Drivers and Applica-
tions CD that came with your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK. Refer to your application and operating system documentation for help. The speakers have been muted using the Volume icon in the system tray. Click the Volume icon in the system tray on the bottom right of the screen. (It looks like a speaker). If the Mute box has a red circle on it, click on it to unselect it. You can also use the [Fn+F3] key combination to toggle the volume on and off. Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle the audio mute. Optical Drive Problems LIFEBOOK Tablet PC fails to recognize DVD/CD-
RW/CD-ROMs. The disc is not pushed down onto raised center circle of the drive. Optical drive tray is not latched shut. Open optical drive tray and re-install the disc properly. Push on the front of the optical drive tray until it latches. If that doesnt work, pull out the modular drive latch to remove the device from the bay, then re-
insert the drive until it latched; this ensures that the drive is properly seated. Incorrect DVD Player or player software is installed. Install DVD Player software. DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM is dirty or defective. Wipe the disc with a non-abrasive CD cleaning cloth and reinsert. If it still will not work try another DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM in the drive. 91 - Troubleshooting Problem LIFEBOOK Tablet PC fails to recognize DVD/CD-
RW/CD-ROMs.
(continued) Possible Cause Wrong drive designator was used for the disc in the appli-
cation. Possible Solutions Verify the drive designator used by the application is the same as the one used by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a DVD/CD, drive designations are automatically adjusted. Note that the drive designation can be changed with the Disk Management tool located at Control Panel ->
Administrative Tools -> Computer Management. The Windows auto insertion function is active and is checking to see if a disc is ready to run. Drive access indicator on the Status Indicator Panel blinks at regular intervals with no disc in the tray or the drive is not installed. Port Replicator Problems Note: Be sure to power down your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC before adding a printer to the Port Replicator parallel port. This is normal. However, you may disable this feature. Tablet PC does not turn on when installed in the optional Port Replicator Hard Drive Problems You cannot access your hard drive. Port Replicator AC adapter is not plugged in. Tablet PC is not properly seated in the Port Replicator. The wrong drive designator was used by an application when a bootable disc was used to start the Tablet PC. Security is set so your operat-
ing system cannot be started without a password. Provide power to the Port Replicator. Remove and re-dock your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Verify drive designator used by application is in use by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a CD, drive designations are auto-
matically adjusted. Verify your password and security settings. Keyboard or Mouse Problems The built-in keyboard does not seem to work. The Tablet PC has gone into Sleep mode. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. 92 - Troubleshooting Problem You have installed an external keyboard or mouse, and it does not seem to work. Possible Cause Your application has locked out your keyboard. Your external device is not properly installed. Your operating system is not set up with correct software driver for that device. Possible Solutions Try to use your integrated pointing device to restart your system. Re-install your device. See Device Ports on page 80. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. You have connected an external keyboard or a mouse and it seems to be locking up the system. Memory Problems Your System screen in the Control Panel does not show the correct amount of installed memory. USB Device Problems Your LIFEBOOK doesnt recognize an installed USB device, or it doesnt work. Your OS is not setup with cor-
rect driver for that device. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Your system has crashed. Try to restart your Tablet PC. Your memory upgrade mod-
ule is not properly installed. Remove and re-install your memory upgrade module. See Memory Upgrade Module on page 77. You have a memory failure. Check for Power On Self Test (POST) messages. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 99. The device is not properly installed. Your device may not have the correct software driver active. The device may have been installed while an application was running, so your system is not aware of its installation. Remove and re-install the device. See Device Ports on page 80. See your software documentation and activate the correct driver. Close the application and restart your Tablet PC. 93 - Troubleshooting Problem Power Failures You turn on your LIFE-
BOOK Tablet PC and nothing seems to happen. Possible Cause Possible Solutions The installed battery is com-
pletely discharged or there is no power adapter installed. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Install a charged battery or a Power adapter. The battery is installed but is faulty. The battery is low. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify the presence and condition of the bat-
tery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. If the battery indicates a short, remove it and operate from another power source or replace that battery. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Use a Power adapter to operate until a battery is charged or install a charged battery. The power adapter is not plugged in properly. Verify that your adapter is connected correctly. See Power Sources on page 58. The power adapter (AC or auto/airline) has no power from the AC outlet, airplane jack, or car cigarette lighter. The power adapter (AC or auto/airline) is faulty. Move the AC cord to a different outlet, check for a line switch or tripped circuit breaker for the AC outlet. If you are using an auto/airline adapter in a car make sure the ignition switch is in the On or Accessories position. Try a different power adapter. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC turns off all by itself. The power management parameters are set for auto timeouts which are too short for your operating needs. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. Check your power management settings, or close your applications and go to the Power Options located in the Control Panel to adjust the timeout values to better suit your needs. Install a power adapter, then push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. See Power Sources on page 58. You are operating on battery power and ignored a low bat-
tery alarm until the battery was at the dead battery state and the system has entered Dead Battery Suspend mode. 94 - Troubleshooting Problem Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC turns off all by itself.
(continued) Possible Cause You have a battery failure. Possible Solutions Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel. If the battery is shorted, replace or remove it. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Your power adapter has failed or lost its power source. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the outlet has power. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC will not work on battery alone. The installed battery is dead. Replace the battery with a charged one or install a power adapter. Battery is improperly installed. Verify that the battery is properly connected by re-installing it. Your installed battery is faulty. Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel and replace or remove any batteries that are shorted. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. The battery seems to discharge too quickly. The power savings features may be disabled. Check the Power Options menu settings and adjust according to your operating needs. The brightness is turned all the way up. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The higher the brightness the more power your display uses. The battery is very old. Replace the battery. You are running an applica-
tion that uses a lot of power due to frequent hard drive access or optical drive access, or use of a Wireless LAN, or Bluetooth device. The battery has been ex-
posed to high temperatures. Use a power adapter for this application when at all possible. Replace the battery. The battery is too hot or too cold. Restore the Tablet PC to normal operating temperature. Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when battery is outside of operating range. 95 - Troubleshooting Possible Cause Problem Shutdown and Startup Problems The Suspend/Resume slide does not work. Suspend/Resume slide is disabled. Possible Solutions To enable the button, go to the Control Panel -> Power Options Properties and click the Advanced tab. In the Power buttons area, select Change what the power button does . There may be application software. conflict Close all applications and try the button again. The system powers up, and displays power on information, but fails to load the operating system. The boot sequence settings of the setup utility are not compatible with your configu-
ration. Set the operating source by pressing the [ESC] key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or use the [F2] key and enter the setup utility and adjust the source set-
tings from the Boot menu. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 62. You have a secured system requiring a password to load your operating system. Make sure you have the right password. Enter the setup utility and verify the Security settings and modify them as accordingly. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 62. Internal hard drive was not detected. Use the BIOS setup utility or Primary Master submenu, located within the Main menu, to try to auto detect the internal hard drive. An error message is dis-
played on the screen dur-
ing the Boot sequence. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a problem. See the POST messages to determine the meaning and severity of the prob-
lem. Not all messages are errors; some are simply status indicators. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 99. Your Tablet PC appears to change setup parameters when you start it. BIOS setup changes were not saved when made and you exited the setup utility. Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit when exiting the BIOS setup utility. The BIOS CMOS hold-up bat-
tery has failed. Contact your support representative for repairs. This is not a user serviceable part but has a normal life of 3 to 5 years. Your system display wont turn on when the system is turned on or has resumed. You have installed the LIFE-
BOOK/Security Application panel. Check the Status Indicator Panel for presence of the Security icon. If it is visi-
ble, enter your password See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. 96 - Troubleshooting Problem Video Problems The built-in display is blank when you turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Possible Cause Possible Solutions The Tablet PC is set for an external monitor only. Pressing [F10] while holding down the [Fn] key allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order are: built-in display only, external monitor only, both built-in display and external monitor. Display angle and brightness settings are not adequate for your lighting conditions. Move the display and the brightness control until you have adequate visibility. Pressing either the [F6] or [F7] keys while holding down the [Fn] key also allows you to change the brightness level of the display. Power management time-
outs are set for short intervals and you didnt see the display go on and off again. Press a keyboard button or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. (The display may be shut off by Sleep mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The Tablet PC turned on with a series of beeps and the built-in display is blank. Power On Self Test has detected a failurethat doesnt allow the display to operate. Contact your support representative. The display goes blank by itself after you have been using it. The Tablet PC has gone into Video timeout, Sleep mode, or Save-to-Disk mode because you have not used it for a period of time. Press any keyboard button, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. Check your power management settings, or close your applications and go to the Power Savings menu of the setup utility to adjust the timeout values to better suit your operation needs. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 62. The power management time-
outs may be set for very short intervals and you failed to notice the display come on and go off again. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. (The display may be shut off by Sleep Mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The system may be pass-
word-protected. Check the status indicator panel to verify that the Security icon is blinking. If it is blinking, enter your password. Your display wont turn on when the system is turned on or when it has resumed. 97 - Troubleshooting Problem The display does not close. The display has bright or dark spots. The display is dark when on battery power. Possible Cause A foreign object, such as a paper clip, is stuck between the display and keyboard. If the spots are very tiny and few in number, this is normal for a large LCD display. If the spots are numerous or large enough to interfere with your operation needs. The Power Management util-
ity default is set on low bright-
ness to conserve power. Possible Solutions Remove all foreign objects from the keyboard. This is normal; do nothing. Display is faulty; contact your support representative. Press [Fn] + [F7] to increase brightness or click the battery gauge, click on More power options, and select Adjust the display brightness. You have connected an external monitor but it does not display anything. Your operating system is not setup with the correct soft-
ware driver for that device. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Your BIOS setup is not set to enable your external monitor. Toggle the video destination by pressing [Fn]+ [F10] together, or check your BIOS setup and enable your external monitor. (See the Video Features sub-
menu, located in the Advanced Menu of the BIOS. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 62. Your external monitor is not properly installed. Your external monitor is not compatible with your LIFE-
BOOK Tablet PC. Application software often has its own set of error message displays. You have connected an external monitor and it does not come on. Miscellaneous Problems Error message is dis-
played on the screen dur-
ing the operation of an application. Reinstall your device. See External Video Port on page 83. See your monitor documentation and the External Monitor Support portions of the Specifications section. See Specifications on page 129. See your application manual and help displays screens for more information. Not all messages are errors some may simply be status. 98 - Troubleshooting Power On Self Test Messages The following is a list of error-and-status messages that the Phoenix BIOS and/or your operating system can generate and an explanation of each message. Error messages are marked with an *. If an error message is displayed that is not in this list, write it down and check the operating system documentation on screen and in the manual. If you can find no reference to the message, contact a support representative.
*Invalid NVRAM Data Problem with NVRAM access. In the unlikely case that you see this message you may have a display problem. You can continue operating but should contact your support representative for more information.
*Keyboard controller error The keyboard controller test failed. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.
*Keyboard not detected Keyboard not working. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.
*Operating system not found Operating system cannot be located on either drive A: or drive C: Enter the setup utility and see if both the fixed disk, and drive A: are properly identified and that the boot sequence is set correctly. Unless you have changed your installation greatly, the operating system should be on drive C:. If the setup utility is correctly set, your hard drive may be corrupted.
*Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP Displayed after any recoverable error message. Press [F1] key to Continue or [F2] key to Enter Setup.
*Real time clock error - Check date and time settings Real-time clock fails BIOS test. May require board repair. Contact your support representative.
*Fan error, system shutdown in 30s. Contact Fujitsu tech support Fan error occurred. Please contact your sales representative.
*Fan error occurred during previous boot. Fan error occurred during previous boot. Please contact your sales representative. 99 - Troubleshooting Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) Equivalent information for Windows 8 configurations can be found at Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) on page 110 It is very important that you create DVD copies of your Factory Image and Bootable Disc (along with other applicable media such as application discs) before beginning to use your system. To do so, follow the instructions in the Saving Your Factory Image and Creating Backup Images of Factory Image and Discs sections of this chapter. Saving and Recovering Your Factory and System Images Along with instructions on saving your Factory Image, this document outlines several other important procedures, such as making a system image, restoring your Factory Image and system images, managing your images, and restoring the partitions on a hard drive. IN ORDER TO INSTALL APPLICATIONS, MAKE COPIES OF FACTORY AND SYSTEM IMAGES, AND BURN APPLICATION MEDIA AND BOOTABLE DISCS YOU MUST HAVE AN INTERNAL OR EXTERNALLY CONNECTED WRITABLE DVD DRIVE. IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT YOU COPY YOUR FACTORY IMAGE TO REMOVABLE MEDIA (E.G., DVD DISCS). FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN AN INABILITY TO RESTORE THE IMAGE AT A FUTURE DATE. WE RECOMMEND THAT YOU USE DVD-R OR DVD+R DISCS FOR YOUR BACKUP, BUT SUPPORTED MEDIA* FOR IMAGE BACKUPS INCLUDE:
FOR FACTORY IMAGE, APPLICATION DATA, AND BOOTABLE DISC: DVD-R/+R. FOR USER-CREATED BACKUP IMAGE: DVD-R/+R, DVD-RW/+RW, DVD-DL.
* DEPENDING UPON YOUR OPTICAL DRIVE AND MEDIA FORMAT USED, SOME MEDIA TYPES MAY BE INCOMPATIBLE FOR CREATING IMAGE BACKUPS. DUE TO CERTAIN LICENSING REQUIREMENTS, SOME THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED SEPARATELY USING THE APPLICATION MEDIA BUNDLED WITH YOUR SYSTEM. Saving your Factory Image When you purchased your new system, a copy of the pre-installed Factory Image was loaded into a hidden partition on your hard disk drive. Having a copy of the original Factory Image available to you means that in the event of system failure, you will be able to restore it to its original state. 100 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) To make a copy of the Factory Image to DVD discs, you will need several blank discs (DVD-R or DVD+R discs are recommended) to create the copy. After creating the copy, be sure to label the discs and keep them in a safe place to ensure they do not get damaged. Creating Backup Images of Factory Image and Discs SOME CONFIGURATIONS OF CERTAIN STYLISTIC MODELS DO NOT HAVE APPLICATIONS LOADED ON THE HARD DRIVE; RATHER, THEY ARE AVAILABLE AT THE FUJITSU SUPPORT SITE FOR DOWNLOAD. PLEASE TAKE THAT INTO ACCOUNT WHEN READING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES. ALL USER-CREATED DATA WILL BE DELETED FROM YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE FACTORY IMAGE IS RESTORED. Using the [Manage/Change] button, you can create backup images of the Factory Image, Application Disc(s), or Bootable Disc. 1 Launch My Recovery from desktop icon 2 Select [Manage/Create]-> [Manage Backup Images]. The Backup Images menu displays a list from which you can choose which type of disc you want to burn: Bootable Disc, Application Discs, or Recovery Disc. 3 Select Recovery Disc, then click [Make DVD]. 4 Confirm that the # box has 2 (Note that in some cases the box may display a larger number for the factory image, depending upon its size.) 5 The message Recovery Disc #1 will be created. Enter your comments and the number of media on the DVD. Click
[YES] to burn the Factory Image. 6 While the copy is being made, a Writing to the media screen displays a progress bar. When the copy is complete, a dialog will appear informing you of the successful completion of the backup. 7 Repeat the process for the remaining images on disc (Bootable Disc and Application Discs). The number of images available may vary depending on your system model; some models do not have the applications loaded on the hard drive. 101 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) Recovering Your Factory Image In the event you need to restore your original Factory Image, perform the following steps. Note that there may be some third-party applications that need to be installed from the application media bundled with your system. ALL USER-CREATED DATA WILL BE DELETED FROM YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE FACTORY IMAGE IS RESTORED. In order to recover your Factory Image, perform the steps outlined in Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk. Backing Up a System Image Optional Step: Launch the Fujitsu Bonus Apps utility from your desktop, and select the components you wish to install. User-Configured System Backups: On your desktop, there is a [MyRecovery] icon that allows you to make backups of your current system image either to another location on your hard drive or on removable media. A system image is the configuration of your C: drive at a particular point of time. You may want to make system image backups occasionally in order to have points to which you can return without having to go all the way back to the Factory Image. By default, system images are saved in the MyRecovery folder (either on D:\ or external hard drive, depending on your hardware type). 1 Click the [MyRecovery] icon on your desktop. The My Recovery screen will appear (See Figure 52). Note that the My Recovery screen illustrated may vary, depending upon your system configuration.) 2 Click the [Backup] button on the MyRecovery screen. 3 On the next screen that appears, you can enter up to 200 characters of information about the backup file. This information will help you to identify the image at a later date. 102 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) Figure 52. MyRecovery screen 4 Click the [Next] button and the system will reboot. 5 After rebooting, the Creating of the backup image window appears, in which you can either click [Create the image on D drive] or [Select the drive] if you want to save to an external hard disk drive. (Note that the [Create the image on D drive may not be available on all configurations.) 6 An image appears showing you graphically how the image will be stored. Click the [Next] button. 7 Click [Execute] to start the backup. 103 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) Managing Your Backup Images With the MyRecovery tool you can also make copies of backup images, archive them on DVD, or delete them from your hard drive. 1 To begin, click the [MyRecovery] icon on your desktop. 2 Click the [Manage/Create] button in the MyRecovery window. 3 When the MyRecovery Manager window appears, click [Manage Backup Images]. 4 In the next window, a list of your backup images appears. Below the list are three buttons allowing you to [Make DVD], [Copy], or [Delete] your backup images. 5 Select an image title from the list, then click the action button you would like to perform. 6 Note that you need to have an external disk drive connected for the [Copy] button to be enabled. If you elect to copy the image, you will be prompted to enter the destination. If you are ready to copy, click [OK] to proceed. A progress screen appears while the backup copy is being made. 7 Note that if you copy an image to an external hard drive, both the original and the copy will appear in the [Backup Images] window with identical names, dates, and file sizes, but with the different drive letter to distinguish them. Before you select [Make DVD], make sure you have a recordable DVD drive connected and blank DVDs available. Using the Recovery and Utility Tools The Recovery and Utility tools consist of a variety of tools that will help you recover your Factory Image, recover system images, and delete the data from your hard disk. Methods for accessing the utilities Recovery and Utility Tools are preinstalled in a hidden partition by the factory, or they can be accessed by using the bootable disc. Please note that you can delete Recovery and Utility tools from your hard disk drive if you modify the partitions. In this case you will not be able to use the hidden partition for booting to Recovery and Utility Tools, but you will still be able to boot from the Bootable Disc. 104 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) Determining whether Recovery and Utility is pre-loaded 1 Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press [F12] key. The Boot Menu will appear. 2 Press the Tab key to select Application menu. 3 Check whether the <Recovery and Utility> option is present. If it is not present, it means that the utility must be used from the disc. Proceed to Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable Disc if <Recovery and Utility> is unavailable. Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk 1 Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press [F12] key. The Boot Menu will appear. 2 Press the Tab key to select Application menu. 3 Cursor down to <Recovery and Utility> and press the [Enter] key. 4 While the files are being loaded from the disc, a progress bar will appear at the bottom of the screen. 5 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 6 When the Operating System dialog appears, select Use recovery tools..., then click [Next]. 7 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 8 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 9 The Recovery and Utility screen appears on the screen with three tabs: Diagnostics, Recovery and Utility. Please note that Diagnostics tab is not supported on certain LIFEBOOK/STYLISTIC models when running Recovery and Utility from the hard disk. In order to restore the operating system, please use the middle icon Restoring the Factory Image (only C:\drive) under the Recovery tab. Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable disc To verify/change the boot-up priority (rather than booting-up from the hard drive or an external floppy disk drive), perform the following steps:
1 Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. press the [F12] key to get to the Boot Menu. 2 Highlight the CD/DVD option. 3 Insert the bootable disc into the drive tray. 105 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) 4 Click [OK]. While the files are being loaded from the disc, a progress bar will appear at the bottom of the screen. 5 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 6 When the Operating System dialog appears, click [Next]. 7 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 8 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 9 When the Recovery and Utility screen appears, three tabs will be present: Diagnostics, Recovery, and Utility. Recovery and Utility tabs Diagnostics tab: The Diagnostics tool is designed for use by IT professionals. It is not likely you will need to use this tool. When you select devices from the Diagnosis window then click [Execute], several tests are performed on the selected components. Recovery tab: The Recovery tab contains three tools: Recovering User-Configured System Backups, Restoring the Factory Image (only C: drive), and Restoring the Factory Image (full hard drive recovery). You can use these tools to restore the Factory Image from the hidden partition, restore backup image(s) created by you or images stored on DVD discs, and perform a full hard drive recovery. Please refer to instructions above for details on how to create Factory Image Recovery DVDs, user backup DVDs and system image backup. Utility tab: The Utility tab contains three tools: Hard Disk Data Delete, Restore Recovery and Utility, and Windows Complete PC Restore. The Hard Disk Data Delete utility is used to delete all data on the hard disk and prevent the data from being reused. NOTE: Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions. Restore Recovery and Utility allows you to restore the first hidden partition. Windows Complete PC Restore utility allows you to restore an image created with Windows Backup and Restore Center. Complete PC Restore will overwrite the data on your hard disk drive. 106 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) Using Windows 7 Recovery DVD on Windows 8 64-bit system (downgrade option). When using the Windows 7 Recovery DVD on a system that was supplied with Windows 8 x64 pre-installed, you should first deactivate Secure Boot and activate CSM and Fast Boot using the following procedure:
1 To access the BIOS Setup, press the [F2] key after switching on the system. 2 Use right/left arrow keys to switch to the "Security" page. NOTE: If your system doesn't have Supervisor Password, you cannot change the Secure Boot Configurations. In this case you need to select Set Supervisor Password and set the password. 3 Use up/down arrow keys to select Secure Boot Configurations. 4 Select Secure Boot or Secure Boot Option and using [Enter] key set it to [Disabled], then the use [ESC] key to exit Secure Boot Configurations. 5 Use arrow keys to switch to the "Advanced" page. 6 Select CSM and set it to [Enabled]. 7 Select the Fast Boot and set it to [Disabled]. 8 Use the arrow keys to switch to the "Exit" page. 9 Exit the BIOS Setup via Exit Saving Changes. You can then start the system from Windows 7 Recovery DVD and install Windows 7 on the system. Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility (for new hard drive or non-bootable hard drive) If you have installed a new hard drive or your hard drive is not bootable, perform the following steps. Note that first you will need to create new partitions on the hard drive, then restore the Factory Image:
1 Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. press the [F12] key. 2 Highlight the CD/DVD option. 3 Insert the bootable disc in your DVD drive, then click [OK]. 4 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on <Recovery and Utility>. 5 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 107 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) 6 When the Operating System dialog appears, click [Next]. 7 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 8 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 9 Click the Recovery tab in the Recovery and Utility window, then click Restoring the Factory Image icon. 10 Click [Execute]. 11 Read the precautions, then select I Agree. 12 Click [Next], then click [Execute] to start the recovery process. 13 1. Recovery Disc Check will be in bold and the rest will be grayed out. Follow the instructions and Insert the Recovery Disc #1. In some cases, you may prompted to Insert the Recovery Disc #2, depending upon the size of the Recovery Image 14 Click [Next] to begin the check. Click [Next] again when the check is complete. 15 2. Initializing hard disk drive will be in bold with the message Please insert the Bootable Disc into your optical drive. Insert the bootable disc. Click [Next] to proceed. A dialog box appears, with a checking disc message. 16 Warning All DATA on the Hard Disk will be completely erased!!! will appear. Select [OK]. The partition creation process will begin. 17 3. Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition will be in bold with the message Please insert the Recovery Disk#1 into the optical drive. Click [Next] to proceed. After completion, the tool will automatically go back to "3.Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition" but will include the note Please insert your Third Party Applications Disc or CyberLink DVD, then click [OK]. After installation of each disc, insert the next and continue until all have been installed. If you don't have your Third Party Applications Disc and/or CyberLink DVD, or you have already inserted these discs, please click [Skip] to continue. NOTE: In some cases (products without an optical drive) you will not have a CyberLink DVD". At this point, you can either:
Insert Application Disc(s) to restore back to hidden partition, or, Click [Skip] to skip restoring Application disc(s) and continue with restore. 108 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) 18 If you select to insert Application Disc, after copying of application disc(s) to hidden partition is completed, the message will appear again. Repeat inserting application disc(s) until all discs have been copied, then click [Skip]
to continue with Restore. 19 After clicking [Skip], a confirmation message will appear "If you want to skip copying or you have finished copying, click [OK]. Click [Cancel] to go back to Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition. 20 Click [OK] and Restoring Factory Image will begin. 21 When restoration is complete, you will see the message Restoration has been completed. Click [OK] to reboot the computer. Click [OK]. Downloading Driver Updates The Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility is available to allow you to download the latest drivers, utilities, and applications from the Fujitsu Support site. If you have a Windows 8 or Windows 7 operating system, you will need to go to the Support Site (http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS). 109 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) Equivalent information for Windows 7 configurations can be found at Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 7) on page 100 It is very important that you create DVD copies of your Factory Image and Bootable Disc before beginning to use your system. To do so, follow the instructions in the Saving Your Factory Image and Creating Backup Images of Factory Image and Discs sections of this chapter. Saving and Recovering Your Factory and System Images Along with instructions on saving your Factory Image, this document outlines several other important procedures, such as making a system image, restoring your Factory Image and system images, managing your images, and restoring the partitions on a hard drive. IN ORDER TO MAKE COPIES OF FACTORY AND SYSTEM IMAGES AND BURN BOOTABLE DISCS YOU MUST HAVE AN INTERNAL OR EXTERNALLY CONNECTED WRITABLE DVD DRIVE. IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT YOU COPY YOUR FACTORY IMAGE TO REMOVABLE MEDIA (E.G., DVD DISCS). FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN AN INABILITY TO RESTORE THE IMAGE AT A FUTURE DATE. WE RECOMMEND THAT YOU USE DVD-R OR DVD+R DISCS FOR YOUR BACKUP, BUT SUPPORTED MEDIA* FOR IMAGE BACKUPS INCLUDE:
FOR FACTORY IMAGE, APPLICATION DATA, AND BOOTABLE DISC: DVD-R/+R. FOR USER-CREATED BACKUP IMAGE: DVD-R/+R, DVD-RW/+RW, DVD-DL.
* DEPENDING UPON YOUR OPTICAL DRIVE AND MEDIA FORMAT USED, SOME MEDIA TYPES MAY BE INCOMPATIBLE FOR CREATING IMAGE BACKUPS. DUE TO CERTAIN LICENSING REQUIREMENTS, SOME THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED SEPARATELY. Saving your Factory Image When you purchased your new system, a copy of the pre-installed Factory Image was loaded into a hidden partition on your hard disk drive. Having a copy of the original Factory Image available to you means that in the event of system failure, you will be able to restore it to its original state. 110 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) To make a copy of the Factory Image to DVD discs, you will need four or five blank discs (DVD-R or DVD+R discs are recommended) to create the copy. After creating the copy, be sure to label the discs and keep them in a safe place to ensure they do not get damaged. Creating Backup Images of Factory Image and Bootable Disc Using the [Manage/Change] button, you can create backup images of the Factory Image and/or Bootable Disc. ALL USER-CREATED DATA WILL BE DELETED FROM YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE FACTORY IMAGE IS RESTORED. 1 Launch System Backup and Restore from the desktop icon and click [Yes] on the User Account Control dialog. 2 Click [Next] on the Backup Your Data screen. 3 Select the [Manage/Create] tab, then click [Make Recovery Disc set] to burn your factory image to DVD. 4 On Step 1: Please select a media type for Recovery Disc screen select Media Type from the drop down box, then click [Next]. (Note: This screen shows the number of discs required for backup.) 5 On Step 2: Confirm your Recovery Disc both the Bootable Disc and Recovery disks are selected by default under List of Recovery Discs. When the backup is created for the first time, these options should stay selected. Click
[Next]. 6 Click [OK] on the Attention about media confirmation screen. DURING THE FOLLOWING PROCESS, YOU SHOULD CONNECT AN AC ADAPTER SINCE THE PROCESS MAY TAKE A LONG TIME. 7 Click [Start] on Step 3: Making Recovery Disc . 8 The process will prompt you to insert your discs. 9 Once the process completes successfully, click [Finish] on Step 4: Making Recovery Disc process has been completed screen. 111 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) Recovering Your Factory Image. In the event you need to restore your original Factory Image, perform the following steps. ALL USER-CREATED DATA WILL BE DELETED FROM YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE FACTORY IMAGE IS RESTORED. In order to recover your Factory Image, perform the steps outlined in Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk. Backing Up a System Image Optional Step: Launch the Fujitsu Bonus Apps utility from your desktop, and select the components you wish to install. User-Configured System Backups: On your desktop, there is a [System Backup and Restore] icon that allows you to make backups of your current system image either to another location on your hard drive or on removable media. A system image is the configuration of your C: drive at a particular point of time. You may want to make system image backups occasionally in order to have points to which you can return without having to go all the way back to the Factory Image. By default, system images are saved in the D: drive in the System Backup and Restore folder. You can also elect to save the image to an external hard drive. 1 Launch System Backup and Restore from the desktop icon and click [Yes] on User Account Control dialog 2 Click [Next] on Backup Your Data screen 3 Select the [Backup] tab on System Backup and Restore screen. 4 Click the [Backup User System] button. 5 On the Step 1: Select a backup destination screen select your destination drive. By default the Destination is set to D: drive. You can also select the [Other drive] option to back up to an external drive. Select whether you would like the system to [Shutdown] or [Restart] after the process is completed. 112 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) 6 On the Step 2: Name your backup images screen that appears, you can enter up to 300 characters of information about the backup file. This information will help you to identify the image at a later date. 7 On Step 3: Backup the entire C: drive image verify your backup settings and click [Next]. 8 Click [OK] on Step 4: Please confirm the following before starting your backup to restart you computer and begin backup. 9 After backup completes and the system restarts, Step 5: Backup Completed. Confirm the results screen should appear on your desktop confirming that backup image has been created successfully. Click [Close] to close System Backup and Restore dialog. 10 Click [OK] to quit the System Backup and Restore utility. Managing Your Backup Images With the System Backup and Restore tool you can also make copies of backup images, archive them on DVD, or delete them from your hard drive. 1 Launch System Backup and Restore from the desktop icon and click [Yes] on User Account Control dialog. 2 Click [Next] on the Backup Your Data screen. 3 Select the [Create/Manage] tab and click on [Manage User System Backup]. 4 In the next window there are three options allowing you to [Copy], [Delete], or [Add Comment] to your images. Click the action button you would like to perform:
Selecting [Copy] option (Note that you must have an external disk drive connected for the [Copy] button to work, otherwise an attempt to copy will result in an error.) a. On Step 1: Select a backup file that you wish to copy, select the location of a backup file. A list of backup files will appear. Select the file you wish to copy from the list and click [Next]. b. On Step 2: Select a drive to copy a backup file, select the destination drive and click [Next]. c. On Step 3: Start to copy the following information confirm the information and click [Start]. d. Step 4: Processing backup data copying screen displays the progress bar. e. Click [Finish] on Step 5: Copy completed. Confirm the results screen. 113 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) Selecting Delete option a. On Step 1: Please select your target data screen select location of a backup file. A list of backup files will appear. Select the file(s) you wish to delete and click [Next]. b. Click [Start] on Step 2: Delete backup data screen. c. Click [OK] to the confirmation message. d. Click [Finish] on Step 4: Delete process has been completed screen. Selecting Add Comment option a. On the Step 1: Select target data screen select location of a backup file. A list of backup files will appear. Select the file you wish to add comments to and click [Next]. b. On the Step 2: Add comment screen, type in a maximum of 300 characters in Comment text area and click [Add]. c. Click [Finish] on the Step 3: Adding comment has been completed screen. Restoring your backup images 1 Launch System Backup and Restore from the desktop icon and click [Yes] on the User Account Control dialog 2 Click [Next] on the Backup Your Data screen 3 Select the Restore tab and click on Restore User System Backup 4 On Step 1: Please confirm the following before starting restore process, confirm information and click [OK]. The system will restart to begin restoring your backup. 5 After the system restarts, the Explanation about Restore User System Backup screen is shown. Once you read the EULA, select [Agree] choice and click [Next]. 6 Select an image to restore from the Backup data list and click [Next]
7 Click [Start] on Confirm before restoration screen 8 Once restoration finishes, click [Close] in Finished restoration screen, the computer will restart to Windows. 114 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) Using the Recovery and Utility Tools The Recovery and Utility tools consist of a variety of tools that will help you recover your Factory Image, recover system images, and delete the data from your hard disk. Methods for accessing the utilities Recovery and Utility Tools are preinstalled in a hidden partition by the factory, or they can be accessed by using the bootable disc. Please note that you can delete Recovery and Utility tools from your hard disk drive if you modify the partitions. In this case you will not be able to use the hidden partition for booting to Recovery and Utility Tools, but you will still be able to boot from the Bootable Disc. Determining whether Recovery and Utility is pre-loaded 1 Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press [F12] key. 2 From the Boot Menu that appears, check whether the <Recovery and Utility> option is present. If it is not present, it means that the utility must be used from the disc. Proceed to Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable Disc if <Recovery and Utility> is unavailable. Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk 1 Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press the [F12] key. 2 Cursor down to <Recovery and Utility> and press the [Enter] key. 3 Choose your Language (English or French). 4 Three tool options appear: Diagnostics, Recovery and Utility (Please see Recovery and Utility tools section below for instructions on how to use these tools). Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable disc To verify/change the boot-up priority (rather than booting-up from the hard drive or an external floppy disk drive), perform the following steps:
1 Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. press the [F12] key. 2 Highlight the CD/DVD option from the Boot menu, then press [Enter]. 115 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) 3 Insert the bootable disc into the drive tray. 4 Click [OK]. NOTE: In the following step, the Fujitsu logo screen may appear on the display for a couple of minutes before the progress bar appears. 5 Select CD/DVD boot mode: UEFI Mode) and press [Enter]. While the files are being loaded from the disc, the Fujitsu logo screen will appear followed by a progress bar screen at the bottom of the screen. Recovery and Utility tools Diagnostics tool: The Diagnostics tool is designed for use by IT professionals. It is not likely you will need to use this tool. If you should need to use this tool, perform the following steps:
1 Press the Diagnostics Tool button to start the Diagnostics tool. A progress bar appears while the Diagnostics tool is starting up. 2 Read the note, then click [OK]. 3 Choose one or more of the following options for diagnostics on the Fujitsu Hardware Diagnostics Tool window:
CPU, Memory, Display, Hard Disk, CD/DVD/BD, Floppy Disk, Keyboard, and Mouse. Click the [Option] button to specify how many times the tool should run diagnostics on each selected component. Press [Execute] to start the Diagnostics tool. 4 After the execution is completed, the selected components are circled in red to indicated that they have been diagnosed and the result dialog window is opened. 5 Click [End] to close the Diagnostics tool, then click [Yes] to confirm the end of diagnostics session. Recovery tool: The Recovery tool contains three options. User System Backups: Recovering C: Drive from D: Drive or external storage device), Restore C: Drive: Restore factory image (only C: drive), and Restore Full Hard Drive:
Restore factory image (full hard drive).You can use these tools to restore the Factory Image from the hidden partition, restore backup image(s) created by you or images stored on DVD discs, and perform a full hard drive recovery. Please refer to instructions above for details on how to create Factory Image Recovery DVDs, user backup DVDs and system image backup. 116 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) To recover from D: drive or external storage device:
1 Click [User System Backups]
2 The progress bar screen is followed by EULA screen. Click [Agree] to accept the EULA. 3 On Select an image to restore screen select the image to restore from the list of images and click [Next]. 4 Click [Start] on the Confirm before restoration screen to begin the restoration process. 5 Once restoration finishes, click [Close] in the Finished restoration screen; the computer will restart to Windows. To restore from the Factory Image (hidden partition):
1 Click [Restore C: drive]. 2 The progress bar screen is followed by Restore Factory Image (only C: drive) screen confirming that the Factory Image will be restored to the C: drive and D: drive data will remain. Click [Next]. 3 Read the instruction screen and select [Agree], then [Next]. 4 Click [OK] to the warning message to restore factory image to the C: drive. 5 When the progress bar screen, wait for the process to complete. 6 Click [Finish] when the process completes; the computer will restart to Windows. To restore full hard drive:
Follow the steps in section Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility (for new hard drive or non-bootable hard drive) Utility tool: The Utility tool contains two options: Hard Disk Data Delete and Partition Creation. The Hard Disk Data Delete utility is used to delete all data on the hard disk and prevent the data from being reused. NOTE: Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions. 117 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) To delete hard disk data:
a. Click the [Hard Disk Data Delete] button b. The progress bar appears, followed by the EULA screen. c. Agree to the EULA and click [Next]. d. Choose the hard disk from which the data should be deleted in the list of hard disks and click [Next]. The Partition Creation utility is used to change the C: and D: drive partition sizes. To run this utility:
a. Click the [Partition Creation] button. b. A progress bar screen appears, followed by the EULA screen. Agree to the EULA. c. On the Recovery Tool - Partition Creation screen move the slider to set disk size, then click [OK]. d. Click YES in the Partition Creation confirmation dialog. Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility (for new hard drive or non-bootable hard drive) If you have installed a new hard drive or your hard drive is not bootable, perform the following steps. 1 Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen, press the [Enter] key. 2 Highlight the CD/DVD option from the Boot Menu and press [Enter]. 3 Insert the bootable disc in your DVD drive, then click [OK]. 4 Select CD/DVD boot mode: UEFI Mode and press [Enter]. While the files are being loaded from the disc, Fujitsu logo screen will appear followed by a progress bar screen at the bottom of the screen. 5 Choose your language ([English or French). 6 Three tool options appear: Diagnostics, Recovery and Utility. Select [Recovery]. 7 Select [Restore full hard drive]. 8 Click [Next] to confirm full hard drive restoration. (All data on HDD will be deleted). 9 Agree to EULA by selecting [Agree] option and clicking [Next]. 10 Click [Next] on the Recovery Disk Check screen to verify that the bootable disk has been inserted into the optical drive. 118 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) 11 The Checking for Recovery Disk screen appears followed by the prompt to insert the first disk. Click [OK] to continue. Repeat this step for all disks. After all recovery disks have been checked and the check has been completed, click [Next]
12 Reinsert the first recovery disk and click [Next]
13 Click [OK] when you receive the final warning informing you that all data on drives C: and D: will be lost. This starts the recovery process. 14 Follow the prompts to insert the next recovery disks and click [OK]. 15 After the copying of the factory image to the HDD completes and the factory image is restored, follow the prompt to insert bootable disk. 16 After the restore process is complete, click [Finish] to restart the system. The computer will restart automatically and then go through the first boot process. Changing BIOS settings between Windows 8 32-bit and Windows 8 64-bit In order to install a 32-bit version of Windows 8 and to be able to boot from 32-bit media, you must disable the Security Boot option in the BIOS settings. Switching back to the 64-bit version of Windows 8 from the 32-bit version of Windows 8 will require you to revert the above change and to re-enable Secure Boot. If you do not re-enable Secure Boot, the following product functionalities will not be enabled as it relies on native UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) mode boot:
1 Secure Boot 2 Seamless Boot experience 3 Network unlock for Bitlocker for systems with a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 4 eDrive support WARNING: Reverting back to UEFI mode will require a hard drive reformat. All data and personal settings will be lost. It is highly recommended that you back up your data before you revert back to UEFI mode. For further information please refer to our support pages: http://www.fujitsu.com/us/support/
1 To access the BIOS Setup, press the [F2] key after switching the system on. 119 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) 2 Use the right/left arrow keys to switch to the Security page.
* If your system doesn't have Supervisor Password, you cannot change the Secure Boot Configurations. In this case you need to select Set Supervisor Password and set the password. 3 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Secure Boot Configurations. 4 Select Secure Boot or Secure Boot Option and using the [Enter] key set it to [Disabled] for 32-bit and to
[Enabled] for 64-bit, then use the [ESC] key to exit Secure Boot Configurations. 5 Use the arrow keys to switch to the Advanced page. 6 Select CSM and set it to [Enabled] for 32-bit and [Disabled] for 64-bit. 7 Select the Fast Boot and set it to [Enable] for 32-bit and [Disabled] for 64-bit. 8 Use the arrow keys to switch to the Exit page. 9 Exit the BIOS Setup via Exit Saving Changes. Downloading Driver Updates The Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility is available to allow you to download the latest drivers, utilities, and applications from the Fujitsu Support site. If you have a Windows 8 or Windows 7 operating system, you will need to go to the Support Site (http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS). 120 - Restoring Your System Image and Software (Windows 8) Chapter 5 Care and Maintenance Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC If you use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC carefully, you will increase its life and reliability. This section provides some tips for looking after the Tablet PC and its devices. THE SYSTEM CONTAINS COMPONENTS THAT CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE COMPONENTS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:
BEFORE DOCKING OR UNDOCKING YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC (WHEN USING A PORT REPLICATOR), IT IS A GOOD PRACTICE TO ALWAYS TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MEMORY MODULE, HOLD IT BY THE EDGE SO AS NOT TO TOUCH ANY CONTACTS OR CHIPS. BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH ANY INTERNAL COMPUTER TERMINALS OR COMPONENTS; THE OIL FROM YOUR FINGERS COULD CAUSE A SHORT TO THE COMPONENTS. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY BE HAZARDOUS IF MISUSED. OPERATIONS OF THIS PRODUCT OR SIMILAR PRODUCTS, MUST ALWAYS BE SUPERVISED BY AN ADULT. DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF ANY ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS AND DO NOT PERMIT THEM TO HANDLE ANY CABLES. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is a durable but sensitive electronic device. Treat it with care. Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable carrying case. Do not attempt to service the computer yourself. Always follow installation instructions closely. 121 Keep it away from food and beverages. To protect your Tablet PC from damage and to optimize system performance, be sure to keep all air vents unobstructed, clean, and clear of debris. This may require periodic cleaning, depending upon the environment in which the system is used. Do not operate the Tablet PC in areas where the air vents can be obstructed, such as in tight enclosures or on soft surfaces like a bed or cushion. If you accidentally spill liquid on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC:
1 2 3 4 Turn it off. Position it so that the liquid can run out. Let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer if needed. If your Tablet PC will not boot after it has dried out, call your support representative. Do not use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC in a wet environment (near a bathtub, swimming pool). Always use the AC adapter and batteries that are approved for your Tablet PC. Avoid exposure to sand, dust and other environmental hazards. Do not expose your Tablet PC to direct sunlight for long periods of time as temperatures above 140 F (60 C) may damage your Tablet PC. Keep the covers closed on the connectors and slots when they are not in use. Do not put heavy or sharp objects on the computer. If you are carrying your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC in a briefcase, or any other carrying case, make sure that there are no objects in the case pressing on the lid. Never position your Tablet PC such that the optical drive is supporting the weight of the Tablet PC. Cleaning your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Always disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not the cord.) Clean your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC with a damp, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents. Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen. Never use glass cleaners. Always shut down the computer, unplug the power adapter, and remove the battery when cleaning or disinfecting the computer exterior, keyboard or LCD display. 122 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Cleaning guidelines using recommended off-the-shelf cleaners Computer exterior, computer keyboard To clean the exterior and keyboard, use one of the following off-the-shelf products:
Office Depot #154-616 Notebook Cleaning Kit Meridrew Enterprises Klear Screen Wipes 3M CL563 Cleaner Wipes Note: After cleaning with one of these products, gently polish with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth until the solution is no longer visible. LCD display To clean the LCD display, use one of the following off-the-shelf products:
Office Depot #154-616 Notebook Cleaning Kit Meridrew Enterprises Klear Screen Wipes Applies to Tablet PC, convertible PC with LCD shield, and standard notebook LCD displays. Wipe the LCD surface gently, allowing it to dry before turning on the computer. Disinfecting LIFEBOOK computers Wipe the surface with a soft cloth wipe and a 50% ethanol solution or use another ethanol-based germicide which has been registered as a hospital disinfectant by the EPA. USE OF INCORRECT CLEANERS CAN RESULT IN OPTICAL IMPAIRMENT OF THE LCD AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE COMPUTER. ALWAYS REFER TO THE CLEANER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR PROPER HANDLING AND USE OF THE PRODUCTS. NEVER USE AMMONIA, ACIDIC, OR ALKALINE CLEANERS OR ORGANIC CHEMICALS SUCH AS PAINT THINNER, ACETONE, PROPYL OR ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL, OR KEROSENE. IT MAY DAMAGE SURFACE FINISHES AND THE COATING OF THE LCD SCREEN. NEVER USE COMPRESSED AIR FOR CLEANING STYLISTIC AND LIFEBOOK PCS. 123 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Cleaning the dust filter Your LIFEBOOK is equipped with fans to make air flow inside by pulling in outside air to cool the inside of the system. Depending on the environment in which the system is used, dust and dirt may be pulled in along with the air. Accumulated dust and dirt could impair the function of the system. REMOVE AC ADAPTER: BEFORE REMOVING THE FILTER, TURN OFF THE SYSTEM AND PERIPHERALS AND DISCONNECT THE AC ADAPTER. CLEANING THE FILTER:
- DO NOT USE DETERGENT
- AVOID DAMAGING THE FILTER; DAMAGE TO THE FILTER IS NOT COVERED BY WARRANTY.
- USE PLASTIC TOOLS TO CLEAN THE FILTER. METAL OR WOODEN TOOLS COULD DAMAGE THE FILTER. ESD: BEFORE CLEANING THE FILTER, TOUCH A METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY. 1 Turn off your computer and disconnect the AC adapter. 2 Close the display panel and turn the system upside down. 3 Remove the dust filter by pressing the latch towards the filter and lifting it out (Figure 53). 4 Carefully clean the dust filter and the air-cooling duct. 5 Put back the dust filter by inserting the end without latch first and pushing in the filter until it latches. Dust Filter Cover Filter Cover Latch Figure 53. Removing the Dust Filter Cover 124 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC ALWAYS BE SURE THE DUST FILTER IS INSTALLED WHEN RUNNING YOUR SYSTEM. NOT USING THE FILTER COULD CAUSE CONTAMINATION AND POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE SYSTEM. Storing your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC If storing your Tablet PC for a month or longer, turn it off, fully charge the battery, then remove and store all Lithium ion batteries. Store the Tablet PC and batteries separately. If you store your tablet with a battery installed, the battery will discharge, and battery life will be reduced. In addition, a bad battery might damage the system. Store your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK in a cool, dry location. Temperatures should remain between 13F
(-25C) and 140F (60C). ALWAYS POWER OFF THE COMPUTER BEFORE TRANSPORTING AND/OR PACKAGING IT. AFTER SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM, WAIT UNTIL THE STATUS LED PANEL INDICATES POWER OFF CONDITION (I.E., NO LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED). IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE UNIT MAY NOT AUTOMATICALLY GO TO POWER OFF OR HIBERNATE MODE WHEN YOU CLOSE THE LID. THIS SITUATION MAY OCCUR DUE TO PRE-OS BOOT PASSWORD SECURITY SETTINGS OR SOME OTHER APPLICATION RUNNING ON THE COMPUTER. ATTEMPTING TO TRANSPORT THE COMPUTER WHILE POWER IS ON MAY DAMAGE THE TABLET PC DUE TO SHOCK OR OVERHEATING SINCE THE AIR VENTS MAY BE BLOCKED OR RESTRICTED. Traveling with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Do not transport your Tablet PC while it is turned on. It is recommended that you carry your Tablet PC with you while traveling, rather than checking it in as baggage. Always bring your System Recovery CD that came with your Tablet PC when you travel. If you experience system software problems while traveling, you may need it to correct any problems. Never put your Tablet PC through a metal detector. Have your Tablet PC hand-inspected by security personnel. You can however, put your Tablet PC through a properly tuned X-ray machine. To avoid problems, place your Tablet PC close to the entrance of the machine and remove it as soon as possible or have your Tablet PC hand-
inspected by security personnel. Security officials may require you to turn your Tablet PC on, so make sure you have a charged battery on hand. 125 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Take the necessary plug adapters if you're traveling overseas. Check the following diagram to determine which plug adapter you'll need or ask your travel agent. Outlet Type Location Outlet Type Location United States, Canada, parts of Latin Amer-
ica, Mexico, Japan, Korea, the Philippines, Taiwan United Kingdom, Ire-
land, Malaysia, Singa-
pore, parts of Africa Russia and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), most of Europe, parts of Latin America, the Middle East, parts of Africa, Hong Kong, India, most of South Asia China, Australia, New Zealand Batteries Caring for your Batteries Always handle batteries carefully. Do not short-circuit the battery terminals (that is, do not touch both terminals with a metal object). Do not carry lose batteries in a pocket or purse where they may mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so may cause an explosion or fire. Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate or incinerate the battery. Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and only in ventilated areas. Do not leave batteries in hot locations for more than a day or two. Intense heat can shorten battery life. Do not leave a battery in storage for longer than 6 months without recharging it. 126 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Increasing Battery Life Power your Tablet PC through the AC or optional auto/airline adapter whenever possible. If your Tablet PC is running on battery power all day, connect it to the AC adapter overnight to recharge the battery. Keep brightness to the lowest level comfortable. Set the power management for maximum battery life. Put your Tablet PC in Sleep mode when it is turned on and you are not actually using it. Limit your media drive access. Disable the Media Player auto insert notification function. Always use fully charged batteries. Media Care Caring for your Media (DVD/CD/CD-R) Media discs are precision devices and will function reliably if given reasonable care. Always store your media disc in its case when it is not in use. Always handle discs by the edges and avoid touching the surface. Avoid storing any media discs in extreme temperatures. Do not bend media discs or set heavy objects on them. Do not spill liquids on media discs. Do not scratch or get dust on media discs. Never write on the label surface with a ballpoint pen or pencil. Always use a felt pen. If a media disc is dirty, use only a DVD/CD cleaner or wipe it with a clean, soft, lint free cloth starting from the inner edge and wiping to the outer edge. If a media disc is subjected to a sudden change in temperature, cold to warm condensation may form on the surface. Wipe the moisture off with a clean, soft, lint free cloth and let it dry at room temperature. DO NOT use a hair dryer or heater to dry media discs. 127 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Caring for your Optical Drive Your optical drive is durable but you must treat it with care. Please pay attention to the following points:
The drive rotates the compact disc at a very high speed. Do not carry it around or subject it to shock or vibration with the power on. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be exposed to extreme temperatures. Avoid using or storing the drive where it is damp or dusty. Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets or devices that generate strong magnetic fields. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be subjected to shock or vibration. Do not disassemble or dismantle the optical drive. Use of a commercially available lens cleaner is recommended for regular maintenance of your drive. 128 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Chapter 6 System Specifications Specifications This section provides the hardware and environmental specifications for your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Specifications of particular configurations will vary. Microprocessor New 3rd Generation Intel Core Processor family. (Refer to system label to determine your processor.) Chipset Mobile Intel QM77 Express Platform Control Hub (PCH) Memory System Memory DDR3-1600 MHz SDRAM dual-channel memory module. Two DIMM slots; upgradeable to 16 GB of total memory (8 GB x 2). Cache Memory Up to 4 MB L3 cache on-die (depending upon CPU) 129 Video Built-in color flat-panel TFT active matrix LED backlit display with simultaneous display capability. Video Color and Resolution 13.3" HD+ anti-glare display Internal: 1600 x 900 pixel resolution, 16M colors External (CRT, HDMI, DVI): 1920 x 1200 pixel resolution, 16M colors DisplayPort (on port replicator): 2560 x 1600 pixel resolution, 16M colors Simultaneous: 1600 x 900, 16M colors Screen Orientations Supported: 0o, 90o, 180o, 270o Graphics Controller Intel HD 4000 integrated graphics Digitizer Dual Digitizer, consisting of active digitizer and capacitive touch panel (uses active stylus input, ten finger touch input in Windows 7 and five finger touch input in Windows 8). Audio Realtek codec ALC269 VB6 with High Definition (HD) audio. Headphones: Stereo headphone jack, 3.5 mm, 1 Vrms or less, minimum impedance 32 Ohms Microphone: Stereo microphone jack, 3.5 mm, 100 mVp-p or less, minimum impedance 10K Ohms Two built-in speakers, 20 mm x 12 mm Two built-in digital microphones Mass Storage Device Options Hard Drive Serial ATA II, 3.0Gb/s, 2.5, 9.5 mm or 7 mm, shock-mounted with Shock Sensor utility. Capacity, depth, and speed of the hard drive are determined by system configuration. 32 GB m-SATA SSD cache for fast boot. 130 - Specifications BTO 2.5" 7mmH/9.5mmH SATA HDD 5400rpm: 320, 500GB HDD 7200rpm: 320, 500GB TCG Opal-compliant Self-Encrypted Drive (SED) HDD 7200rpm: 320GB TCG Opal-compliant Self-Encrypted Drive (SED) SSD: 128GB non-FDE SSD(MLC): 128, 256GB Modular Bay Devices One of the following devices is pre-installed:
Modular Blu-ray RW drive Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer Modular Bay Battery Weight Saver Features Integrated Pointing Device Touchpad cursor control buttons Communications Gigabit LAN: Intel wired 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet LAN WLAN: Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Bluetooth: Bluetooth V4+LE device for wireless personal area network communication 131 - Specifications LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Panel See LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons on page 49. Trusted Platform Module The LIFEBOOK T904 has a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) installed for added system security. Theft Prevention Lock Lock slots for use with security restraint systems. Web Camera Optional FHD (1920 x 1080 pixel) digital web camera with access indicator LED Device Ports On the LIFEBOOK Tablet PC:
Secure Digital Card slot HDMI Port One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external monitor (see Display specifications) Two USB 2.0 connectors for input/output devices Two USB 3.0 connectors for input/output devices (one of which features Anytime USB Charge support) One DC In connector One LAN (RJ-45) connector Docking port (100-pin, to dock with port replicator) One stereo headphone/line-out jack One stereo microphone/line-in jack Dedicated Smart Card slot (requires third-party application) On the Optional Port Replicator:
One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external monitor Four USB 3.0 connectors for input/output devices One LAN (RJ-45) connector 132 - Specifications One DC-in connector One DVI-D connector One DisplayPort connector One Headphone connector Docking connector (100-pin, to dock with system) Keyboard Built-in keyboard with all functions of 101 key keyboard. Total number of keys: 84 Function keys: F1 through F12, plus Fn extension key Two Windows keys: one Start key, one application key Key pitch: 19 mm; key stroke: 1.7 mm (Note: On backlit keyboards, the stroke is 1.4mm) Built-in Touchpad pointing device with left and right buttons Built-in Palm Rest Anti-microbial Spill-resistant External USB keyboard/mouse support Power Batteries Lithium ion battery, rechargeable, 6-cell, 72Wh, or, Optional Lithium ion modular bay battery, rechargeable, 6-cell, 28 Wh AC Adapter Autosensing 100-240V AC, supplying 19V DC, 4.22A, 80W to the LIFEBOOK; includes an AC cable Power Management Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface). 133 - Specifications Dimensions and Weight Overall Dimensions With foot and 6-cell main battery: 13.15"(w) x 9.60"(d) x 1.28 (h) (334 mm x 244 mm x 32.6 mm) Without foot, with 6-cell main battery: 13.15"(w) x 9.60"(d) x 1.06/1.22(h) (334 mm x 244 mm x 26.8/31.0 mm) Weight With weight saver: Approximately 4.11 lbs. (1.86 kg) With optical drive: Approximately 4.41 lbs. (1.99 kg) With bay battery: Approximately 4.67 lbs. (2.12 kg) Environmental Requirements Temperature Operating: 41 to 95 F (5 to 35 C). Non-operating: 5 to 140 F (15 to 60 C) Humidity Operating: 20% to 85%, relative, non-condensing. Non-operating: 8% to 85%, relative, non-condensing Altitude Operating: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum Popular Accessories For ordering or additional information on Fujitsu accessories please visit our Web site at www.shopfujitsu.com or call 1-800-FUJITSU. 134 - Specifications Pre-Installed Software Depending on your operating system, your Tablet PC comes with pre-installed software for playing audio and video files of various formats. In addition, there is virus protection software and applications that can bring additional value during your daily use of the system. Some software is pre-installed while other apps are a part of Fujitsu Bonus Apps THE FOLLOWING LIST CONSTITUTES THE SOFTWARE THAT MAY BE INSTALLED ON YOUR COMPUTER. THE PRE-INSTALLED SOFTWARE MAY VARY, AND IS DETERMINED BY YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM AND CONFIGURATION. BACK-UP COPIES OF ALL ROYALTY APPLICATIONS (E.G., ALL CYBERLINK ODD AND YOUCAM APPLICATIONS, EXPRESS CACHE, PORTSHUTTER, OMNIPASS, INTEL WIDI) ARE AVAILABLE FOR DOWNLOAD FROM THE FUJITSU SUPPORT SITE. BACKUP COPIES ARE NOT PROVIDED IN THE PHYSICAL MEDIA. Adobe Reader Norton Internet Security (60-day free trial) Norton Studio CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink MakeDisc (Windows 7 only) CyberLink YouCam Skype for Windows 8 Fujitsu Touch Launcher (Windows 7 only) DTS Boost OmniPass Fingerprint application Microsoft Windows Live Essentials (Windows 7 only) Learning About Your Software Tutorials All operating systems and most application software have tutorials built into them upon installation. We highly recommend that you step through the tutorial before you use an application. 135 - Specifications Manuals Included with your Tablet PC you will find manuals for your installed operating system and other pre-installed software. Any manuals that are not included are available online through the softwares Help menu. We recommend that you review these manuals for information on the use of these applications. Adobe Reader Adobe Reader allows you to view, navigate, and print PDF files across all major computing platforms. Norton Internet Security Your system is preinstalled with a free 60-day trial version of Symantecs Norton Internet Security. Internet Security is a suite of tools designed to protect your LIFEBOOK from viruses, hackers, spam, and spyware. It helps you protect data currently on your hard disk from destruction or contamination. The trial version is activated upon your acceptance of software license agreement. After 60 days, you will need to purchase a subscription from Symantec to download latest virus, spyware, and spam definitions. Norton Studio Easily manage your Norton protection for your PCs and other devices right from your Windows 8 tile interface desktop. Designed and optimized for Windows 8 tile interface, Norton Studio lets you view, control, fix, update, and renew all your Norton protection products from a single screen. CyberLink MakeDisc (Windows 7 only) CyberLink MakeDisc allows you to burn data, videos and photographs to CDs or DVDs. CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink PowerDVD allows you to produce and edit home movies and slideshows on discs. CyberLink YouCam CyberLink YouCam allows you to capture photos or movies on the embedded webcam, add special effects to them, and share them in a variety of formats or via social networks. CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDirector allows you to edit and enhance your videos, and add special effects to them. 136 - Specifications Skype for Windows 7 Skype for Windows 7 allows users to communicate with peers by Internet voice, video, and instant messaging. Skype can be used to place phone calls on traditional telephone networks. Calls to other users within Skype are free, while calls to landlines and cell phones are charged via a user account system. Skype is also popular for file transfer and teleconferencing. OmniPass Fingerprint application The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass lets you use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords, and presents a convenient user interface through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. Fujitsu Touch Launcher (Windows 7 only) The Touch Launcher is a handy on-screen method for quickly launching commonly-used applications and performing Internet tasks. DTS Boost DTS Boost maximizes acoustic power beyond the volume limits of PC hardware, allowing users to create an overall louder or fuller master by limiting the dynamic range and boosting the perceived overall level of the mix. Microsoft Windows Live Essentials (Windows 7 only) Windows Live Essentials is a suite of programs that make it easier and more enjoyable to use your Tablet PC. Live Essentials consists of four Live applications: Messenger, Photo Gallery, Writer, and Mail. Messenger lets you communicate and interact with individuals and groups. Photo Gallery lets you organize, edit, and share your photos. Writer can be used to generate blog entries, upload videos and photos to your blogs, and publish entries online. Mail makes it easy for you to manage your email. Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Edition or Microsoft Windows 8 Pro Edition 137 - Specifications Glossary AC Adapter A device which converts the AC voltage from a wall outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your system. Access point Wireless network device used to bridge wireless and wired network traffic. ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Active-Matrix Display A type of technology for making flat-panel displays which has a transistor or similar device for every pixel on the screen. Ad Hoc Mode Ad Hoc Mode refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Points. Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. AGP Accelerated Graphics Port. Graphics port specifically designed for graphics-intensive devices, such as video cards and 3D accelerators. 138 Auto/Airline Adapter A device which converts the DC voltage from an automobile cigarette lighter or aircraft DC power outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. BIOS Basic Input-Output System. A program and set of default parameters stored in ROM which tests and operates your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC when you turn it on until it loads your installed operating system from disk. Information from the BIOS is transferred to the installed operating system to provide it with information on the configuration and status of the hardware. Bit An abbreviation for binary digit. A single piece of information which is either a one (1) or a zero (0). b/s or bps An abbreviation for bits per second. Used to describe data transfer rates. Boot To start-up a computer and load its operating system from disk, ROM or other storage media into RAM. Bus An electrical circuit which passes data between the CPU and the sub-assemblies inside your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Byte 8 bits of parallel binary information. Cache Memory A block of memory built into the micro-processor which is much faster to access than your system RAM and used in specially structured ways to make your overall data handling time faster. 139 -
CD-ROM Compact disk read only memory. This is a form of digital data storage which is read optically with a laser rather than a magnetic head. A typical CD-ROM can contain about 600MB of data and is not subject to heads crashing into the surface and destroying the data when there is a failure nor to wear from reading. Channel Range of narrow-band frequencies used by the WLAN device to transmit data. IEEE802.11b/g - 11 channels, 22 MHz wide channels. CMOS RAM Complementary metal oxide semiconductor random access memory. This is a technology for manufacturing random access memory which requires very low levels of power to operate. Command An instruction which you give your operating system. Example: run a particular application or format a floppy disk. Configuration The combination of hardware and software that makes up your system and how it is allocated for use. CRT Cathode Ray Tube. A display device which uses a beam of electronic particles striking a luminescent screen. It produces a visual image by varying the position and intensity of the beam. Data The information a system stores and processes. DC Direct current. A voltage or current that does not fluctuate periodically with time. Default Value A pre-programmed value to be used if you fail to set your own. 140 -
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used to automatically acquire parameters required for the communication, such as IP address. The sender of IP address is called a DHCP server, and the receiver is called a DHCP client. DIMM Dual-in-line memory module. Disk A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media. Disk Drive The hardware which spins the disk and has the heads and control circuitry for reading and writing the data. DMA Direct Memory Access. Special circuitry for memory to memory transfers of data which do not require CPU action. DMI Desktop Management Interface. A standard that provides PC management applications with a common method of locally or remotely querying and configuring PC computer systems, hardware and software components, and peripherals. DNS Domain Name System. A function to control the association between the IP address and the name assigned to the computer. If you do not know the IP address but if you know the computer name, you can still communicate to that computer. DOS Disk Operating System (MS-DOS is a Microsoft Disk Operating System). 141 -
Driver A computer program which converts application and operating system commands to external devices into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of device in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. ECP Extended Capability Port. A set of standards for high speed data communication and interconnection between electronic devices. Encryption Key (Network Key) Data encryption key used to encrypt message text and for computing message integrity checks. Data encryption protects data from unauthorized viewing. This device uses the same encryption key to encode and decode the data, and the identical encryption key is required between the sender and receiver. ESD Electro-Static Discharge. The sudden discharge of electricity from a static charge which has built-up slowly. Example:
the shock you get from a doorknob on a dry day or the sparks you get from brushing hair on a dry day. FCC Federal Communications Commission. GB Gigabyte. One billion bytes. Hard drive A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media where the platter is stiff. I/O Input/Output. Data entering and leaving your Tablet PC in electronic form. 142 -
I/O Port The connector and associated circuits for data entering and leaving your computer in electronic form. IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics. A type of control interface for a hard drive that is inside the hard drive unit. IEEE802.11a Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11a devices operate in the 5 GHz lower and middle UNII bands. IEEE802.11b Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 11 Mbps. 802.11b devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. IEEE802.11g Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11g devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. IEEE802.11n Wireless LAN standard using multiple data streams supporting a maximum data rate of 450 Mbps. 802.11n devices operate in both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz UNII bands and are backward compatible with 802.11g and 802.11a. Infrastructure A name of a wireless LAN configuration. This type of communication uses an access point. Another type of communication is called Ad Hoc. IP Address An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. Networks using the TCP/IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the destination. The format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods. Each number can be zero to 255. For example, 1.160.10.240 could be an IP address. 143 -
Within an isolated network, you can assign IP addresses at random as long as each one is unique. However, connecting a private network to the Internet requires using registered IP addresses (called Internet addresses) to avoid duplicates. The four numbers in an IP address are used in different ways to identify a particular network and a host on that network. Three regional Internet registries -- ARIN, RIPE NCC and APNIC -- assign Internet addresses from the following three classes. Class A - supports 16 million hosts on each of 126 networks Class B - supports 65,000 hosts on each of 16,000 networks Class C - supports 254 hosts on each of 2 million networks The number of unassigned Internet addresses is running out, so a new classless scheme called CIDR is gradually replacing the system based on classes A, B, and C and is tied to adoption of IPv6. IRQ Interrupt Request. An acronym for the hardware signal to the CPU that an external event has occurred which needs to be processed. KB Kilobyte. One thousand bytes. LAN Local Area Network. An interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. LCD Liquid Crystal Display. A type of display which makes images by controlling the orientation of crystals in a crystalline liquid. Lithium ion Battery A type of rechargeable battery which has a high power-time life for its size and is not subject to the memory effect as Nickel Cadmium batteries. 144 -
MAC Address Media Access Control Address. A unique physical address of a network card. For Ethernet, the first three bytes are used as the vendor code, controlled and assigned by IEEE. The remaining three bytes are controlled by each vendor
(preventing overlap), therefore, every Ethernet card is given a unique physical address in the world, being assigned with a different address from other cards. For Ethernet, frames are sent and received based on this address. MB Megabyte. One million bytes. Megahertz 1,000,000 cycles per second. Memory A repository for data and applications which is readily accessible to your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs CPU. MHz Megahertz. MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface. A standard communication protocol for exchange of information between computers and sound producers such as synthesizers. Modem A contraction for MOdulator-DEModulator. The equipment which connects a computer or other data terminal to a communication line. Monaural A system using one channel to process sound from all sources. 145 -
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit The maximum data size that can be transferred at a time through the Internet or other networks. You can set a smaller MTU size to obtain successful communication, if you have difficulty transferring data due to the fact that the maximum size is too large. Network key Data that is used for encrypting data in data communication. The personal computer uses the same network key both for data encryption and decryption, therefore, it is necessary to set the same network key as the other side of communication. Network name (SSID: Service Set Identifier ) When a wireless LAN network is configured, grouping is performed to avoid interference or data theft. This grouping is performed with Network name (SSID). NTSC National TV Standards Commission. The standard for TV broadcast and reception for the USA. Open system authentication Null authentication method specified in the 802.11 standard that performs no authentication checks on a wireless client before allowing it to associate. Operating System A group of control programs that convert application commands, including driver programs, into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of microprocessor in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. Partition A block of space on a hard drive which is set aside and made to appear to the operating system as if it were a separate disk, and addressed by the operating system accordingly. 146 -
Peripheral Device A piece of equipment which performs a specific function associated with but not integral to a computer. Examples: a printer, a modem, a CD-ROM. Pitch (keyboard) The distance between the centers of the letter keys of a keyboard. Pixel The smallest element of a display, a dot of color on your display screen. The more pixels per area the clearer your image will appear. POST Power On Self Test. A program which is part of the BIOS which checks the configuration and operating condition of your hardware whenever power is applied to your Tablet PC. Status and error messages may be displayed before the operating system is loaded. If the self test detects failures that are so serious that operation cannot continue, the operating system will not be loaded. PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. A protocol for Ethernet, using a Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), which is used for connection on the phone line. Program Set of coded commands to your computers telling your hardware what to do and how and when to do it. Protocol Procedures and rules use to send and receive data between computers.
- Method of sending and receiving data
- Process used to handle communication errors Conditions required for communication are organized in procedures for correct transfer of information. 147 -
RAM Random Access Memory. A hardware component of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC that holds binary information (both program and data) as long as it has the proper power applied to it. RAM Module A printed circuit card with memory and associated circuitry which allows the user to add additional memory to the computer without special tools. Reset The act of reloading the operating system. A reset erases all information stored in RAM. Resume To proceed after interruption. In your Tablet PC this refers to returning to active operation after having been in one of the suspension states. ROM Read Only Memory. A form of memory in which information is stored by physically altering the material. Data stored in this way cannot be changed by your Tablet PC and does not require power to maintain it. SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory. Shared key authentication 802.11 network authentication method in which the AP sends the client device a challenge text packet that the client must then encrypt with the correct WEP key and return to the AP. If the client has the wrong key or no key, authentication will fail and the client will not be allowed to associate with the AP. Shared key authentication is not considered secure, because a hacker who detects both the clear-text challenge and the same challenge encrypted with a WEP key can decipher the key. 148 -
SSID Service Set Identifier, a 32-character unique identifier attached to the header of packets sent over a WLAN that acts as a password when a mobile device tries to connect to the BSS. The SSID differentiates one WLAN from another, so all access points and all devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. A device will not be permitted to join the BSS unless it can provide the unique SSID. Because the SSID is broadcast in plain text, it does not supply any security to the network. Status Indicator A display which reports the condition of some portion of your hardware. On your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC this is an LCD screen just above the keyboard. Stereo (audio) A system using two channels to process sound from two different sources. Subnet mask TCP-IP network is controlled by being divided into multiple smaller networks (subnets). IP address consists of the subnet address and the address of each computer. Subnet mask defines how many bits of IP address comprise the subnet address. The same value shall be set among computers communicating with each other. SVGA Super VGA. S-Video Super Video. A component video system for driving a TV or computer monitor. System Clock An oscillator of fixed precise frequency which synchronizes the operation of the system and is counted to provide time of day and date. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A standard Internet protocol that is most widely used. 149 -
TFT Thin Film Transistor A technology for flat display panels which uses a thin film matrix of transistors to control each pixel of the display screen individually. UL Underwriters Laboratories An independent organization that tests and certifies the electrical safety of devices. USB Universal Serial Bus. Standard that allows you to simultaneously connect up to 127 USB devices such as game pads, pointing devices, printers, and keyboards to your computer. VRAM Video Random Access Memory. A memory dedicated to video display data and control. WFM Wired for Management is Intels broad-based initiative to reduce the total cost of ownership (TCO) of business computing without sacrificing power and flexibility. Wi-Fi Compatible Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity). Identifies that a product has passed an interoperability test supplied by WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance), which guarantees the interoperability of wireless IEEE 802.11 LAN products. WLAN Wireless Local Area Network. A wireless interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. 150 -
Regulatory Information Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Fujitsu could void this users authority to operate the equipment. FCC NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limit for class B digital devices, pursuant to parts 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit than the receiver. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device. DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. 151 - Regulatory Information Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide FCC Regulatory Information Please note the following regulatory information related to the optional wireless LAN device. Regulatory Notes and Statements Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wireless LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however, are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as:
On board an airplane, or In an explosive environment, or In situations where the interference risk to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports, hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private buildings), obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the equipment. Regulatory Information/Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failure to comply with these guidelines. 152 This device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN: For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of this device must be integral. Federal Communications Commission statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. FCC Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the one the receiver is connected to. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The wireless LAN radio device has been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. 153 -
Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network Export restrictions This product or software contains encryption code which may not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003 B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation. Modifications not expressly authorized by Fujitsu America, Inc. may invalidate the user's right to operate this equipment. Canadian Notice The device for the 5150 - 5250 MHz band is only for indoor usage to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. The maximum antenna gain of 6 dBi permitted (for devices in the 5250 - 5350 MHz, 5470 - 5725 MHz and 5725 - 5825 MHz bands) to comply with the e.i.r.p. limit as stated in A9.2 of RSS210. In addition, users are cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 -
5350 MHz and 5650 - 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 154 -
Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to properly set up and configure the optional integrated Wireless LAN Mini-PCI device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure its correct operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing one of the following optional devices:
Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Characteristics of the WLAN Device The WLAN device is a Mini-PCI card attached to the main board of the mobile computer. The WLAN device operates in license-free RF bands, eliminating the need to procure an FCC operating license. The WLAN operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band and the lower, middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands. The WLAN devices are capable of four operating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and The WLAN devices are Wi-Fi certified and operate (as applicable) at a the maximum data rate of 450 Mbps
(theoretical) in IEEE802.11n mode; 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode; and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode. The WLAN devices support the following encryption methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption. The Wireless LAN devices are compliant with the following standards: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0, and IEEE802.11n CCX4.0. 155 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device Ad Hoc Mode
"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authentication, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Figure 54. Ad Hoc Mode Network 156 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network architecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infrastructure mode because they require access to the WLAN in order to access services, devices, and computers (e.g., file servers, printers, databases). Internet ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar Wired LAN Access Point*
Wireless LAN
*An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used. Figure 55. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network 157 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN How to Handle This Device The WLAN device is an optional device that may come pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The operating system that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device. The Wireless LAN devices support IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n. The WLAN devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands. Microwave ovens may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices since they operate in the same 2.4 GHz frequency range as IEEE802.11b/g/n devices. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band. Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4 GHz range may interfere with operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g/n modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and many frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure proper operation of the WLAN device. Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device Disconnecting the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). The WLAN device can be deactivated by using the Wireless On/Off Switch, and it can be disconnected in Windows using the WLAN icon in the system tray (Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected.). 158 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and efficiently by toggling the Wireless Device On/Off Switch to the Off position. The switch has no effect on non-Wireless LAN models. Wireless Device Switch Figure 56. Wireless Device On/Off Switch Location Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected. 1 Right-click the WLAN icon in the taskbar at the bottom right of your screen. 2 Choose Disconnect from a network. Activating the WLAN Device Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished using the same methods as the deactivation process Using the Wireless On/Off Switch In Windows, by right-clicking the WLAN icon then clicking Connect to a network 159 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Configuring the Wireless LAN The WLAN device can be configured to establish wireless network connectivity using the software that is built into the operating system. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this software. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network administrator for these parameters:
1 From the Modern Start screen, press [Windows]+[X], then select Control Panel from the menu. 2 If the Control Panel is not in Classic View, select Classic View from the left panel. Double-click the Network and Sharing Center icon. 3 Select "Setup a new connection or network". 4 Depending upon what type of connection you would like to make, make a selection. For an infrastructure network, select Manually connect to a wireless network. 5 Enter the required information. It may be necessary to consult with your network administrator for some of the information. 6 In the event you require assistance, go to the Network and Sharing Center window (Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center), and type in relevant keywords in the Search box. Connecting to a Network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by performing the following steps:
1 Click on the WLAN icon in the system tray. 2 Select Connect to a network. 3 Select a network from the list that appears, and click the [Connect] button. Connection to the network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by clicking on the Wireless Network icon in the system tray:
160 - Configuring the Wireless LAN Troubleshooting the WLAN Troubleshooting Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. If you are unfamiliar with the steps required, consult your System Administrator or go to [Start] ->
Help and Support -> Networking and the Web Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys (WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP or WPA/WPA2 Pre-
Shared key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better transmission. Check if the wireless switch is turned On. Go to Start -> Control Panel, and double-click on Windows Mobility Center. If the wireless network is off, click the [Turn wireless on] button. Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. Weak received signal strength and/or link quality The WLAN device has been deactivated or disabled The computer to be connected is turned off 161 - Troubleshooting the WLAN Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection
(continued) RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks Wireless network authentication has failed Incorrectly configured network settings The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a misconfigured LEAP username/password, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. Recheck the configuration of your network settings. Incorrect IP address configuration This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 162 - Troubleshooting the WLAN WLAN Specifications Specifications Item Specification Type of network The integrated Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 device conforms to IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g, and 802.11n, Wi-Fi based*. Transfer rate Active frequency Typical operating distances**
Number of channels
(Automatic switching) 54 Mbps maximum data rate (IEEE802.11n to be determined) 802.11n: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz 802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz 802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz 802.11a: 40 ft. (12 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 6 Mbps 802.11b: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 11 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11g: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11n: Estimated double the operating distance of 802.11g and 802.11a in their respective frequencies. 802.11a: 8 independent channels 802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels 802.11n: 2.4 GHz - 3 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is not used; 2 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is used. 5 GHz - 12 non-overlapping UNII channels with or without Channel Bonding Security Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES***, CKIP, WPA 1.0 and WPA 2.0 compliant Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection) 10 units or less ****
* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.
** The communication ranges shown above will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or interference from external RF sources.
*** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/ 104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.
**** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 163 - WLAN Specifications Using the Bluetooth Device The Integrated Bluetooth module is a wireless device installed in selected Fujitsu mobile computers. What is Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is designed as a short-range wireless link between mobile devices, such as laptop computers, phones, printers, and cameras. Bluetooth technology is used to create Personal Area Networks (PANs) between devices in short-range of each other. CLICKING THE [FN] + F5] KEYS WILL TOGGLE BOTH THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS LAN AND BLUETOOTH DEVICES ON AND OFF AT THE SAME TIME. TO ENABLE OR DISABLE EITHER ONE OF THE DEVICES INDIVIDUALLY, PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS:
PRESS THE [FN] AND [F5] KEYS AT THE SAME TIME. CHECK THE STATUS INDICATOR PANEL TO VERIFY THAT THE WIRELESS DEVICE IS ON. GO TO THE MODERN START SCREEN -> CHARMS -> SETTINGS -> CHANGE PC SETTINGS -> WIRELESS. UNDER WIRELESS -> WIRELESS DEVICES CLICK ON "BLUETOOTH" SWITCH TO TURN IT ON. Where to Find Information About Bluetooth For additional information about Bluetooth Technology, visit the Bluetooth Web site at: www.bluetooth.com. 164 - Using the Bluetooth Device FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The Bluetooth antenna is exempt from minimum distance criteria due to its low power. The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Notice To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Warranty Users are not authorized to modify this product. Any modifications invalidate the warranty. This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without signed written permission from Fujitsu. Unauthorized modification will void the equipment authorization from the FCC and Industry Canada and the warranty. 165 - Using the Bluetooth Device Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Your system has a fingerprint sensor device at the bottom left below the display screen. Fingerprint Sensor Device With a fingerprint sensor, you can avoid having to enter a username and password every time you want to:
Figure 57. Fingerprint sensor Log onto Windows Cancel a password-protected screen saver Log into homepages that require a username and password After you have enrolled - or registered - your fingerprint, you can simply swipe your fingertip over the sensor for the system recognize you. 166 The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass enables you to use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-
line passwords. OmniPass requires users to authenticate themselves using the fingerprint sensor before granting access to the Windows desktop. This device results in a secure authentication system for restricting access to your computer, applications, web sites, and other password-protected resources. OmniPass presents a convenient graphical user interface, through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. CERTAIN MODELS SUPPORT PRE-BOOT AUTHENTICATION OR PBA. PBA ALLOWS THE USER TO LOG IN PRIOR TO WINDOWS' OWN AUTHENTICATION MECHANISM. A PBA ENVIRONMENT SERVES AS AN EXTENSION OF THE BIOS OR BOOT FIRMWARE AND ALLOWS FOR A MORE SECURE ENVIRONMENT EXTERNAL TO THE OPERATING SYSTEM. Getting Started This section guides you through the preparation of your system for the OmniPass fingerprint recognition application. You will be led through the OmniPass installation process. You will also be led through the procedure of enrolling your first user into OmniPass. Installing OmniPass If OmniPass has already been installed on your system, skip this section and go directly to User Enrollment on page 169. You can determine whether OmniPass has already been installed by checking to see if the following are present:
The gold key-shaped OmniPass icon in the system tray at the bottom right of the screen. The Softex program group in the Programs group of the Start menu System Requirements The OmniPass application requires space on your hard drive; it also requires specific Operating Systems (OSs). The minimum requirements are as follows:
167 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Windows XP Professional operating system or later At least 35 MB available hard disk space Installing the OmniPass Application If OmniPass is already installed on your system, go to User Enrollment on page 169. Otherwise continue with this section on software installation. INSTALLATION OF THE APPLICATION REQUIRES THAT YOU HAVE AN EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ATTACHED TO YOUR SYSTEM. FOR INSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER INSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS INSTALLATION. To install OmniPass on your system you must:
1 Omnipass is included in the Fujitsu Bonus Apps. To install Omnipass, start the Fujitsu Bonus Apps application from the desktop icon, select Softex Omnipass and click [Install]. 2 Once OmniPass has completed installation you will be prompted to restart you system. Once your system has rebooted you will be able to use OmniPass. If you choose not to restart immediately after installation, OmniPass will not be available for use until the next reboot. 3 The installation program automatically places an icon (Softex OmniPass) in the Windows Control Panel as well as a golden key shaped icon in the taskbar. Verifying Information about OmniPass After you have completed installing OmniPass and restarted your system, you may wish to check the version of OmniPass on your system. To check the version information of OmniPass:
1 From the Windows Desktop, double-click the key-shaped OmniPass icon in the taskbar (usually located in the lower right corner of the screen), or, Windows 7: Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Select Control Panel. 168 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Windows 8: From the Modern Start screen, right-click and select "All Apps", then select Control Panel. Double-click Softex OmniPass in the Control Panel, and the OmniPass Control Center will appear. If it does not appear, then the program is not properly installed, or, Click the Start button, select Programs, and from the submenu select the Softex program group, from that submenu click OmniPass Control Center. 2 Version information is listed on the left side of OmniPass Control center window. Uninstalling OmniPass FOR UNINSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER UNINSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS UNINSTALLATION. To remove the OmniPass application from your system:
1 Windows 7: Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Select Control Panel. Windows 8: From the Modern Start screen, right-click and select "All Apps", then select Control Panel. 2 Double-click Add/Remove Programs (In Windows 7: Programs and Features). 3 Select OmniPass, and then click Change/Remove. 4 Follow the directions to uninstall the OmniPass application. 5 Once OmniPass has finished uninstalling, reboot your system when prompted. User Enrollment Before you can use any OmniPass features you must first enroll a user into OmniPass. Master Password Concept Computer resources are often protected with passwords. Whether you are logging into your computer, accessing email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing network resources, you often have to supply credentials to gain access. This can result in dozens of sets of credentials that you have to remember. 169 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device During user enrollment a "master password is created for the enrolled user. This master password replaces all other passwords for sites you register with OmniPass. Example: A user, John, installs OmniPass on his system (his home computer) and enrolls an OmniPass user with username John_01 and password freq14. He then goes to his webmail site to log onto his account. He inputs his webmail credentials as usual (username John_02 and password lifebook), but instead of clicking [Submit], he directs OmniPass to Remember Password. Now whenever he returns to that site, OmniPass will prompt him to supply access credentials. John enters his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14) in the OmniPass authentication prompt, and he is allowed into his webmail account. He can do this with as many web sites or password protected resources he likes, and he will gain access to all those sites with his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14). This is assuming he is accessing those sites with the system onto which he enrolled his OmniPass user. OmniPass does not actually change the credentials of the password protected resource. If John goes to another computer without he OmniPass account to access his webmail, he would need to enter his original webmail credentials (John_02 and lifebook) to gain access. If he attempts his OmniPass user credentials on a system other than a system hes enrolled on, he will not gain access. THE ENROLLMENT PROCEDURE ASSUMES YOU HAVE NO HARDWARE AUTHENTICATION DEVICES OR ALTERNATE STORAGE LOCATIONS THAT YOU WISH TO INTEGRATE WITH OMNIPASS. IF YOU DESIRE SUCH FUNCTIONALITY, CONSULT THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THIS DOCUMENT. Basic Enrollment The Enrollment Wizard will guide you through the process of enrolling a user. Unless you specified otherwise, after OmniPass installation the Enrollment Wizard will launch on Windows login. If you do not see the Enrollment Wizard, you can bring it up by clicking Start on the Windows taskbar; select Programs; select Softex; click Enroll a new user. 1 Click Enroll to proceed to username and password verification. By default, the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard enters the credentials of the currently logged in Windows user. 170 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device 2 Enter the password you use to log in to Windows. This becomes the master password for this OmniPass user. In most cases, the Domain: value will be your Windows computer name. In a corporate environment, or when accessing corporate resources, Domain: may not be your Windows computer name. Click [Next] to continue. 3 In this step OmniPass captures your fingerprint. See Enrolling a Fingerprint on page 171 for more information. 4 You will then see a Congratulations screen indicating your completion of user enrollment. 5 Click [OK] to exit the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. You will be asked if youd like to log in to OmniPass with your newly enrolled user; click [Yes]. Enrolling a Fingerprint Enrolling a fingerprint increases the security of your system and streamlines the authentication procedure. You enroll fingerprints in the OmniPass Control Center. With an OmniPass user logged in, click the Start button >
Select Programs > Select Softex > Select Enroll a new user. 1 During initial user enrollment, you will be prompted to select the finger you wish to enroll. Fingers that have already been enrolled will be marked by a green check. The finger you select to enroll at this time will be marked by a red arrow. OmniPass will allow you re-enroll a finger. If you choose a finger that has already been enrolled and continue enrollment, OmniPass will enroll the fingerprint, overwriting the old fingerprint. Select a finger to enroll and click [Next]. 2 It is now time for OmniPass to capture your selected fingerprint. It may take a several capture attempts before OmniPass acquires your fingerprint. Should OmniPass fail to acquire your fingerprint, or if the capture screen times out, click [Back] to restart the fingerprint enrollment process. Your system has a swipe fingerprint sensor. A swipe sensor is small and resembles a skinny elongated rectangle. To capture a fingerprint, gently swipe or pull your fingertip over the sensor (starting at the second knuckle) towards yourself. Swiping too fast or too slow will result in a failed capture. The Choose Finger screen has a
[Practice] button; click it to practice capturing your fingerprint. When you are comfortable with how your fingerprint is captured, proceed to enroll a finger. 171 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device 3 Once OmniPass has successfully acquired the fingerprint, the Verify Fingerprint screen will automatically appear. To verify your enrolled fingerprint, place your fingertip on the sensor and hold it there as if you were having a fingerprint captured. Successful fingerprint verification will show a green fingerprint in the capture window and the text Verification Successful under the capture window. 4 After you finish enrolling and verifying your fingerprints, you have the option to Enable PBA with enrolled finger. If you enable this option, then you must choose two fingers to save in PBA. If you have enrolled successfully, the Finger Enrollment Status in PBA screen will state Finger saved in PBA successfully. IF YOU ENABLE PBA ON YOUR SYSTEM, YOU MUST SET THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD AND PASSWORD ON BOOT SETTINGS. SEE SETTING PASSWORDS ON PAGE 53 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. Using OmniPass You are ready to begin using OmniPass. Used regularly, OmniPass will streamline your authentications. Password Replacement You will often use the password replacement function. When you go to a restricted access website (e.g., your bank, your web-based email, online auction or payment sites), you are always prompted to enter your login credentials. OmniPass can detect these prompts and you can teach OmniPass your login credentials. The next time you go to that website, you can authenticate with your fingerprint to gain access. OmniPass Authentication Toolbar After installing OmniPass and restarting, you will notice a dialog you have not seen before at Windows Logon. This is the OmniPass Authentication Toolbar, and it is displayed whenever the OmniPass authentication system is invoked. The OmniPass authentication system may be invoked frequently: during Windows Logon, during OmniPass Logon, when unlocking your workstation, when resuming from hibernate, when unlocking a password-enabled screensaver, during password replacement for remembered site or application logins, and more. When you see this toolbar, OmniPass is prompting you to authenticate. 172 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device The Logon Authentication window indicates what OmniPass-restricted function you are attempting. The icons in the lower left (fingerprint and key) show what authentication methods are available to you. Selected authentication methods are highlighted while unselected methods are not. When you click the icon for an unselected authentication method, the authentication prompt associated with that method is displayed. When prompted to authenticate, you must supply the appropriate credentials: an enrolled finger for the fingerprint capture window or your master password for the master password prompt (the key icon). Remembering a Password OmniPass can remember any application, GUI, or password protected resource that has a password prompt. Using the following procedure, you can store a set of credentials into OmniPass. These credentials will then be linked to your master password or fingerprint. Go to a site that requires a login (username and password), but do not log in yet. At the site login prompt, enter your username and password in the prompted fields, but do not enter the site (do not hit [Enter], [Submit], [OK], or Login). Right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and select Remember Password from the submenu. The Windows arrow cursor will change to a golden key OmniPass cursor. Click the OmniPass cursor in the login prompt area, but dont click [Login] or [Submit]. Associating a Friendly Name After clicking the OmniPass key cursor near the login prompt, OmniPass will prompt you to enter a friendly name for this site. You should enter something that reminds you of the website, the company, or the service you are logging into. In its secure database, OmniPass associates this friendly name with this website. Additional Settings for Remembering a Site When OmniPass prompts you to enter a friendly name you have the opportunity to set how OmniPass authenticates you to this site. There are three settings for how OmniPass handles a remembered site. The default setting is Automatically click the OK or Submit button for this password protected site once the user is authenticated. With this setting, each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass, you will automatically be logged into the site. 173 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Less secure is the option to Automatically enter this password protected site when it is activated. Do not prompt for authentication. Check the upper box to get this setting, and each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will log you into the site without prompting you to authenticate. THIS SETTING IS MORE CONVENIENT IN THAT WHENEVER YOU GO TO A SITE REMEMBERED WITH THIS SETTING, YOU WILL BYPASS ANY AUTHENTICATION PROCEDURE AND GAIN INSTANT ACCESS TO THE SITE. BUT SHOULD YOU LEAVE YOUR SYSTEM UNATTENDED WITH YOUR OMNIPASS USER LOGGED IN, ANYONE USING YOUR SYSTEM CAN BROWSE TO YOUR PASSWORD PROTECTED SITES AND GAIN AUTOMATIC ACCESS. If you uncheck both boxes in Settings for this Password Site, OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass your credentials will be filled in to the site login prompt, but you will have to click the website [OK], [Submit], or [Login] button to gain access to the site. Click Finish to complete the remember password procedure. The site location, the credentials to access the site, and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are now stored in the OmniPass secure database. The OmniPass authentication settings (Settings for this Password Site) can always be changed in Vault Management. Logging in to a Remembered Site Whether or not OmniPass prompts you to authenticate when you return to a remembered site is determined by Settings for this Password Site and can be changed in Vault Management. The following cases are applicable to using OmniPass to login to: Windows, remembered web sites, and all other password protected resources. With Master Password Once you return to a site you have remembered with OmniPass, you may be presented with a master password prompt. Enter your master password and you will be allowed into the site. Logging into Windows with a Fingerprint Device When logging into Windows with a fingerprint device, the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to the Windows Login screen. Place your enrolled fingertip on the sensor to authenticate. You will be simultaneously logged into Windows and OmniPass. The capture window will also appear if you have used Ctrl-Alt-Del to lock a system, and the fingerprint device can be used to log back in as stated above. 174 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device IF A MACHINE IS LOCKED AND OMNIPASS DETECTS A DIFFERENT USER LOGGING BACK IN WITH A FINGERPRINT, THE FIRST USER WILL BE LOGGED OUT AND THE SECOND USER LOGGED IN. Password Management OmniPass provides an interface that lets you manage your passwords. To access this GUI, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management; you will be prompted to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Passwords under Vault Settings. You will see the Manage Passwords interface, with a list of friendly names. You can view credentials stored for any remembered website by highlighting the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and clicking Unmask Values. Should a password be reset, or an account expire, you can remove stored credentials from OmniPass. Highlight the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and click Delete Page. You will be prompted to confirm the password deletion. The two check boxes in Manage Passwords govern whether OmniPass prompts you to authenticate or directly logs you into the remembered site. OmniPass will overwrite an old set of credentials for a website if you attempt to use Remember Password on an already remembered site. The exception to the above rule is when resetting the Windows password. If your password is reset in Windows, the next time you login to Windows, OmniPass will detect the password change and prompt you to Update or Reconfirm the password with OmniPass. Enter your new Windows password in the prompt and click OK. Your OmniPass "master password" will still be your Windows password. OmniPass User Identities Identities allow OmniPass users to have multiple accounts to the same site (e.g., bob@biblomail.com and boballen@biblomail.com). If OmniPass did not provide you identities, you would be limited to remembering one account per site. 175 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device To create and manage identities, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management;
OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Identities under Vault Settings. You can only manage the identities of the currently logged in OmniPass user To add a new identity, click New Identity or double-click Click here to add a new identity. Name the new identity and click [OK], then click [Apply]. You can now switch to the new identity and start remembering passwords. To delete an identity, highlight the identity you want to delete and click [Delete Identity], then [Apply]. WHEN YOU DELETE AN IDENTITY, ALL OF ITS ASSOCIATED REMEMBERED SITES AND PASSWORD PROTECTED DIALOGS ARE LOST. To set the default identity, highlight the identity you want as default and click [Set as Default]; click [Apply] to ensure the settings are saved. If you log in to OmniPass with a fingerprint device, you will automatically be logged in to the default identity for that OmniPass user. You can choose the identity with which you are logging in if you login using
"master password". Choosing User Identity during Login To choose your identity during login, type your username in the User Name: field. Press [Tab] and see that the Domain: field self-populates. Click the Password: field to bring the cursor to it, and you will see the pull-down menu in the Identity: field. Select the identity to login as, then click OK. Switch User Identity To switch identities at any time, right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and click Switch User Identity from the submenu. The Switch Identity dialog will appear. Select the desired identity and then click OK. Identities and Password Management On the Manage Passwords interface of the Vault Management tab of the OmniPass Control Center, there is a pull-
down selection box labeled, Identity. This field lets you choose which identity you are managing passwords for. When you select an identity here, only those password protected dialogs that are associated with that identity are shown. You can perform all the functions explained in Password Management on page 175. 176 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Configuring OmniPass This section gives an overview of both the Export/Import function and the OmniPass Control Center. Exporting and Importing Users YOU CANNOT IMPORT A USER INTO OMNIPASS IF THERE ALREADY IS A USER WITH THE SAME NAME ENROLLED IN OMNIPASS. Using OmniPass Control Center, you can export and import users in and out of OmniPass. The export process backs up all remembered sites, credentials, and enrolled fingerprints for an OmniPass user. All OmniPass data for a user is backed up to a single encrypted database file. During the import process, the Windows login of the exported user is required. If the proper credentials cannot be supplied, the user profile will not be imported. YOU SHOULD PERIODICALLY EXPORT YOUR USER PROFILE AND STORE IT IN A SAFE PLACE. IF ANYTHING HAPPENS TO YOUR SYSTEM, YOU CAN IMPORT YOUR OMNIPASS PROFILE TO A NEW SYSTEM AND HAVE ALL YOUR REMEMBERED SETTINGS AND FINGERPRINTS INSTANTLY. YOU DON'T FORGET THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS WHEN EXPORTING. WHEN YOU EXAMINE THE IMPORTATION, YOU ARE PROMPTED FOR AUTHENTICATION. THE CREDENTIALS THAT WILL ALLOW A USER PROFILE TO BE IMPORTED ARE THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS OF THE EXPORTED USER. THEY ARE THE CREDENTIALS THAT HAD TO BE SUBMITTED WHEN THE USER PROFILE WAS EXPORTED. YOU WILL NEED USER NAME, PASSWORD, AND DOMAIN. Exporting an OmniPass User Profile To export a user, open OmniPass Control Center, and click Run User Management Wizard. Click Backup a user's OmniPass profile. OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Upon successfully authentication, you must name the OmniPass user profile and decide where to save it. An .opi file is generated, and you should store a copy of it in a safe place. This .opi file contains all your user specific OmniPass data, and it is both encrypted and password protected. This user profile does NOT contain any of your encrypted data files. 177 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Importing an OmniPass User Profile To import an OmniPass user open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Run User Management Wizard. Click Restore a user's OmniPass profile. OmniPass will then prompt you to browse for the file you had previously exported
(.opi file). When you select the .opi file for importation, OmniPass will prompt you for authentication. The credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported are the Windows login credentials of the exported user. They are the credentials that had to be submitted when the user profile was exported. You will need User Name, Password, and Domain. If you dont remember the value for Domain, in a PC or SOHO environment Domain should be your computer name. OmniPass will notify you if the user was successfully imported. Things to Know Regarding Import/Export Assume you export a local Windows User profile from OmniPass. You want to import that profile to another machine that has OmniPass. Before you can import the profile, a Windows user with the same login credentials must be created on the machine importing the profile. Example: I have a Windows user with the username Tom and the password Sunshine on my system. I have enrolled Tom into OmniPass and remembered passwords. I want to take all my passwords to new system. I export Toms OmniPass user profile. I go to my new system and using the Control Panel I create a user with the username "Tom" and the password "Sunshine". I can now successfully import the OmniPass user data to the new system. If you export an OmniPass-only user, you can import that user to any computer running OmniPass, provided that a user with that name is not already enrolled in OmniPass. If you attempt to import a user profile who has the same name as a user already enrolled in OmniPass, the OmniPass import function will fail. OmniPass Control Center The Omnipass Control Center allows you to perform a variety of Omnipass "housekeeping" tasks. For details about the features offered by the Control Center:
1 Go to Start > All Programs > Softex > Omnipass Control Center. 2 When the Omnipass Control Center opens, click the Help link on the left side of the Control Center window. 178 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Troubleshooting You cannot use OmniPass to create Windows users. You must first create the Windows user, and you will need administrative privileges to do that. Once the Windows user is created, you can add that user to OmniPass using the same username and password Cannot add Windows users to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a Windows user to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. You can do this by going to Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Network Access: Sharing and Security Model for Local Accounts. The correct setting should be Classic - Local Users Authenticate as Themselves. Cannot add a User with a Blank Password to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a user with a blank password to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. First attempt the procedure explained in the Cannot add Windows user to OmniPass section. If the difficulties persist, then try the following procedure. Click Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Accounts: Limit local account use of blank passwords to console login only. This setting should be set to Disabled. Dialog appears after OmniPass authentication during Windows Logon After installing OmniPass on your system, you can choose to logon to Windows using OmniPass. You authenticate with OmniPass (via master password, or an enrolled security device) and OmniPass logs you into Windows. You may, during this OmniPass authentication, see a Login Error dialog box. This dialog box occurs when OmniPass was unable to log you into Windows with the credentials supplied
(username and password). This could happen for any of the following reasons:
Your Windows password has changed Your Windows account has been disabled 179 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device If you are having difficulties due to the first reason, you will need to update OmniPass with your changed Windows account password. Click Update Password and you will be prompted with a dialog to reconfirm your password. Enter the new password to your Windows user account and click OK. If the error persists, then it is unlikely the problem is due to your Windows user account password changing. 180 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Appendix C: Using Intel Wireless Display Using the Wireless Display technology Intel Wireless Display (WiDi) is a new technology that is available as an option on selected Fujitsu LIFEBOOK computers. If you have Intel WiDi on your system, please read these instructions and information regarding its use. Intel WiDi lets users enjoy and share PC content from an Intel Core processor-based notebook with their big screen TV. With Intel WiDi, you can use your big screen TV to view data and applications from your hard drive, home network, or the Internet. Its no longer necessary for friends and families to crowd around the PC to enjoy content stored or accessed there. As its name implies, Intel WiDi is a wireless technology. Note, however, that it requires a third-party display adapter in order to be used. The display adapter is attached to the TV via HDMI (preferred) or composite A/V cables. FIRST GENERATION DISPLAY ADAPTERS ARE AVAILABLE FROM ELECTRONICS RETAILERS. ANY DISPLAY ADAPTER THAT IS COMPATIBLE WITH INTEL WIRELESS DISPLAY CAN BE USED WITH THIS TECHNOLOGY. IF YOUR TELEVISION HAS HDMI PORTS, THAT IS THE PREFERRED METHOD OF CONNECTION AS OPPOSED TO COMPOSITE CABLE CONNECTION. 181 IF YOU PURCHASED A SYSTEM WITH AN INTEL WIRELESS LAN AND OPTIONAL INTEL WIDI TECHNOLOGY, THE WIDI APPLICATION MAY OR MAY NOT BE PRE-INSTALLED (DEPENDING UPOON YOUR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION). SYSTEMS WITH INTEL WIDI PRE-INSTALLED WILL HAVE A WIDI ICON LOCATED ON THEIR DESKTOP. IF THE ICON IS NOT PRESENT, INTEL WIDI CAN BE DOWNLOADED FROM THE FUJITSU SUPPORT WEBSITE. THE INTEL WIDI TECHNOLOGY WILL ONLY WORK IN COMBINATION WITH AN INTEL WIRELESS LAN. ONLY WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER CAN BE USED AS THE MEIA PLAYER FOR WIDI 3.0. BEFORE USING INTEL WIDI, BE SURE THAT THE SYSTEMS WIRELESS DEVICE SWITCH IS TURNED ON. NOTE THAT SECURE CONTENTS ARE NOT SUPPORTED BY INTEL WIDI 3.0. CONTENT REQUIRING OUTPUT PROTECTION SUCH AS BLU-RAY AND DVD MOVIE PLAYBACK IS NOT SUPPORTED BY WIDI. THERE MAY BE A SLIGHT TIME LAG WHEN USING WIDI WHEN YOU MOVE THE MOUSE OR TYPE IN CHARACTERS. THE FIRST TIME YOU USE WIDI, THE DEFAULT DISPLAY RESOLUTION IS 1280X720. IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO CHANGE THE RESOLUTION, GO TO THE CONTROL PANEL -> DISPLAY PROPERTIES UNDER THE SETTINGS TAB. ONCE YOU HAVE SET THE RESOLUTION, IT WILL BECOME THE DEFAULT UNLESS YOU CHANGE IT AGAIN. Starting the WiDi application To launch Intel Wireless Display, perform the following steps:
1 Verify that you have a display adapter connected to the television on which you want to use WiDi and turn on the television. 2 If you havent yet turned on the wireless device switch on your Tablet PC, do so now. 3 Click on the WiDi icon on your desktop or the Start menu shortcut. 4 The PC content is displayed on the big screen TV. After the initial set-up between the laptop and a compatible display adapter, you can set the adapter as the default to auto-connect. In the future, simply opening the application will automatically connect the two. For detailed information about using and troubleshooting the WiDi technology, click on the WiDi icon then click the
[Help] button in the upper right-hand corner to open the Wireless Display Help file. 182 - Using the Wireless Display technology Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network Index A About This Guide 1, 8 AC adapter 58 plug adapters 126 Active Digitizer 39 Air Vents 23 Anti-theft lock slot 21 Auto/Airline Adapter 58, 59 B Battery 70 care 126 cold-swapping 73 conserving power 65 dead 95 faulty 95 hot-swapping 73 increasing life 127 level indicator 25 level indicators 25 lithium ion battery 70 low 72 problems 95 recharging 71 replacing 73 shorted 72 Standby mode 72 Battery Latches 23 BIOS 62 Bluetooth 164 Built-in Speakers 91 Button Icons 50 C Capacitive Touchscreen 43 CapsLock 26 Cold-swapping 48 Contact Information 9 Controls and Connectors 12 Conventions Used in the Guide 8 Cursor Keys 34 D DC Output Cable 58 DC Power Jack 58 Device Ports 80 DIMM 77 Display Panel 15, 27 brightness 30 opening 27 problems 97 Docking Port 80 Double-Clicking 37 Dragging 37, 38 Dual Built-in Microphones 17 183 H Hard Disk Drive access indicator 26 problems 92 HDMI Port 17 Headphone Jack 12, 18, 82 Hibernation Feature 67 I IEEE 1394 Port 19, 82, 83 Internal LAN Jack 80 K Keyboard 16, 33 cursor keys 34 function keys 34 numeric keypad 33 problems 92 windows keys 34 L LifeBook Security Panel 15, 49 operating 55 passwords 53 setting up 53 uninstalling 56 Lithium ion Battery Bay 23 Local Area Network (LAN) 13 E Error Messages 99 External Video Port 13, 22, 83 F Fingerprint Sensor Device 17, 166 enrolling a fingerprint 171 getting started 167 installing OmniPass 167 logging into a remembered site 174 OmniPass authentication toolbar 172 password replacement 172 remembering a password 173 uninstalling OmniPass 169 user enrollment 169 using OmniPass 172 Fujitsu Contact Information 9 Function Key F10 35 F3 35 F4 35 F6 35 F7 35 F8 35, 46 F9 35, 46 FN 35 G Gestures 43 Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack 21 Glossary 138 184 M Media Player 128 Memory capacity 79 checking capacity 79 compartment 22, 77 installing 77 problems 93 removing 79 upgrade module 77 Microphone Jack 12, 19, 82 Modular Bay 47 cold-swapping 48 devices 47 installing 47 removing 47 Modular Devices 47 installing 47 removing 47 Mouse problems 92 MS/SD Card installing 76 N NumLk 26 P Pen tether 45 Pen Tether Attachment Point 19 Pointing Device 36 Port Replicator 85 attaching 87 back panel components 85 connector 23 185 detaching 87 problems 92 Post-logon button functions 51 Power AC adapter 58 Auto/Airline adapter 58 failure 94 indicator 24 management 65 off 68 on 60 problems 96 sources 58 Power On Self Test 61, 99 Power/Suspend/Resume button 60, 65 Power/Suspend/Resume Slide 15 Pre-Installed Software 135 Adobe Acrobat Reader 136 Google Toolbar 136, 137 manuals 136 Q Quick Point Pointing Device 36 R Registration 64 Regulatory Information 151 Restarting 67 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 100, 110 Right Button 17 RJ-45 80 S Save-to-Disk 67 ScrLk 26 SD Card Slot 12 SDRAM 22, 77 Secure Digital Cards 75 Security Buttons 49 Security lock slot 13 Sleep Mode 65 Smart Card Slot 12 Specifications 129 Audio 130 Chipset 129 Device Ports 132 Dimensions and Weight 134 Environmental Requirements 134 Keyboard 133 mass storage device options 130 Memory 129 Microprocessor 129 Power 133 Video 130 Status Indicator Panel 15, 24 Suspend/ Resume button 13 T Tablet Configuration 28 Tablet PC Button Functions 52 Touch Screen calibrating 42 clicking 41 dragging 42 Touchpad 44 Touchpad Control Adjustment 38 Troubleshooting 88 U USB 2.0 Ports 12, 18, 21, 81, 93 V Volume control 46 W Warranty 10 Web Cam Access LED 15 Windows keys 34 Wireless Device On/Off Switch 13 Wireless LAN Before Using the Wireless LAN 155 configuring 155 connection to the network 160 deactivating/disconnecting 158 modes 156 Specifications 163 Troubleshooting 161 186 Guide dutilisation Dcouvrez comment utiliser votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu T904 1 -
Informations sur les droits dauteurs et les marques commerciales La socit Fujitsu America, Inc. a fait tous les efforts possibles pour vrifier lexactitude des informations figurant dans ce document et sassurer quil ny manque rien. Cependant, puisque nos produits font continuellement lobjet damliorations, nous ne pouvons garantir lexactitude de tout le contenu de ce document. Nous rfutons toute responsabilit relative des erreurs, des omissions ou des modifications futures. Fujitsu, le logo Fujitsu et LIFEBOOK sont des marques dposes de Fujitsu Limited. Centrino, Intel Core et Centrino sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de la socit Intel ou des ses filiales aux tats-Unis et dans dautres pays. Microsoft et Windows sont des marques dposes de la socit Microsoft aux tats-Unis et/ou dans dautres pays. Atheros est une marque dpose de la socit Atheros Communications, Inc. Bluetooth est une marque de commerce de Bluetooth SIG, Inc., USA. OmniPass est une marque de commerce de la socit Softex, Inc. PowerDVD, PowerDirector, MakeDisc et YouCam sont des marques de commerce de la socit CyberLink. Adobe et Adobe Reader sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de la socit Adobe Systems Incorporated aux tats-Unis et/ou dans dautres pays. Norton et Norton Internet Security sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de la socit Symantec aux tats-Unis et dans dautres pays. Fabriqu sous licence de DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, le symbole DTS et la combinaison nom/symbole DTS sont des marques dposes, alors que DTS Boost est une marque de commerce, appartenant toutes DTS (BVI) Limited ( Hong Kong et en Chine) et DTS, Inc.
(hors de Hong Kong et de la Chine). DTS, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Toutes les autres marques de commerce mentionnes dans le prsent document sont la proprit de leurs dtenteurs respectifs. Copyright 2012 Fujitsu America, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Aucune partie de cette publication ne peut tre copie, reproduite ou traduite sans le consentement pralable de Fujitsu. Aucune partie de cette publication ne peut tre enregistre ou transmise lectroniquement sans le consentement crit de Fujitsu. B5FK-0871-01ENZ0-00 1 AVERTISSEMENT: LA MANIPULATION DU CORDON DE CE PRODUIT VOUS EXPOSE AU PLOMB, UNE SUBSTANCE CHIMIQUE QUI, SELON LTAT DE CALIFORNIE, PEUT CAUSER DES ANOMALIES CONGNITALES OU DAUTRES PROBLMES DE REPRODUCTION. LAVEZ-VOUS LES MAINS APRS CHAQUE MANIPULATION. GUIDE DUTILISATION POUR LA CONNEXION SANS FIL EN LARGE BANDE SI LE PRIPHRIQUE DE RSEAU TENDU SANS FIL (WWAN) OPTIONNEL EST INSTALL SUR VOTRE ORDINATEUR TABLETTE, LE GUIDE DUTILISATION CORRESPONDANT EST DISPONIBLE SUR:
http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/mobile/support_notices LA VERSION COMPLTE DU GUIDE DUTILISATION CONTIENT DES AVERTISSEMENTS ET DES MISES EN GARDE SUR LA SCURIT DES RADIOFRQUENCES LORSQUON UTILISE UN DISPOSITIF DE RSEAU TENDU SANS FIL, POUR LES CONSULTER, CLIQUEZ SUR 3G MINI-CARD GOBI3000 REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION. DCLARATION DE CONFORMIT selon la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC Nom de la partie responsable : Fujitsu America, Inc. Adresse:
Tlphone :
Dclare que le produit:
1250 E. Arques Avenue, Sunnyvale, CA 94085
(408) 746-6000 Configuration du modle de base: PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T904 Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences de la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC. Lutilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible; (2) cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris celles pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement de lappareil. Est conforme aux exigences de la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC. 2 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT IMPORTANTES Pour fonctionner, cet appareil ncessite un adaptateur secteur. Utilisez uniquement un adaptateur pour quipement informatique, homologu UL I.T.E., avec une sortie nominale de 19 V c.c. et un courant de 4,22 A (80 W). Polarit de sortie de ladaptateur secteur :
Lorsque vous utilisez votre PC Tablette, vous devez toujours prendre certaines prcautions de base pour viter les risques dincendie, de choc lectrique et de blessure, notamment:
Le dessous de ce PC Tablette peut chauffer lorsque lappareil est utilis pendant une longue priode. Lorsque vous utilisez ce PC Tablette et quil repose mme la peau (sur les jambes nues), prenez garde ne pas lutiliser pendant trop longtemps ou de manire continue. Nutilisez pas ce produit proximit dun point deau (baignoire, lavabo, vier de cuisine, vier de buanderie) ni dans un sous-sol humide ou ct dune piscine. Utilisez uniquement le cordon dalimentation et les piles recommands dans ce manuel. Ne jetez pas les batteries dans le feu. Elles risquent dexploser. Vrifiez si la rglementation locale comporte des instructions spciales dlimination. ATTENTION: Il y a un risque dexplosion si la batterie nest pas remplace par une batterie approprie. Jetez les batteries uses conformment aux instructions en page suivante. Avis rserv des rparateurs qualifis CONSERVEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS DANGER DEXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE AU LITHIUM (HORLOGE) EST INCORRECTEMENT REMPLACE. LA PILE DOIT TRE REMPLACE UNIQUEMENT PAR UNE PILE IDENTIQUE OU DUN TYPE QUIVALENT RECOMMAND PAR LE FABRICANT. JETEZ LES BATTERIES USES CONFORMMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT. POUR BNFICIER DUNE PROTECTION CONTINUE CONTRE LES RISQUES DINCENDIE, LE FUSIBLE NE DOIT TRE REMPLAC QUE PAR UN AUTRE FUSIBLE DE MME TYPE ET DE MME CAPACIT. 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 | USERS MANUAL 2 OF 2 | Users Manual | 3.65 MiB | April 12 2013 / February 06 2014 |
Recyclage de la batterie Avec le temps, lautonomie des batteries qui alimentent votre ordinateur portable finira par diminuer; cest un phnomne naturel pour toutes les batteries. Lorsque vous remarquerez cela, songez installer une batterie neuve*. Si vous remplacez votre ancienne batterie, il est important que vous la jetiez comme il convient car, dans le cas contraire, les matriaux quelle contient risquent de nuire lenvironnement. Chez Fujitsu, nous portons une attention particulire la protection de lenvironnement et nous collaborons donc avec la Rechargeable Battery Recycle Corporation (RBRC**), une organisation de service publique but non lucratif qui sengage dans la protection de lenvironnement par le recyclage des batteries usages sans cot pour vous. La RBRC dispose de dizaines de milliers de points de collecte aux tats-Unis et au Canada. Pour trouver le lieu de collecte le plus proche de chez vous, visitez www.RBRC.org ou appelez au 1-800-822-8837. Si aucun des lieux proposs par la RBRC ne vous convient, vous pouvez en trouver un en visitant le site de la Consumer Education Initiative (Initiative pour lducation des consommateurs) de lEIA ladresse http://EIAE.org/. Rappelez-vous que la protection de lenvironnement est laffaire de tous, vous devriez donc faire tout votre possible afin dy contribuer, pour la gnration actuelle et les gnrations suivantes.
* Pour commander une nouvelle batterie compatible avec votre ordinateur portable Fujitsu, allez sur www.shopfujitsu.com (tats-Unis) ou www.fujitsu.ca/
products/notebooks (Canada).
** La RBRC est une organisation indpendante dont Fujitsu finance une partie des activits de recyclage ; la RBRC nest en aucune faon affilie Fujitsu. 4 Table des matires Chapitre 1 propos de ce guide. 8 Conventions utilises dans ce guide. 8 Coordonnes pour contacter Fujitsu. 9 Prsentation de votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK Aperu gnral . 11 Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs . 12 Composants suprieurs. 15 Composants sur le ct gauche de lordinateur . 17 Composants sur le ct droit de lordinateur . 19 Composants de la face arrire . 21 Composants sous lordinateur. 22 Tableau de voyants dtat . 24 Voyant dalimentation . 24 Voyants de charge en cours . 25 Voyant de niveau de charge . 25 cran . 27 Ouverture de lcran . 27 Utilisation du systme comme une tablette . 28 Modification de la fonction de pivotement automatique . 29 Rglage de la luminosit de lcran . 30 Activation/Dsactivation du capteur de lumire ambiante. 31 1 Clavier . 33 Utilisation du clavier. 33 Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile. 36 Utilisation du pav Touchpad. 36 cran de numriseur actif. 39 Utilisation de lcran tactile capacitif . 43 Parcourir avec la commande gestuelle . 43 Fixation du cordon du stylet. 45 Rglage du volume. 46 Rglage du volume . 46 Priphriques de baie modulaire . 47 Retrait et installation de priphriques modulaires . 47 Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK . 49 Fonctions des boutons de scurit . 49 Fonctions des boutons de post-identification . 51 Modification des fonctions des boutons PC Tablette. 52 Configuration du tableau de scurit LIFEBOOK . 53 Mots de passe . 53 Utilisation de votre tableau de scurit LIFEBOOK . 55 Mises en garde . 55 Dsinstallation/rinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit . 56 2 -
Chapitre 2 Chapitre 3 Premire mise en marche de votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK Sources dalimentation. 58 Connexion des adaptateurs dalimentation. 58 Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK . 60 Mise sous tension . 60 Procdure damorage . 61 Mots de passe daccs au disque dur . 62 Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS . 62 Amorage du systme. 63 Premier dmarrage de Windows . 63 Gestion de lalimentation . 65 Commutateur dalimentation/veille/reprise. 65 Mode sommeil (veille) . 65 Mode veille prolonge (enregistrement sur le disque). 67 Gestion de lalimentation dans Windows. 67 Redmarrage du systme. 67 Mise hors tension . 68 Conformit ENERGY STAR . 69 Options installables par lutilisateur Batterie au lithium . 71 Recharge des batteries . 72 Remplacement de la batterie. 74 Cartes Secure Digital. 76 Installation dune carte SD . 77 Retirer une carte SD . 77 Module de mmoire additionnelle . 78 Installer un module de mmoire additionnelle. 78 Retirer un module de mmoire additionnelle . 80 Vrification de la capacit de mmoire . 80 3 -
Chapitre 4 Ports de priphriques . 81 Prise de rseau local (RJ-45) interne . 81 Connecteur de duplicateur de ports . 81 Ports USB. 82 Informations sur lutilitaire de charge USB en tout temps. 83 Prise dcouteurs . 83 Prise de micro . 83 Port HDMI.. 84 Port vido externe. 84 Duplicateur de ports . 85 Composants du duplicateur de ports . 86 Installation du duplicateur de ports. 88 Dsinstallation du duplicateur de ports. 88 Dpannage de votre LIFEBOOK Dpannage . 89 Identification du problme. 89 Problmes spcifiques . 91 Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension . 103 Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7). 105 Enregistrement et restauration de vos images dorigine et de systme . 105 Cration dune image de systme . 107 Onglets Restauration et Utilitaires. 111 Utilisation du DVD de restauration Windows 7 sur un systme Windows 8 de 64 bits (option de rtrogradation). 112 Restauration de limage dorigine avec la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires ( partir dun nouveau disque dur ou dun disque dur sans auto-amorage) . 113 Tlchargement des mises jour de pilotes . 114 4 -
Chapitre 5 Chapitre 6 Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8)115 Enregistrement et restauration de vos images dorigine et de systme . 115 Cration dune image de systme . 117 Restauration et utilitaires. 122 Restauration de limage dorigine avec la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires ( partir dun nouveau disque dur ou dun disque dur sans auto-amorage) . 125 Modification des paramtres BIOS pour passer de Windows 8 32 bits Windows 8 64 bits et inversement. 126 Tlchargement des mises jour de pilotes . 127 Entretien Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK . 128 Nettoyage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. 129 Nettoyage du filtre anti-poussire . 131 Entreposage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK . 132 Voyager avec votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK . 132 Batteries . 133 Entretien de votre lecteur multimdia. 134 Spcifications techniques Spcifications . 136 Microprocesseur . 136 Puce. 136 Mmoire . 136 Vido . 137 Numriseur . 137 Audio . 137 Options de stockage . 137 Priphriques de baie modulaire. 138 Caractristiques techniques . 138 5 -
Ports de priphriques . 139 Clavier . 140 Gestion de lalimentation . 140 Dimensions et poids . 141 Environnement requis . 141 Accessoires prfrs des utilisateurs . 141 Logiciels pr-installs . 142 Apprendre utiliser vos logiciels . 142 Glossaire/Renseignements sur la rglementation Glossaire . 145 Renseignements sur la rglementation . 158 Annexe A: Guide dutilisation de la carte de rseau local sans fil Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil optionnelle. 162 Cartes rseau sans fil prsentes dans ce document . 162 Caractristiques de la carte rseau sans fil . 162 Modes de rseau sans fil compatibles avec cette carte. 163 Dsactivation/dconnexion de la carte rseau sans fil . 165 Dsactivation avec le commutateur de la carte rseau sans fil . 166 Dsactivation par licne dans la zone de notification . 166 Activation de la carte rseau sans fil . 166 Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil. 167 Connexion au rseau . 167 Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil . 168 Dpannage . 168 Spcifications de la carte de rseau local sans fil . 170 Spcifications . 170 6 -
Utilisation de Bluetooth. 171 Prsentation de Bluetooth . 171 Annexe B: Capteur dempreintes digitales Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales . 173 Premire mise en marche. 174 Installer OmniPass . 175 Enregistrement des utilisateurs . 177 Utilisation dOmniPass . 179 Configuration dOmniPass . 185 Centre de contrle OmniPass . 187 Dpannage . 187 Annexe C: Utilisation de laffichage Intel Wireless Display Utilisation de la technologie Wireless Display . 190 Dmarrer lapplication WiDi . 191 Index . 192 7 -
Prface propos de ce guide Le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Srie T904 de la socit Fujitsu America est un ordinateur compact, mais puissant. Il peut tre utilis en configuration dordinateur portable classique, avec un clavier, ou en configuration tablette, avec un stylet. Son fonctionnement est assur par le tout nouveau processeur Intel Core de 3e gnration et son cran intgr en couleurs est dot dun numriseur double; cela fait de votre ordinateur portable un outil aussi puissant quun PC normal, capable de fonctionner dans des environnements varis. La tablette LIFEBOOK T904 est conue pour prendre en charge les systmes dexploitation Windows 7 dition professionnelle et Windows 8 Pro. Ce manuel prsente le mode demploi du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T904 et de ses logiciels intgrs. Conventions utilises dans ce guide Les touches du clavier et lcran apparaissent entre crochets. Exemple: [Fn], [F1], [chap], [Entre] et [Ctrl]. Le texte contient plusieurs renvois vers des pages contenant des informations supplmentaires sur un sujet quelconque. Exemple: (Voir Procdure dinstallation en page 43). Remarque: tous les renvois sont relis aux lments concerns, il vous suffit donc de cliquer sur le lien et vous serez automatiquement redirig(e) vers llment ou la page en question. Les lments des menus lcran sont indiqus en caractres gras. Exemple: Cliquez sur Menu Fujitsu, puis faites votre slection. LICNE DINFORMATIONS MET EN VIDENCE DES RENSEIGNEMENTS QUI VOUS AIDERONT MIEUX COMPRENDRE LE SUJET TRAIT. 8 LICNE DE MISE EN GARDE MET EN VIDENCE DES INFORMATIONS IMPORTANTES POUR LUTILISATION SCURITAIRE DE VOTRE ORDINATEUR OU POUR LINTGRIT DE VOS FICHIERS. VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT TOUTES LES MISES EN GARDE. LICNE DAVERTISSEMENT MET EN VIDENCE DES INFORMATIONS SUR DES DANGERS POUR VOUS, VOTRE PC TABLETTE LIFEBOOK OU VOS FICHIERS. VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT TOUS LES AVERTISSEMENTS. Coordonnes pour contacter Fujitsu Service et assistance Plusieurs faons soffrent vous pour contacter lquipe de service et assistance de Fujitsu :
Appel sans frais : 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Site Internet:
U.S.A. - us.fujitsu.com/solutions Canada - www.fujitsu.ca Avant de nous contacter, veuillez avoir les informations suivantes porte de main pour que notre prpos du service la clientle puisse vous venir en aide le plus rapidement possible:
Nom du produit Numro de configuration du produit Numro de srie du produit Date dachat Conditions dans lesquelles le problme est survenu Texte des messages derreur reus Types de priphriques connects, si applicable 9 - propos de ce guide Site de vente par internet de Fujitsu Vous pouvez vous rendre sur ce site directement : www.shopfujitsu.com. Maintien de la plus rcente configuration Pour vous assurer de toujours disposer des versions les plus actuelles des pilotes de votre systme, il vous est suggr dutiliser priodiquement lutilitaire de mise jour Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM). Lutilitaire FSDM est votre disposition pour tlcharger les plus rcentes versions des pilotes, utilitaires et applications depuis le site dassistance Fujitsu. Si vous avez un systme dexploitation Windows 7, vous devez vous connecter au site dassistance
(http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS). Garantie limite Votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK est accompagn dune garantie limite internationale de Fujitsu. Pour connatre les conditions gnrales et la dure de votre garantie limite, consultez la pochette de service livre avec votre ordinateur. 10 - propos de ce guide Chapitre 1 Prsentation de votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK Aperu gnral Cette section dcrit les composants de votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T904. Nous vous suggrons fortement de la lire avant de commencer utiliser votre PC Tablette, mme si vous avez dj utilis des ordinateurs de ce type. Figure 1. PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu T90 11 Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Les interfaces de connecteurs et de priphriques sur le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T904 et sur le duplicateur de ports optionnel vous permettent de connecter divers priphriques. Les emplacements spcifiques sont illustrs dans les figures 2 6. Le tableau ci-dessous fournit une brve description de chacune des icnes figurant sur le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T904 et/ou le duplicateur de ports en option. Chacune des icnes est soit moule, soit imprime sur le chssis du systme. Connexion Icne PC Tablette Fente SD/SDHC/SDHX Fente pour carte Smart Card Port USB Port USB avec charge en tout temps Prise de micro Prise dcouteurs Objectif La fente pour carte Secure Digital (SD)/SHDC/SDXC permet dinsrer une carte mmoire pour la conservation des donnes. Cette carte mmoire vous permet de transfrer des donnes partir de et vers une varit de priphriques numriques. La fente rserve vous permet dinsrer une carte Smart Card sur laquelle vous pouvez enregistrer des informations importantes, telles que renseignements mdicaux, ou de largent lectronique. Connecter des priphriques USB au PC Tablette. Veuillez prendre note que les ports USB ayant une patte noire dans leur centre sont destins des priphriques USB 2.0 ou 1.1, alors que ceux ayant une patte bleue sont destins des priphriques USB 3.0.
Connecter des priphriques compatibles USB 2.0 et 1.1. Ce port peut galement tre utilis pour charger des priphriques USB peu importe que le systme soit allum ou non. Connecter un micro externe. Le micro interne est dsactiv lorsque vous branchez un micro externe. Connecter des couteurs stros ou des haut-parleurs externes avec amplificateur. Le haut-
parleur interne est dsactiv lorsque vous branchez des couteurs externes ou des haut-parleurs avec amplificateur. 12 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Connexion Icne PC Tablette Objectif Port HDMI Fente dantivol Glissire Veille/Reprise Rseau local Commutateur Marche/Arrt du dispositif sans fil Le port HDMI vous permet dutiliser des priphriques numriques compatibles avec votre ordinateur, tels quune tlvision haute dfinition ou un rcepteur AV (audio-vido). La fente dantivol vous permet de scuriser le PC Tablette en y branchant un dispositif antivol compatible. La glissire veille/reprise vous permet de mettre votre systme en veille sans lteindre, de reprendre lutilisation du systme lorsquil a t mis en veille et de le faire dmarrer sil est teint. La prise de rseau local (RJ-45) est utilise pour connecter la carte Ethernet Base-T/Tx 10/100/1000*
interne un rseau local de votre bureau (ou domicile) ou des priphriques tels que cble modem, DSL ou Internet par satellite.
*1000 Mbit/s, galement connue sous le nom de Gigabit Ethernet. Le commutateur de carte sans fil vous permet de mettre sous tension ou hors tension ces dispositifs sans fil (disponibles en option). Port vido externe Le port vido externe permet de connecter un moniteur externe ou un projecteur ACL. Interface vido numrique (DVI) Port DisplayPort Le port DVI-D situ sur le duplicateur de ports (en option) vous permet de raccorder un moniteur ACL plat ou un poste de tlvision quip dun port DVI-D; vous obtenez des graphismes et images dune trs grande nettet.
Le port DisplayPort du duplicateur de ports optionnel permet de connecter des priphriques daffichage numriques compatibles avec la technologie DisplayPort, avec laide dun cble DisplayPort, notamment un cran plat ou un projecteur numrique. 13 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Camra web en option DEL daccs la camra Web cran Bouton Windows Boutons de scurit/
PC Tablette du LIFEBOK Glissire dalimentation/
veille/reprise Microphone intgr Capteur de lumire ambiante Clavier Tableau de voyants dtat Microphone intgr Capteur dempreintes digitales Haut-parleur stro Tableau de voyants dtat Interrupteur de communications sans fil Fente pour carte SD/SDHC/SDXC Commande du curseur TouchPad Haut-parleur stro Figure 2. PC Tablette LIFEBOOK avec cran ouvert 14 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Composants suprieurs Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant sur le dessus de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Camra Web La camra web optionnelle trs haute rsolution (1920 x 1080 pixels) permet de prendre des photos de vous-mme et de les envoyer par Internet. DEL daccs la camra Web Le voyant daccs la camra web sallume lorsque la camra web est active. cran Lordinateur est quip dun cran couleur diodes lectroluminescentes avec rtro-clairage, permettant dafficher des textes et des images. Lcran possde un numriseur actif pouvant tre utilis avec un stylet et un numriseur double pouvant tre utilis avec un stylet ou avec les doigts. Bouton Windows Aprs louverture de session, le bouton Windows vous permet dexcuter deux fonctions. Lorsque vous appuyez uniquement sur ce bouton, il ouvre le menu Dmarrer. Si vous appuyez sur le commutateur dalimentation en mme temps que sur le bouton Windows, vous obtenez les mmes fonctions quavec la combinaison [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Suppr]. Boutons de scurit/PC Tablette du LIFEBOOK Les boutons de scurit/PC Tablette permettent de scuriser votre systme grce un mot de passe et de lancer des applications au simple toucher dun bouton. Voir Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK en page 49. Glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise La glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise vous permet de mettre votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK en veille sans lteindre, de reprendre lutilisation de lordinateur lorsquil a t mis en sommeil et de le faire dmarrer sil est teint. Voir Commutateur dalimentation/veille/reprise en page 65. Microphones intgrs doubles Le microphone intgr vous permet denregistrer de la voix et des annotations. 15 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Clavier Clavier complet avec plusieurs touches spciales Windows. Voir Clavier en page 33. Deux haut-parleurs stro Les deux haut-parleurs intgrs permettent une coute en strophonie. Commande du curseur Touchpad La commande de curseur TouchPad vous offre une faon supplmentaire de dplacer le curseur. Voir Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile en page 36. Fente pour carte SD/SDHC/SDXC La fente pour carte SD/SDHC/SDXC permet dintroduire une carte Secure Digital (SD) de stockage de donnes. Cette architecture vous permet de transfrer des donnes partir dune grande varit de priphriques numriques. Voir Installation dune carte SD en page 77. Interrupteur de communications sans fil Ce commutateur permet dallumer/teindre les dispositifs sans fil optionnels. Pour prolonger la longvit de la batterie, teignez ces priphriques entre les utilisations. Voir Activation de la carte rseau sans fil en page 166. Tableau de voyants dtat Les tableaux de voyants dtat affichent des symboles qui correspondent des composants spcifiques du PC Tablette. Les voyants dtat sont situs deux endroits diffrents : sur le devant de lordinateur (voyants dtat relatifs au systme) et sous les boutons dapplications (voyants dtat relatifs aux boutons). Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. Capteur dempreintes digitales Le capteur dempreintes digitales vous permet de vous connecter votre systme ainsi qu des sites Internets et dautres applications protgs par mot de passe: il suffit de glisser votre doigt sur le capteur. Voir Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales en page 173. Capteur de lumire ambiante Lorsque lordinateur est en cours dutilisation, ce capteur value la lumire ambiante et ajuste automatiquement la luminosit de lcran en consquence. Voir Activation/Dsactivation du capteur de lumire ambiante en page 31. 16 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Grilles de ventilation Port HDMI Fente pour carte Smart Card Prise dalimentation c.c. Port vido externe Port USB 3.0 avec Chargeur USB Anytime Prise dcouteurs Prise de micro Figure 3. Ct gauche du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Port USB 3.0 Composants sur le ct gauche de lordinateur Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant sur le ct gauche de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Grilles de ventilation Permettent de refroidir le systme afin dviter une surchauffe. POUR PROTGER VOTRE PC TABLETTE DES DOMMAGES ET OPTIMISER SES PERFORMANCES, GARDEZ TOUJOURS LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION DGAGES, PROPRES ET SANS DBRIS. IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS DEVIEZ LES NETTOYER PRIODIQUEMENT, SELON LENVIRONNEMENT DANS LEQUEL VOUS UTILISEZ LORDINATEUR. NE PLACEZ PAS LORDINATEUR DANS UN ENDROIT O LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION POURRAIENT TRE OBSTRUES, NOTAMMENT DANS UN PETIT ESPACE FERM OU SUR UNE SURFACE MOLLE COMME UN LIT OU UN COUSSIN. Port HDMI Le port HDMI est conu pour tre utilis avec des priphriques numriques compatibles avec votre ordinateur, tels quune tlvision haute dfinition ou un rcepteur AV (audio-vido). Voir Port HDMI. en page 84. 17 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Fente pour carte Smart Card Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK est dot dune fente pour cartes intelligentes, aussi appeles cartes puce. Ces cartes ressemblent des cartes de crdit mais elles contiennent des circuits imprims. Pour pouvoir utiliser le lecteur de carte puce, vous devez acqurir un logiciel tiers qui nest pas fourni. Prise dcouteurs La prise dcouteurs vous permet de connecter des couteurs. Voir Prise dcouteurs en page 83. Prise de micro Permet de connecter un microphone stro externe. Voir Prise de micro en page 83. Port USB 3.0 avec capacit de charge USB en tout temps Le port USB 3.0 vous permet de connecter des priphriques USB. Chaque port USB 3.0 permet de transfrer des donnes une vitesse atteignant 5 Gbit/s. Il est galement rtrocompatible avec les priphriques USB 1.1 et 2.0, lesquels permettent de transfrer des donnes des vitesses atteignant respectivement 12 Mbit/s et 480 Mbit/s. Voir Ports USB en page 82. Veuillez prendre note que le port USB 3.0 offre la fonction de charge USB en tout temps, laquelle permet de charger un priphrique USB peu importe que le systme soit allum ou non. Port USB 3.0 Le port USB 3.0 vous permet de connecter des priphriques USB. Chaque port USB 3.0 permet de transfrer des donnes une vitesse atteignant 5 Gbit/s. Il est galement rtrocompatible avec les priphriques USB 1.1 et 2.0, lesquels permettent de transfrer des donnes des vitesses atteignant respectivement 12 Mbit/s et 480 Mbit/s. Voir Ports USB en page 82. Port vido externe Le port vido externe permet de connecter un moniteur externe ou un projecteur ACL. Voir Port vido externe en page 84. Prise dalimentation c.c. La prise dalimentation c.c. sert brancher ladaptateur secteur, lequel permet dalimenter le PC Tablette LifeBook et de charger la batterie interne au lithium. 18 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Priphrique de baie modulaire Port USB 2.0 Point dattache du cordon du stylet Levier djection de la baie modulaire Figure 4. Ct droit du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fente pour dispositif antivol Support de stylet Composants sur le ct droit de lordinateur Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant sur le ct droit de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Baie modulaire La baie modulaire permet dinstaller lun des priphriques suivants. Voir Priphriques de baie modulaire en page 47. Lecteur modulaire Blu-ray RW. Graveur de DVD multiformat double couche Batterie au lithium modulaire Volet rducteur de poids Port USB 2.0 Le port USB 2.0 vous permet de connecter des priphriques USB. La norme USB 2.0 transfre des donnes un dbit thorique de 480 Mbit/s. Elle est rtrocompatible avec les priphriques USB 1.1 dont le dbit atteint 12 Mbit/s. Voir Ports USB en page 82. Point dattache du cordon du stylet Ce point dattache est conu pour retenir le stylet prs de lordinateur et viter quil ne sgare. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous Fixation du cordon du stylet en page 45. 19 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Support de stylet Le support sert tenir le stylet lorsque ce dernier nest pas utilis. Le stylet sert dinterface avec lcran numriseur actif. Fente pour dispositif antivol La fente de dispositif antivol vous permet dinstaller un dispositif antivol disponible en option. Levier djection de la baie modulaire Le levier djection de la baie modulaire permet djecter un priphrique de baie modulaire, afin de pouvoir le retirer. Voir Priphriques de baie modulaire en page 47. 20 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Prise de rseau local Gigabit (RJ-45) Figure 5. Arrire du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Port USB 2.0 Composants de la face arrire Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant larrire de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Gigabit Prise de rseau local (RJ-45) Cette prise est utilise pour une connexion Gigabit Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T) interne. Voir Prise de rseau local (RJ-45) interne en page 81. Port USB 2.0 Le port USB 2.0 vous permet de connecter des priphriques USB. La norme USB 2.0 transfre des donnes un dbit thorique de 480 Mbit/s. Elle est rtrocompatible avec les priphriques USB 1.1 dont le dbit atteint 12 Mbit/s. Voir Ports USB en page 82. 21 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Filtre intgr pouvant tre nettoy Grilles de ventilation
(divers emplacements) Compartiment de module de mmoire Compartiment dantenne grand rseau sans fil Loquet de batterie Loquet de batterie Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports Batterie au lithium Figure 6. Dessous du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Composants sous lordinateur Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant sous votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Compartiment de mmoire supplmentaire Votre PC Tablette est quip en usine dune mmoire vive synchrone dynamique de type 3 double dbit et haute vitesse (SDRAM DDR3 1600 MHz). Le compartiment de mmoire permet daugmenter la capacit de mmoire systme de votre ordinateur pour en amliorer les performances globales. Voir Module de mmoire additionnelle en page 78. Normalement, vous ne devriez pas avoir ouvrir ce compartiment. 22 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Grilles de ventilation Les grilles permettent lair de circuler dans le systme afin de refroidir les composants. POUR PROTGER VOTRE PC TABLETTE DES DOMMAGES ET OPTIMISER SES PERFORMANCES, GARDEZ TOUJOURS LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION DGAGES, PROPRES ET SANS DBRIS. IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS DEVIEZ LES NETTOYER PRIODIQUEMENT, SELON LENVIRONNEMENT DANS LEQUEL VOUS UTILISEZ LORDINATEUR. NE PLACEZ PAS LORDINATEUR DANS UN ENDROIT O LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION POURRAIENT TRE OBSTRUES, NOTAMMENT DANS UN PETIT ESPACE FERM OU SUR UNE SURFACE MOLLE COMME UN LIT OU UN COUSSIN. Compartiment dantenne grand rseau sans fil Le compartiment de module grand rseau sans fil contient le dispositif de communications sur grand rseau sans fil. Normalement, vous ne devriez pas avoir ouvrir ce compartiment. Loquets de la batterie Les loquets servent maintenir la batterie lintrieur de son compartiment. Compartiment de batterie au lithium Le compartiment de batterie contient la batterie interne au lithium. Le couvercle de ce compartiment peut tre ouvert pour enlever la batterie lorsque lordinateur doit tre entrepos pendant une longue priode ou pour remplacer une batterie plat par une autre batterie charge. Voir Batterie au lithium en page 71. Filtre intgr pouvant tre nettoy Le filtre anti-poussire aide viter que la poussire et la salet sinfiltrent dans votre ordinateur. Voir Nettoyage du filtre anti-poussire en page 131. Connecteur de duplicateur de ports Ce connecteur permet de brancher le duplicateur de ports en option sur votre ordinateur portable. 23 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Voyant dalimentation Batterie 1 niveau de charge Accs au lecteur optique/disque dur Chargement de la batterie Batterie 2 niveau de charge Verr num Verr dfil Verr maj Scurit Figure 7. Tableau de voyants dtat Tableau de voyants dtat Votre ordinateur comprend deux tableaux de voyants dtat: on the left front and under the display. Le tableau de voyants dtat contient des symboles et DEL associes correspondant des composants spcifiques de votre PC Tablette. Ces symboles vous renseignent sur le fonctionnement des composants correspondants.(Figure 7) Voyant dalimentation Le voyant dalimentation indique si le systme est oprationnel. Il prsente diffrents tats, chacun dentre eux indiquant le mode dalimentation de votre PC Tablette au moment donn. 24 - Tableau de voyants dtat Allum en continu (bleu): Le PC Tablette est sous tension et prt tre utilis. Clignotant : Le PC Tablette est en mode Sommeil. teint : Votre systme est en veille prolonge ou hors tension. Si la batterie est en cours de charge, le voyant dalimentation demeure allum mme si lordinateur est teint. Et mme si le systme a t teint avec Windows, le voyant dalimentation restera allum si un adaptateur est branch lordinateur. Voyants de charge en cours Les voyants Chargement de la batterie et Niveau de charge indiquent laquelle des batteries est en cours de chargement (Batterie 1: batterie au lithium principale; Batterie 2: batterie au lithium modulaire optionnelle). 111 2 Voyant de niveau de charge Le voyant de niveau de charge de la batterie affiche le niveau de charge de la batterie comme suit :
Vert continu : batterie charge entre 51% et 100% de sa capacit maximale. Orange continu : batterie charge entre 13% et 50% de sa capacit maximale. Rouge continu : batterie charge entre 0% et 12% de sa capacit maximale. Orange clignotant : Le clignotement indique quune mesure de chargement est en cours
(quatre secondes aprs linstallation de la batterie). Rouge clignotant: Problme au niveau de la batterie. teint : Aucune batterie nest installe. LORSQUE LA BATTERIE EST INSTALLE ET QUE LORDINATEUR NEST PAS SOUS TENSION, LE VOYANT DE CHARGE DE LA PILE INDIQUERA LE NIVEAU DE CHARGE PENDANT CINQ SECONDES APRS LE CLIGNOTEMENT ORANGE. LORSQUE LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR NEST PAS BRANCH OU QUE LA BATTERIE NEST PAS COMPLTEMENT CHARGE ET QUE LORDINATEUR SE TROUVE EN MODE SOMMEIL, LE VOYANT CLIGNOTE. IL CLIGNOTE EN SALLUMANT UNE SECONDE TOUTES LES CINQ SECONDES. LES BATTERIES SOUMISES DES CHOCS, DES VIBRATIONS OU DES TEMPRATURES EXTRMES RISQUENT DE SUBIR DES DGTS PERMANENTS. SI UNE BATTERIE EST COURT-CIRCUITE, ELLE EST FORCMENT ABME ET DOIT TRE REMPLACE. 25 - Tableau de voyants dtat Voyant daccs au disque dur/lecteur optique Ce voyant daccs indique si le disque dur interne ou le lecteur optique est en cours dutilisation. Voyant de scurit Si un mot de passe a t dfini, ce voyant clignote lorsque le systme est ractiv partir de ltat Hors tension ou du mode Sommeil. Vous devez entrer le mot de passe dfini dans le Tableau de scurit pour que le systme redevienne oprationnel. Voyant de verrouillage du pav numrique Le voyant Verr num rvle si le clavier intgr est en mode de pav numrique dix touches. Voyant de verrouillage des majuscules Le voyant Verr maj rvle si le clavier inscrira les lettres en majuscules. Voyant Verr dfil Le voyant Verr dfil indique si le verrouillage du dfilement est actif. 26 - Tableau de voyants dtat cran Figure 8. Ouverture de lcran cran Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T904 est dot dun cran daffichage DEL rtro-clair vous permettant de mieux voir son contenu lorsque la lumire environnante est intense. La conception convertible de votre PC Tablette vous permet douvrir compltement lcran, de le tourner 180 degrs dans les deux sens et le placer face vers le haut sur le clavier. Cela vous permet dutiliser le systme comme une tablette, de la mme manire quavec un bloc-note en papier. Ouverture de lcran Soulevez simplement lcran vers le haut et vers larrire jusqu une position confortable, en faisant attention de ne pas toucher la surface daffichage. (Figure 8) 27 - cran Utilisation du systme comme une tablette Si vous souhaitez utiliser le systme comme une tablette, effectuez les tapes suivantes. LCRAN PEUT PIVOTER DANS UN SENS COMME DANS LAUTRE; MAIS LORSQUE VOUS SOUHAITEZ REVENIR LA CONFIGURATION PORTABLE, PRENEZ GARDE LE FAIRE PIVOTER DANS LE SENS INVERSE CELUI DANS LEQUEL VOUS LAVEZ OUVERT. SI VOUS TOURNEZ LCRAN DANS UNE DIRECTION INAPPROPRIE, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LA CHARNIRE. LTAPE SUIVANTE, ASSUREZ-VOUS DE PLACER LCRAN PERPENDICULAIREMENT AU CLAVIER, SINON LE CLAVIER ET LE COUVERCLE DE LCRAN POURRAIENT SGRATIGNER. 1 Soulevez lcran jusqu ce quil soit perpendiculaire au clavier. (Figure 9). 2 Lorsque lcran est perpendiculaire au clavier, tournez de 180 degrs dans lune ou lautre direction(Figure 10) afin quil soit face vers larrire. 3 En tenant lextrmit suprieure de lcran, tirez vers lavant jusqu ce quil repose pratiquement au dessus du clavier. 4 Pour revenir la configuration portable, reprenez les tapes 3 et 2. C A B D Figure 9. cran compltement ouvert Figure 10. Rotation de lcran Figure 11. Mode tablette 28 - cran Comment tenir le PC Tablette Votre ordinateur peut tre utilis en configuration tablette et orient de quatre faons diffrentes : 0o, 90o, 180o et 270o (Figure ). Les lettres associes chaque orientation dsignent la position du systme lorsque la flche est tourne vers le haut.
(A) Orientation verticale: Positionnez lcran la verticale, la camra Web gauche.
(B) 2e orientation verticale: Positionnez lcran la verticale, la camra Web droite.
(C) Orientation horizontale: Positionnez lcran lhorizontale, la camra Web au-dessus. SI UN MODULE DE GRAND RSEAU SANS FIL A T INSTALL DANS VOTRE SYSTME, VEUILLEZ NOTER CE QUI SUIT : TOUT EN TENANT LE SYSTME HORIZONTALEMENT AVEC LA CAMRA WEB EN DESSOUS (2E ORIENTATION HORIZONTALE, CONFORMMENT AUX INDICATIONS CI-DESSOUS), LA CARTE DE GRAND RSEAU SANS FIL NE DOIT PAS TRE UTILISE AVEC LANTENNE OUVERTE. UNE UTILISATION DANS CETTE POSITION POURRAIT ENDOMMAGER LANTENNE DE LA CARTE DE GRAND RSEAU SANS FIL.
(D) 2e orientation horizontale: Positionnez lcran lhorizontale, la camra Web au-dessous. Modification de la fonction de pivotement automatique Votre PC Tablette possde un utilitaire de pivotement automatique permettant de dterminer comment vous souhaitez que lcran ragisse lorsque la tablette est tourne. Lorsque le pivotement automatique est activ, laffichage pivote automatiquement dans le mme sens que lcran. Lorsque vous recevez votre PC tablette, les valeurs Pause et Pause automatique sont les paramtres par dfaut de lutilitaire de pivotement automatique. Lorsque loption Pause est active, le systme ne se place pas en Pivotement automatique tant que ce mode nest pas activ. Lorsque loption Pause automatique est active, lcran ne pivote pas automatiquement sil a t tourn autrement quavec la fonction de pivotement automatique (notamment avec le bouton de pivotement sur la tablette). Si loption Pause automatique est active, il existe plusieurs faons de ractiver le pivotement automatique:
Positionnez laffichage et lcran dans le mme sens. Lorsque le systme quitte le mode veille ou le mode veille prolonge. Lorsque le systme est redmarr ou que la session est ferme puis rouverte. 29 - cran Lorsque le systme est en Pause, il existe plusieurs faons de lactiver:
Slectionnez Dmarrer > Tous les programmes > Utilitaire de pivotement automatique, puis cliquez sur Reprendre. Avec le bouton droit, cliquez sur licne de lutilitaire de pivotement automatique dans la barre de tches, puis cliquez sur Reprendre. Ouvrez le menu Fujitsu en cliquant sur le bouton [A] ou en cliquant sur licne du menu Fujitsu dans la barre de tches, puis cliquez sur [Reprendre pivotement automatique] dans la deuxime page du menu Fujitsu. Remarque: Si Windows 8 Pro a t install sur votre systme, vous pouvez enfoncer et tenir le bouton de rotation pour dsactiver la rotation automatique. Rglage de la luminosit de lcran Lorsque vous avez allum votre ordinateur PC Tablette, vous pouvez rgler la luminosit de lcran un niveau plus confortable. Vous pouvez ajuster la luminosit de trois faons: avec le clavier, avec lutilitaire de gestion de lalimentation, avec le menu Fujitsu. Utilisation du clavier. Si vous rglez la luminosit en vous servant du clavier, vous modifiez les paramtres du systme (c.--d., le paramtrage ralis avec les touches de fonction modifient automatiquement les paramtres de luminosit dans les paramtres de la tablette et du stylet).
[Fn+F6] : Appuyez plusieurs fois sur cette combinaison de touches pour diminuer la luminosit de votre cran.
[Fn+F7] : Appuyez plusieurs fois sur cette combinaison de touches pour augmenter la luminosit de votre cran. Utilisation de lutilitaire de gestion de lalimentation. Pour rgler la luminosit avec lutilitaire de gestion de lalimentation:
Cliquez sur Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration. Dans Affichage par: , slectionnez un des affichages par icnes. Slectionnez Affichage, puis cliquez sur Rgler la luminosit dans la partie gauche de lcran. Faites glisser la barre Luminosit de lcran vers la gauche ou la droite selon votre prfrence. 30 - cran Utilisation du menu Fujitsu pour rgler la luminosit. Pour rgler la luminosit en vous servant du menu Fujitsu, cliquez sur licne Menu Fujitsu de la barre de tches dans le coin infrieur droit de lcran. (Vous pouvez aussi ouvrir le menu Fujitsu en appuyant sur le bouton [A].) Faites dfiler vers le bas jusquau Centre de mobilit Windows, puis double-cliquez sur licne situe ct de Luminosit de lcran. Rglez la luminosit en faisant glisser le bouton sur la position On battery (Alimentation batterie) ou Plugged in
(Alimentation secteur). Vous pouvez galement utiliser le menu Fujitsu pour rapidement rduire la luminosit au minimum ou laugmenter au maximum. Pour cela, vous navez qu cliquer sur le bouton correspondant du menu Fujitsu : Luminosit ACL min ou Luminosit ACL max. LORSQUE VOUS EMPLOYEZ UNE ALIMENTATION SECTEUR, LCRAN UTILISE PAR DFAUT LE NIVEAU DE LUMINOSIT LE PLUS LEV. LORSQUE VOUS EMPLOYEZ UNE ALIMENTATION SUR BATTERIE, LCRAN UTILISE PAR DFAUT UN NIVEAU DE LUMINOSIT MOYEN. PLUS LA LUMINOSIT EST LEVE, PLUS LORDINATEUR CONSOMME DNERGIE ET PLUS LA LONGVIT DE VOTRE BATTERIE SERA RDUITE. SI VOUS DSIREZ MAXIMISER LA LONGVIT DE LA BATTERIE, RGLEZ LA LUMINOSIT AU PLUS BAS NIVEAU POSSIBLE. Activation/Dsactivation du capteur de lumire ambiante Ce systme possde un capteur de lumire ambiante (juste sous les boutons de tablette) qui mesure automatiquement les conditions de luminosit dans lesquelles lordinateur est utilis. Si lenvironnement est trs clair, la luminosit de lcran ACL augmentera pour faciliter la lecture. Au contraire, dans la pnombre, la luminosit de lcran diminuera automatiquement. NOTEZ QUAU PREMIER DMARRAGE DU SYSTME, LE CAPTEUR DE LUMIRE AMBIANTE EST DSACTIV. VOUS DEVREZ LACTIVER EN SUIVANT LA PROCDURE SUIVANTE. Le capteur de lumire peut tre activ ou dsactiv partir du Panneau de configuration, comme suit:
Windows 7 :
1 Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration et cliquez sur Affichage par: puis slectionnez la taille des icnes souhaite. 2 Cliquez sur licone Capteurs demplacement et autres. 31 - cran 3 Pour activer ou dsactiver le capteur de lumire, cochez ou dcochez la case situe dans la colonne Activ . 4 Pour de plus amples informations propos du capteur de lumire, ouvrez la fentre Proprits du capteur en cliquant sur Capteur de lumire dans la colonne Capteur . 5 Dans la fentre Proprits du capteur , vous pouvez modifier la description du capteur, dsinstaller le capteur ou encore activer ou dsactiver les utilisateurs slectionns. Pour modifier la description du capteur, cliquez sur le bouton [Modifier la description], saisissez les nouveaux lments, puis cliquez sur le bouton [OK]. Pour limiter le nombre dutilisateurs ayant accs aux capteurs, cliquez sur Modifier les accs aux capteurs, puis cochez ou librez la case situe ct de lutilisateur auquel vous souhaitez autoriser ou refuser laccs. Pour dsinstaller le capteur, cliquez sur Dsinstaller ce capteur. Windows 8 :
Dans un systme Windows 8, il existe deux faons dactiver/dsactiver le capteur de lumire ambiante. 1. Allez lcran de dmarrage moderne -> Modifier les paramtres de lordinateur -> Gnral -> cran. Vous trouverez alors loption Rgler automatiquement la luminosit de lcran. Vous pouvez utiliser linterrupteur pour activer/
dsactiver le capteur de lumire ambiante. 2. Depuis le bureau Windows, allez sur Panneau de configuration -> Tous les lments du panneau de configuration ->
Options dalimentation. Slectionnez le plan avec lequel vous dsirez rgler le capteur de lumire ambiante. Allez ensuite Modifier les paramtres de plan -> Modifier les paramtres dalimentation avancs -> cran. Sous Activer la luminosit adaptative, vous pouvez activer/dsactiver Alimentation batterie ou Fiche de connexion branche. 32 - cran Clavier Touches de fonction Touche Fn Touche Dmarrer Pav numrique
(dlimit par la ligne noire) Figure 12. Clavier Touche dapplication Touches de dfilement Utilisation du clavier Votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK est dot dun clavier 84 touches. Ce clavier excute toutes les fonctions dun clavier 101 touches, y compris les touches Windows et diverses touches de fonction spciales. Cette section dcrit les touches suivantes (Figure 12) :
Pav numrique : Certaines touches de votre PC Tablette remplissent une double fonction, servant la fois de caractre standard et de touche numrique ou mathmatique. Pour passer du caractre standard la fonction numrique, utilisez la touche [Verr num]. 33 - Clavier Touches de defilement: Votre clavier contient quatre touches flches permettant de dplacer le curseur ou le point dinsertion vers la droite, vers la gauche, vers le haut ou vers le bas, dans les fentres, dans les applications et dans les documents. Touches de fonction: Les touches [F1] [F12] sutilisent avec la touche [Fn] pour excuter des actions spciales, selon le programme en cours dutilisation. Touches Windows: Ces touches fonctionnent avec votre systme dexploitation Windows. Ces touches permettent de basculer entre les modes de bureau Windows et dcran de dmarrage moderne, ainsi que douvrir la barre dapplications en bas de lcran. Pav numrique Certaines touches du clavier remplissent une double fonction en servant de touche standard et de touche numrique. Pour utiliser la fonction numrique de ces touches, appuyez sur [Verr num]. Pour dsactiver la fonction numrique, appuyez de nouveau sur la mme touche. Lorsque cette fonction est active, vous pouvez saisir des chiffres de 0 9, excuter des additions ( + ), des soustractions ( - ), des multiplications ( * ) et des divisions ( / ), ainsi que saisir des dcimales ( , ) en vous servant des touches de fonction dsignes du pav numrique. Les fonctions secondaires des touches du pav numrique sont indiques sur leur face avant. Touches Windows Votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK comporte deux touches Windows, soit une touche Windows et une touche Application. La touche Windows permet de basculer entre le bureau Windows et lcran de dmarrage moderne. La touche Application ouvre la barre dapplications dans le bas de lcran. (pour de plus amples informations concernant les touches Windows, veuillez consulter votre documentation Windows). Touches de dfilement Les touches de dfilement sont les quatre touches flches qui permettent de dplacer le curseur vers le haut, vers le bas, vers la gauche et vers la droite dans les applications. Dans les programmes tels que lExplorateur Windows/Explorateur de fichiers, elles servent dplacer la mise en vidence (slectionne llment suivant en haut, en bas, gauche ou droite). 34 - Clavier Touches de fonction Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK comporte 12 touches de fonction, F1 F12. Les fonctions affectes ces touches varient selon lapplication. Pour les connatre, consultez la documentation du logiciel utilis. La touche [Fn] permet daccder des fonctions supplmentaires de votre PC Tablette. Elle est toujours utilise conjointement avec une autre touche.
[Fn+F2]: Si vous avez un ordinateur rtro-clairage et que vous appuyez sur [F2] tout en enfonant la touche [Fn], vous pourrez activer ou dsactiver la fonction de rtro-clairage du clavier.
[Fn+F3]: Maintenez [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur [F3] pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction Silence.
[Fn+F4]: Maintenez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur [F4] pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction Quick Point. Veuillez prendre note que la combinaison de touches [Fn+F4] fonctionne uniquement lorsque le paramtre Manual Setting (Configuration manuelle) est slectionn dans le BIOS. (Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 62)
[Fn+F6]: Gardez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F6] pour diminuer la luminosit de lcran.
[Fn+F7]: Gardez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F7] pour augmenter la luminosit de lcran.
[Fn+F8]: Si vous appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F8] tout en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce, vous rduirez le volume sonore de votre systme. le volume sonore de votre systme.
[Fn+F9]: Si vous appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F9] tout en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce, vous augmenterez
[Fn+F10]: Gardez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur [F10] pour changer lemplacement de laffichage vido. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur cette combinaison de touches, vous passez au choix suivant. Les choix disponibles sont, dans lordre: cran intgr uniquement, moniteur externe uniquement et cran intgr plus moniteur externe. 35 - Clavier Pav tactile/numriseur actif
/cran tactile Bouton gauche Commande du curseur Bouton droit Figure 13. Pav tactile Touchpad Utilisation du pav Touchpad Le pav tactile Touchpad est intgr votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Ce dispositif permet de commander le dplacement du curseur et de slectionner des lments affichs lcran. Ce pav est compos dune commande de curseur sous le centre du clavier et de deux boutons juste en-dessous. Le bouton gauche fonctionne de la mme manire quun bouton gauche de souris tandis que le bouton droit a la mme fonction que le bouton droit dune souris. La fonction exacte des boutons peut varier selon lapplication utilise. 36 - Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile Cliquer Cliquer signifie enfoncer et relcher un bouton. Pour cliquer gauche, placez le curseur sur llment que vous dsirez slectionner, puis enfoncez et relchez immdiatement le bouton gauche. Pour cliquer droite, placez le curseur sur llment que vous dsirez slectionner, puis enfoncez et relchez immdiatement le bouton droit. Vous pouvez galement cliquer en frappant une fois le pav Touchpad avec dlicatesse. Figure 14. Cliquer laide du bouton Figure 15. Cliquer laide du pav TouchPad Figure 16. Faire un clic droit avec le bouton Double-cliquer Double-cliquer signifie cliquer rapidement, deux fois de suite, avec le bouton gauche. Cette procdure ne fonctionne pas avec le bouton droit. Pour effectuer un double-clic, placez le pointeur sur lobjet voulu et appuyez rapidement deux fois sur le bouton gauche. Vous pouvez galement effectuer un double-clic en tapant deux fois lgrement sur le pav tactile. Figure 17. Double-cliquer laide du bouton Figure 18. Double-cliquer laide du pav Touchpad 37 - Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile SI LINTERVALLE ENTRE LES DEUX CLICS EST TROP LONG, LE DOUBLE-CLIC NE SERA PAS EXCUT. LES PARAMTRES DU PAV TACTILE QUICK POINT PEUVENT TRE RGLS DANS LA BOTE DE DIALOGUE SOURIS DU PANNEAU DE CONFIGURATION WINDOWS. Glisser Glisser signifie enfoncer le bouton gauche, sans le relcher, en dplaant le curseur. Pour faire glisser un lment, placez dabord le curseur sur cet lment. Ensuite, enfoncez et tenez le bouton gauche tout en dplaant llment son nouvel emplacement, puis relchez. Vous pouvez galement glisser un lment avec le pav tactile Touchpad. Premirement, placez le curseur sur llment que vous dsirez dplacer et frappez lgrement le pav tactile Touchpad deux reprises en faisant attention de laisser le doigt sur le pav aprs la dernire frappe. Ensuite, glissez votre doigt sur le pav tactile jusqu ce que llment soit lemplacement dsir et retirez votre doigt. Figure 19. Glisser laide du bouton Figure 20. Glisser laide du pav Touchpad Rglage des commandes du pav TouchPad Le panneau de configuration Windows vous permet de personnaliser votre pav tactile TouchPad avec divers paramtres disponibles dans la bote de dialogue Proprits de la souris. Il y a trois aspects du fonctionnement du pav tactile que vous pouvez rgler:
Boutons : Cet onglet vous permet de configurer les boutons pour une utilisation gaucher ou droitier, et de configurer lintervalle de temps permis entre deux clics lors des double-clics. 38 - Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile Pointeurs: Cet onglet vous permet de paramtrer le rgime du curseur selon sa fonctionnalit. Options de Pointeur: Cet onglet vous permet de configurer une relation entre la vitesse de mouvement de votre doigt et la vitesse du curseur. Il vous permet aussi dactiver un sillage de pointeur pour la flche du curseur. cran de numriseur actif REMARQUE: Votre systme possde un pav tactile capacitif rpondant aux mouvements et aux pressions du doigt.
(cette configuration est appele numriseur double ). Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements sur lcran tactile, reportez-vous au Utilisation de lcran tactile capacitif en page 43. Le numriseur intgr vous permet dutiliser le stylet comme un pointeur. Vous pouvez utiliser le stylet pour cliquer, double-
cliquer, cliquer droite, faire glisser des lments ou icnes ou pour dessiner et effacer comme avec un stylet ou un crayon dans des applications qui fonctionnent avec cette caractristique, notamment des programmes de dessin et de peinture. La moiti avant du manche fonctionne exactement comme un bouton droit de souris. La moiti arrire du manche et le commutateur deffacement lextrmit du stylet agissent comme des effaceurs. Si vous utilisez le bouton deffacement, assurez-vous de bien lenfoncer sur lcran pour activer la fonction deffacement. Figure 21. Utilisation de lcran numriseur actif 39 - Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile Commutateur de clic droite Bouton deffacement Commutateur deffacement Point dattache du cordon du stylet Figure 22. Fonctionnalits du stylet LORSQUE VOUS TOUCHEZ LCRAN AVEC LE DOIGT ET LORSQUE VOUS CRIVEZ AVEC LE STYLET, NUTILISEZ PAS DE FORCE EXCESSIVE. DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LCRAN DEL ET/OU LCRAN TACTILE. POUR ACHETER DES STYLETS SUPPLMENTAIRES OU DE REMPLACEMENT, VISITEZ LE SITE INTERNET DES ACCESSOIRES DE FUJITSU :
WWW.SHOPFUJITSU.COM. Cliquer sur lcran numriseur actif Pour faire un clic gauche, touchez lobjet que vous voulez slectionner, puis soulevez immdiatement le bout du stylet (Figure 23). Faire un clic droit sur lcran numriseur Pour faire un clic droit, maintenez le bouton sur le devant du stylet enfonc en tapotant sur lcran (Figure 24). Pour dsactiver la fonction de clic droite, allez Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration -> Matriel et son ->
Paramtres tactiles et du stylet. 40 - Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile Figure 23. Cliquer sur lcran numriseur actif Figure 24. Faire un clic droit sur lcran numriseur Double-cliquer Pour double-cliquer, touchez llment deux fois, puis retirez immdiatement le bout du stylet (Figure 25). Figure 25. Faire un double clic sur lcran 41 - Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile Glisser Glisser signifie dplacer un lment avec le stylet en touchant lcran, puis en dplaant et en soulevant le stylet. Pour glisser, touchez lcran tactile avec votre stylet sur llment que vous souhaitez dplacer. Tout en continuant de toucher lcran avec le stylet, glissez llment vers son nouvel emplacement en dplaant le stylet travers lcran, puis en soulevant le stylet pour le relcher (Figure 26). talonner lcran de numriseur actif Pour assurer une correspondance prcise entre le curseur et le stylet, vous devez excuter lUtilitaire dtalonnage de lcran tactile avant dutiliser lcran tactile pour la premire fois. Faites de mme si vous avez modifi la rsolution de lcran et/ou lorientation. Figure 26. Faire glisser un objet sur lcran LORS DU PREMIER TALONNAGE, LCRAN DE LORDINATEUR DOIT TRE EN POSITION HORIZONTALE (PAYSAGE). LA POSITION NA PLUS DIMPORTANCE POUR LES TALONNAGES SUIVANTS (PAYSAGE OU PORTRAIT). LE PREMIER TALONNAGE UTILISE 16 POINTS DE MESURE; LES TALONNAGES SUIVANTS NEN UTILISENT QUE 4. Pour excuter lutilitaire dtalonnage:
1 Allez Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Priphriques et sons, puis slectionnez Paramtres PC tablette. 3 Sous longlet Affichage, cliquez sur le bouton [talonner]. (Remarque: Si vous avez un cran tactile capacitif optionnel, vous devez cliquer sur Entre stylet ou sur Entre tactile, selon la mthode que vous dsirez talonner.) 4 Rglez lcran de votre portable un angle confortable, puis reprez le symbole (+) dans le coin suprieur gauche de lcran. 42 - Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile LORSQUE VOUS TAPOTEZ SUR LCRAN PENDANT LTALONNAGE, NUTILISEZ PAS DE FORCE EXCESSIVE. DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LCRAN DEL ET/OU LCRAN TACTILE. 5 Selon que vous procdiez ltalonnage de lentre stylet ou de lentre tactile, touchez fermement lcran avec le stylet ou votre doigt, directement sur le symbole (+). Soulevez le stylet ou votre doigt de lcran et la cible se dplacera vers une position diffrente sur lcran. 6 Rptez ltape 4 jusqu ce que vous ayez slectionn tous les symboles (+). 7 Une fois cette opration termine, appuyez sur le bouton [OK]. 8 Avec le stylet ou votre doigt, touchez plusieurs points de lcran pour vrifier quil est bien talonn. Si vous ntes pas satisfait de ltalonnage de lcran, appuyez sur le bouton [talonner] pour recommencer. Utilisation de lcran tactile capacitif Ce PC Tablette comporte un numriseur double optionnel permettant dutiliser le stylet ou un doigt comme pointeur. Ce type dcran permet galement dutiliser des mouvements pour excuter diverses oprations, notamment pour dfiler, zoomer et pivoter. LA RECONNAISSANCE DES MOUVEMENTS EST ACTIVE SUIVANT LAPPLICATION UTILISE. LE STYLET EST PRIORITAIRE PAR RAPPORT LA COMMUNICATION TACTILE. SI LE STYLET SE TROUVE DANS LE RAYON DACTION DE LCRAN, LA COMMUNICATION TACTILE EST DSACTIVE. LORSQUE LUTILISATEUR POSE UN DOIGT SUR LCRAN TACTILE, CE DERNIER RAGIT COMME SI LE STYLET TAIT UTILIS. Parcourir avec la commande gestuelle Le pav tactile vous permet de faire des agrandissements et rtrcissements sur une page, de parcourir rapidement des documents volumineux, de basculer les icnes, de basculer la barre de commandes dapplication et de retourner la dernire application. Dfilement en haut/bas:
Pour dfiler vers le haut ou vers le bas, glissez deux doigts vers le haut ou vers le bas (Figure 27). 43 - Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile Dfilement gauche/droite:
Pour dfiler vers la droite ou vers la gauche, glissez deux doigts vers la droite ou vers la gauche (Figure 27). Agrandissements/rtrcissements :
Pour faire un zoom avant ou un zoom arrire sur une page avec le pav tactile, placez deux doigts en position de pincement et cartez-les pour faire un zoom avant ou rapprochez-les pour faire un zoom arrire (Figure 28). Basculer les icnes Pour faire basculer les icnes, glissez un doigt partir du rebord droit du pav tactile (Figure 29). Basculer la barre de commandes dapplication Pour faire basculer la barre de commandes dapplication, glissez un doigt vers le bas partir du rebord suprieur du pav tactile (Figure 30). Retourner la dernire application Pour retourner la dernire application, glissez un doigt partir de la bordure gauche. Pour faire un zoom avant ou un zoom arrire sur une page avec le pav tactile, placez deux doigts en position de pincement et cartez-les pour faire un zoom avant ou rapprochez-les pour faire un zoom arrire (Figure 31). Figure 27. Dfilement Figure 28. Zoom Figure 29. Basculer les icnes Figure 30. Basculer les applications Figure 31. Dernire application 44 - Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile
. Fixation du cordon du stylet Pour viter dchapper ou de perdre votre stylo, attachez-le votre ordinateur laide du cordon fourni. Pour attacher le cordon votre PC Tablette, suivez les tapes suivantes:
1 Attachez lextrmit du cordon (petite boucle) votre stylet. Pour ce faire, enfilez la petite boucle travers le trou du stylet, puis faites passer lautre extrmit du cordon travers la boucle. 2 Attachez la grande boucle du cordon au point dattache de votre ordinateur. Pour ce faire, enfilez le bout du cordon
(grande boucle) travers le point dattache, puis faites passer le stylo travers la grande boucle. Figure 32. Installation du cordon 45 - Pav tactile/numriseur actif/cran tactile Rglage du volume Votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK est dot de plusieurs commandes de volume fonctionnant en interaction. LES APPLICATIONS POUVANT REPRODUIRE DES FICHIERS AUDIO PROPOSENT GALEMENT LEUR PROPRE COMMANDE DE VOLUME (COMMANDE LOGICIELLE). SI VOUS INSTALLEZ UN PRIPHRIQUE AUDIO EXTERNE DOT DUNE COMMANDE DE VOLUME INDPENDANTE, LA COMMANDE DE VOLUME DE LAPPAREIL ET LA COMMANDE DE VOLUME LOGICIELLE FONCTIONNERONT EN INTERACTION. VOUS DEVEZ TOUTEFOIS SAVOIR QUE SI VOUS COUPEZ LE VOLUME AVEC LA COMMANDE LOGICIELLE, LA COMMANDE DE VOLUME EXTERNE SERA GALEMENT DSACTIVE. Rglage du volume Le volume peut tre rgl de plusieurs manires:
Vous pouvez aussi ajuster et couper/remettre le volume avec licne de volume dans la zone de notification. Le volume peut tre rgl avec les boutons daugmentation/diminution du volume sur le tableau de boutons. Le volume peut galement tre rgl avec les touches de fonction [F8] et [F9]. Si vous appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F8] tout en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce, vous rduirez le volume sonore de votre systme. Si vous appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F9] tout en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce, vous augmenterez le volume sonore de votre PC Tablette. Pour rgler le volume, vous pouvez ouvrir le panneau de configuration et slectionner le Centre de mobilit Windows. Ensuite, dans la zone Volume , vous pourrez rgler le volume ou passer en sourdine. Gardez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur la touche [F3] pour couper le son. Pour rtablir le son, appuyez de nouveau sur [Fn+F3]. Le volume peut aussi tre rgl avec les commandes de volume proposes par diverses applications. Certains priphriques audio pouvant tre connects votre systme sont dots de commandes de volume. Chaque commande de volume ci-dessus impose une limite suprieure sappliquant aux autres commandes. Nous vous recommandons dessayer les diffrentes commandes pour dcouvrir le rglage vous convenant le mieux. 46 - Rglage du volume Baie modulaire Figure 33. Baie modulaire Priphriques de baie modulaire Votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK est dot dune baie modulaire. La baie modulaire permet dinsrer un lecteur optique, une batterie au lithium ou un volet rducteur de poids. Lun des priphriques indiqus ci-dessous sera install dans la baie modulaire. Graveur de DVD multiformat double couche: Ce lecteur vous permet de lire des films, des logiciels et des DVD/CD audio, ainsi que denregistrer des DVD, des CD et des DVD-RAM. Lecteur modulaire Blu-ray RW. Ce lecteur permet de lire et graver des disques Blu-ray. Batterie au lithium modulaire: cette batterie rechargeable peut tre utilise pour alimenter votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK lorsque aucun adaptateur ny est connect. Volet rducteur de poids: Ce volet permet de remplir la baie lorsque vous ny insrez aucun priphrique. LA BAIE MODULAIRE NE DOIT JAMAIS TRE VIDE LORSQUE LORDINATEUR EST EN MARCHE. SI VOUS LA LAISSEZ VIDE, DE LA POUSSIRE ET DES CORPS TRANGERS PEUVENT SINFILTRER DANS LORDINATEUR. Retrait et installation de priphriques modulaires La baie modulaire permet dinstaller et retirer des priphriques de deux faons:
Installation hors tension: installation ou remplacement dun priphrique lorsque votre PC Tablette est teint. Installation sous tension: installation ou remplacement dun priphrique lorsque le systme fonctionne, grce licne Dconnecter/jecter en toute scurit de votre zone de notification. 47 - Priphriques de baie modulaire Remplacement hors tension Pour remplacer froid un priphrique modulaire dans la baie modulaire, procdez comme suit:
1 Fermez les fichiers ouverts et teignez votre ordinateur. 2 Tirez sur le loquet de dgagement du compartiment multifonction. Le priphrique install sort lgrement, vous permettant de le saisir. 3 Retirez compltement le priphrique de la baie. Vous devrez utiliser une force lgre. 4 Insrez le priphrique que vous dsirez installer dans lordinateur jusqu ce quil senclenche. 5 Vous pouvez maintenant rallumer votre ordinateur en toute scurit. 6 Vous pourrez ensuite accder au priphrique et lutiliser normalement. Votre PC Tablette dtectera automatiquement le nouveau priphrique et lactivera lors du dmarrage de votre systme. Une lettre de dsignation du priphrique sera attribue et visible dans le Poste de travail et dans Fichier/Explorateur Windows. Remplacement sous tension Pour remplacer un priphrique chaud, employez lutilitaire Dconnecter ou jecter un priphrique en toute scurit. Licne de cet utilitaire est disponible dans la zone de notification. Cliquez sur licne et suivez les instructions saffichant lcran. 48 - Priphriques de baie modulaire Loquet d'ouverture de la baie modulair Figure 34. Retrait/installation dun priphrique modulaire Baie modulaire tactile Bouton Windows Bouton d'alimetation illustr titr de rfrence Figure 35. Boutons Scurit/PC Tablette du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T90 Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Le PC tablette LIFEBOOK T904 est dot dune fonctionnalit unique : le panneau de boutons Scurit et PC tablette, avec un bouton Windows indpendant. Ces boutons vous permettent de protger votre ordinateur contre toute utilisation non autorise et de lancer des applications et actions spcifique au simple toucher dun bouton. Fonctions des boutons de scurit Si le systme de scurit est activ au dmarrage de votre PC Tablette ou partir du mode Veille prolonge ou Hors tension, vous devrez entrer un mot de passe laide des boutons de scurit. Une fois le mot de passe valide entr, le systme reprend son fonctionnement. Cinq boutons de scurit/application tablette sont situs sur le ct infrieur droit de lcran lorsquil est configur pour une utilisation en ordinateur portable classique. Les cinq boutons sont utiliss pour lactivation des fonctions de scurit. Quatre des boutons sont utiliss pour entrer un mot de passe et le cinquime lest en tant que bouton dEntre. Pour plus dinformations sur chacun des boutons Scurit, consultez Tableau 3. 49 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Icne de bouton tat du systme Fonction du tableau de scurit Pr-dmarrage ou reprise partir du mode Veille Bouton de scurit 1 Bouton de scurit 2 Bouton de scurit 3 Bouton de scurit 4 Bouton de scurit [Entre]
Table 3. Fonctions des boutons de scurit 50 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Fonctions des boutons de post-identification Les six boutons peuvent tre utiliss aprs louverture de session. Pour plus dinformations sur les fonctions de post-identification, consultez Tableau 3. Icne de bouton tat du systme Fonctions PC Tablette Post-dmarrage (bureau Windows affich) Le bouton Windows a deux fonctions :
Action principale : ouvre le menu Dmarrer bouton [Windows] + bouton
[Alimentation]: ouvre le gestionnaire des tches Ctrl+Alt+Suppr Diminution du volume Augmentation du volume dsactive et ractive la rotation automatique ouvre lutilitaire de menu Fujitsu ouvre lapplication Journal Windows Table 3. Fonctions des boutons PC Tablette pendant la post-identification Bouton Windows En postconnexion, le bouton Windows sert activer deux fonctions. Lorsque vous appuyez uniquement sur ce bouton, il ouvre le menu Dmarrer. Si vous appuyez sur le commutateur dalimentation en mme temps que sur le bouton Windows, vous obtenez les mmes fonctions quavec la combinaison [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Suppr]. 51 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Boutons Dim. volume/Augm. volume Ces boutons servent augmenter ou diminuer le volume. Blocage de la rotation La fonction de blocage de rotation sert dsactiver ou ractiver la rotation automatique. Lorsque lordinateur est en configuration tablette et si la fonction de rotation automatique est ractive, lcran tourne automatiquement ds que lordinateur est tourn. Lorsque la rotation automatique est dsactive, lcran reste en position quels que soient les mouvements de lordinateur. Bouton A Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton A aprs connexion, lutilitaire de menu Fujitsu saffiche. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton A, le voyant de batterie indique la capacit restante de la batterie (Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24.); il steint automatiquement cinq secondes aprs que vous avez relch le bouton. Remarque: La fonction de confirmation de charge de la batterie est disponible uniquement lorsque le systme est teint (S3/S4/S5). Bouton B Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton B aprs connexion, le Journal Windows saffiche. Modification des fonctions des boutons PC Tablette Les boutons Applications A et B peuvent tre changs pour lancer un programme ou effectuer une tche que vous choisissez. Par dfaut, le bouton Application A lance le menu Fujitsu et le bouton Application B, le Journal MS. Pour lancer diffrentes applications ou amener les boutons Applications A et B effectuer une tche spcifique:
1 Dans le Panneau de configuration, double-cliquez sur licne Paramtres des boutons tablette. 2 Slectionnez longlet Boutons tablette et, dans la liste, cliquez sur le bouton que vous souhaitez modifier. 3 Cliquez sur [Changer] et ouvrez la liste droulante dans le champ Appuyer :. 4 Slectionnez laction que vous voulez voir le bouton effectuer. Si vous voulez lancer un programme, cliquez sur Dmarrer un programme, puis naviguez vers lemplacement du programme. 5 Cliquez sur [OK], puis cliquez nouveau sur [OK]. Les boutons effectueront maintenant les actions que vous leur avez assignes. 52 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Configuration du tableau de scurit LIFEBOOK Lorsque vous recevez votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK, lapplication du tableau de scurit est prinstalle, mais sans aucun mot de passe dfini. Les rubriques suivantes dcrivent en dtail le tableau de scurit et la faon de configurer, de changer ou de supprimer des mots de passe. Boutons numrots Utilisez ces boutons pour saisir votre mot de passe. Bouton Entre Aprs avoir entr les codes numrots, appuyez sur ce bouton pour enregistrer le mot de passe dans le PC Tablette. Mots de passe Des mots de passe dutilisateur et de superviseur peuvent tre dfinis sur lordinateur. Afin de faciliter la gestion des systmes, le mot de passe de superviseur est habituellement le mme sur tous les PC Tablette dun groupe de travail, dun bureau ou dune entreprise. Toutefois, les ordinateurs individuels utiliss dans un environnement de groupe ne devraient pas utiliser un mot de passe commun. Un mot de passe se compose de une cinq frappes de bouton, suivies du bouton Entrer. Une frappe valide peut faire intervenir un seul bouton ou jusqu quatre boutons simultanment. Voici des exemples de frappes valides:
Bouton [4] enfonc seul Boutons [2] et [3] enfoncs en mme temps Boutons [1], [2] et [4] enfoncs en mme temps Boutons [1], [2], [3] et [4] enfoncs en mme temps Voici maintenant des mots de passe valides. Les codes entre accolades ({}) font intervenir plus dun bouton.
{[2]+[3]}, [1], [Entre]
[4], [Entre]
{[1]+[3]}, {[2]+[3]+[4]}, [1], [4], [2], [Entre]
Dfinir des mots de passe Lorsque lordinateur est expdi de lusine, aucun mot de passe nest dfini. Vous avez le choix de le laisser tel quel ou de dfinir un mot de passe de superviseur et dutilisateur. Vous devez dfinir le mot de passe de superviseur avant celui de lutilisateur. 53 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK LE MOT DE PASSE DU SUPERVISEUR PERMET DE CONTOURNER LE MOT DE PASSE DUTILISATEUR AU CAS O CE DERNIER SERAIT OUBLI. UTILIS SEUL, LE MOT DE PASSE DE SUPERVISEUR NE VERROUILLE PAS LE SYSTME. LES DEUX MOTS DE PASSE (SUPERVISEUR ET UTILISATEUR) DOIVENT TRE DFINIS POUR QUE LE TABLEAU DE SCURIT FONCTIONNE. Dfinition du mot de passe de superviseur Vous devez dtenir un mot de passe de superviseur avant de paramtrer tout mot de passe dutilisateur. Le mot de passe de superviseur permet de contourner le mot de passe dutilisateur. 1 Windows 7 : Allez au menu Dmarrer. Windows 8 : Cliquez sur lcran de dmarrage rapide, puis cliquez droite sur Toutes les applications . 2 Cliquez sur Excuter. 3 Entrez: C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\Security Panel Application\Supervisor\FJSECS.EXE, puis appuyez sur [Entre]
4 Suivez les instructions affiches lcran pour dfinir le mot de passe de superviseur. Dfinition du mot de passe dutilisateur 1 Allez au menu Dmarrer. 2 Cliquez sur Tous les programmes. 3 Cliquez sur Application Tableau de scurit et dapplications -> Application Tableau de scurit. 4 Suivez les instructions qui saffichent pour dfinir le mot de passe dutilisateur. VOUS POUVEZ CHANGER OU SUPPRIMER LE MOT DE PASSE DE SUPERVISEUR OU DUTILISATEUR EN RPTANT LES TAPES PRCDENTES. 54 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Utilisation de votre tableau de scurit LIFEBOOK La fonction de verrouillage de scurit est active la mise sous tension du systme, de mme qu sa reprise depuis le mode veille prolonge. Il faut toujours utiliser les boutons du tableau de scurit pour entrer le mot de passe dutilisateur. Votre systme nentamera la squence damorage quaprs lentre du mot de passe de superviseur ou dutilisateur. Lorsque le systme est hors tension 1 Mettez le systme sous tension. 2 Lorsque le voyant de scurit clignote, entrez le mot de passe puis appuyez sur le bouton [Entre] (par exemple:
si le mot de passe est 22222, appuyez dabord cinq fois sur le bouton 2, puis sur le bouton [Entre]. Le PC Tablette dmarrera normalement. Lorsque le systme est en veille prolonge 1 Appuyez sur la glissire veille/reprise. 2 Lorsque le voyant de scurit clignote, entrez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur le bouton [Entre]; lordinateur doit alors reprendre son fonctionnement normal. Entre dun mot de passe incorrect Aprs trois checs successifs de saisie dun mot de passe de superviseur ou dutilisateur, le systme met des bips pendant environ une minute. Si le mot de passe entr durant cet intervalle (pendant les bips) est valide, le signal sonore sarrte et le PC Tablette reprend son fonctionnement normal. Si aucun mot de passe nest saisi, ou si un mot de passe incorrect est nouveau saisi, le systme retourne son tat prcdent (hors tension) et le voyant de scurit steint. Pour ractiver le portable aprs un chec de la saisie du mot de passe, vous devez appuyer sur la glissire veille/reprise, puis saisir un mot de passe valide. NOUBLIEZ PAS LE MOT DE PASSE DUTILISATEUR DFINI DANS LAPPLICATION TABLEAU DE SCURIT. SINON, VOUS NE POURREZ PLUS UTILISER LORDINATEUR. LE MOT DE PASSE DE SUPERVISEUR PERMET TOUTEFOIS DE CONTOURNER LE MOT DE PASSE DUTILISATEUR. Mises en garde Ouverture et fermeture du couvercle de lcran Pour changer la procdure excute par le systme lorsque le couvercle est ferm :
55 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK 1 Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration. Si laffichage est en vue Catgorie , cliquez sur lun des choix dicne dans Affichage par : Cliquez sur Options dalimentation. 2 Dans le panneau de gauche, cliquez sur Choisir ce que fait la fermeture du couvercle. 3 Sous Lorsque je ferme le couvercle, slectionnez laction souhaite puis cliquez sur le bouton [Sauvegarder les modifications]. Fonctionnement avec une batterie faible Si la batterie de votre PC Tablette est faible, le fait denfoncer la glissire veille/reprise active simplement le voyant de scurit. Votre portable ne se dverrouille pas et le voyant de scurit steint aprs une minute. Pour revenir au fonctionnement normal, branchez dabord une source dalimentation lordinateur. Vous pouvez alors le dverrouiller. Dsinstallation/rinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit Deux mthodes peuvent tre utilises pour dsinstaller lapplication Tableau de scurit:
Supprimez les mots de passe et dsinstaller lapplication. Cette mthode dsactive toutes les fonctions de scurit. Dsinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit avec le mot de passe toujours actif. Si cette option est choisie, plus aucune modification du mot de passe ne sera possible. Dsinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit Cette opration est utile lorsque lutilisateur ne veut aucune protection par mot de passe et ne veut donner personne lutilitaire de dfinition de mot de passe sur son ordinateur. Dans ce cas, si des mots de passe (superviseur, utilisateur ou les deux) sont dfinis, les mots de passe doivent tre effacs AVANT de supprimer lapplication. Pour effacer les mots de passe, suivez la mme procdure qu la section DFINITION DES MOTS DE PASSE, mais slectionnez cette fois loption SUPPRIMER; ensuite, entrez le mot de passe actuel, puis cliquez sur le bouton Suivant. Rpondez [Oui]
la demande de confirmation. Suppression de lapplication Tableau de scurit avec des mots de passe encore actifs Lutilisation de cette fonction ne permettra aucune modification du mot de passe. LA SUPPRESSION DE LAPPLICATION NE SUPPRIME PAS LE MOT DE PASSE. LA DSINSTALLATION DE LAPPLICATION NE SUPPRIME PAS LE MOT DE PASSE, MAIS SIMPLEMENT LA CAPACIT DE MODIFIER, DAJOUTER ET DE SUPPRIMER DES MOTS DE PASSE. POUR CHANGER VOTRE MOT DE PASSE, VOUS DEVREZ RINSTALLER LAPPLICATION. 56 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Utilisateur:
1 Allez Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration. 2 Dans le panneau de configuration, ouvrez Programmes et fonctions. 3 Dans la liste, slectionnez Tableau de scurit / Utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Dsinstaller/Modifier. 4 Lorsque la bote Contrle du compte utilisateur apparat, cliquez sur Continuer. Superviseur:
1 Allez Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration. 2 Dans le Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des proprits de programme. 3 Dans la liste, slectionnez Tableau de scurit / Superviseur, puis cliquez sur Dsinstaller/Modifier. 4 Lorsque la bote Contrle du compte utilisateur apparat, cliquez sur Continuer. Rinstallation du tableau de scurit Pour rinstaller le Tableau de scurit pour superviseur et utilisateur, vous devez utiliser lutilitaire de gestion des tlchargements (FSDM) de Fujitsu. Cet utilitaire vous permet de tlcharger les derniers pilotes, utilitaires et applications du site de soutien Fujitsu. Pour y accder, rendez-vous sur le site de soutien en ligne
<http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS>tal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS. Le logiciel du Tableau de scurit et dapplications se compose de deux progiciels : Tableau de scurit et dapplications/superviseur et Tableau de scurit et dapplications/utilisateur. 1 Allez sur le site dassistance et tlchargez les deux progiciels sur votre ordinateur. 2 Double-cliquez sur setupS.exe dans le dossier du progiciel Tableau de scurit et dapplications/superviseur. La fentre dinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit saffiche. Suivez les directives fournies lcran. 3 Double-cliquez sur setup.exe dans le dossier du progiciel Tableau de scurit et dapplications/utilisateur. La fentre dinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit saffiche. Suivez les directives fournies lcran. 57 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Chapitre 2 Premire mise en marche de votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK Sources dalimentation Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu peut utiliser quatre sources dalimentation diffrentes: une batterie au lithium principale, une batterie secondaire de baie modulaire, un adaptateur secteur et un adaptateur auto/avion. Connexion des adaptateurs dalimentation Ladaptateur secteur et ladaptateur auto/avion disponible en option permettent tous deux de faire fonctionner votre PC Tablette et de charger les batteries. Connexion de ladaptateur secteur 1 Branchez le cble de sortie c.c. dans la prise dalimentation c.c. de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. 2 Branchez ladaptateur secteur sur une prise lectrique secteur (c.a.). Connexion de ladaptateur auto/avion disponible en option 1 Branchez le cble de sortie c.c. sur la prise dalimentation c.c. de votre ordinateur. 2 Branchez ladaptateur auto/avion dans lallume-cigare dune automobile, ou, 3 Branchez ladaptateur auto/avion sur la prise dalimentation c.c. de votre sige davion. 58 Prise dalimentation c.c. Adaptateur secteur Figure 36. Connexion de ladaptateur secteur Passer dune alimentation sur adaptateur secteur ou auto/avion une alimentation sur batterie 1 Assurez-vous quau moins une batterie charge est installe dans votre ordinateur. 2 Dbranchez ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur auto/avion. LORSQUE VOUS RECEVEZ VOTRE NOUVEL ORDINATEUR, LA BATTERIE AU LITHIUM NEST PAS CHARGE. LORS DE LA PREMIRE UTILISATION DE VOTRE ORDINATEUR, VOUS DEVEZ CONNECTER LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR OU LADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION. 59 - Sources dalimentation Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Mise sous tension Alimentation Glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise Le commutateur dalimentation/veille/reprise permet dallumer votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK, de le mettre en sommeil ou en veille prolonge et de le rveiller sil est en sommeil ou en veille prolonge. (Vous pouvez galement vous servir de ce commutateur pour mettre le systme hors tension lorsque vous lenfoncez pendant environ cinq secondes. Ceci savre parfois utile lorsque le systme cale. Toutefois, cette faon de mettre lordinateur hors tension ne doit pas tre utilise rgulirement.) Vous pouvez aussi teindre votre ordinateur laide de la mthode suivante : Depuis lcran de dmarrage moderne, ouvrez les Icnes ([Windows]+C ou dposez le pointeur [-] dans le coin infrieur droit de lcran), puis cliquez sur [Paramtres]->[Alimentation] et slectionnez Arrter dans la liste affiche. LORSQUE VOUS ALLUMEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR PORTABLE, ASSUREZ-VOUS DAVOIR UNE SOURCE DALIMENTATION. VOUS DEVEZ DONC AVOIR AU MOINS UNE BATTERIE INSTALLE ET CHARGE OU AVOIR BRANCH LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR OU LADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION UNE PRISE SOUS TENSION. Lorsque vous avez connect votre adaptateur secteur ou charg la batterie au lithium interne, vous pouvez appuyer sur ce commutateur pour allumer votre ordinateur. (Figure 37) Glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise Figure 37. Dmarrer le PC Tablette 60 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK LORSQUE LE LIFEBOOK EST ALLUM, NE LE TRANSPORTEZ PAS ET PROTGEZ-LE DES CHOCS ET DES VIBRATIONS CAR VOUS RISQUERIEZ ALORS DE LENDOMMAGER. Lorsque vous allumez votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK, ce dernier excute un auto-test de mise sous tension pour vrifier les composants internes et la configuration. Si une anomalie est dcouverte, votre systme met un avertissement audio et/ou affiche un message derreur. Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 103. Selon la nature du problme, vous pourrez poursuivre le dmarrage du systme dexploitation ou vous devrez ouvrir lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS pour corriger certains paramtres. Une fois les diagnostics termins, le PC Tablette charge le systme dexploitation. VOUS NE DEVEZ JAMAIS TEINDRE VOTRE ORDINATEUR PORTABLE DURANT LAUTO-TEST DE MISE SOUS TENSION. AUTREMENT, LA PROCHAINE FOIS QUE VOUS ALLUMEREZ LORDINATEUR, CE DERNIER AFFICHERA UN MESSAGE DERREUR. Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 103. Procdure damorage La procdure de dmarrage de lordinateur invoque une procdure damorage, laquelle fait dabord appel au BIOS. La premire fois que votre ordinateur portable est allum, la mmoire principale du systme est vide et doit trouver les instructions de dmarrage de lordinateur. Ces informations se trouvent dans le programme BIOS. Chaque fois que vous dmarrez ou redmarrez votre ordinateur, il excute une procdure damorage et lcran affiche le logo Fujitsu jusqu ce que le systme dexploitation soit charg. Cette procdure comporte diverses oprations dont un auto-test de mise sous tension. Si la procdure damorage est excute sans chec et sans demande daccs lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS, le message de bienvenue du systme dexploitation saffiche. La procdure damorage est excute lorsque :
Vous allumez votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK. Vous pouvez redmarrer votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK partir du menu [Paramtres] -> [Alimentation]. Un logiciel dclenche un redmarrage du systme (par exemple, lorsque vous installez une nouvelle application). 61 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Mots de passe daccs au disque dur Pour mieux scuriser vos donnes, vous pouvez crer des mots de passe contrlant laccs au(x) disque(s) dur(s). Cette fonction est gre par lutilitaire de configuration BIOS. Pour savoir comment procder, reportez-vous la section Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS ci-aprs. RETENEZ BIEN VOS MOTS DE PASSE. SI VOUS CONFIGUREZ DES MOTS DE PASSE DE MATRE ET DUTILISATEUR, PUIS QUE VOUS LES OUBLIEZ, FUJITSU AMERICA NE POURRA PAS RINITIALISER VOTRE SYSTME. VOUS RISQUERIEZ ALORS DE PERDRE DES DONNES ET DE DEVOIR REMPLACER VOTRE CARTE SYSTME OU VOTRE DISQUE DUR. Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS Lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS dfinit lenvironnement de fonctionnement de votre ordinateur. Votre BIOS a t configur en usine pour des conditions dutilisation normales. Vous ne devriez donc pas avoir configurer ni modifier votre environnement BIOS pour utiliser lordinateur. Lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS permet galement de paramtrer des proprits telles que la scurit des donnes systme ou les mots de passe. Entre dans lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS Pour ouvrir lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS, excutez les oprations suivantes :
1 Allumez ou redmarrez votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK. 2 Pour accder lutilitaire, appuyez sur la touche [F2] lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat lcran. Le menu principal de lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS saffichera avec les paramtres courants. Avec la touche flche droite ou gauche, parcourez les autres menus de configuration et vrifiez/modifiez les paramtres actuels. 62 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Guide dinformation sur le BIOS Un guide sur le BIOS du LIFEBOOK est accessible en ligne sur le site Internet de support et dassistance de Fujitsu, ladresse:
http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php. Une fois sur le site, slectionnez Users Guides
(Guides dutilisation) sous Online Support (Assistance en ligne). Slectionnez votre produit, sa srie et son modle, puis cliquez sur [Go]. SI VOS PARAMTRES DE SCURIT DE DONNES LEXIGENT, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS DEVIEZ SAISIR UN MOT DE PASSE AVANT DOUVRIR LE MENU PRINCIPAL DU BIOS. Amorage du systme Il est fortement recommand de ne pas installer de priphrique externe et de ne pas insrer de DVD/CD dans votre lecteur tant que la procdure de dmarrage nest pas entirement termine. La premire fois que vous allumez votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK, lcran affiche le logo Fujitsu. Si vous nintervenez pas, lordinateur charge le systme dexploitation et lance la procdure douverture Windows. Premier dmarrage de Windows La premire fois que vous faites dmarrer le systme et que vous suivez les instructions lcran, vous voyez apparatre une fentre de bienvenue. Aprs louverture de session, il faut moins dune minute lordinateur pour amorcer Windows. Pendant cette procdure, vous voyez une barre de progression et des messages interactifs. Lors du premier dmarrage, vous devrez lire et accepter les contrats de licence dutilisation de Microsoft et Fujitsu. VOUS NE POURREZ LUTILISER QUE SI VOUS ACCEPTEZ LE CONTRAT DE LICENCE. SI VOUS NALLEZ PAS AU BOUT DE CETTE PROCDURE, VOTRE ORDINATEUR RETOURNE LCRAN DE BIENVENUE WINDOWS, MME SI VOUS ESSAYEZ DTEINDRE LORDINATEUR ET DE LE REDMARRER. Plusieurs autres fentres safficheront, vous demandant de saisir un nom et une description pour votre ordinateur, ainsi quun mot de passe dadministrateur et un nom de domaine. Lisez attentivement les instructions saffichant lcran et remplissez les espaces mesure que le systme vous le demande. 63 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Aprs la premire procdure damorage, vous verrez apparatre lcran de dmarrage moderne. Certains raccourcis pouvant vous tre utiles : Appuyez sur les touches Windows + D pour aller au bureau Windows classique ou appuyez sur les touches Windows + M pour charger le bureau Windows classique et rduire toutes les applications. Installation de lutilitaire Bonus Apps Aprs le premier dmarrage de votre systme, une icne Applications en prime saffiche sur votre bureau Windows. Cliquez sur cette icne et vous verrez une liste dapplications supplmentaires pouvant tre installes. Vous pouvez galement accder lutilitaire Bonus Apps en ouvrant le tableau Icnes sur lcran de dmarrage moderne et en cherchant Bonus Apps . Les applications dj installes sont affiches en gris et celles que vous pouvez installer sont affiches en bleu. Pour slectionner une application que vous dsirez installer, cochez la case de choix ct de lapplication ou cliquez sur [Slectionner tout] si vous dsirez installer toutes les applications disponibles. Lorsque vous avez fait vos choix, cliquez sur [Installer]. Veuillez prendre note que dans certains cas (selon les applications slectionnes), il est possible que vous deviez redmarrer le systme aprs linstallation des applications. Si vous demandez linstallation de plusieurs applications et que lune delles ncessite un redmarrage du systme, le redmarrage est excut immdiatement et les applications restantes sont ensuite installes. Enregistrement de votre LIFEBOOK chez Fujitsu Pour enregistrer votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK, vous pouvez aller sur notre site Internet: http://www.us.fujitsu.com/
computers. Pour vous enregistrer en ligne, vous devez avoir un compte valide auprs dun fournisseur daccs Internet. 64 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Gestion de lalimentation Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK possde plusieurs dispositifs permettant dconomiser lnergie des batteries. Certains dentre eux sont automatiques et ne ncessitent donc aucune intervention. Cependant, dautres dpendent de paramtres que vous pouvez configurer en fonction de vos conditions dutilisation, notamment en ce qui concerne la luminosit de lcran. La gestion interne de lalimentation de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK est contrle partir dun paramtrage du systme dexploitation. Outre les dispositifs prcdents de conservation de lnergie de la batterie, dautres moyens sont votre disposition pour viter lpuisement trop rapide de votre batterie. Par exemple, vous pouvez crer un profil de conservation de lnergie appropri, mettre votre ordinateur en mode sommeil lorsquil nexcute aucune opration et vous pouvez limiter lutilisation des priphriques consommant beaucoup dnergie. linstar de tous les ordinateurs portables aliments par batterie, vous devez trouver le meilleur compromis entre performance et rendement nergtique. Sous Windows 7, si votre systme dispose dune deuxime batterie, vous pouvez slectionner les paramtres de dcharge de batterie en choisissant Dmarrer -> Utilitaire Batterie -> Paramtres de dcharge de batterie. Commutateur dalimentation/veille/reprise Lorsque le PC Tablette est allum, vous pouvez utiliser le commutateur dalimentation/veille/reprise pour placer manuellement lordinateur en mode sommeil. Assurez-vous alors que le PC Tablette nest pas en train daccder des donnes, puis enfoncez et relchez immdiatement le commutateur dalimentation/veille/reprise. Votre systme se mettra alors en mode sommeil. Pour rveiller lordinateur lorsquil est en mode sommeil, appuyez de nouveau sur la glissire dalimentation/
veille/reprise. Pour connatre ltat de votre ordinateur (sommeil ou en activit), observez le voyant indicateur de lalimentation qui fait partie du commutateur de veille/reprise (Voir figure 2 en page 14 for location) Si le voyant est allum sans clignoter, lordinateur LIFEBOOK est entirement fonctionnel. Si le voyant est allum et quil clignote, le PC Tablette est en mode sommeil. Si le voyant est teint, le PC Tablette est teint ou en veille prolonge. Voir Mode veille prolonge (enregistrement sur le disque) en page 67. Mode sommeil (veille) Lorsque le mode sommeil est activ, le systme conserve le contenu de la mmoire du PC Tablette durant la priode dinactivit en maintenant lalimentation de certains composants critiques. Ce mode teint lunit centrale, lcran, le disque dur et tous les autres composants internes sauf ceux qui sont ncessaires pour conserver la mmoire du systme et permettre son redmarrage. 65 - Gestion de lalimentation Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK peut tre mis en sommeil de plusieurs faons :
En appuyant sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise (si lordinateur est allum). En cliquant sur licne dalimentation du menu de verrouillage. En slectionnant le mode sommeil partir du menu [Paramtres] -> [Alimentation]. Lorsque le dlai dinactivit est atteint. En laissant la charge de la batterie descendre au niveau Avertissement de batterie faible. Dans ces situations, la mmoire de systme du PC Tablette enregistre gnralement les fichiers sur lesquels vous travaillez, des informations sur les applications ouvertes et dautres donnes ncessaires aux oprations en cours. Lorsque vous quittez le mode veille, le PC Tablette retourne ltat o vous lavez laiss. Pour reprendre lutilisation du PC Tablette, vous devez employer la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise et vous devez disposer dune source dalimentation valide. SI LORDINATEUR UTILISE LALIMENTATION PAR BATTERIE, NOUBLIEZ PAS QUE LA BATTERIE CONTINUE SE DCHARGER MME EN MODE VEILLE, MAIS PLUS LENTEMENT QUEN MODE DE FONCTIONNEMENT NORMAL. SI VOUS DSACTIVEZ LE COMMUTATEUR DE VEILLE/REPRISE, VOUS NE POURREZ PLUS LUTILISER POUR METTRE LE PC TABLETTE LIFEBOOK EN MODE SOMMEIL OU EN VEILLE PROLONGE. LA FONCTION DE REPRISE DU COMMUTATEUR NE PEUT PAS TRE DSACTIVE. IL EST POSSIBLE QUAVEC CERTAINES CARTES PC CARD, VOUS NE PUISSIEZ PAS PLACER LORDINATEUR EN MODE SOMMEIL OU EN VEILLE PROLONGE. POUR DE PLUS AMPLES INFORMATIONS, CONSULTEZ LA DOCUMENTATION DE VOTRE CARTE PC CARD. LORSQUE DES CARTES PC CARD OU DES PRIPHRIQUES EXTERNES SONT UTILISS, LORDINATEUR NE PEUT RETROUVER EXACTEMENT SON TAT ANTRIEUR APRS AVOIR T EN VEILLE PROLONGE CAR TOUS LES PRIPHRIQUES EXTERNES SONT RINITIALISS DURANT LA PROCDURE DE REPRISE DE LORDINATEUR. SI LE PC TABLETTE UTILISE DES INFORMATIONS LORSQUE VOUS LE METTEZ EN SOMMEIL OU EN VEILLE PROLONGE, LES MODIFICATIONS AUX FICHIERS OUVERTS SERONT PERDUES. LORSQUE VOUS ACTIVEZ LE MODE SOMMEIL, LES FICHIERS SONT LAISSS OUVERTS ET LA MMOIRE DEMEURE ACTIVE. SI VOUS CHOISISSEZ LE MODE VEILLE PROLONGE, LA MMOIRE EST TRANSFRE SUR LE DISQUE DUR INTERNE. LE PRINCIPAL AVANTAGE DU MODE VEILLE PROLONGE EST QUAUCUNE NERGIE NEST NCESSAIRE POUR CONSERVER VOS DONNES. CET AVANTAGE EST PARTICULIREMENT IMPORTANT SI VOUS COMPTEZ LAISSER VOTRE PC TABLETTE LIFEBOOK EN VEILLE PENDANT DE LONGUES PRIODES. LES PRINCIPAUX INCONVNIENTS DE LA VEILLE PROLONGE SONT UNE PLUS LONGUE DURE DES PROCDURES DE MISE EN VEILLE ET DE REPRISE, AINSI QUE LA RINITIALISATION DES PRIPHRIQUES. LE SYSTME EST RGL POUR UTILISER LE PLAN DAUTONOMIE MAXIMUM LORSQUIL EST ALIMENT PAR BATTERIE. SI VOUS CHANGEZ LE PROFIL DU PLAN DALIMENTATION, LA DURE DE VIE DE LA BATTERIE PEUT CHANGER. 66 - Gestion de lalimentation Mode veille prolonge (enregistrement sur le disque) Le mode de veille prolonge enregistre le contenu de la mmoire du systme sur le disque dur du PC Tablette dans le cadre du mode veille/reprise. Cette fonction peut tre active et dsactive. Activation et dsactivation de la fonction de veille prolonge Pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction de veille prolonge, excutez les oprations suivantes:
1 Allez lcran de dmarrage moderne, appuyez sur [Windows]+[X], puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration dans le menu et slectionnez Options dalimentation. 2 Puis slectionnez Choisir ce que fait le bouton dalimentation ou Choisir ce que fait la fermeture du couvercle, puis faites votre slection (Ne rien faire, Sommeil, Veille prolonge ou Arrter). Gestion de lalimentation dans Windows Licne des options dalimentation disponible dans le Panneau de configuration Windows vous permet de configurer certains paramtres de gestion de lalimentation. Par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser les Options dalimentation pour rgler les valeurs de temporisation (dlai dinactivit) afin dteindre lcran et les disques durs selon que lordinateur est aliment par batterie ou par lun des adaptateurs. Redmarrage du systme Si votre systme est allum et que vous dsirez le redmarrer, vous devez excuter les oprations suivantes :
1 Depuis lcran de dmarrage moderne, ouvrez les Icnes ([Windows]+C) ou dposez le pointeur [-] dans le coin infrieur droit de lcran), puis cliquez sur [Paramtres]->[Alimentation]. 2 Dans la liste, slectionnez Redmarrer. SI VOUS ARRTEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR SANS FERMER WINDOWS OU SI VOUS LALLUMEZ MOINS DE 10 SECONDES APRS LAVOIR ARRT, VOUS RISQUEZ DE PROVOQUER UNE ERREUR LORS DU PROCHAIN DMARRAGE DU PC TABLETTE. 67 - Gestion de lalimentation Mise hors tension Avant de mettre lordinateur hors tension, assurez-vous que le voyant daccs au disque dur/lecteur optique est teint. Si vous arrtez lordinateur alors quun disque est en cours dutilisation, vous risquez de perdre des donnes. Pour vous assurer que lordinateur sarrte sans erreur, utilisez la procdure darrt Windows. TEIGNEZ TOUJOURS VOTRE ORDINATEUR AVANT DE LE TRANSPORTER ET/OU DE LEMBALLER. APRS AVOIR TEINT LE SYSTME, ATTENDEZ QUE LE PANNEAU DE VOYANTS DTAT INDIQUE BIEN LE STATUT HORS TENSION (CEST DIRE QUAUCUN VOYANT NEST ALLUM). IL EST POSSIBLE QUE LAPPAREIL NE SE METTE PAS AUTOMATIQUEMENT EN MODE HORS TENSION OU VEILLE PROLONGE APRS QUE VOUS AVEZ FERM LE COUVERCLE. CETTE SITUATION PEUT SE PRODUIRE EN FONCTION DES PARAMTRES DE SCURIT PAR MOT DE PASSE QUI GRENT LA PR-INITIALISATION DU SYSTME OU DUNE AUTRE APPLICATION EN COURS DUTILISATION SUR LORDINATEUR. SI VOUS TENTEZ DE TRANSPORTER LORDINATEUR SANS LTEINDRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DE LENDOMMAGER EN LE SOUMETTANT DES CHOCS OU EN LAMENANT EN TAT DE SURCHAUFFE CAR LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION PEUVENT TRE BLOQUES OU OBSTRUES. AVANT DE COUPER LALIMENTATION LECTRIQUE, NOUBLIEZ PAS DE FERMER TOUS LES FICHIERS, DE QUITTER TOUTES LES APPLICATIONS ET DARRTER VOTRE SYSTME DEXPLOITATION. SI DES FICHIERS SONT OUVERTS LORSQUE VOUS COUPEZ LALIMENTATION, VOUS PERDREZ TOUTES LES MODIFICATIONS NAYANT PAS T ENREGISTRES ET VOUS RISQUEZ DE CAUSER DES ERREURS DE DISQUE. Si vous arrtez votre systme depuis Windows, vous permettez au PC Tablette de terminer les oprations en cours, vous lui permettez aussi dexcuter les oprations de mise hors tension dans le bon ordre et vous vitez les risques derreur. La procdure approprie est la suivante :
Depuis lcran de dmarrage moderne, ouvrez les Icnes ([Windows] + C) ou dposez le pointeur [-] dans le coin infrieur droit de lcran), puis cliquez sur [Paramtres]->[Alimentation]. Dans la liste, slectionnez Arrter. Si vous comptez entreposer votre PC Tablette pendant un mois ou plus, consultez la section Entretien. 68 - Gestion de lalimentation Conformit ENERGY STAR Votre systme Fujitsu est un ordinateur mobile homologu par ENERGY STAR. En choisissant un ordinateur dot de la dernire technologie dconomie de lnergie, vous contribuez prserver notre environnement pour les gnrations futures. Le programme ENERGY STAR a t mis en place conjointement par lU.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(Agence de protection de lenvironnement amricaine), lU.S. Department of Energy (Dpartement de lnergie amricain), Ressources naturelles Canada, ainsi que dautres gouvernements dans le monde. Grce aux pratiques et aux produits co-efficients que ce programme prconise, il est possible de faire des conomies et de protger lenvironnement. Dans un contexte o les cots nergtiques et le rchauffement climatique sont parmi les premires proccupations des consommateurs, Fujitsu sengage proposer des solutions pour les aider prserver lnergie et amliorer la qualit de notre environnement. Mode veille (sommeil) :
Si vous alimentez votre systme partir dun adaptateur secteur, vous remarquerez que daprs la configuration initiale de votre ordinateur, lcran steint aprs 15 minutes dinactivit, et que lordinateur lui-mme entre en mode sommeil aprs 20 minutes dinactivit. Si vous alimentez votre systme partir de la batterie, vous remarquerez que daprs la configuration initiale de votre ordinateur, lcran steint aprs 10 minutes dinactivit, et que lordinateur lui-mme entre en mode sommeil aprs 20 minutes dinactivit. Lorsque lordinateur entre en mode sommeil, il rduit la vitesse de fonctionnement de toute linterface de rseau Ethernet. Pour rveiller lordinateur et le faire sortir du mode sommeil, appuyez sur le commutateur de veille/reprise. Avantages lis lconomie dnergie:
Les ordinateurs portables Fujitsu homologus par ENERGY STAR utilisent environ deux fois moins dlectricit quun matriel standard, ce qui permet de diviser la facture dlectricit par deux. Mais ce nest pas tout, en effet, ENERGY STAR fait galement la diffrence en termes de protection de lenvironnement. Saviez-vous quun mnage moyen peut mettre deux fois plus de gaz effet de serre quune voiture ordinaire ? Cela sexplique ainsi: lorsque vous manipulez linterrupteur dune lampe, que vous faites marcher votre lave-vaisselle ou que vous mettez en route votre PC, vous utilisez de lnergie, et cela entrane un surcrot dmissions de gaz effet de serre par les centrales lectriques. Donc, plus nous conomisons lnergie grce lco-efficience, plus nous contribuons diminuer les gaz effet de serre et les risques de rchauffement climatique. 69 - Gestion de lalimentation Pour de plus amples informations sur cet important programme ENERGY STAR, visitez : www.energystar.gov. Pour en apprendre plus sur la faon dont Fujitsu soutient la Gestion durable et dautres activits de protection de lenvironnement, visitez la page Internet de Fujitsu Corporate Citizenship : http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/
www/content/aboutus/environmental/environment.php 70 - Gestion de lalimentation Chapitre 3 Options installables par lutilisateur Batterie au lithium Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK possde une batterie au lithium qui lui permet de fonctionner lorsque vous navez pas accs une source dalimentation externe. Cette batterie est robuste et durable, mais elle ne doit pas tre expose des tempratures extrmes, des tensions leves, des produits chimiques ou dautres situations dangereuses. Si la batterie au lithium est utilise dans les conditions suivantes, son autonomie peut en tre rduite :
Utilise des tempratures en de de 5 C ou au-del de 35 C (41 F 95 F). Les tempratures extrmes ne diminuent pas seulement lefficacit du chargement, elles risquent galement de provoquer la dtrioration de la batterie. Si vous tentez de charger une batterie sous une temprature ambiante dpassant les seuils de tolrance, vous voyez clignoter licne de charge en cours sur le tableau de voyants dtat. Lorsque vous vous servez dun dispositif courant lev tel quun modem, un lecteur optique externe ou un disque dur, lutilisation de ladaptateur secteur vous permettra de conserver la dure de vie de la batterie. NE LAISSEZ JAMAIS UNE BATTERIE DFECTUEUSE DANS VOTRE PC TABLETTE. ELLE POURRAIT ENDOMMAGER LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR, LADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION DISPONIBLE EN OPTION, LA DEUXIME BATTERIE SI VOUS EN POSSDEZ UNE OU LORDINATEUR LUI-MME. UNE BATTERIE ENDOMMAGE PEUT GALEMENT NUIRE AU FONCTIONNEMENT DU PC TABLETTE EN UTILISANT TOUT LE COURANT DISPONIBLE. 71 LAUTONOMIE RELLE DE LA BATTERIE PEUT VARIER SELON LA LUMINOSIT DE LCRAN, SELON LES APPLICATIONS, LES FONCTIONS ET LES PARAMTRES DE GESTION DE LALIMENTATION QUE VOUS UTILISEZ, SELON LTAT DE LA BATTERIE ET SELON DAUTRES PRFRENCES QUE VOUS POUVEZ CONFIGURER. LUTILISATION DU LECTEUR OPTIQUE OU DU DISQUE DUR PEUT GALEMENT AVOIR UN IMPACT SIGNIFICATIF SUR LA DURE DE VIE DE LA BATTERIE. EN OUTRE, LA CAPACIT DE CHARGE DE LA BATTERIE DIMINUE AVEC LUSAGE. SI VOTRE BATTERIE PERD RAPIDEMENT SA CHARGE, REMPLACEZ-LA PAR UNE NEUVE. IL EST POSSIBLE QUE DES LOIS FDRALES, PROVINCIALES OU LOCALES INTERDISENT DE JETER DES BATTERIES DANS LES DCHETS DOMESTIQUES. CONTRIBUEZ LA PROTECTION DE LENVIRONNEMENT ET JETEZ VOS BATTERIES USES CONFORMMENT AUX LOIS EN VIGUEUR. POUR OBTENIR DES INFORMATIONS SUR LE RECYCLAGE ET LA MISE AUX REBUTS DES VIEILLES BATTERIES, CONSULTEZ LES AUTORITS LOCALES OU PROVINCIALES COMPTENTES. SI VOUS NARRIVEZ PAS TROUVER CES INFORMATIONS, CONTACTEZ UN PRPOS DU SERVICE LA CLIENTLE AU 1-800-8FUJITSU
(1-800-838-5487). Recharge des batteries Pour connatre le niveau de charge de votre batterie au lithium principale, vrifiez le voyant de batterie dans le tableau de voyants dtat. Ce voyant change selon le niveau de charge de la batterie. La batterie au lithium peut tre recharge avec ladaptateur secteur ou avec ladaptateur auto/avion. Pour recharger une batterie, assurez-vous quelle est bien installe dans le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK et connectez ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur auto/avion. LORSQUE LE BOUTON A EST ENFONC ALORS QUE LE SYSTME EST TEINT, LE VOYANT DE BATTERIE AFFICHE LA CHARGE RESTANTE DE LA BATTERIE
(VOIR TABLEAU DE VOYANTS DTAT EN PAGE 24.). CINQ SECONDES APRS LE RELCHEMENT DU BOUTON, LE VOYANT STEINT AUTOMATIQUEMENT. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE LE VOYANT DE BATTERIE EN CHARGE SUR LE TABLEAU DE VOYANTS DTAT INDIQUE BIEN LE NIVEAU DE CHARGE EN COURS. LORSQUE LA MARQUE [POUSSER] VISIBLE SUR LA BATTERIE EST ENFONCE, LE VOYANT LUMINEUX SITU CT DE CETTE MARQUE INDIQUE LA CHARGE RESTANTE DE LA BATTERIE (VERT : 50-100 %, ORANGE : 11-49 %, ROUGE: 1-10 %). Puisque les batteries au lithium nont aucun effet de mmoire, il nest pas ncessaire de dcharger compltement votre batterie avant de la recharger. La dure de charge sera nettement plus longue si vous utilisez le PC Tablette pendant que la batterie se charge. Si vous dsirez charger la batterie le plus rapidement possible, placez votre ordinateur en mode sommeil ou teignez-le pendant que la batterie se charge. (Pour de plus amples informations sur le mode veille et la procdure darrt, reportez-vous Gestion de lalimentation en page 65). 72 - Batterie au lithium SI VOUS UTILISEZ DES PRIPHRIQUES FORTE CONSOMMATION DNERGIE OU SI VOUS ACCDEZ FRQUEMMENT AU LECTEUR OPTIQUE EXTERNE, LA BATTERIE RISQUE DE NE PAS SE CHARGER COMPLTEMENT. Batterie faible Lorsque la batterie est faible, le systme affiche un avis de batterie faible. Si vous ne prtez pas attention cet avis de batterie faible, la batterie continuera se dcharger jusqu ce quelle ne puisse plus faire fonctionner le systme. Lorsque cela se produit, le PC Tablette se place en mode sommeil. Dans un tel cas, rien ne garantit que toutes vos donnes seront sauvegardes. LORSQUE LAVIS DE BATTERIE FAIBLE APPARAT, VOUS DEVEZ ENREGISTRER TOUTES VOS DONNES ACTIVES ET PLACER VOTRE ORDINATEUR LIFEBOOK EN MODE SOMMEIL JUSQU CE QUE VOUS PUISSIEZ DISPOSER DUNE AUTRE SOURCE DALIMENTATION. VOUS DEVEZ CONNECTER LE PLUS RAPIDEMENT POSSIBLE UNE BATTERIE CHARGE, UN ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR OU UN ADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION. LORSQUE LORDINATEUR EST EN MODE SOMMEIL, IL DOIT TOUJOURS DISPOSER DUNE BONNE SOURCE DALIMENTATION. SI VOUS RETIREZ TOUTES LES SOURCES DALIMENTATION ALORS QUE LORDINATEUR EST EN MODE SOMMEIL, TOUTES LES DONNES NAYANT PAS T SAUVEGARDES SONT PERDUES. Si lordinateur se place en mode veille car batterie puise, le voyant dtat apparat comme si lordinateur tait en mode sommeil normal. Lorsque le PC Tablette est en mode Veille de batterie puise, il est impossible den reprendre lutilisation avant davoir connect une source dalimentation valide provenant dun adaptateur ou dune batterie charge. Lorsque vous avez connect une alimentation valide, vous devez ensuite appuyer sur la glissire dalimentation/
veille/reprise pour reprendre lutilisation de lordinateur. Lorsque lordinateur est en mode veille de batterie puise, vos donnes peuvent tre sauvegardes pendant une certaine priode, mais si vous ne connectez pas rapidement une source dalimentation valide, le voyant dalimentation cesse de clignoter et steint. Vous avez alors perdu toutes les donnes nayant pas t enregistres. Ds que vous fournissez une source dalimentation, vous pouvez poursuivre lutilisation du PC Tablette pendant que la batterie se recharge. Batteries court-circuites Le tableau de voyants dtat comprend un voyant de charge indiquant le niveau de charge disponible de la batterie. Si ce voyant affiche une DEL rouge clignotante, cela signifie que la batterie est endommage: elle doit donc tre remplace pour viter quelle ne nuise dautres composants de votre ordinateur. 73 - Batterie au lithium Remplacement de la batterie Si vous achetez une batterie supplmentaire de rechange, vous pourrez remplacer la batterie principale si elle vient se dcharger compltement. Deux mthodes soffrent vous pour remplacer votre batterie : le remplacement hors tension et le remplacement sous tension. Remplacement hors tension de la batterie Pour remplacer la batterie alors que le systme est hors tension, excutez les oprations suivantes :
1 Trouvez une batterie charge, prte linstallation. 2 Arrtez lordinateur et dbranchez ladaptateur secteur. 3 Retournez votre systme lenvers et orientez-le comme indiqu la Figure 38. 4 Tout en poussant le verrou de batterie vers la batterie, glissez le loquet douverture de la batterie vers la droite, puis sortez la batterie de son compartiment (voir la figure 39). 5 Insrez une nouvelle batterie et appuyez jusqu ce que vous sentiez lenclenchement des loquets. 6 Branchez ladaptateur secteur et allumez lordinateur. Remplacement sous tension de la batterie Pour remplacer la batterie alors que le systme est sous tension, excutez les oprations suivantes :
AVANT DENLEVER LA BATTERIE, ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR EST BIEN CONNECT. LORDINATEUR NE DISPOSE DAUCUNE BATTERIE TEMPORAIRE POUR FAIRE FONCTIONNER LE SYSTME DURANT LE REMPLACEMENT DE LA BATTERIE. SI VOUS NUTILISEZ PAS LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR, VOUS PERDREZ TOUTES LES DONNES NON ENREGISTRES. 1 Branchez ladaptateur secteur sur votre ordinateur, puis sur une prise lectrique sous tension. 2 Suivez les tapes 3 5 de la section Remplacement hors tension. SI LE CONNECTEUR DE LA BATTERIE AU LITHIUM NEST PAS BIEN ENFONC, VOUS RISQUEZ DE NE PAS POUVOIR UTILISER LORDINATEUR OU RECHARGER LA BATTERIE. 74 - Batterie au lithium s Verrou de la batterie Batterie Loquet de dgagement de la batterie Figure 38. Dverrouillage de la batterie Figure 39. Retrait dune batterie 75 - Batterie au lithium Carte SD Figure 40. Installation dune carte SD Cartes Secure Digital Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK peut accueillir des cartes Secure Digital (SD), Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) et Secure Digital eXtended Capacity (SDXC) sur lesquelles vous pouvez stocker et transfrer des donnes vers et partir de divers dispositifs numriques. Ces cartes utilisent une architecture de mmoire flash, ce qui veut dire que vous navez pas besoin dune source dnergie pour conserver les donnes. Les cartes Secure Digital (SD) sont des cartes de mmoire flash permettant lenregistrement, le transfert et le partage de contenus numriques, tels que photos, films, sons, voix, donnes et applications. Les cartes SD permettent un stockage mobile sur plusieurs types de dispositifs, tels que des tlphones cellulaires, des systmes de positionnement mondial, des appareils photo numriques et des assistants numriques personnels. Les cartes SD transfrent les donnes rapidement et sollicitent trs peu la batterie. Les cartes SD utilisent une architecture de mmoire flash. 76 - Cartes Secure Digital Installation dune carte SD Les cartes SD sont insres dans la fente pour carte SD. Pour installer une carte SD, excutez les oprations suivantes:
SI VOUS INSREZ OU RETIREZ UNE CARTE PC CARD PENDANT LE PROCESSUS DARRT OU DE DMARRAGE DE VOTRE PC TABLETTE, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LA CARTE ET/OU VOTRE ORDINATEUR. NINSREZ PAS DE CARTE DANS LA FENTE SIL Y A DE LEAU OU TOUTE AUTRE SUBSTANCE SUR LA CARTE, CAR VOUS POURRIEZ ENDOMMAGER DE FAON PERMANENTE LA CARTE, VOTRE PC TABLETTE OU LES DEUX. 1 Le guide dutilisation de la carte mmoire vous indiquera comment linstaller. Certaines cartes pourraient ncessiter que votre ordinateur soit teint pendant que vous les insrez. 2 Avant dinsrer votre carte, assurez-vous quaucune autre carte nest dj installe dans la fente. Si cest le cas, consultez la rubrique Retirer une carte SD ci-dessous. 3 Enfoncez la carte dans la fente, tiquette vers le haut. 4 Poussez fermement la carte dans la fente jusqu ce quelle soit loge dans le connecteur. Retirer une carte SD Pour retirer une carte SD, suivez ces tapes faciles:
LE GUIDE DUTILISATION DE LA CARTE MMOIRE VOUS INDIQUERA COMMENT LA RETIRER. CERTAINES CARTES POURRAIENT NCESSITER QUE VOTRE PC TABLETTE SOIT EN MODE SOMMEIL OU QUIL SOIT TEINT PENDANT QUE VOUS LES RETIREZ. 1 Dans la zone de notification, cliquez sur licne Retirer le priphrique en toute scurit. Dans la liste, mettez la carte en surbrillance, puis cliquez sur Stop. 2 Enfoncez la carte SD jusqu ce que vous sentiez un dclic de dverrouillage. La carte sjecte ensuite de la fente pour que vous puissiez la retirer. 77 - Cartes Secure Digital Module de mmoire additionnelle Votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK est fourni avec une mmoire dynamique synchrone haute vitesse et double dbit binaire dau moins 2 Go (SDRAM DDR3-1600), installe en usine. Pour augmenter la capacit mmoire de votre PC Tablette, vous pouvez installer un module (barrette) dextension mmoire. La mmoire additionnelle doit tre un module SDRAM (DIMM) double range de connexions. Pour vous assurer davoir une compatibilit 100 %, achetez le module SDRAM uniquement auprs de la boutique virtuelle Fujitsu, ladresse suivante : www.shopfujitsu.com. NENLEVEZ AUCUNE VIS DU COMPARTIMENT DU MODULE DE MMOIRE ADDITIONNELLE LEXCEPTION DE CELLES SPCIFIQUEMENT INDIQUES DANS LES DIRECTIVES DINSTALLATION ET DE RETRAIT CORRESPONDANTES. LE MODULE DE MMOIRE ADDITIONNELLE PEUT TRE FORTEMENT ENDOMMAG PAR UNE DCHARGE LECTROSTATIQUE (DES). POUR MINIMISER CE RISQUE, VEUILLEZ PRENDRE LES PRCAUTIONS SUIVANTES:
AVANT DE MANIPULER UN MODULE DE MMOIRE, TOUCHEZ UN OBJET MTALLIQUE MIS LA TERRE POUR DCHARGER LLECTRICIT STATIQUE QUI SEST ACCUMULE DANS VOTRE CORPS. LORSQUE VOUS INSTALLEZ OU RETIREZ UN MODULE DE MMOIRE, TENEZ-LE PAR LE BORD DE FAON NE TOUCHER AUCUN CONTACT NI AUCUNE PUCE. ASSUREZ-VOUS DE NE TOUCHER AUCUNE BORNE DE CONNEXION NI AUCUN COMPOSANT INTERNE DE LORDINATEUR. LA PEAU DGAGE UNE SUBSTANCE HUILEUSE QUI POURRAIT CAUSER UN COURT-CIRCUIT AUX COMPOSANTS. ASSUREZ-VOUS DE METTRE VOTRE SYSTME HORS TENSION AVANT DAJOUTER OU DE RETIRER DES MODULES DE MMOIRE. MME SI LE SYSTME EST EN SOMMEIL OU EN VEILLE PROLONGE, DES DONNES RISQUENT DTRE PERDUES ET LA MMOIRE POURRAIT TRE ENDOMMAGE SI LE COURANT QUI ALIMENTE LE SYSTME NEST PAS COUP. Installer un module de mmoire additionnelle 1 Coupez le courant de votre ordinateur et dbranchez ladaptateur dalimentation (adaptateur secteur ou adaptateur auto/avion), le cas chant. Retirez la batterie. 2 Assurez-vous que tous les couvercles du connecteur sont ferms. 3 Tournez lordinateur portable lenvers et retirez la vis du compartiment du module de mmoire additionnelle. 4 Soulevez et retirez le couvercle du compartiment de mmoire supplmentaire (Figure 41). 5 Retirez le module de mmoire additionnelle de sa gaine protectrice antistatique. 6 Alignez le module de mmoire additionnelle avec la pice vers le haut. Alignez le bord du connecteur du module de mmoire additionnelle avec la fente du connecteur dans le compartiment.(Figure 42) 78 - Module de mmoire additionnelle Figure 41. Ouverture du compartiment de mmoire 7 Insrez le module de mmoire additionnelle en oblique, 45. Poussez fermement le bord du connecteur du module vers le bas et appuyez sur le connecteur jusqu ce quil se loge sous la cl de serrage. Vous entendrez un clic lorsque celui-ci sera bien en place. 8 Replacez le couvercle et les vis. LE MODULE DE MMOIRE ADDITIONNELLE NEST PAS UN LMENT QUE VOUS RETIREZ DE VOTRE ORDINATEUR DE FAON ROUTINIRE. APRS LINSTALLATION, VOUS POUVEZ LE LAISSER EN PLACE JUSQU CE QUE VOUS DCIDIEZ DE CHANGER LA CAPACIT DE MMOIRE DU SYSTME. Figure 42. Installer un module de mmoire 79 - Module de mmoire additionnelle Retirer un module de mmoire additionnelle 1 Excutez les tapes 1 4 de la section Installation dun module de mmoire additionnelle. 2 Tirez les attaches latrales en les orientant vers les cts pour les loigner du module. 3 En maintenant les ergots carts, retirez la barrette en la tirant vers lextrieur de lordinateur. 4 Rangez le module de mmoire additionnelle dans une gaine protectrice antistatique. 5 Replacez le couvercle et les vis. Figure 43. Retrait dun module de mmoire Vrification de la capacit de mmoire Lorsque vous avez chang la capacit de mmoire du systme en remplaant le module install par un module plus puissant, assurez-vous que votre ordinateur a reconnu le changement. Pour vrifier la capacit de mmoire, faites ce qui suit: allez lcran de dmarrage moderne, appuyez sur
[Windows]+[X], puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration > Systme. La capacit de mmoire est indique ct de Mmoire installe (RAM):. La quantit de mmoire installe doit tre peu prs gale au total de tous les modules de mmoire installs. Une ventuelle diffrence est normale cause de la capacit utilise par la mmoire vido fixe. SI LA MMOIRE TOTALE AFFICHE EST INCORRECTE, VRIFIEZ SI LE MODULE DE MMOIRE ADDITIONNELLE EST BIEN INSTALL. (SI LE MODULE EST BIEN INSTALL MAIS QUE LA CAPACIT NEST TOUJOURS PAS BIEN RECONNUE, CONSULTEZ LA SECTION DPANNAGE EN PAGE 89). 80 - Module de mmoire additionnelle Ports de priphriques Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu et le duplicateur de ports optionnel sont quips de plusieurs ports auxquels vous pouvez brancher des dispositifs externes tels que: lecteurs de disque, claviers, imprimantes, etc. Prise de rseau local (RJ-45) interne La prise interne de rseau local (RJ-45) est utilise pour une connexion Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-
Tx/1000Base-T). Il est possible que vous deviez configurer votre PC Tablette selon les particularits de votre rseau.
(pour de plus amples informations sur la configuration de votre rseau, veuillez consulter votre administrateur de rseau). Pour brancher le cble de rseau local, excutez ces oprations simples:
1 Alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port. 2 Poussez la fiche de connexion dans le port jusqu ce quelle senclenche. 3 Branchez lautre extrmit du cble sur une prise de rseau local. Figure 44. Connexion un rseau local Connecteur de duplicateur de ports Ce connecteur permet de raccorder votre PC Tablette un duplicateur de ports en option. Pour savoir comment connecter votre PC Tablette ce priphrique, consultez les instructions disponibles sous Duplicateur de ports en page 85. 81 - Ports de priphriques Ports USB Les ports Universal Serial Bus (USB) vous permettent de connecter divers priphriques USB tels que des tablettes de jeu externes, des dispositifs de pointage, des claviers et/ou des haut-parleurs. Votre PC Tablette possde quatre ports USB: deux ports USB 3.0 sur le ct gauche, dont un avec fonction de charge USB en tout temps (Voir Informations sur lutilitaire de charge USB en tout temps. en page 83), et deux ports USB 2.0 sur le ct droit et larrire. Pour connecter un dispositif dinterface parallle, excutez ces oprations :
1 Alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port. 2 Poussez la fiche de connexion dans le port jusqu ce quelle senclenche. Port USB 2.0 Figure 45. Connexion dun priphrique USB EN RAISON DES CHANGEMENTS CONTINUS APPORTS LA TECHNOLOGIE ET AUX NORMES USB, IL EST IMPOSSIBLE DE GARANTIR LA COMPATIBILIT DE TOUS LES DISPOSITIFS ET/OU LECTEURS USB. 82 - Ports de priphriques Informations sur lutilitaire de charge USB en tout temps
. La fonction de charge USB en tout temps peut tre active et dsactive partir de lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS. Par dfaut, cette fonction est active. Les paramtres de la fonction de charge USB en tout temps peuvent tre modifis en excutant la procdure suivante. Windows 7 : Dmarrer> Tous les programmes > Utilitaire de charge USB en tout temps> Paramtres. Windows 8 : Allez lcran de dmarrage moderne et cliquez droite. Slectionnez Toutes les applications, puis lutilitaire de charge USB en tout temps. Trois positions de rglage sont disponibles avec cette fonction :
Dsactiver la fonction de charge USB en tout temps , Activer la fonction de charge USB en tout temps uniquement avec ladaptateur secteur connect et Activer la fonction de charge USB en tout temps avec ladaptateur secteur ou la batterie . Veuillez prendre note que si ce rglage est choisi, la batterie risque de se vider de toute sa charge si ladaptateur secteur nest pas connect. Il est possible que certains priphriques USB ncessitent linstallation dun pilote pour garantir le bon fonctionne-
ment de cette fonction. Veuillez consulter la documentation accompagnant votre priphrique USB pour correctement le charger laide de lutilitaire de charge USB en tout temps. Prise dcouteurs La prise dcouteurs permet de connecter votre PC Tablette des couteurs ou des haut-parleurs externes amplifis. Vos couteurs ou haut-parleurs doivent tre munis dune mini-prise stro de 3,5 mm (1/8 po). Pour connecter des couteurs ou des haut-parleurs, alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port, puis pousser le connecteur lintrieur jusqu ce quil sy enclenche correctement. Prise de micro La prise de micro permet de connecter un microphone stro externe. Votre microphone doit tre muni dune mini-
fiche de connexion de 1/8 po (3,5 mm) pour quil puisse tre branch sur la prise microphone de votre PC Tablette. Pour connecter un microphone, alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port, puis poussez le connecteur lintrieur jusqu ce quil sy enclenche correctement. 83 - Ports de priphriques Port HDMI. Le port HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface, ou Interface multimdia haute dfinition) est une interface numrique audio/vido permettant de faire transiter des flux de donnes non compresses. Le HDMI sert brancher des priphriques numriques compatibles avec votre ordinateur (un tlviseur grand cran et des appareils vido, par exemple). Pour brancher un priphrique HDMI:
1 Alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port. 2 Poussez la fiche de connexion dans le port jusqu ce quelle senclenche. Port vido externe Le port vido externe permet de connecter un moniteur externe ou un projecteur ACL. Pour connecter un priphrique vido externe, effectuez ces oprations simples:
1 Alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port. 2 Poussez la fiche de connexion dans le port jusqu ce quelle senclenche. 3 Serrez les deux vis de fixation situes de chaque ct du connecteur. Figure 46. Branchement dun priphrique HDMI Figure 47. Branchement dun priphrique vido externe LORSQUE VOUS APPUYEZ SUR LES TOUCHES [FN] + [F10], VOUS POUVEZ CHANGER LEMPLACEMENT DE LAFFICHAGE VIDO. CHAQUE FOIS QUE VOUS APPUYEZ SUR LA COMBINAISON DE TOUCHES, VOUS PASSEREZ AU CHOIX SUIVANT, EN COMMENANT PAR LCRAN INTGR SEULEMENT, PUIS AU MONITEUR EXTERNE SEULEMENT, PUIS AUX DEUX, LCRAN INTGR ET LE MONITEUR EXTERNE. 84 - Ports de priphriques Duplicateur de ports Le duplicateur de ports augmente la fonctionnalit de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK en ajoutant des ports de connexion pour un moniteur VGA externe, un cble de rseau local (RJ-45) quatre priphriques USB 3.0, un priphrique DVI, un priphrique DisplayPort, des couteurs et une alimentation c.c. Le duplicateur de ports se connecte sur le dessous de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports Bouton d'alimetation Ports USB 3.0 (Qt: 4) Prise dalimentation c.c. Bouton de verrouillae/
dverrouillag de la barre mobile Port DVI-D Port DisplayPort Port VGA externe Fente dantivol Prise dcouteurs Prise de rseau (RJ-45) Figure 48. Duplicateur de ports - Arrire 85 - Duplicateur de ports Composants du duplicateur de ports Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant larrire du duplicateur de ports. (Figure 48) Commutateur dalimentation Le commutateur dalimentation permet de mettre en marche et darrter le duplicateur de ports. Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports Ce connecteur permet de brancher le duplicateur de ports en option sur votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. LE SYSTME CONTIENT DES COMPOSANTS POUVANT TRE FORTEMENT ENDOMMAGS PAR UNE DCHARGE LECTROSTATIQUE (DES). POUR MINIMISER CE RISQUE, VEUILLEZ PRENDRE LES PRCAUTIONS SUIVANTES:
AVANT DE CONNECTER OU DE DCONNECTER VOTRE ORDINATEUR PORTABLE LIFEBOOK (LORSQUE VOUS UTILISEZ UN DUPLICATEUR DE PORTS), IL VOUS EST RECOMMAND DE TOUCHER UN OBJET MTALLIQUE MIS LA TERRE AFIN DE DCHARGER LLECTRICIT STATIQUE QUI SEST ACCUMULE DANS VOTRE CORPS. ASSUREZ-VOUS DE METTRE VOTRE SYSTME HORS TENSION AVANT DAJOUTER OU DE RETIRER DES COMPOSANTS DU SYSTME. MME SI LE SYSTME EST EN TAT DE SOMMEIL OU DE VEILLE PROLONGE, DES DONNES POURRAIENT TRE PERDUES ET LA MMOIRE ENDOMMAGE SI LE COURANT QUI ALIMENTE LE SYSTME NEST PAS COUP. Port DVI-D Le port DVI-D permet de connecter des priphriques daffichage numriques avec laide dun cble DVI-D, notamment un cran plat ou un projecteur numrique. Le port DVI-D sert principalement connecter un ordinateur un systme de cinma maison. Port DisplayPort Ce port permet de connecter des priphriques daffichage numriques compatibles avec la technologie DisplayPort, avec laide dun cble DisplayPort, notamment un cran plat ou un projecteur numrique. MME SI LE DUPLICATEUR DE PORTS OFFRE UNE PRISE EN CHARGE DISPLAYPORT ET DVI-D, VOUS NE POUVEZ UTILISER QUUNE SEULE DE CES TECHNOLOGIES LA FOIS. UN COMMUTATEUR INTERNE IDENTIFIE LE TYPE DE PRIPHRIQUE CONNECT. SI DES PRIPHRIQUES UTILISANT LES DEUX TECHNOLOGIES SONT CONNECTS SIMULTANMENT, LE PRIPHRIQUE DISPLAYPORT SERA PRIORITAIRE. IL EST CEPENDANT POSSIBLE DUTILISER UN PRIPHRIQUE DISPLAYPORT OU DVI-D EN MME TEMPS QUUN PRIPHRIQUE VIDO EXTERNE CONNECT AU PORT VGA EXTERNE ANALOGIQUE. LA TECHNOLOGIE HOT PLUG NEST PAS PRISE EN CHARGE PAR LES PORTS DISPLAYPORT ET DVI-D. SI VOUS CONNECTEZ UN CONVERTISSEUR DISPLAYPORT-HDMI AU PORT DISPLAYPORT, AUCUN SON NE SORTIRA DU PRIPHRIQUE HDMI. POUR UTILISER SANS PROBLME UN PRIPHRIQUE HDMI, BRANCHEZ-LE SUR LE PORT HDMI SITU SUR LE CT GAUCHE DU SYSTME. 86 - Duplicateur de ports Ports USB 3.0 (Qt: 4) Les ports USB 3.0 vous permettent de connecter des priphriques USB. Les ports USB 3.0 sont rtrocompatibles avec les priphriques USB 2.0 et 1.1. Bouton de verrouillage/dverrouillage de la barre mobile Le bouton de verrouillage/dverrouillage de la barre mobile permet de rgler la position de la barre mobile afin que votre systme soit bien align avec le connecteur du duplicateur de ports. Lorsque vous regardez le duplicateur de ports depuis lavant, la barre mobile doit tre dplace le plus possible vers le ct gauche du duplicateur de ports. Port VGA externe Le port VGA externe permet de connecter un moniteur externe ou un projecteur. Veuillez prendre note que si un duplicateur de ports est install, vous devez utiliser le port VGA externe du duplicateur de ports, pas celui de lordinateur. Prise dcouteurs La prise dcouteurs permet dcouter en stro le son manant de votre PC Tablette, grce des couteurs. Prise de rseau local (RJ-45) La prise de rseau local vous permet de connecter un cble de rseau local au duplicateur de ports. Veuillez prendre note que si un duplicateur de ports est install, vous devez utiliser la prise de rseau local du duplicateur de ports, pas celle de lordinateur. Fente dantivol La fente de dispositif antivol vous permet dinstaller un dispositif antivol disponible en option. Prise dalimentation c.c. La prise dalimentation c.c. sert brancher ladaptateur secteur, lequel permet dalimenter le PC Tablette et de charger la batterie interne au lithium. 87 - Duplicateur de ports Installation du duplicateur de ports Pour installer le duplicateur de ports, alignez le port de connexion du duplicateur de ports sous votre PC Tablette avec le connecteur sur le duplicateur de ports, puis enfoncez simultanment les coins. (Figure 49) Dsinstallation du duplicateur de ports Pour enlever le duplicateur de ports:
1 Pour sparer le duplicateur de ports de votre PC Tablette, tirez le loquet de sparation loppos du duplicateur de ports. (Figure 50) 2 Sparez le PC Tablette du duplicateur de ports. Le duplicateur est enlev. (Figure 51) Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports Figure 49. Installation du duplicateur de ports Loquet douverture Figure 50. Dconnexion du duplicateur de ports Figure 51. Retrait du systme 88 -
Chapitre 4 Dpannage de votre LIFEBOOK Dpannage Il est possible que vous rencontriez parfois des problmes simples de configuration ou dexploitation pouvant tre rsolus sur le champ, ou des problmes au niveau dun priphrique pouvant tre rsolus en remplaant lquipement. Les informations contenues dans cette section vous aideront isoler et rsoudre certains de ces problmes simples et identifier les pannes qui ncessitent une rparation. Identification du problme Si vous prouvez un problme, consultez la procdure suivante avant dentreprendre un processus de dpannage complexe:
1 Arrtez votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK. 2 Assurez-vous que ladaptateur secteur est connect votre ordinateur portable et une source dalimentation secteur active. 3 Assurez-vous que toute carte insre dans la fente pour carte PC Card est bien en place. Vous pouvez galement enlever la carte de la fente pour vous assurer quelle nest pas la raison de la panne. 4 Assurez-vous que tous les priphriques connects aux connecteurs externes sont bien branchs. Vous pouvez galement dconnecter ces priphriques pour vous assurer quils ne sont pas lorigine de la panne. 89 5 Allumez votre ordinateur portable. Assurez-vous quil soit rest hors fonction pendant 10 secondes au moins avant de le remettre en marche. 6 Laissez sexcuter la procdure damorage. 7 Si le problme na pas t rsolu, consultez le tableau suivant pour obtenir des renseignements plus dtaills concernant le dpannage. SI VOUS PRENEZ EN NOTE TOUT CE QUE VOUS ESSAYEZ, LE SERVICE DASSISTANCE POURRA VOUS AIDER PLUS RAPIDEMENT EN VOUS DONNANT DES SUGGESTIONS SUPPLMENTAIRES AU TLPHONE. 8 Si vous avez essay les solutions suggres par le tableau de dpannage sans succs, communiquez avec le service dassistance :
Appel sans frais : 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Site Web : http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php. Avant de nous contacter, veuillez avoir les informations suivantes porte de main pour que notre prpos du service la clientle puisse vous venir en aide le plus rapidement possible :
Nom du produit Numro de configuration du produit Numro de srie du produit Date dachat Conditions dans lesquelles le problme est survenu Texte des messages derreur reus Types de priphriques connects, si applicable Pour les numros de srie et de configuration, consultez ltiquette de configuration sur le dessous de votre ordinateur. 90 - Dpannage Problmes spcifiques Utilisation du tableau de dpannage Lorsque vous prouvez des problmes avec votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK, essayez de trouver les symptmes sous la colonne Problme du tableau suivant pour la fonction qui vous cause des problmes. Vous trouverez une description des causes communes pour ce symptme sous la colonne Cause possible ; le cas chant, ce que vous pouvez faire pour corriger la situation se trouve sous la colonne Solutions possibles. Il est possible que certaines causes et solutions possibles ne sappliquent pas votre ordinateur. Tableau de dpannage Problme Problme Page Page Problmes audio . page 92 Problmes de priphrique USB . page 95 Problmes de lecteur optique . page 93 Problmes dalimentation lectrique . page 96 Problmes de duplicateur de ports . page 94 Problmes darrt et de dmarrage. page 98 Problmes de disque dur . page 94 Problmes vido . page 100 Problmes de clavier ou de souris . page 94 Problmes divers . page 102 Problmes de mmoire . page 95 91 - Dpannage Problme Problmes audio Aucun son ne sort du haut-
parleur incorpor. Cause possible Solutions possibles Le volume est rgl un niveau trs bas. Rglez le volume de votre ordinateur et de votre systme dexploitation. Pour ce faire, utilisez la combinaison de touches [Fn+F9] sur votre clavier. Si vous appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F9] tout en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce, vous augmente-
rez le volume sonore de votre PC Tablette. Le volume logiciel est rgl un niveau trop bas. Le rglage manuel du volume avec les touches du clavier devrait changer dynamique-
ment le niveau de volume du systme dexploitation (voir ci-dessus). Si cela ne fonc-
tionne pas, rglez les paramtres de volume dans lapplication utilise. Des couteurs sont branchs sur votre PC Tablette. Le branchement dcouteurs dsactive le haut-parleur incorpor. Retirez les couteurs. Le lecteur de logiciel nest pas bien configur. Le pilote audio peut tre install ou rinstall laide du CD de pilotes et dapplica-
tions livr avec votre LIFEBOOK Fujitsu. Consultez la documentation de votre applica-
tion et de votre systme dexploitation pour obtenir de laide. Les haut-parleurs ont t bloqus en utilisant licne Volume situe dans la zone de notification. Cliquez sur licne Volume dans la zone de notification, en bas droite de lcran
(elle ressemble un haut-parleur). Si la case Mute (Sourdine) est entoure dun cercle rouge, cliquez dessus pour la dselectionner. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser la combinaison de touches [Fn+F3] pour activer ou dsactiver le volume. Appuyez sur
[F3] en enfonant la touche [Fn] pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction Silence (ou Muet). 92 - Dpannage Cause possible Solutions possibles Problme Problmes de lecteur optique Le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK ne reconnat pas les DVD/CD-
RW/CD-ROM. Le disque nest pas bien log dans le cercle surlev au centre du lecteur. Le tiroir du lecteur optique nest pas bien ferm. Un mauvais lecteur de DVD ou logiciel de lecteur a t ins-
tall. Le DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM est sale ou dfectueux. Un mauvais identificateur dunit a t utilis pour le disque. Ouvrez le plateau du lecteur optique et rinstallez correctement le disque. Appuyez sur le devant du tiroir du lecteur optique jusqu ce que le verrou senclenche. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, dverrouillez et retirez le lecteur optique modulaire du compartiment multifonction, puis rinsrez-le jusqu ce quil senclenche. Cela permet de bien le brancher. Installez un logiciel de lecture de DVD Essuyez le disque avec un chiffon de nettoyage doux, puis rinsrez-le. Sil ne fonctionne toujours pas, essayez un autre disque (DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM) dans le lecteur. Vrifiez si lidentificateur dunit utilis par lapplication est le mme que celui utilis par le systme dexploitation. Lorsque le systme dexploitation dmarre partir dun DVD/CD, les identifications des lecteurs sont automatiquement ajustes. Veuillez noter que lidentification dun lecteur peut tre change avec loutil Gestion des disques situ dans Panneau de configuration ->
Outils administratifs -> Gestion de lordinateur. Cela est normal. Toutefois, vous pouvez dsactiver cette fonction. 93 - Dpannage Le voyant daccs au lecteur optique du tableau de voyants dtat clignote lorsque le lecteur ne contient pas de disque ou quil ny a pas de lecteur optique install. La fonction Windows dinsertion automatique est active et vrifie si un disque est prt tre lu. Problme Problmes de duplicateur de ports Remarque : Assurez-vous darrter votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK avant dajouter une imprimante au port parallle du duplicateur de ports. Solutions possibles Cause possible Le PC Tablette ne fonctionne pas lorsquil est install sur le duplicateur de ports optionnel. Problmes de disque dur Vous ne pouvez pas accder votre disque dur. Ladaptateur c.a. du duplicateur de ports nest pas branch. Lordinateur nest pas bien log dans le duplicateur de ports. Un mauvais identificateur dunit a t utilis par une application lorsquun disque damorage a t utilis pour dmarrer votre ordinateur. Les paramtres de scurit exigent un mot de passe pour le dmarrage du systme dexploitation. Alimentez le duplicateur de ports. Retirez votre ordinateur et reconnectez-le. Assurez-vous que la lettre dunit utilise par lapplication est bien celle quutilise le systme dexploitation. Lorsque le systme dexploitation est dmarr partir dun CD, les identifications du lecteur sont ajustes automatiquement. Vrifiez votre mot de passe et vos paramtres de scurit. Problmes de clavier ou de souris Le clavier intgr ne semble pas fonctionner. Le PC Tablette est tomb en mode sommeil. Vous avez install un clavier ou une souris externe et il/elle ne semble pas fonctionner. Votre application a verrouill votre clavier. Votre priphrique externe nest pas bien install. Votre systme dexploitation nutilise pas le bon pilote pour ce priphrique. Appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. Essayez dutiliser votre dispositif de pointage intgr pour redmarrer votre systme. Rinstallez votre priphrique. Voir Ports de priphriques en page 81. Consultez la documentation du priphrique et du systme dexploitation, puis installez le pilote appropri. 94 - Dpannage Problme Vous avez connect un cla-
vier externe ou une souris et il/elle semble bloquer le systme. Cause possible Votre systme dexploitation nest pas configur avec le bon pilote pour ce priphrique. Solutions possibles Consultez la documentation du priphrique et du systme dexploitation, puis installez le pilote appropri. Votre systme sest plant. Essayez de redmarrer votre systme. Problmes de mmoire Dans le panneau de configuration, lcran Systme nindique pas le montant correct de mmoire installe. Votre module daugmentation de mmoire nest pas bien install. Votre mmoire est dfaillante. Problmes de priphrique USB Votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK ne reconnat pas un priphrique USB install ou le priphrique ne fonctionne pas correctement. Votre priphrique nest pas bien install. Votre priphrique pourrait ne pas disposer du bon pilote de logiciel actif. Le priphrique a peut-tre t install pendant quune application tait en excution, par consquent votre systme ne reconnat pas son installation. Enlevez et rinstallez votre module de mmoire additionnelle. Voir Module de mmoire additionnelle en page 78. Vrifiez les messages de lauto-diagnostic de dmarrage (POST). Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 103. Retirez et rinstallez votre priphrique. Voir Ports de priphriques en page 81. Consultez la documentation relative votre logiciel et activez le bon pilote. Fermez lapplication et redmarrez votre ordinateur portable. 95 - Dpannage Problme Problmes dalimentation Lorsque vous allumez votre PC Tablette, rien ne semble se produire. Cause possible Solutions possibles La batterie installe est compltement dcharge ou aucun adaptateur de courant nest install. La batterie est installe, mais elle est dfectueuse. La batterie est faible. Ladaptateur secteur nest pas branch convenablement. Ladaptateur de courant
(secteur ou auto/avion) ne reoit pas dnergie de la prise secteur, de la prise de sige davion ou de lallume-cigare de voiture. Ladaptateur de courant
(secteur ou auto/avion) est dfectueux. Vrifiez le tableau de voyants dtat pour dterminer la prsence et ltat de la batterie. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. Installez une batterie charge ou branchez un adaptateur dalimentation. Vrifiez le tableau de voyants dtat pour dterminer la prsence et ltat de la batterie. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. Si le voyant indique que la batterie est endommage (court-circuite), retirez-la et passez une autre source dalimentation, ou remplacez-la. Vrifiez le tableau de voyants dtat pour dterminer la prsence et ltat de la batterie. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. Utilisez un adaptateur dalimentation en attendant que la batterie se charge ou installez une batterie charge. Vrifiez si votre adaptateur est branch de faon approprie. Voir Sources dalimentation en page 58. Branchez le cordon dalimentation secteur dans une autre prise murale et vrifiez si un interrupteur ou un disjoncteur coupe le courant. Si vous utilisez un adaptateur auto/avion dans un vhicule, assurez-vous que la cl de contact est la position On (marche) ou Acc. (accessoires). Essayez un autre adaptateur dalimentation. 96 - Dpannage Problme Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK steint tout seul. Le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK ne fonctionne pas lorsquil est aliment uniquement par batterie. Cause possible Les paramtres de gestion dalimentation sont rgls des temporisations (dlais dinactivit) automatiques trop courtes par rapport vos besoins dexploitation. Lordinateur est aliment par batterie et vous navez pas tenu compte dun avertissement de batterie faible ; lordinateur est donc maintenant en mode veille car batterie puise . Votre batterie est dfectueuse. Votre adaptateur dalimentation est tomb en panne ou a perdu sa source dnergie. La batterie installe est puise. La batterie na pas t correctement installe. La batterie installe est dfectueuse. Solutions possibles Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche du clavier ou bougez la souris. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. Vrifiez vos paramtres de gestion dalimentation, ou fermez vos applications et consultez les proprits des Options dalimentation du Panneau de configuration pour ajuster les valeurs de temporisation afin quelles rpondent mieux vos besoins. Installez un adaptateur dalimentation puis appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. Voir Sources dalimentation en page 58. Vrifiez ltat des batteries laide du Tableau de voyants dtat. Si la batterie est court-circuite, remplacez-la ou retirez-la. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. Assurez-vous que ladaptateur est branch et que la prise est alimente. Remplacez la batterie par une batterie charge ou branchez un adaptateur dalimentation. Vrifiez si la batterie est bien connecte en la rinstallant. Consultez le tableau de voyants dtat pour connatre ltat de la batterie et remplacez ou retirez la batterie si elle est court-circuite. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. 97 - Dpannage Problme La batterie semble se dcharger trop rapidement. Cause possible Les fonctions dconomies dnergie sont peut-tre dsactives. Solutions possibles Consultez le menu Options dalimentation du Panneau de configuration pour changer les paramtres en fonction de vos besoins. La luminosit est rgle au maximum. Rduisez la luminosit. Plus la luminosit est leve, plus lcran daffichage consomme de lnergie. La batterie est trs vieille. Remplacez la batterie. Vous utilisez une application qui consomme beaucoup dnergie car elle sollicite souvent le disque dur, le lecteur optique, le dispositif de rseau sans fil ou Bluetooth. La batterie a t expose des tempratures leves. La batterie est trop chaude ou trop froide. Utilisez un adaptateur de courant pour cette application chaque fois que vous le pouvez. Remplacez la batterie. Rtablissez le PC Tablette la temprature dexploitation normale. Licne de chargement sur le tableau de voyants dtat clignote lorsque la batterie est en dehors de la plage de fonctionnement. Problmes darrt et de dmarrage La glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise ne fonctionne pas. La glissire dalimentation/
veille/reprise est dsactive. Pour la ractiver, allez Panneau de configuration -> Options dalimentation ->
Proprits, puis cliquez sur longlet Avancs. Dans la zone Alimentation, slectionnez loption Changer ce que fait le bouton dalimentation . Il est possible quil y ait un conflit entre logiciels. Fermez toutes les applications et essayez le bouton nouveau. 98 - Dpannage Problme Le systme se met en marche et affiche les informations sur la mise en marche, mais nest pas en mesure de charger le systme dexploitation. Cause possible Les paramtres damorage de lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS sont incompatibles avec votre configuration. Solutions possibles Configurez la source dexploitation en appuyant sur la touche [chap] pendant que le logo Fujitsu est affich sur lcran ou utilisez la touche [F2], accdez lutilitaire de configuration et ajustez les paramtres de source partir du menu Amorage. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 62. Vous avez un systme protg qui requiert un mot de passe pour charger votre systme dexploitation. Le disque dur interne na pas t dtect. Assurez-vous davoir le bon mot de passe. Accdez lutilitaire de configuration et vrifiez les paramtres de scurit, puis modifiez-les en consquence. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 62. Essayez de dtecter automatiquement le disque dur interne en utilisant lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS ou le sous-menu Matre principal situ dans le Menu principal. Un message derreur saffiche sur lcran durant la procdure damorage. Lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension (POST) a dtect un problme. Lisez les messages de lauto-test pour dterminer la signification et la svrit du problme. Tous les messages nindiquent pas des erreurs ; certains sont simplement des indicateurs dtat. Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 103. Votre PC Tablette semble changer les paramtres de configuration lorsque vous le dmarrez. Les modifications que vous avez apportes la configuration du BIOS nont pas t sauvegardes et vous avez quitt lutilitaire sans les sauvegarder. La batterie de rtention du BIOS CMOS fait dfaut. Lcran ne sallume pas au dmarrage ou la sortie du mode Veille. Vous avez install le Tableau de scurit et dapplications du LIFEBOOK. Assurez-vous de slectionner loption Sauvegarder les changements et quitter lorsque vous quittez lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS. Communiquez avec le service dassistance concernant les rparations. Cela nest pas une pice rparable par lutilisateur mais elle est cense avoir une dure normale de vie de 3 5 ans. Consultez les indicateurs dtat pour voir si licne de scurit est affiche. Le cas chant, entrez votre mot de passe Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. 99 - Dpannage Problme Problmes vido Lcran daffichage intgr demeure vide lorsque vous mettez en marche votre PC Tablette. Le PC Tablette sest mis en marche en mettant une srie de tonalits et votre cran intgr est vide. Cause possible Solutions possibles Gardez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur la touche [F10] pour changer votre slection et choisir o envoyer votre affichage. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur ces touches, vous passez au choix suivant. Les choix, par ordre, sont : affichage intgr seulement, moniteur externe seulement, affichage intgr et moniteur externe ensemble. Dplacez lcran et actionnez la commande de luminosit jusqu ce que vous ayez une visibilit adquate. Pour rgler la luminosit, maintenez la touche [Fn]
enfonce et appuyez sur [F6] ou [F7]. Appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou dplacez la souris. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. (lcran daffichage peut avoir t arrt par le mode sommeil, veille automatique ou temporisation vido). Communiquez avec le service dassistance. Le PC Tablette est rgl pour fonctionner avec un moniteur externe seulement. Langle de laffichage et les paramtres de luminosit ne sont pas adapts vos conditions dclairage. Les temporisations de gestion de lalimentation ont t rgles des intervalles trop courts et vous navez pas remarqu que lcran sallume et steint souvent. Lauto-diagnostic de dmarrage (POST) a dtect une dfaillance qui ne permet pas lcran de fonctionner. 100 - Dpannage Problme Lcran devient vide par lui-
mme aprs avoir t utilis. Cause possible Lordinateur portable sest retrouv en temporisation vido, en mode sommeil ou en mode veille prolonge car vous ne lavez pas utilis pendant un certain moment. Solutions possibles Appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou dplacez la souris. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. Vrifiez vos paramtres de gestion de lalimentation, ou fermez vos applications et allez dans le menu conomies dnergie (ou Options dalimentation) de lutilitaire de configuration pour ajuster les valeurs de temporisation afin quelles rpondent mieux vos besoins. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 62. Lcran ne sallume pas au dmarrage ou la sortie du mode veille. Lcran daffichage ne se ferme pas. Lcran affiche des zones claires ou sombres. Les temporisations de gestion de lalimentation peuvent tre trop courtes et vous navez pas remarqu que lcran sest allum, puis teint de nouveau. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche sur le clavier, ou dplacez votre souris pour restaurer le fonctionnement. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. (Lcran daffichage peut avoir t arrt par le mode sommeil, veille automatique ou temporisation vido). Le systme est protg par mot de passe. Vrifiez le tableau de voyants dtat pour vous assurer que licne Scurit clignote. Le cas chant, entrez votre mot de passe. Un corps tranger, tel quun trombone, est coinc entre lcran et le clavier. Si ces zones sont trs petites et si leur nombre est restreint, cela est normal pour un grand cran ACL. Si les zones sont nombreuses ou suffisamment grandes pour perturber vos besoins dexploitation. Retirez tous les objets trangers du clavier. Ne faites rien. Lcran est dfectueux : communiquez avec le service dassistance. 101 - Dpannage Problme Lcran est sombre lorsquil fonctionne sur lalimentation par batterie. Cause possible La valeur par dfaut de lutilitaire Gestion de lalimentation est rgle sur Faible luminosit pour conomiser lnergie. Solutions possibles Appuyez sur les touches [Fn] + [F7] pour augmenter la luminosit ou cliquez sur la jauge de la batterie, puis cliquez sur Autres options dalimentation, et slectionnez enfin Rgler la luminosit de lcran. Vous avez connect un moniteur externe et il naffiche rien. Vous avez connect un moniteur externe et il ne sallume pas. Problmes divers Un message derreur saffiche sur lcran durant lexcution dune application. Le systme dexploitation nutilise pas le bon pilote. Consultez la documentation du priphrique et du systme dexploitation, puis installez le pilote appropri. La configuration de votre BIOS nest pas rgle pour activer votre moniteur externe. Votre moniteur externe nest pas bien install. Votre moniteur externe nest pas compatible avec votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK. Basculez la destination vido en appuyant en mme temps sur [Fn]+ [F10], ou vrifiez la configuration du BIOS et validez votre moniteur externe. Consultez le sous-menu Video Features (Fonctions vido) du menu Advanced (Avanc) du BIOS. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 62. Rinstallez votre priphrique. Voir Port vido externe en page 84. Consultez la documentation de votre moniteur, ainsi que les conseils concernant le moniteur externe dans la section Spcifications. Voir Spcifications en page 136. Les applications gnrent souvent leurs propres messages derreur. Pour obtenir de plus amples informations, consultez le guide dutilisation et les crans daide de votre application. Tous les messages nindiquent pas des erreurs ; certains sont simplement des indicateurs dtat. 102 - Dpannage Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension Voici une liste des messages derreur et dtat que le BIOS Phoenix et/ou votre systme dexploitation peuvent gnrer ainsi quune explication pour chacun deux. Les messages derreurs sont marqus dun *. Si un message derreur est affich et ne se trouve pas dans la liste, prenez-le en note et vrifiez-le dans la documentation du systme dexploitation ( lcran et dans le manuel imprim). Si vous ne trouvez pas dexplication au message, communiquez avec le service dassistance.
*Donnes NVRAM non valides Problme daccs la mmoire NVRAM. Au cas o ce message safficherait, ce qui est peu probable, vous pourriez avoir un problme daffichage. Vous pouvez continuer utiliser votre ordinateur mais vous devriez communiquer avec le service dassistance pour plus dinformations.
*Erreur du contrleur de clavier Le test du contrleur de clavier a chou. Vous pourriez avoir besoin de remplacer votre clavier ou le contrleur de votre clavier mais vous pourriez utiliser un clavier externe en attendant. Communiquez avec le service dassistance.
*Le clavier na pas t dtect Le clavier ne fonctionne pas. Vous pourriez avoir besoin de remplacer votre clavier ou le contrleur de votre clavier mais vous pourriez utiliser un clavier externe en attendant. Communiquez avec le service dassistance.
*Systme dexploitation introuvable Le systme dexploitation ne peut pas tre localis ni sur le lecteur A: ni sur le lecteur C: Accdez lutilitaire de configuration et vrifiez si le disque fixe et le lecteur A: sont bien identifis et si la squence damorage est bien configure. Le systme dexploitation devrait tre sur le lecteur C: sauf si vous avez chang sensiblement votre installation. Si lutilitaire de configuration est bien install, votre disque dur pourrait tre corrompu.
*Appuyez sur <F1> pour reprendre, sur <F2> pour CONFIGURER Affich aprs tout message derreur rcuprable. Appuyez sur [F1] pour continuer le dmarrage ou sur [F2] pour accder lutilitaire de configuration. 103 - Dpannage
*Erreur de lhorloge de temps rel - Vrifiez les paramtres dheure et de date Lhorloge de temps rel a chou le test du BIOS. Une rparation de la carte mre pourrait tre ncessaire. Communiquez avec le service dassistance.
*Erreur de ventilateur, le systme sarrtera dans 30 secondes. Contactez le service de support technique Fujitsu. Une erreur de ventilateur sest produite. Communiquez avec votre reprsentant commercial.
*Une erreur de ventilateur sest produite durant lamorage. Une erreur de ventilateur sest produite durant lamorage. Communiquez avec votre reprsentant commercial. 104 - Dpannage Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) Des informations quivalentes pour les ordinateurs dots de Windows 8 sont disponibles Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) en page 115 Avant de commencer utiliser votre ordinateur, il est trs important de faire des copies sur DVD de limage dorigine et du disque damorage (ainsi que dautres supports comme le disque de pilotes, dapplications et de restauration). Pour ce faire, suivez les instructions donnes dans les sections Sauvegarde de limage dorigine et Cration de sauvegardes de limage dorigine et des disques de ce chapitre. Enregistrement et restauration de vos images dorigine et de systme Outre les instructions sur lenregistrement de votre image dorigine, ce document explique plusieurs autres procdures importantes, notamment la cration dune image de systme, la restauration de limage dorigine et des images de systme, la gestion de vos images et la restauration des partitions sur un disque dur. POUR INSTALLER DES APPLICATIONS, POUR COPIER LIMAGE DORIGINE ET LES IMAGES DE SYSTME, POUR GRAVER UN DISQUE PRA, DES DISQUES NOUS VOUS RECOMMANDONS DUTILISER DES DISQUES DE TYPE DVD-R OU DVD+R POUR VOS SAUVEGARDES MAIS LES SUPPORTS* SUIVANTS DAPPLICATIONS OU DES DISQUES DAMORAGE, VOUS DEVEZ AVOIR UN GRAVEUR DE DVD INTERNE OU EXTERNE. IL EST EXTRMEMENT IMPORTANT DE COPIER VOTRE IMAGE DORIGINE SUR DES SUPPORTS AMOVIBLES (P. EX. DISQUES DVD). DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DE NE PAS POUVOIR RESTAURER LIMAGE UNE DATE ULTRIEURE. SONT AUSSI PRIS EN CHARGE:
POUR LIMAGE DORIGINE, LES DONNES DAPPLICATION ET LE DISQUE DAMORAGE POUR LES IMAGES DE SYSTME CRES PAR LUTILISATEUR
* SELON LE LECTEUR OPTIQUE ET LE FORMAT DU SUPPORT UTILIS, CERTAINS TYPES DE SUPPORTS PEUVENT NE PAS CONVENIR LA CRATION
: DVD-R/+R, DVD-RW/+RW, DVD-DL.
: DVD-R/+R. DIMAGES DE SYSTME. TANT DONN CERTAINES LIMITES LGALES, CERTAINES APPLICATIONS TIERCES DEVRONT TRE INSTALLES SPARMENT LAIDE DU SUPPORT DAPPLICATIONS JOINT VOTRE ORDINATEUR. Enregistrement de votre image dorigine Lorsque vous avez achet votre nouveau systme, limage dorigine a t pr-installe dans une partition cache de votre disque dur. Une copie de limage dorigine vous permettra, en cas de panne grave, de restaurer votre systme exactement comme il tait lorigine. 105 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) Pour crer une copie de scurit de limage dorigine sur des DVD, plusieurs disques vierges (les DVD-R ou DVD+R sont recommands) vous seront ncessaires. Lorsque vous avez termin la copie, assurez-vous dtiqueter clairement les disques et de les conserver en lieu sr. Cration dimages de sauvegarde de limage dorigine et des disques SUR CERTAINS MODLES DE STYLISTIC, LES APPLICATIONS NE SONT PAS SUR LE DISQUE DUR. ELLES SONT PLUTT DISPONIBLES POUR TLCHARGEMENT SUR LE SITE WEB DASSISTANCE FUJITSU. VEUILLEZ EN TENIR COMPTE LORSQUE VOUS LISEZ LES PROCDURES SUIVANTES. TOUTES LES DONNES CRES PAR LUTILISATEUR SERONT SUPPRIMES DE VOTRE SYSTME LORSQUE LIMAGE DORIGINE SERA RESTAURE. Le bouton [Grer/Changer] permet galement de crer des copies de sauvegarde de limage dorigine, du ou des disques dapplications ou du disque damorage. 1 Lancez le programme My Recovery en cliquant sur licne correspondante disponible sur le bureau. 2 Slectionnez [Grer/Crer] -> [Grer les images de sauvegarde]. Vous trouverez dans le menu Images de sauvegarde une liste dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir le type de disque que vous souhaitez graver: disque damorage, disques dapplication ou disque de rcupration. 3 Slectionnez Disque de restauration, puis cliquez sur [Graver le DVD]. 4 Assurez-vous que le numro de la case est 2 (Remarque: en fonction de la taille de limage, il est possible que le chiffre de limage dorigine indiqu soit suprieur). 5 Vous voyez apparatre le message Le disque de restauration 1 sera cr. Inscrivez quelques commentaires et un numro de disque sur le DVD. Cliquez sur [OUI] pour commencer graver limage dorigine. 6 Lorsque le systme copie, il affiche un cran criture sur disque avec une barre de progression. Lorsque lopration est termine, une bote de dialogue vous informe que la copie de sauvegarde a t cre avec succs. 7 Rptez la procdure avec les autres disques dimages (disque damorage et disques dapplications). Le nombre dimages disponibles peut varier selon le modle du systme; sur certains modles, les applications ne sont pas charges sur le disque dur. 106 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) Restauration de votre image dorigine Si vous avez un jour besoin de restaurer votre image dorigine, excutez les oprations suivantes. Il ne faut pas oublier que vous pouvez avoir des applications de fabricants indpendants devant tre installes sparment laide du disque dapplications livr avec votre ordinateur. TOUTES LES DONNES CRES PAR LUTILISATEUR SERONT SUPPRIMES DE VOTRE SYSTME LORSQUE LIMAGE DORIGINE SERA RESTAURE. Si vous dsirez restaurer votre image dorigine, excutez les oprations indiques sous Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque dur . Cration dune image de systme tape facultative : Depuis votre bureau Windows, lancez lutilitaire Applications Fujitsu en prime, puis slectionnez les composants que vous dsirez installer. Copies de sauvegarde de limage systme configures par lutilisateur: Sur votre bureau, il existe une icne [MyRecovery] (Ma restauration) qui vous permet de faire une copie de scurit de votre image systme actuelle sur un autre emplacement de votre disque dur ou sur un support externe. Une image systme est un enregistrement de la configuration de votre unit de disque C: un moment prcis. Il est conseill de faire occasionnellement une copie de scurit de limage systme afin de pouvoir revenir certains stades prcdents sans avoir revenir au tout dbut, limage dorigine. Par dfaut, les images de systme sont enregistres dans le dossier MyRecovery (soit sur D:\ soit sur une unit de disque externe, selon la configuration de votre systme). 1 Cliquez sur licne [MyRecovery] de votre bureau Windows. Lcran My Recovery apparatra (voir la figure 52). My Recovery
(Il est possible que votre tiquette soit diffrente selon la configuration de votre systme.) 2 Dans lcran MyRecovery, cliquez sur [Sauvegarde]. 3 Sur lcran suivant, vous pouvez saisir jusqu 200 caractres dinformations se rapportant au fichier de sauvegarde. Ces informations vous aideront identifier limage ultrieurement. 107 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) Figure 52. cran MyRecovery 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant] et vous verrez le systme redmarrer. 5 Aprs le redmarrage, vous voyez apparatre une fentre Cration de limage de scurit vous proposant de Crer limage sur lunit de disque D ou de Slectionner une unit de disque pour le cas o vous prfreriez conserver limage sur un disque dur externe. (Veuillez prendre note que la fonction de cration dimage sur lunit D nest pas disponible avec toutes les configurations.) 6 Vous voyez apparatre une illustration graphique de la faon dont limage sera enregistre. Cliquez sur le bouton [Suivant]. 7 Cliquez sur [Excuter] pour dmarrer lenregistrement de la copie de sauvegarde. 108 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) Gestion de vos images de sauvegarde Loutil MyRecovery permet galement de copier vos images de sauvegarde, de les archiver sur des DVD, ou de les supprimer de votre disque dur lorsquelles ny sont plus utiles. 1 Tout dabord, cliquez sur licne [MyRecovery] de votre bureau Windows. 2 Dans la fentre MyRecovery, cliquez sur [Grer/Crer]. 3 Lorsque vous voyez apparatre la fentre Gestionnaire MyRecovery, cliquez sur [Grer les images de sauvegarde]. 4 Vous voyez ensuite apparatre une liste de vos images de sauvegarde. Sous cette liste, trois boutons [Crer DVD],
[Copier], [Supprimer] permettent de grer les images de sauvegarde. 5 Slectionnez un titre dimage dans la liste, puis cliquez sur le bouton correspondant laction que vous dsirez excuter. 6 Veuillez prendre note que le bouton [Copier] est disponible uniquement si un disque dur externe est connect votre systme. Si vous dcidez de copier une image, vous devez ensuite dsigner un emplacement de destination. Lorsque vous tes prt copier, cliquez sur [OK] pour continuer. Un cran de progression est affich pendant que le systme copie. 7 Veuillez prendre note que si vous copiez une image sur un disque dur externe, loriginal et la copie sont tous deux affichs dans la fentre Images de sauvegarde avec le mme nom, la mme date et la mme taille de fichier, mais avec une lettre dunit de disque diffrente. Si vous choisissez [Crer DVD], assurez-vous davoir un graveur de DVD et des DVD vierges. Utilisation du disque de restauration et dutilitaires Le disque Restauration et Utilitaires contient divers outils permettant de restaurer votre image dorigine ou une image de systme, ainsi que deffacer certaines donnes inutiles sur votre disque dur. Mthodes pour accder aux utilitaires Les outils Restauration et Utilitaires sont pr-installs en usine dans une partition cache et sont disponibles sur le disque auto-amorage. Veuillez prendre note que si vous modifiez la configuration des partitions de votre disque dur, vous risquez de supprimer les outils Restauration et Utilitaires . Dans un tel cas, vous ne pourrez plus utiliser la partition cache pour lancer les outils Restauration et Utilitaires , mais vous pourrez toujours amorcer le systme partir du disque damorage. 109 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) Comment dterminer si la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires est dj installe 1 Allumez ou redmarrez votre systme. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat, appuyez sur la touche [F12]. Le menu damorage saffiche. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Tab pour slectionner le menu Applications. 3 Vrifiez si la fonctionnalit <Restauration et Utilitaires> est installe. Si elle ny est pas, cela signifie que la fonctionnalit doit tre utilise partir du disque. Si loption <Restauration et Utilitaires> nest pas disponible, reportez-vous Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque damorage . Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque dur 1 Allumez ou redmarrez votre systme. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat, appuyez sur la touche [F12]. Le menu damorage saffiche. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Tab pour slectionner le menu Applications. 3 Avec le curseur, allez en bas de page jusqu <Restauration et Utilitaires>, puis appuyez sur [Entre]. 4 Une barre de progression apparatra en bas de lcran pendant le transfert des fichiers partir du disque. 5 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Options de restauration du systme apparat, choisissez une nouvelle configuration de clavier si ncessaire, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Systme dexploitation apparat, slectionnez Utiliser les outils de restauration... et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Si ncessaire, entrez votre mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 8 Lorsque la fentre Options de restauration du systme apparat, cliquez sur Restauration et Utilitaires. 9 Lcran Restauration et Utilitaires apparat avec trois onglets: Diagnostics, Restauration et Utilitaires. Veuillez noter que longlet Diagnostics nest pas pris en charge par certains modles LIFEBOOK/STYLISTIC lorsque vous excutez la fonction Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque dur. Si vous dsirez restaurer le systme dexploitation, utilisez licne du centre Restauration de limage dorigine (seulement unit de disque C:) sous longlet Restauration. 110 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque damorage Si vous dsirez vrifier/changer la priorit damorage (plutt que de dmarrer partir du disque dur ou dun lecteur de disquette externe), excutez les oprations suivantes:
1 Mettez le systme sous tension. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat lcran, appuyez sur la touche [F12]
pour aller au menu darmorage. 2 Surlignez loption CD/DVD. 3 Mettez le disque damorage sur le plateau du lecteur. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Une barre de progression apparatra en bas de lcran pendant le transfert des fichiers partir du disque. 5 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Options de restauration du systme apparat, choisissez une nouvelle configuration de clavier si ncessaire, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Systme dexploitation apparat, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Si ncessaire, entrez votre mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 8 Lorsque la fentre Options de restauration du systme apparat, cliquez sur Restauration et Utilitaires. 9 Lorsque lcran Restauration et utilitaires apparat, trois onglets sont prsents: Diagnostics, Restauration et Utilitaires. Onglets Restauration et Utilitaires Onglet Diagnostics: Loutil de diagnostic est conu pour tre utilis par des informaticiens professionnels. Il y a peu de chances que vous ayez besoin de lutiliser. Lorsque vous slectionnez des dispositifs dans la fentre Diagnostic et que vous cliquez ensuite sur [Excuter], ceux-ci sont soumis plusieurs tests. Onglet Restauration: Longlet Restauration comprend trois outils: Restauration de copies de systme configures par lutilisateur , Restauration de limage dorigine (uniquement lunit de disque C:) et Restauration de limage dorigine (restauration intgrale du disque dur). Vous pouvez utiliser ces outils pour restaurer limage dorigine partir de la partition cache, pour restaurer une image de sauvegarde cre par vous ou des images enregistres sur des DVD, et pour restaurer compltement votre disque dur. Si vous dsirez savoir comment crer des DVD de restauration de limage dorigine, des DVD de sauvegarde cr par lutilisateur, et une sauvegarde de limage de systme, reportez-
vous aux sections appropries ci-dessus. 111 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) partition cache. Onglet Utilitaires: Longlet Utilitaires comprend trois outils: Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur , Restaurer la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires et Restauration complte dordinateur Windows . Lutilitaire Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur permet de supprimer toutes les donnes sur votre disque dur et den empcher leur rutilisation. REMARQUE: Nutilisez pas lutilitaire Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur, moins que vous soyez absolument certain de vouloir effacer votre disque dur en entier, y compris toutes les partitions. Lutilitaire Restaurer la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires permet de restaurer la premire Lutilitaire Restauration complte dordinateur Windows permet de restaurer une image cre avec le Centre de restauration et de sauvegarde Windows. Lutilitaire Restauration complte de lordinateur efface et rcrit toutes les donnes se trouvant sur le disque dur. Utilisation du DVD de restauration Windows 7 sur un systme Windows 8 de 64 bits (option de rtrogradation). Si vous utilisez le DVD de restauration Windows 7 sur un systme avec Windows 8 de 64 bits prinstall, vous devez dabord dsactiver la fonction Amorage scuris, puis activer CSM et Amorage rapide avec laide de la procdure suivante :
1 Pour accder aux paramtres BIOS, appuyez sur la touche [F2] aprs avoir allum le systme. 2 Utilisez les touches flches droite ou gauche pour ouvrir la page Scurit . REMARQUE: Si votre systme ne possde aucun mot de passe superviseur, vous ne pouvez pas changer les configurations damorage scuris. Dans ce cas, vous devez slectionner loption Dfinir un mot de passe superviseur et choisir un mot de passe. 3 Avec les touches flches vers le haut et vers le bas, slectionnez Configurations damorage scuris. 4 Slectionnez Amorage scuris ou Option damorage scuris, puis avec la touche [Entre], choisissez
[Dsactiv] et utilisez la touche [chap] pour quitter Configurations damorage scuris. 5 Utilisez les touches flches pour ouvrir la page Avanc . 6 Slectionnez CSM et choisissez [Activ]. 7 Slectionnez Amorage rapide et choisissez [Dsactiv]. 8 Utilisez les touches flches pour ouvrir la page Quitter . 9 Quittez les paramtres de configuration du BIOS en choisissant Enregistrer les modifications et quitter. Vous pouvez ensuite dmarrer le systme partir du DVD de restauration Windows 7 et installer Windows 7 sur le systme. 112 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) Restauration de limage dorigine avec la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires ( partir dun nouveau disque dur ou dun disque dur sans auto-amorage) Si vous avez install un nouveau disque dur ou si votre disque dur na pas de fonction dauto-amorage, excutez les oprations suivantes. Veuillez prendre note que vous devez dabord crer de nouvelles partitions sur le disque dur, puis restaurer limage dorigine. 1 Mettez le systme sous tension. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat lcran, appuyez sur la touche [F12]. 2 Surlignez loption CD/DVD. 3 Insrez le disque amorable dans le lecteur de DVD, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 4 Lorsque la fentre Options de restauration du systme apparat, cliquez sur <Restauration et Utilitaires>. 5 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Options de restauration du systme apparat, choisissez une nouvelle configuration de clavier si ncessaire, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Systme dexploitation apparat, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Si ncessaire, entrez votre mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 8 Lorsque la fentre Options de restauration du systme apparat, cliquez sur Restauration et Utilitaires. 9 Dans la fentre Restauration et Utilitaires, cliquez sur longlet Restauration puis slectionnez licne Restauration de limage dorigine. 10 Cliquez sur [Excuter]. 11 Lisez lavis et cliquez sur Jaccepte . 12 Cliquez sur [Suivant], puis sur [Excuter] pour dmarrer le processus de restauration. 13 1. La mention Vrification du disque de restauration saffichera en caractres gras et le reste sera gris. Suivez les consignes et Insrez le disque de restauration N 1. Dans certains cas, vous pouvez tre invit Insrer le disque de restauration N 2, selon la taille de limage de restauration. 14 Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour dmarrer la vrification. Cliquez sur [Suivant] nouveau lorsque la vrification est termine. 15 2. La mention Initialisation du disque dur saffichera en gras avec le message Veuillez insrer le disque amorable dans le lecteur optique. Insrez le disque amorable. Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour continuer. Une bote de dialogue saffiche, avec un message de vrification de disque. 113 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) 16 Le message Attention ! Toutes les donnes du disque dur seront compltement effaces ! apparatra. Slectionnez [OK]. Le processus de cration de partition dmarrera. 17 3. La mention Restauration de limage dorigine dans une partition cache est affiche en gras avec le message Veuillez insrer le disque de restauration N 1 dans le lecteur optique . Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour continuer. la fin du processus, loutil retournera automatiquement 3. Restauration de limage dorigine dans une partition cache et affichera le message suivant: Veuillez insrer votre disque dapplications tierces ou le DVD CyberLink, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Insrez chaque disque lun aprs lautre jusqu les avoir tous installs. Si vous navez pas de disque dapplications tierces ni de DVD CyberLink ou si vous avez dj insr tous ces disques, cliquez sur [Sauter] pour continuer. REMARQUE: Certains produits (notamment ceux nayant pas de lecteur optique) sont livrs sans DVD CyberLink. Vous avez alors deux choix:
Insrer un ou plusieurs disques dapplications pour restaurer la partition cache, ou Cliquer sur [Sauter] pour sauter la restauration du ou des disques dapplications et poursuivre le processus de restauration. 18 Si vous slectionnez dinsrer un disque dapplication, le mme message apparatra de nouveau chaque fois quun disque dapplications aura t copi dans la partition cache. Insrez au besoin de nouveaux disques dapplications jusqu ce que tous les disques aient t copis, puis cliquez sur [Sauter] pour continuer le processus de restauration. 19 Lorsque vous avez cliqu sur [Sauter], le message de confirmation suivant apparat: Si vous dsirez sauter lopration de copie ou si vous avez termin de copier, cliquez sur [OK]. Cliquez sur [Annuler] si vous dsirez retourner Restauration de limage dorigine sur une partition cache. 20 Cliquez sur [OK] et le processus de restauration de limage dorigine commencera. 21 la fin de la restauration, vous verrez le message La restauration a t effectue. Cliquez sur [OK] pour redmarrer lordinateur. Cliquez sur [OK]. Tlchargement des mises jour de pilotes Lutilitaire FSDM (Fujitsu Software Download Manager) est votre disposition pour tlcharger les plus rcentes versions des pilotes, utilitaires et applications depuis le site dassistance Fujitsu. Si vous avez un systme dexploitation Windows 8 ou Windows 7, vous devez vous connecter au site dassistance (http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/
support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS) 114 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) Des informations quivalentes pour les ordinateurs dots de Windows 7 sont disponibles Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 7) en page 105 Avant de commencer utiliser votre ordinateur, il est trs important de copier sur DVD limage dorigine de votre systme et votre disque damorage. Pour ce faire, suivez les instructions donnes dans les sections Sauvegarde de limage dorigine et Cration de sauvegardes de limage dorigine et des disques de ce chapitre. Enregistrement et restauration de vos images dorigine et de systme Outre les instructions sur lenregistrement de votre image dorigine, ce document explique plusieurs autres procdures importantes, notamment la cration dune image de systme, la restauration de limage dorigine et des images de systme, la gestion de vos images et la restauration des partitions sur un disque dur. POUR INSTALLER DES APPLICATIONS, POUR COPIER LIMAGE DORIGINE ET LES IMAGES DE SYSTME, POUR GRAVER UN DISQUE DAMORAGE, NOUS VOUS RECOMMANDONS DUTILISER DES DISQUES DE TYPE DVD-R OU DVD+R POUR VOS SAUVEGARDES MAIS LES SUPPORTS* SUIVANTS VOUS DEVEZ AVOIR UN GRAVEUR DE DVD INTERNE OU EXTERNE. IL EST EXTRMEMENT IMPORTANT DE COPIER VOTRE IMAGE DORIGINE SUR DES SUPPORTS AMOVIBLES (P. EX. DISQUES DVD). DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DE NE PAS POUVOIR RESTAURER LIMAGE UNE DATE ULTRIEURE. SONT AUSSI PRIS EN CHARGE:
POUR LIMAGE DORIGINE, LES DONNES DAPPLICATION ET LE DISQUE DAMORAGE POUR LES IMAGES DE SYSTME CRES PAR LUTILISATEUR
* SELON LE LECTEUR OPTIQUE ET LE FORMAT DU SUPPORT UTILIS, CERTAINS TYPES DE SUPPORTS PEUVENT NE PAS CONVENIR LA CRATION
: DVD-R/+R, DVD-RW/+RW, DVD-DL.
: DVD-R/+R. DIMAGES DE SYSTME. EN RAISON DE CERTAINES EXIGENCES DE LICENCE, CERTAINES APPLICATIONS TIERCES DEVRONT TRE INSTALLES SPARMENT. Enregistrement de votre image dorigine Lorsque vous avez achet votre nouveau systme, limage dorigine a t pr-installe dans une partition cache de votre disque dur. Une copie de limage dorigine vous permettra, en cas de panne grave, de restaurer votre systme exactement comme il tait lorigine. 115 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) Pour crer une copie de scurit de limage dorigine sur des DVD, quatre ou cinq disques vierges (les DVD-R ou DVD+R sont recommands) vous seront ncessaires. Lorsque vous avez termin la copie, assurez-vous dtiqueter clairement les disques et de les conserver en lieu sr. Cration dimages de sauvegarde de limage dorigine et dun disque damorage Le bouton [Grer/Changer] permet galement de crer des copies de sauvegarde de limage dorigine et/ou un disque damorage. TOUTES LES DONNES CRES PAR LUTILISATEUR SERONT SUPPRIMES DE VOTRE SYSTME LORSQUE LIMAGE DORIGINE SERA RESTAURE. 1 Lancez lapplication Sauvegarde et restauration de systme avec laide de licne correspondante sur le bureau Windows, puis cliquez sur [Oui] dans la bote de dialogue Contrle de compte dutilisateur. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant] lorsque lcran Sauvegardez vos donnes apparat. 3 Slectionnez longlet [Grer/Crer], puis cliquez sur [Crer des disques de restauration] pour graver limage dorigine de votre systme sur un DVD. 4 Sous Step 1: Veuillez slectionner un type de support pour le disque de restauration , slectionnez Type de support dans la liste droulante, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. (Remarque: cet cran indique le nombre de disques ncessaires la restauration). 5 Sous Step 2: Confirm your Recovery Disc (tape 2: Confirmez votre disque de restauration), les disques damorage et de restauration sont par dfaut tous les deux slectionns dans la Liste des disques de restauration. Si vous gravez une sauvegarde pour la premire fois, veillez slectionner les options suivantes: Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Lorsque lcran de confirmation Attention about media (Attention au support) apparat, cliquez sur [OK]. VEILLEZ BRANCHER LORDINATEUR SUR LE SECTEUR POUR LES TAPES SUIVANTES CAR ELLES RISQUENT DE DURER LONGTEMPS. 116 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) 7 Sous Step 3: Making Recovery Disc (tape 3: Cration du disque de Restauration), cliquez sur [Dmarrer]. 8 Le systme vous demandera dinsrer les disques. 9 Une fois le processus termin et lorsque lcran Step 4: Making Recovery Disc process has been completed
(tape 4: La cration du disque de restauration est termine) apparat, cliquez sur [Terminer]. Restauration de votre image dorigine. Si vous avez un jour besoin de restaurer votre image dorigine, excutez les oprations suivantes. TOUTES LES DONNES CRES PAR LUTILISATEUR SERONT SUPPRIMES DE VOTRE SYSTME LORSQUE LIMAGE DORIGINE SERA RESTAURE. Si vous dsirez restaurer votre image dorigine, excutez les oprations indiques sous Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque dur . Cration dune image de systme tape facultative : Depuis votre bureau Windows, lancez lutilitaire Applications Fujitsu en prime, puis slectionnez les composants que vous dsirez installer. Copies de sauvegarde de limage systme configures par lutilisateur: Sur votre bureau, il existe une icne [Sauvegarde et restauration du systme] qui vous permet de faire une copie de scurit de votre image systme actuelle sur un autre emplacement de votre disque dur ou sur un support externe. Une image systme est un enregistrement de la configuration de votre unit de disque C un moment prcis. Il est conseill de faire occasionnellement une copie de scurit de limage systme afin de pouvoir revenir certains stades prcdents sans avoir revenir au tout dbut, limage dorigine. Par dfaut, les images de systme sont enregistres dans lunit de disque D: situe dans le dossier Sauvegarde et restauration du systme. Vous pouvez galement dcider denregistrer limage sur un disque dur externe. 117 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) 1 Lancez lapplication Sauvegarde et restauration de systme avec laide de licne correspondante sur le bureau Windows, puis cliquez sur [Oui] dans la bote de dialogue Contrle de compte dutilisateur. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant] lorsque lcran Sauvegardez vos donnes apparat. 3 Slectionnez longlet [Sauvegarde] lorsque lcran Sauvegarde et restauration du systme apparat. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton [Sauvegarde du systme utilisateur]. 5 Sous Step 1: Select a backup destination (tape 1 : Slectionnez une destination de sauvegarde), slectionnez le disque de destination. Par dfaut, le lecteur de destination est le D. Vous pouvez aussi slectionner loption
[Autre lecteur] pour faire la sauvegarde sur un disque externe. Indiquez si vous souhaitez que le systme sarrte ou redmarre une fois le processus termin en cliquant sur [Arrt] ou [Redmarrer]. 6 Sous Step 2: Name your backup images (tape 2 : Nommez vos images de sauvegarde.), vous pouvez saisir jusqu 300 caractres dinformations se rapportant au fichier de sauvegarde. Ces informations vous aideront identifier limage ultrieurement. 7 Sous Step 3: Backup the entire C: drive image (tape 3 : Sauvegarder limage complte du disque C :), vrifiez vos paramtres de sauvegarde et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 8 Sous Step 4: Please confirm the following before starting your backup (tape 4: Veuillez confirmer les donnes suivantes avant de lancer la sauvegarde), cliquez sur [OK] pour redmarrer votre ordinateur et lancer la sauvegarde. 9 Une fois la sauvegarde effectue et aprs redmarrage du systme, lcran Step 5: Backup Completed. Confirm the results (tape 5: Sauvegarde termine. Confirmez les rsultats) doit apparatre sur le bureau, confirmant que la cration limage de sauvegarde est russie. Cliquez sur [Fermer] pour fermer la bote de dialogue Sauvegarde et restauration du systme . 10 Cliquez sur [OK] pour quitter lutilitaire Sauvegarde et restauration du systme . Gestion de vos images de sauvegarde. Loutil Sauvegarde et restauration du systme permet galement de copier vos images de sauvegarde, de les archiver sur des DVD, ou de les supprimer de votre disque dur lorsquelles ny sont plus utiles. 1 Lancez lapplication Sauvegarde et restauration de systme avec laide de licne correspondante sur le bureau Windows, puis cliquez sur [Oui] dans la bote de dialogue Contrle de compte dutilisateur. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant] lorsque lcran Sauvegardez vos donnes apparat. 118 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) 3 Slectionnez longlet [Crer/Grer] et cliquez sur [Grer la sauvegarde du systme utilisateur]. 4 La fentre suivante contient trois options qui vous permettent de [Copier], [Supprimer] ou [Ajouter des commentaires] vos images. Slectionnez laction que vous voulez voir le bouton effectuer. Si vous choisissez Copier (Pour que le bouton [Copier] fonctionne, un disque externe doit tre connect au systme, faute de quoi toute tentative de copie produira un message derreur.) a. Sous Step 1: Select a backup file that you wish to copy (tape 1 : Slectionnez un fichier de sauvegarde que vous souhaitez copier.), slectionnez lemplacement du fichier de sauvegarde dsir. Une liste de fichiers de sauvegarde apparat. Slectionnez le fichier que vous souhaitez copier et cliquez sur [Suivant]. b. Sous Step 2: Select a drive to copy a backup file (tape 2 : Slectionnez un disque pour copier le fichier de sauvegarde), slectionnez le disque de destination et cliquez sur [Suivant]. c. Sous Step 3: Start to copy the following information (tape 3 : Dmarrer la copie des informations suivantes), confirmez les informations et cliquez sur [Dmarrer]. d. Lcran Step 4: Processing backup data copying (tape 4 : Copie des donnes de sauvegarde en cours), affiche une barre de progression. e. Cliquez sur le bouton [Terminer] de lcran tape 5 : Copy completed. Confirm the results (tape 5 :
Confirmez les rsultats), cliquez sur [Terminer]. Slection de loption [Supprimer]. a. Sous Step 1: Please select your target data (tape 1 : Veuillez slectionner les donnes dsires.), slectionnez lemplacement du fichier de sauvegarde dsir. Une liste de fichiers de sauvegarde apparat. Slectionnez le(les) fichier(s) que vous souhaitez supprimer et cliquez sur [Suivant]. b. lcran Step 2: Delete backup data (tape 2 : Supprimer les donnes de sauvegarde), cliquez sur [Dmarrer]. c. Le systme ouvre une fentre de confirmation. Cliquez sur [OK]. d. lcran Step 4: Delete process has been completed (tape 4 : La suppression est termine.), cliquez sur [Terminer]. 119 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) Slection de loption [Ajouter un commentaire]. a. Sous Step 1: Please select your target data (tape 1 : Veuillez slectionner les donnes dsires.), slectionnez lemplacement du fichier de sauvegarde dsir. Une liste de fichiers de sauvegarde apparat. Slectionnez le fichier auquel vous souhaitez ajouter des commentaires et cliquez sur [Suivant]. b. Sous Step 2: Add comment (tape 2 : Ajouter un commentaire), saisissez au maximum 300 caractres dans la zone Commentaire , puis cliquez sur [Ajouter]. c. Cliquez sur le bouton [Terminer] de lcran tape 3 : Adding comment has been completed (tape 3 :
Ajout du commentaire termin), cliquez sur [Terminer]. Restauration partir de vos images de sauvegarde 1 Lancez lapplication Sauvegarde et restauration de systme avec laide de licne correspondante sur le bureau Windows, puis cliquez sur [Oui] dans la bote de dialogue Contrle de compte dutilisateur. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant] lorsque lcran Sauvegardez vos donnes apparat. 3 Slectionnez longlet Restaurer et cliquez sur Restore User System Backup (Restaurer partir dune sauvegarde du systme utilisateur). 4 Sous Step 1: Please confirm the following before starting restore process (tape 1 : Veuillez confirmer ce qui suit avant de commencer le processus de restauration), confirmez les informations et cliquez sur [OK]. Le systme redmarrera pour permettre la restauration de commencer. 5 Aprs le redmarrage du systme, lcran Explanation about Restore User System Backup (Explications sur la restauration partir de la sauvegarde de lutilisateur) apparat. Aprs avoir lu laccord de licence, cliquez sur [Accepter], puis sur [Suivant]. 6 Dans la liste des donnes de sauvegarde, slectionnez une image restaurer et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 lcran Confirmer avant la restauration , cliquez sur [Dmarrer]. 8 Une fois la restauration termine et lorsque lcran Finished restoration (Restauration termine) apparat, cliquez sur [Fermer]; le systme redmarre et retourne Windows. 120 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) Utilisation du disque de restauration et dutilitaires Le disque Restauration et Utilitaires contient divers outils permettant de restaurer votre image dorigine ou une image de systme, ainsi que deffacer certaines donnes inutiles sur votre disque dur. Mthodes pour accder aux utilitaires Les outils Restauration et Utilitaires sont pr-installs en usine dans une partition cache et sont disponibles sur le disque auto-amorage. Veuillez prendre note que si vous modifiez la configuration des partitions de votre disque dur, vous risquez de supprimer les outils Restauration et Utilitaires . Dans un tel cas, vous ne pourrez plus utiliser la partition cache pour lancer les outils Restauration et Utilitaires , mais vous pourrez toujours amorcer le systme partir du disque damorage. Comment dterminer si la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires est dj installe 1 Allumez ou redmarrez votre systme. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat, appuyez sur la touche [F12]. 2 Dans le menu Amorage qui apparat, vrifiez si loption <Restauration et Utilitaires> est prsente. Si elle ny est pas, cela signifie que la fonctionnalit doit tre utilise partir du disque. Si loption <Restauration et Utilitaires>
nest pas disponible, reportez-vous Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque damorage . Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque dur 1 Allumez ou redmarrez votre systme. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat, appuyez sur la touche [F12]. 2 Avec le curseur, allez en bas de page jusqu <Restauration et Utilitaires>, puis appuyez sur [Entre]. 3 Choisissez votre langue (anglais ou franais). 4 Trois options sont disposition : Diagnostics, Restauration et Utilitaires (pour savoir comment utiliser ces outils, consultez la section Restauration et Utilitaires ci-dessous). Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque damorage Si vous dsirez vrifier/changer la priorit damorage (plutt que de dmarrer partir du disque dur ou dun lecteur de disquette externe), excutez les oprations suivantes:
121 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) 1 Mettez le systme sous tension. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat lcran, appuyez sur la touche [F12]. 2 Mettez en surbrillance loption CD/DVD du menu damorage et appuyez sur la touche [Entre]. 3 Mettez le disque damorage sur le plateau du lecteur. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. REMARQUE: ltape suivante, il se peut que le logo Fujitsu apparaisse lcran pendant quelques minutes avant la barre de progression. 5 Slectionnez le mode damorage CD/DVD. (mode UEFI), puis appuyez sur [Entre]. Le logo Fujitsu suivi dune barre de progression, apparatra en bas de lcran pendant le transfert des fichiers partir du disque. Restauration et utilitaires Outil Diagnostics : Loutil de diagnostic est conu pour tre utilis par des informaticiens professionnels. Il y a peu de chances que vous ayez besoin de lutiliser. Si vous devez toutefois lutiliser, procdez selon les tapes suivantes :
1 Appuyez sur le bouton Outil Diagnostic pour dmarrer loutil de diagnostic. Une barre de progression saffiche pendant le dmarrage de loutil. 2 Lisez la remarque, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 3 Dans la fentre affichant les outils de diagnostic matriel Fujitsu, choisissez une ou plusieurs des options suivantes :
Unit centrale, Mmoire, cran, Disque dur, CD/DVD/BD, Disquette, Clavier, et Souris. Cliquez sur le bouton [Option]
pour indiquer combien de fois loutil doit raliser un diagnostic sur chacun des composants slectionns. Appuyez sur [Excuter] pour dmarrer loutil de diagnostic. 4 Une fois lopration termine, les composants slectionns sont entours en rouge, ce qui indique quils ont t diagnostiqus, puis la fentre de rsultats apparat. 5 Cliquez sur [Terminer] pour fermer loutil de diagnostic, puis cliquez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la fin de la session de diagnostic. Outil Restauration : Loutil de restauration contient trois options. Copies de sauvegarde de limage systme configures par lutilisateur: Restauration du disque C: partir du disque D: ou dun support externe), 122 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) Restauration du disque C: Restauration de limage dorigine (disque C: uniquement), et Restauration complte du disque dur : Vous pouvez utiliser ces outils pour restaurer limage dorigine partir de la partition cache, pour restaurer une image de sauvegarde cre par vous ou des images enregistres sur des DVD, et pour restaurer compltement votre disque dur. Si vous dsirez savoir comment crer des DVD de restauration de limage dorigine, des DVD de sauvegarde cr par lutilisateur, et une sauvegarde de limage de systme, reportez-vous aux sections appropries ci-dessus. Pour une restauration partir du disque D: ou dun support externe :
1 Cliquez sur [User System Backup] (Sauvegarde de limage systme configures par lutilisateur). 2 Un cran avec une barre de progression saffiche, suivi par lcran avec laccord de licence. Cliquez sur [Accepter]
pour accepter laccord de licence. 3 lcran Select an image to restore (Slectionnez une image restaurer), slectionnez dans la liste dimages celle que vous souhaitez restaurer, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 lcran Confirm before restoration (Confirmer avant la restauration), cliquez sur [Dmarrer] pour commencer la restauration. 5 Une fois la restauration termine et lorsque lcran Finished restoration (Restauration termine) apparat, cliquez sur [Fermer]; le systme redmarre et retourne Windows. Pour une restauration partir de limage dorigine (partition cache) :
1 Cliquez sur [Restore C: drive] (Restauration partir du disque C:). 2 Un cran avec une barre de progression saffiche, suivi par lcran Restore Factory Image (only C: drive)
(Restauration partir de limage dorigine disque C: uniquement) confirmant que limage dorigine sera restaure sur le disque C: et que les donnes prsentes sur le disque D: seront conserves. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 3 Lisez lcran avec les instructions, cliquez sur [Accepter] puis sur [Suivant]. 4 Au message davertissement annonant la restauration de limage dorigine sur le disque C:, cliquez sur [OK]. 5 Lorsque lcran avec la barre de progression apparat, attendez la fin du processus. 6 Une fois le processus termin, cliquez sur [Terminer]; lordinateur redmarre et retourne Windows. 123 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) Pour une restauration complte du disque dur :
Suivez les instructions donnes dans la section approprie : Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility (for new hard drive or non-bootable hard drive) (Restauration de limage dorigine avec la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires - partir dun nouveau disque dur ou dun disque dur sans auto-amorage). Outil Utilitaires : Loutil Utilitaires comprend deux options: Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur et Crer des partitions. Lutilitaire Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur permet de supprimer toutes les donnes sur votre disque dur et den empcher leur rutilisation. REMARQUE: Nutilisez pas lutilitaire Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur, moins que vous soyez absolument certain de vouloir effacer votre disque dur en entier, y compris toutes les partitions. 124 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) Pour supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur :
a. Cliquez sur [Suppression des donnes sur le disque dur]
b. Une barre de progression apparat, suivie par un cran avec laccord de licence. c. Acceptez les conditions du contrat et cliquez sur [Suivant]. d. Dans la liste de disques durs, slectionnez le disque dur dont les donnes sont supprimer et cliquez sur [Suivant]. Lutilitaire Cration de partitions sert changer la taille des partitions sur le disque C: et le disque D:. Pour excuter cet utilitaire :
a. Cliquez sur [Cration dune partition]. b. Une barre de progression apparat, suivie par un cran avec laccord de licence. Acceptez laccord de licence. c. Sur lcran Outil de restauration Cration de partitions, glissez la coulisse jusqu la taille approprie et cliquez sur [OK]. d. Au message vous demandant de confirmer la cration des partitions, cliquez sur [Oui]. Restauration de limage dorigine avec la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires ( partir dun nouveau disque dur ou dun disque dur sans auto-amorage) Si vous avez install un nouveau disque dur ou si votre disque dur na pas de fonction dauto-amorage, excutez les oprations suivantes. 1 Mettez le systme sous tension. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat lcran, appuyez sur la touche [Entre]. 2 Mettez en surbrillance loption CD/DVD du menu damorage et appuyez sur la touche [Entre]. 3 Insrez le disque amorable dans le lecteur de DVD, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 4 Slectionnez le mode damorage CD/DVD. (mode UEFI), puis appuyez sur [Entre]. Le logo Fujitsu, suivi dune barre de progression, apparatra en bas de lcran pendant le transfert des fichiers partir du disque. 5 Choisissez votre langue (anglais ou franais). 6 Trois options sont disposition : Diagnostics, Restauration et Utilitaires. Slectionnez [Restauration]. 125 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) 7 Slectionnez [Restore full hard drive] (Restauration complte du disque dur). 8 Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour confirmer la restauration complte du disque dur. (Toutes les donnes prsentes sur le disque dur seront effaces.) 9 Acceptez laccord de licence en cliquant sur [Accepter], puis sur [Suivant]. 10 lcran Recovery Disk Check (Vrification du disque de restauration), cliquez sur [Suivant] pour vrifier si le disque damorage est bien insr dans le lecteur optique. 11 Lcran de vrification du disque de restauration apparat, suivi par un message vous invitant insrer le premier disque. Cliquez sur [OK] pour continuer. Rptez cette tape pour tous les disques. Aprs avoir vrifi tous les disques et termin la vrification, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 12 Insrez nouveau le premier disque de restauration puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 13 Lorsque le message final vous avertissant que toutes les donnes prsentes sur les disques C: et D: seront perdues, cliquez sur [OK]. Le processus de restauration dmarre alors. 14 Suivez les messages vous invitant insrer les disques de restauration suivants et cliquez sur [OK]. 15 Une fois limage dorigine copie sur le disque dur et restaure, insrez le disque damorage lorsque le message vous y invite. 16 Une fois le processus de restauration termin, cliquez sur [Terminer] pour redmarrer lordinateur. Lordinateur redmarrera automatiquement puis effectuera son amorage initial. Modification des paramtres BIOS pour passer de Windows 8 32 bits Windows 8 64 bits et inversement Pour installer la version 32 bits de Windows 8 et pouvoir amorcer le systme partir du support 32 bits, vous devez dsactiver loption damorage scuris dans les paramtres BIOS. Pour retourner la version 64 bits de Windows 8 partir de la version 32 bits de Windows 8, vous devrez annuler les modifications ci-dessus et ractiver loption damorage scuris. Si vous ne ractivez pas lamorage scuris, les fonctionnalits suivantes seront dsactives car elles ont besoin de lamorage en mode UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) :
1 Amorage scuris 2 Exprience damorage sans coupure 126 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) 3 Dverrouillage rseau de Bitlocker pour systmes avec TPM (Trusted Platform Module) 4 Prise en charge eDrive AVERTISSEMENT: Pour retourner au mode UEFI, vous devez reformater le disque dur. Toutes les donnes et tous les paramtres personnels prsents sur le disque dur seront effacs. Il est fortement recommand de sauvegarder vos donnes avant de retourner au mode UEFI. Pour de plus amples informations, veuillez consulter nos pages dassistance : http://www.fujitsu.com/us/support/
1 Pour accder aux paramtres BIOS, appuyez sur la touche [F2] aprs avoir allum le systme. 2 Utilisez les touches flches droite ou gauche pour ouvrir la page Scurit .
* Si votre systme ne possde aucun mot de passe superviseur, vous ne pouvez pas changer les configurations damorage scuris. Dans ce cas, vous devez slectionner loption Dfinir un mot de passe superviseur et choisir un mot de passe. 3 Avec les touches flches vers le haut et vers le bas, slectionnez Configurations damorage scuris. 4 Slectionnez Amorage scuris ou Option damorage scuris, puis avec la touche [Entre], choisissez [Dsactiv]
pour la version 32 bits et [Activ] pour la version 64 bits. Utilisez ensuite la touche [chap] pour quitter Configurations damorage scuris. 5 Utilisez les touches flches pour ouvrir la page Avanc . 6 Slectionnez CSM, puis choisissez [Activ] pour la version 32 bits et [Dsactiv] pour la version 64 bits. 7 Slectionnez Amorage rapide, puis choisissez [Activ] pour la version 32 bits et [Dsactiv] pour la version 64 bits. 8 Utilisez les touches flches pour ouvrir la page Quitter . 9 Quittez les paramtres de configuration du BIOS en choisissant Enregistrer les modifications et quitter. Tlchargement des mises jour de pilotes Lutilitaire FSDM (Fujitsu Software Download Manager) est votre disposition pour tlcharger les plus rcentes versions des pilotes, utilitaires et applications depuis le site dassistance Fujitsu. Si vous avez un systme dexploitation Windows 8 ou Windows 7, vous devez vous connecter au site dassistance (http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/
support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS). 127 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels (Windows 8) Chapitre 5 Entretien Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Si vous prenez soin de votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK, vous augmenterez sa dure de vie et sa fiabilit. Cette section fournit certains conseils relatifs lentretien de votre PC Tablette et de ses dispositifs. LE SYSTME CONTIENT DES COMPOSANTS POUVANT TRE FORTEMENT ENDOMMAGS PAR UNE DCHARGE LECTROSTATIQUE (DES). POUR MINIMISER CE RISQUE, VEUILLEZ PRENDRE LES PRCAUTIONS SUIVANTES:
AVANT DE CONNECTER OU DE DCONNECTER VOTRE PC TABLETTE LIFEBOOK (LORSQUE VOUS UTILISEZ UN DUPLICATEUR DE PORTS), IL EST TOUJOURS RECOMMAND DE TOUCHER UN OBJET MTALLIQUE MIS LA TERRE AFIN DE DCHARGER LLECTRICIT STATIQUE QUI SEST ACCUMULE DANS VOTRE CORPS. ASSUREZ-VOUS DE METTRE VOTRE SYSTME HORS TENSION AVANT DAJOUTER OU DE RETIRER DES COMPOSANTS DU SYSTME. MME SI LE SYSTME EST EN TAT DE SOMMEIL OU DE VEILLE PROLONGE, DES DONNES POURRAIENT TRE PERDUES ET LA MMOIRE ENDOMMAGE SI LE COURANT QUI ALIMENTE LE SYSTME NEST PAS COUP. LORSQUE VOUS INSTALLEZ OU RETIREZ UN MODULE DE MMOIRE, TENEZ-LE PAR LE BORD DE FAON NE TOUCHER AUCUN CONTACT NI AUCUNE PUCE. ASSUREZ-VOUS DE NE TOUCHER AUCUNE BORNE DE CONNEXION NI AUCUN COMPOSANT INTERNE DE LORDINATEUR. LA PEAU DGAGE UNE SUBSTANCE HUILEUSE QUI POURRAIT CAUSER UN COURT-CIRCUIT AUX COMPOSANTS. TOUT QUIPEMENT LECTRIQUE PEUT TRE DANGEREUX SIL EST UTILIS DE FAON INAPPROPRIE. LE FONCTIONNEMENT DE CE PRODUIT OU DAUTRES PRODUITS SIMILAIRES DOIT TOUJOURS SE FAIRE SOUS LA SUPERVISION DUN ADULTE. NE PERMETTEZ PAS AUX ENFANTS DACCDER LINTRIEUR DE TOUT PRODUIT LECTRIQUE ET NE LEUR PERMETTEZ PAS DEN MANIPULER LES CBLES. Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK est durable, mais cest un appareil lectronique sensible. Prenez en soin. Prenez lhabitude de transporter votre ordinateur dans une mallette convenable. 128 Nessayez pas de rparer lordinateur vous-mme. Suivez toujours les instructions dinstallation la lettre. Gardez-le loin de la nourriture et des boissons. Pour protger votre PC Tablette des dommages et optimiser ses performances, gardez toujours les grilles de ventilation dgages, propres et sans dbris. Il est possible que vous deviez les nettoyer priodiquement, selon lenvironnement dans lequel vous utilisez lordinateur. Ne placez pas lordinateur dans un endroit o les grilles de ventilation pourraient tre obstrues, notamment dans un petit espace ferm ou sur une surface molle comme un lit ou un coussin. Si vous renversez par accident un liquide sur votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK:
1 2 3 4 teignez-le. Positionnez-le de sorte que le liquide puisse sortir. Laissez-le scher pendant 24 heures, ou plus si ncessaire. Sil ne dmarre pas une fois sec, contactez le service dassistance clients. Nutilisez pas votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu dans un environnement trs humide ( proximit dune baignoire, dune piscine). Utilisez toujours ladaptateur secteur dorigine et des batteries approuves pour votre ordinateur. vitez dexposer lordinateur au sable, la poussire et dautres matires. Nexposez pas votre ordinateur portable la lumire directe du soleil pendant de longues priodes, car les tempratures de plus de 60 C (140 F) pourraient lendommager. Gardez les caches des connecteurs et des fentes ferms lorsque ceux-ci ne sont pas en utilisation. Ne dposez pas dobjets lourds ou tranchants sur lordinateur. Si vous transportez votre ordinateur dans un porte-documents, ou toute autre mallette, assurez-vous quaucun objet dans ltui nappuie sur le couvercle. Ne placez jamais votre ordinateur de faon ce que le lecteur optique supporte le poids du portable. Nettoyage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Dbranchez toujours la prise lectrique (tirez la fiche, pas le cordon). Nettoyez votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK avec un chiffon humide, non pelucheux. Nutilisez pas de solvant ou dabrasif. Utilisez un tissu doux pour enlever la poussire de lcran. Nutilisez jamais de liquide lave-vitre. Avant de nettoyer ou de dsinfecter lextrieur de votre ordinateur, le clavier ou lcran ACL, prenez garde toujours teindre le systme, dbrancher ladaptateur secteur et retirer la batterie. 129 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Suivez les procdures de nettoyage en utilisant des produits nettoyants recommands disponibles dans le commerce. Extrieur et clavier de lordinateur Pour nettoyer lextrieur et le clavier, utilisez lun des nettoyants suivants:
Kit de nettoyage pour ordinateur portable Office Depot N 154-616 Lingettes Klear Screen de Meridrew Entreprises Lingettes de nettoyage 3M CL563
Remarque: Aprs avoir nettoy votre systme avec lun de ces produits, faites-le reluire et retirez les traces de produit laide dun tissu doux non-pelucheux. cran ACL Pour nettoyer lcran, utilisez lun des nettoyants suivants:
Kit de nettoyage pour ordinateur portable Office Depot N 154-616 Lingettes Klear Screen de Meridrew Entreprises Convient aux crans des PC Tablettes, PC convertibles avec protecteur ACL et ordinateurs portables standard. Nettoyez lcran doucement et laissez-le scher avant dallumer votre ordinateur. Dsinfection des ordinateurs LIFEBOOK Nettoyez la surface de lordinateur laide dun tissu doux imbib dune solution dthanol 50% ou dun autre germicide base dthanol homologu par lEPA (Environment Protection Agency, ou Agence amricaine de protection de lenvironnement) en tant que dsinfectant hospitalier. SI VOUS NUTILISEZ PAS LES BONS PRODUITS, LAFFICHAGE DE LCRAN ACL OU LORDINATEUR LUI-MME PEUT EN TRE ENDOMMAG. POUR SAVOIR COMMENT UTILISER ET MANIPULER CONVENABLEMENT LES PRODUITS NETTOYANTS, PRENEZ GARDE TOUJOURS CONSULTER LES PROCDURES DE NETTOYAGE DU FABRICANT, AINSI QUE LES FICHES TECHNIQUES DE SCURIT. NUTILISEZ JAMAIS DE NETTOYANTS BASE ALCALINE, DAMMONIAQUE, DACIDE, OU DE PRODUITS CHIMIQUES BIOLOGIQUES TELS QUE DISSOLVANTS POUR PEINTURE, ACTONE, ALCOOL PROPYLIQUE OU ISOPROPYLIQUE OU PTROLE. LA FINITION DES SURFACES DE LORDINATEUR ET LA PELLICULE DE PROTECTION DE LCRAN ACL POURRAIENT EN TRE ENDOMMAGES. NUTILISEZ JAMAIS DAIR COMPRIM POUR LE NETTOYAGE DES PC LIFEBOOK ET STYLISTIC. 130 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Nettoyage du filtre anti-poussire Votre LIFEBOOK est quip de ventilateurs qui attirent lair lintrieur pour refroidir les composants internes de lordinateur. Selon lenvironnement dutilisation, de la poussire et de la salet peuvent pntrer avec lair. Si elles saccumulent, elles peuvent nuire au bon fonctionnement du systme. RETIRER LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR: AVANT DE RETIRER LE FILTRE, TEIGNEZ LE SYSTME AINSI QUE LES PRIPHRIQUES, ET DBRANCHEZ LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR. NETTOYAGE DU FILTRE:
- NUTILISEZ PAS DE DTERGENT
- VITEZ DENDOMMAGER LE FILTRE, LES DGTS CAUSS CE COMPOSANT NE SONT PAS COUVERTS PAR LA GARANTIE.
- UTILISEZ DES OUTILS EN PLASTIQUE POUR LE NETTOYER. LES OUTILS EN MTAL OU EN BOIS RISQUENT DE LENDOMMAGER. DES: AVANT DE NETTOYER LE FILTRE, TOUCHEZ UN OBJET EN MTAL AFIN DVACUER LLECTRICIT STATIQUE QUI SEST ACCUMULE DANS VOTRE CORPS. 1 teignez votre ordinateur et dbranchez ladaptateur c.a. 2 Fermez lcran et tournez lordinateur lenvers. 3 Retirez le filtre poussires en poussant le loquet en direction du filtre, puis soulevez-le et tirez-le vers lextrieur (Figure 53). 4 Nettoyez soigneusement le filtre ainsi que le conduit dair. 5 Mettez le filtre nouveau en place en insrant dabord une extrmit, puis poussez jusquau bout jusqu ce quil senclenche. Couvercle du filtre anti-poussire Verrou du couvercle du filtre Figure 53. Retrait du couvercle du filtre anti-poussire 131 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK ASSUREZ-VOUS TOUJOURS QUE LE FILTRE ANTI-POUSSIRE EST INSTALL AVANT DE METTRE VOTRE SYSTME EN MARCHE. DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DE CONTAMINER VOTRE SYSTME ET DE LENDOMMAGER. Entreposage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK au lithium, puis enlevez-les. Si vous entreposez votre PC Tablette durant un mois ou plus, teignez-le, chargez compltement les batteries Rangez votre PC Tablette et les batteries sparment. Si vous rangez votre PC Tablette alors que la batterie est installe, la batterie se dchargera et sa dure de vie sera rduite. De plus, une batterie dfectueuse pourrait endommager votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK. Rangez votre Fujitsu LIFEBOOK dans un endroit frais et sec. Les tempratures acceptables sont comprises entre 13 F
(-25 C) et 140 F (60 C). TEIGNEZ TOUJOURS VOTRE ORDINATEUR AVANT DE LE TRANSPORTER ET/OU DE LEMBALLER. APRS AVOIR TEINT LE SYSTME, ATTENDEZ QUE LE PANNEAU DE VOYANTS DTAT INDIQUE BIEN LE STATUT HORS TENSION (CEST DIRE QUAUCUN VOYANT NEST ALLUM). IL EST POSSIBLE QUE LAPPAREIL NE SE METTE PAS AUTOMATIQUEMENT EN MODE HORS TENSION OU VEILLE PROLONGE APRS QUE VOUS AVEZ FERM LE COUVERCLE. CETTE SITUATION PEUT SE PRODUIRE EN FONCTION DES PARAMTRES DE SCURIT PAR MOT DE PASSE QUI GRENT LA PR-
INITIALISATION DU SYSTME OU DUNE AUTRE APPLICATION EN COURS DUTILISATION SUR LORDINATEUR. SI VOUS TENTEZ DE TRANSPORTER LORDINATEUR SANS LTEINDRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DE LENDOMMAGER EN LE SOUMETTANT DES CHOCS OU EN LAMENANT EN TAT DE SURCHAUFFE CAR LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION PEUVENT TRE BLOQUES OU OBSTRUES. Voyager avec votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Il est recommand de garder lordinateur prs de vous pendant votre voyage au lieu de lenregistrer comme bagage. Ne transportez pas votre PC Tablette pendant quil est en marche. Lorsque vous partez en voyage, apportez toujours avec vous le CD de remise en tat du systme fourni avec votre ordinateur portable. Si vous prouvez des problmes de logiciel dexploitation pendant votre voyage, vous pourriez en avoir besoin pour trouver la solution au problme. Ne faites jamais passer votre ordinateur au dtecteur de mtal. Faites inspecter votre ordinateur manuellement par le personnel de scurit. Par contre, le PC Tablette peut tre soumis un appareil radioscopique correctement rgl. Pour viter les problmes, placez votre ordinateur proximit de lentre de lappareil et retirez-le aussitt que possible, ou faites-le inspecter manuellement par le personnel de scurit. Il se peut que les responsables de la scurit vous demandent dallumer votre ordinateur, alors assurez-vous que vous avez une batterie charge disposition. 132 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Apportez avec vous les adaptateurs de fiches ncessaires lorsque vous voyagez outre-mer. Vrifiez le diagramme suivant pour dterminer quel adaptateur de fiche vous serait ncessaire ou renseignez-vous auprs de votre agent de voyage. Type de prise Emplacement Emplacement Type de prise Canada, tats-Unis, Mexique, certains pays dAmrique latine, Japon, Core, Tawan, Philippines Royaume-Uni, Irlande, Malaisie, Singapour, certains pays dAfrique Russie et Communaut des tats indpendants (CEI), la plupart des pays dEurope, certains pays dAmrique Latine, Moyen-Orient, certains pays dAfrique, Hongkong, Inde, la plupart des pays de lAsie du Sud Chine, Australie, Nouvelle-Zlande Batteries Entretien de vos batteries Manipulez toujours les batteries avec soin. Ne court-circuitez pas les terminaux des batteries (cest dire, ne touchez pas les deux terminaux avec des objets mtalliques). Ne transportez pas des batteries dans votre poche ou sac main car elles pourraient entrer en contact avec de la monnaie, des cls ou dautres objets mtalliques. Cela pourrait causer une explosion ou un incendie. Il ne faut jamais laisser tomber, percer, dsassembler, abmer ou incinrer une batterie. Rechargez les batteries uniquement selon les instructions de ce manuel et seulement dans des endroits ars. Ne laissez pas les batteries dans des endroits chauds pendant plus dune journe ou deux. La chaleur intense pourrait rduire la dure de vie des batteries. Ne rangez pas la batterie pendant plus de 6 mois sans la recharger. 133 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Augmenter la dure de vie des batteries vous le pouvez. Alimentez votre PC Tablette avec ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur dauto/avion optionnel chaque fois que Si votre ordinateur fonctionne sur lalimentation par batterie pendant tout une journe, branchez-le sur ladaptateur secteur durant la nuit pour recharger la batterie. Gardez la luminosit au niveau le plus bas possible. Rglez la gestion de la consommation dnergie pour une dure de vie maximale de la batterie. Lorsque votre PC Tablette est allum et que vous ne lutilisez pas, mettez-le en mode sommeil. Limitez votre accs au lecteur multimdia. Dsactivez la fonction davis automatique dinsertion de votre lecteur Utilisez toujours des batteries charges compltement. Entretien de votre lecteur multimdia Entretien de votre lecteur multimdia (DVD/CD/CD-R) Les disques multimdias sont des dispositifs prcis qui fonctionneront de manire fiable si vous en prenez bien soin. Rangez toujours vos disques multimdias dans leurs tuis lorsquils ne sont pas utiliss. Tenez toujours les disques par les bords et vitez den toucher la surface. vitez de ranger les disques multimdias dans des endroits o les tempratures sont extrmes. Ne courbez pas les disques multimdias et ne dposez pas dobjets lourds par dessus. Ne renversez pas de liquide sur les disques multimdias. Ne laissez pas la poussire saccumuler sur les disques multimdia, ne les rayez pas. Ncrivez jamais sur la surface de ltiquette avec un stylo bille ou un crayon. Utilisez toujours un crayon-feutre. Si un disque est sale, utilisez seulement un nettoyant pour DVD/CD ou essuyez-le avec un chiffon doux, propre et non pelucheux: commencez par le bord intrieur et essuyez en direction du bord extrieur. Si un disque multimdia subit un changement soudain de temprature, une condensation froid/chaud pourrait se former sur la surface. Essuyez lhumidit avec un chiffon doux, propre et non pelucheux, puis laissez le disque scher temprature ambiante. NUTILISEZ PAS de sche-cheveux ou dautre appareil chauffant pour scher les disques multimdia. 134 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Entretien du lecteur optique Votre lecteur optique est durable, mais vous devez en prendre soin. Veuillez faire attention aux points suivants:
Le lecteur fait pivoter le disque compact une vitesse trs leve. Lorsquil fonctionne, ne le transportez pas dun endroit un autre, et vitez quil subisse un choc ou des vibrations. vitez dutiliser ou de ranger le lecteur dans un endroit o il serait expos des tempratures extrmes. vitez dutiliser ou de ranger le lecteur dans un endroit humide ou poussireux. vitez dutiliser ou de ranger le lecteur proximit daimants ou de dispositifs qui gnrent de forts champs magntiques. Nutilisez pas et ne rangez pas le lecteur dans des endroits exposs des chocs ou des vibrations. Ne dsassemblez pas ou ne dmontez pas le lecteur optique. Lusage dun nettoyant spcial pour lentilles est recommand pour lentretien rgulier du lecteur. 135 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Chapitre 6 Spcifications techniques Spcifications Cette partie prsente les spcifications techniques du matriel et de lenvironnement de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu. Selon les configurations, les spcifications techniques peuvent varier. Microprocesseur La nouvelle famille de processeurs Intel Core de 3e gnration. (Le type de votre processeur est indiqu sur ltiquette du systme) Puce Mobile Intel QM77 Express Concentrateur PCH (Platform Control Hub) Mmoire Mmoire systme Module mmoire vive double canal SDRAM DDR3 1066 MHz Deux fentes mmoire DIMM avec possibilit de mise niveau jusqu 16 Go de mmoire totale (8 Go x 2). Mmoire cache Jusqu 4 Mo de mmoire cache L3 intgre (selon lUC) 136 Vido cran couleur plat TFT rtroclair DEL et matrice active, avec possibilit daffichage simultan sur deux moniteurs. Couleur et rsolution Vido cran anti-reflet HD+ de 13,3 po Interne : Rsolution 1600 x 900 pixels, 16 mln couleurs Externe (CRT, HDMI, DVI): Rsolution 1920 x 1200 pixels, 16 mln couleurs Port DisplayPort (sur le duplicateur de ports) : Rsolution 2560 x 1600 pixels, 16 mln couleurs En simultan: Rsolution 1600 x 900 pixels, 16 mln couleurs Orientation dcran prises en charge : 0o, 90o, 180o et 270o Carte graphique Carte graphique intgre Intel HD 4000 Numriseur Numriseur double, comprenant le numriseur actif et le pav tactile technologie capacitive (impulsion par le stylet actif, impulsion par dix doigts sous Windows 7 et impulsion par cinq doigts sous Windows 8) Audio Codec Realtek ALC269 VB6 avec systme audio haute dfinition (HD) couteurs: Prise dcouteurs stro de 3,5 mm, 1 Veff. ou moins, impdance minimale de 32 ohms Microphone: Prise de microphone stro, 3,5 mm, 100 mV crte--crte ou moins, impdance minimale de 10Kohms Deux haut-parleurs intgrs de 20 mm x 12 mm Deux microphones numriques intgrs Options de stockage Disque dur ATA II srie, 3 Gbit/s; 2,5 po; 9,5 mm ou 7 mm, rsistant aux chocs, avec utilitaire Capteur de chocs. La capacit, a profondeur et la vitesse du disque dur sont dtermines par la configuration du systme. Cache m-SATA SSD de 32 Mo pour dmarrages rapides. 137 - Spcifications BTO 2,5 po 7 mmH/9,5 mmH SATA Disque dur 5400 tr/min : 320, 500Go Disque dur 7200 tr/min : 320, 500Go Disque dur TCG compatible Opal auto-chiffrement (SED) 7200 tr/min: 320GB Mmoire cache TCG compatible Opal auto-chiffrement (SED): 128GB Mmoire cache non FDE (MLC) : 128, 256 Go Priphriques de baie modulaire Lun des priphriques suivants est dj install:
Lecteur modulaire Blu-ray RW Graveur de DVD multiformat double couche Batterie de baie modulaire Volet rducteur de poids Caractristiques techniques Dispositif de pointage intgr Boutons de commande du pav tactile Communications Rseau local Gigabit : Carte rseau local interne filaire 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet Rseau local sans fil: carte intgre Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260, en option, ou carte Atheros XSPAN HB116 802.11abgn Bluetooth: Bluetooth V4+LE pour communications personnelles sur rseau local sans fil, en option 138 - Spcifications Tableau de scurit/PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Voir Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK en page 49. Puce Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Le LIFEBOOK T904 est pourvu dune puce Trusted Platform Module (TPM), installe pour plus de scurit sur le systme. Verrouillage antivol Fente pouvant tre utilise pour installer un dispositif antivol. Camra Web Camra Web numrique optionnelle trs haute dfinition (1920 x 1080 pixels) avec DEL indicatrice daccs. Ports de priphriques Sur le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK:
Fente de carte Secure Digital Port HDMI Connecteur analogique D-SUB 15 broches pour moniteur VGA externe (cf. Spcifications techniques daffichage) Deux connecteurs USB 2.0 pour priphriques dentre/sortie Deux connecteurs USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus) pour priphriques dentre/sortie (dont un avec capacit de charge USB en tout temps) Une prise dentre c.c. Un connecteur de rseau local (RJ-45) Port de connexion ( 100 broches pour assurer la connexion avec le duplicateur de ports) Une prise couteur stro/sortie audio Une prise microphone stro/entre audio Fente pour carte puce (ncessite un logiciel tiers) Sur le duplicateur de ports en option :
Connecteur D-SUB 15 broches pour moniteur VGA externe Quatre connecteurs USB 3.0 pour priphriques dentre/sortie 139 - Spcifications Un connecteur de rseau local (RJ-45) Une entre c.c. Un connecteur DVI-D Un port daffichage Un connecteur dcouteurs Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports (100 broches, pour arimage au systme) Clavier Clavier intgr avec toutes les fonctions dun clavier de 101 touches. Nombre total de touches: 84 Touches de fonction: Touches F1 F12 avec une touche Fn pour fonctions tendues Deux touches Windows: Une touche Dmarrage, une touche Applications Pas de touche: 19 mm; course: 1,7 mm (Remarque: Sur les claviers rtro-clairage, la course est de 1,4 mm) Dispositif de pointage intgr avec boutons droit et gauche Repose-main intgr Antimicrobien Rsistant aux claboussures Prise en charge de clavier/souris USB externe Gestion de lalimentation Batteries Batterie rechargeable standard au lithium, 6 accumulateurs, 72 Wh, ou, Batterie optionnelle au lithium pour baie modulaire, rechargeable, 6 accumulateurs, 28 Wh Adaptateur secteur Autodtection 100-240 V c.a., fournissant 19 V c.c.; 4,22 A; 80 W au portable LIFEBOOK, y compris un cble c.a. Gestion de lalimentation Conforme la norme ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface, ou Interface avance de configuration et de gestion de lnergie) 140 - Spcifications Dimensions et poids Dimensions gnrales Avec pied et batterie principale 6 accumulateurs : Environ 334 mm de largeur x 244 mm de profondeur x 32,6 mm dpaisseur (13,15 po x 9,60 po x 1,28 po) Sans pied, avec batterie principale 6 accumulateurs : 334 mm (larg.) x 244 mm (prof.) x 26,8/31,0 mm (haut.)
(13,15 po x 9,60 po x 1,06 po/1,22 po) Poids Avec volet rducteur de poids: Environ 4,11 lb (1,86 kg) Avec lecteur optique : Environ 4,41 lb (1,99 kg) Avec batterie de baie : Environ 4,67 lb (2,12 kg) Environnement requis Temprature Utilisation: 5C 35C (41 F 95 F) Stockage: 5 140 F (-15 60C) Humidit Utilisation: 20 85% dhumidit relative, sans condensation Stockage: 8% 85% dhumidit relative, sans condensation Altitude Utilisation: 3 048 m (10 000 pieds) maximum Accessoires prfrs des utilisateurs Pour commander des accessoires ou demander des informations supplmentaires, veuillez visiter notre site Internet www.shopfujitsu.com ou appelez au 1-800-FUJITSU. 141 - Spcifications Logiciels pr-installs Selon le systme dexploitation pr-install, votre PC Tablette est livr avec des logiciels inclus afin de vous permettre dcouter des fichiers audio et de visionner des fichiers vido de formats divers. En outre, un logiciel antivirus et diverses applications vous apportent des avantages supplmentaires durant votre utilisation quotidienne du systme. Certains logiciels sont prinstalls et certaines applications sont disponibles avec licne Fujitsu Bonus Apps (applications Fujitsu supplmentaires) LA LISTE SUIVANTE NONCE LES PROGRAMMES QUI PEUVENT TRE INSTALLS SUR VOTRE ORDINATEUR. CES PROGRAMMES PEUVENT TRE DIFFRENTS EN FONCTION DU SYSTME DEXPLOITATION ET DE LA CONFIGURATION. DES COPIES DE SCURIT DE TOUTES LES APPLICATIONS DENTREPRISES TIERCES (P. EX. TOUTES LES APPLICATIONS CYBERLINK ODD ET YOUCAM, AINSI QUE LES APPLICATIONS EXPRESS CACHE, PORTSHUTTER, OMNIPASS, INTEL WIDI) PEUVENT TRE TLCHARGES DEPUIS LE SITE DASSISTANCE FUJITSU. CES COPIES DE SCURIT NE SONT PAS INCLUSES SUR LES SUPPORTS PHYSIQUES FOURNIS. Adobe Reader Norton Internet Security (essai gratuit de 60 jours) Norton Studio CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink MakeDisc (Windows 7 uniquement) CyberLink YouCam Skype pour Windows 8 Fujitsu Touch Launcher (modles avec Windows 7 uniquement) DTS Boost OmniPass (application de reconnaissance des empreintes digitales) Microsoft Windows Live Essentials (Windows 7 uniquement) Apprendre utiliser vos logiciels Tutoriaux Tous les systmes dexploitation et la plupart des logiciels dapplication ont des didacticiels intgrs ds leur installation. Nous vous recommandons vivement de passer en revue le tutorial avant dutiliser une application. 142 - Spcifications Manuels Sont compris dans votre PC Tablette, les guides dutilisation pour votre systme dexploitation et les autres applications pr-installes. Tous les manuels non fournis avec votre ordinateur sont disponibles via le menu Aide de lapplication concerne. Nous vous recommandons de passer en revue ces guides dutilisation pour obtenir des informations sur lutilisation des logiciels. Adobe Reader Adobe Reader permet de consulter et dimprimer des fichiers PDF sur toutes les plateformes informatiques courantes. Norton Internet Security Votre systme est livr avec la version dessai de 60 jours de Norton Internet Security de Symantec. La gamme doutils Norton Internet Security est conue pour protger votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK contre les virus, les pirates, les logiciels espions et les pourriels. Il aide la protection des donnes actuellement sur votre disque dur contre toute infection ou destruction. La version dessai est active aprs acceptation du contrat de licence du logiciel. Aprs 60 jours, vous devrez vous procurer un abonnement auprs de Symantec pour pouvoir tlcharger les signatures de virus, de logiciels espions et de pourriel les plus rcentes. Norton Studio Gre avec facilit la protection Norton de vos ordinateurs et de vos priphriques directement partir de linterface mosaque Windows 8. Conu et optimis pour linterface mosaque Windows 8, Norton Studio permet de voir, contrler, rparer, actualiser et renouveler tous vos abonnements de produits Norton partir dun seul et mme cran. CyberLink MakeDisc (Windows 7 uniquement) CyberLink MakeDisc vous permet de graver des donnes, des vidos et des photographies sur des CD ou des DVD. CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink PowerDVD vous permet de raliser et dditer des films personnels et des prsentations sur disques. CyberLink YouCam La webcam intgre CyberLink YouCam vous permet de prendre des photos ou des films, dy ajouter des effets spciaux, et de les partager sous divers formats ou par lintermdiaire de rseaux sociaux. CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDirector vous permet dditer et damliorer vos vidos en les agrmentant notamment deffets spciaux. 143 - Spcifications Skype pour Windows 7 Skype pour Windows 7 permet aux utilisateurs de communiquer avec leurs pairs par voix, vido et messagerie instantane sur Internet. Skype permet de raliser des appels tlphoniques sur les rseaux de tlphonie classiques. Les appels dautres utilisateurs Skype sont gratuits, alors que les appels des tlphones fixes et des tlphones cellulaires sont facturs via un systme de comptes dutilisateur. Skype constitue galement un outil utile pour les transferts de fichiers et les tlconfrences. OmniPass (application de reconnaissance des empreintes digitales) Le capteur dempreintes digitales utilise le logiciel Softex OmniPass qui fournit des fonctions de gestion de mot de passe aux systmes dexploitation Microsoft Windows. OmniPass vous permet dutiliser un mot de passe principal, ou matre pour toutes les applications Windows et mots de passe en ligne, avec une interface dutilisateur conviviale permettant de grer en toute scurit les mots de passe, les utilisateurs et les identits multiples pour chaque utilisateur. Fujitsu Touch Launcher (modles avec Windows 7 uniquement) Le Touch Launcher est un assistant apparaissant lcran qui permet de dmarrer facilement des applications souvent utilises et deffectuer des tches sur Internet. DTS Boost DTS Boost maximise la puissance acoustique au del des limites de volume de lordinateur, permettant lutilisateur de crer une piste matresse plus riche ou plus puissante en limitant la plage dynamique et en augmentant la puissance globale perue du mlange. Microsoft Windows Live Essentials (Windows 7 uniquement) Windows Live Essentials est une suite de programmes vous permettant dutiliser votre PC Tablette avec plus daisance et de plaisir. Live Essentials comprend quatre applications Live: Messenger, Photo Gallery, Writer et Mail. Messenger vous permet de communiquer et dchanger avec des personnes ou des groupes. Photo Gallery est une application vous permettant dorganiser, de modifier et de partager vos photos. Writer vous permet de publier des textes sur votre blog, dy tlcharger des vidos et des photos, et en gnral de publier des textes en ligne. Mail vous permet de grer votre messagerie. Systme dexploitation Microsoft Windows 7 dition Professionnelle ou Microsoft Windows 8 dition Pro 144 - Spcifications Glossaire Glossaire Adaptateur secteur Appareil convertissant une tension c.a. provenant dune prise murale en tension c.c. ncessaire lalimentation de votre systme. Point daccs Priphrique de rseau sans fil servant de pont de communication entre un rseau sans fil et un rseau cbl. ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) Interface avance de configuration et de gestion de lnergie. cran matrice active Type dcran plat o un transistor ou un composant similaire est associ chaque pixel de lcran. Mode Ad Hoc Le mode Ad Hoc dsigne une topologie de rseau sans fil dans laquelle la connectivit entre les divers ordinateurs est tablie sans priphrique central de rseau sans fil, ou point daccs. La connectivit est tablie uniquement laide de priphriques clients dans une configuration gal gal. AGP (Accelerated Graphics Port) Littralement: Port graphique acclr . Port local spcialement conu pour les priphriques utilisant beaucoup dimages graphiques, notamment les cartes vido et les acclrateurs 3D. 145 Adaptateur auto/avion Un dispositif qui convertit le courant continu dun allume-cigare de voiture ou une prise c.c. davion en courant continu la tension voulue pour alimenter votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. BIOS Acronyme signifiant Basic Input-Output System. Programme et ensemble de paramtres par dfaut stocks dans la mmoire morte: il effectue des diagnostics et fait fonctionner votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK lorsque vous le mettez sous tension et agit ainsi jusqu ce que votre systme dexploitation se soit charg partir du disque. Les informations du BIOS sont transfres au systme dexploitation pour lui fournir des donnes sur la configuration et ltat du matriel. Bit Contraction de Binary digit . Unit simple dinformation pouvant adopter la valeur 1 (un) ou 0 (zro). bit/s Abrviation de bits par seconde . Unit utilise pour mesurer le dbit de transfert de donnes. Amorage Dmarrage dun ordinateur et chargement de son systme dexploitation dans la mmoire vive (RAM), partir du disque, de la mmoire ROM ou dautres supports de stockage. Bus Circuit lectrique qui transmet des donnes entre lunit centrale et les sous-ensembles lintrieur du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Octet Unit dinformation comprenant 8 bits dinformations binaires parallles. Mmoire cache Bloc de mmoire intgr au microprocesseur, auquel il est beaucoup plus rapide daccder qu la mmoire vive et utilis de manire spciale pour acclrer le dbit global des donnes. 146 - Glossaire CD-ROM Disque compact mmoire morte. Forme de stockage de donnes numriques lues optiquement par un faisceau laser plutt que par une tte magntique. Gnralement, un CD-ROM peut contenir environ 600 Mo de donnes et permet dviter les problmes dcrasement de la tte qui dtruisent des donnes, ainsi que lusure durant la lecture. Canal Plage de frquences bande troite utilise par la carte rseau sans fil pour transmettre des donnes. IEEE 802.11b/g:
11 canaux dans la bande de 22 MHz. RAM CMOS (Complementary metal oxide semiconductor random access memory) Mmoire vive avec Semi-conducteur complmentaire loxyde de mtal. Technologie de fabrication de mmoire vive ncessitant une trs faible alimentation. Commande Instruction que vous transmettez au systme dexploitation. Exemple: excuter une application particulire ou formater une disquette. Configuration lments matriels et logiciels qui composent le systme et en dfinissent son fonctionnement. Cathodique (CRT Cathode Ray Tube, ou Tube rayons cathodiques) Tube rayons cathodiques. Moniteur dont laffichage est assur par un faisceau de particules lectroniques qui frappe lcran luminescent. Une image est produite par la variation de la position et de lintensit du faisceau. Donnes Les informations stockes et traites par un systme. c.c. Courant continu. Courant qui ne fluctue pas priodiquement dans le temps. Valeur par dfaut Valeur prprogramme utiliser si vous nen dfinissez pas une autre. 147 - Glossaire DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Il sagit dun protocole qui permet un ordinateur qui se connecte sur un rseau dobtenir dynamiquement sa configuration. Il est utilis pour rcuprer automatiquement des paramtres ncessaires la communication, tels des adresses IP. Lmetteur dune adresse IP sappelle un serveur DHCP, et celui qui reoit est un client DHCP. DIMM Barrette de mmoire double range de connexions. Disque Support circulaire et plat pour le stockage magntique de donnes. Lecteur de disque Dispositif qui fait tourner le disque et qui contient les ttes et les circuits de commande permettant la lecture et lcriture de donnes. DMA (Direct Memory Access) Accs direct la mmoire. Circuit spcial de transferts de donnes de mmoire mmoire ne ncessitant pas lintervention de lUC. DMI (Desktop Management Interface) Interface de gestion du mode bureau. Norme qui permet aux applications de gestion dordinateur dinterroger et de configurer, localement ou distance, des systmes informatiques, des composants matriels et logiciels, ainsi que des priphriques. DNS (Domain Name System) Systme dadressage par domaines. Fonction qui contrle la correspondance entre ladresse IP et le nom attribu lordinateur. Il est possible de communiquer avec les ordinateurs dont les adresses IP sont inconnues, mais dont le nom est connu. DOS (Disk Operating System) Littralement Systme dexploitation de disque (MS-DOS est un systme dexploitation de disque Microsoft). 148 - Glossaire Pilote Programme qui traduit les commandes envoyes par les applications et le systme dexploitation aux priphriques externes dans la forme exacte exige par une marque et un modle particulier afin de produire les rsultats voulus avec le matriel employ. ECP (Extended Capability Port) Port capacits tendues. Ensemble de normes de transmission de donnes haute vitesse et dinterconnexions entre appareils lectroniques. Cl de chiffrement (cl rseau) Cl de chiffrement utilise pour coder les textes de messages et pour effectuer les vrifications de lintgrit des messages. La cl de chiffrement protge les donnes contre les interceptions non autorises. Ce dispositif utilise la mme cl de chiffrement pour coder ou dcoder les donnes; cette dernire est obligatoire pour que lmetteur et le receveur puissent communiquer. DES Dcharge lectrostatique. Dcharge lectrostatique soudaine provenant dune charge statique qui sest accumule lentement. Exemple: la dcharge reue dune poigne de porte ou les tincelles gnres par un brossage des cheveux par temps sec. FCC (Federal Communication Commission) Commission fdrale des communications (organisation gouvernementale amricaine). Go Giga-octet. Un milliard doctets. Disque dur Support rotatif, circulaire, plat et rigide pour le stockage magntique de donnes. E/S Entre/Sortie. Donnes lectroniques entrant et sortant de votre PC Tablette. 149 - Glossaire Port E/S Connecteur et circuits de commande associs travers lesquels transitent les donnes lectroniques entrant et sortant de votre ordinateur. IDE (Intelligent Drive Electronics) Interface IDE Linterface IDE se caractrise par le fait que le contrleur lectronique du disque dur est intgr dans le mme botier que ce dernier. IEEE 802.11a Norme de rseau sans fil autorisant un dbit maximum thorique de 54 Mbit/s. Les cartes de norme 802.11a fonctionnent dans les bandes de frquences UNII infrieures et intermdiaires de 5 GHz. IEEE 802.11b Norme de rseau sans fil autorisant un dbit maximum thorique de 11 Mbit/s. Les cartes de norme 802.11b fonctionnent dans les bandes de frquences ISM de 2,4 GHz. IEEE 802.11g Norme de rseau sans fil autorisant un dbit maximum thorique de 54 Mbit/s. Les cartes de norme 802.11g fonctionnent dans les bandes de frquences ISM de 2,4 GHz. IEEE802.11n Norme de rseau sans fil utilisant plusieurs flux de donnes autorisant un dbit maximum thorique de 450 Mbit/s. Les priphriques 802.11n peuvent fonctionner dans les bandes UNII de 2,4 GHz et 5 GHz. Ils sont en outre rtrocompatibles avec les priphriques 802.11g and 802.11a. Infrastructure Nom dune configuration de rseau local (LAN) sans fil. Ce type de communication utilise un point daccs. Il existe galement un autre type de communications appel Ad hoc . Adresse IP Un identifiant pour un ordinateur ou un priphrique sur un rseau TCP/IP. Les rseaux qui utilisent le protocole TCP/IP acheminent des messages en fonction de ladresse IP de la destination. Le format dune adresse IP est une adresse numrique de 32 bits qui scrit avec quatre nombres spars par des points. Chaque nombre peut tre une valeur de 0 255. Par exemple, 1.160.10.240 pourrait tre une adresse IP valide. 150 - Glossaire Au sein dun rseau isol, vous pouvez attribuer des adresses IP au hasard tant que chacune delles reste unique. Toutefois, la connexion dun rseau priv Internet exige lutilisation dadresses IP enregistres (appeles adresses Internet) afin dviter les doublons. Les quatre numros dans une adresse IP sont utiliss de diffrentes faons pour identifier un rseau particulier et un serveur hte. Trois registres rgionaux Internet (ARIN, RIPE NCC et APNIC) attribuent des adresses Internet partir des trois classes suivantes:
Classe A : accepte 16 millions de serveurs sur chacun des 126 rseaux. Classe B : accepte 65 000 serveurs sur chacun des 16 000 rseaux. Classe C : accepte 254 serveurs sur chacun des 2 millions de rseaux. Le nombre dadresses Internet non attribues commence manquer, aussi un nouveau schma sans classe, appel CIDR, remplace de plus en plus le systme bas sur les classes A, B et C et est rattach ladoption de la norme IPv6. IRQ (Interrupt Request) Demande dinterruption. Il sagit dun signal envoy par le matriel lunit centrale indiquant quil y a ncessit de traiter un vnement externe qui vient de se produire. Ko Kilo-octet. Mille octets. LAN (Local Area Network) Rseau local. Interconnexion dordinateurs et de priphriques dans un emplacement dlimit et permettant lchange de programmes et de donnes. ACL Affichage cristaux liquides. Type dcran produisant des images par contrle de lorientation de cristaux dans un liquide cristallin. Batterie au lithium Type de batterie rechargeable ayant une puissance et une dure de vie importantes compte tenu de sa taille, et ne subissant pas leffet de mmoire qui caractrise les batteries au nickel-cadmium. 151 - Glossaire Adresse MAC (Media Access Control) Adresse de contrle daccs au mdia. Adresse physique unique dune carte rseau. Pour Ethernet, les trois premiers octets sont utiliss pour indiquer le code du vendeur, contrl et attribu par lIEEE. Les trois autres octets sont contrls par chaque fabricant (pour empcher toute superposition); en consquence, chaque carte Ethernet reoit une adresse physique unique au monde, ce qui permet de la distinguer parmi dautres cartes. Lorsque la technologie Ethernet est utilise, des trames sont envoyes et reues en fonction de cette adresse. Mo Mga-octet. Un million doctets. Mgahertz 1 000 000 de cycles par seconde. Mmoire Dpt de donnes et dapplications auquel lunit centrale de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK a directement accs. MHz Mga-hertz. MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) Interface numrique pour instruments de musique. Protocole de communication standard pour lchange dinformations entre un ordinateur et un instrument dot dune interface numrique, notamment un synthtiseur. Modem Contraction de MOdulateur-DEModulateur . Lappareil qui relie un ordinateur ou un autre terminal de traitement de donnes une ligne de tlcommunication. Mono Systme qui utilise un seul canal pour traiter le son provenant de toutes les sources. 152 - Glossaire MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) Unit maximum de transmission. Taille maximum de donnes pouvant tre transfres en une fois par Internet ou dautres rseaux. Si vous rencontrez des difficults transfrer des donnes cause dune taille maximum (MTU) trop leve, vous pouvez dfinir une MTU infrieure pour que la communication aboutisse. Cl de rseau Cl utilise pour le chiffrement des donnes sur le rseau. La cl de rseau tant utilise par lordinateur personnel pour crypter et dcrypter les donnes, lmetteur et le rcepteur doivent utiliser la mme cl. Nom de rseau (ou SSID, abrviation de Service Set Identifier. ) La configuration dun rseau local sans fil fait appel un regroupement pour viter les interfrences et le vol de donnes. Ce regroupement est effectu avec le Nom de rseau (SSID). NTSC (National TV Standards Commission) Commission nationale des normes TV. Norme de diffusion et de rception tlvisuelle aux tats-Unis. Authentification ouverte Mthode dauthentification tablie dans la norme 802.11 selon laquelle un client sans fil nest pas authentifi avant de pouvoir sassocier. Systme dexploitation Groupe de programmes de contrle qui convertissent les commandes des applications, y compris les pilotes, dans la forme exacte exige par une marque et un modle particuliers de processeur afin de produire les rsultats voulus avec le matriel employ. Partition Bloc despace rserv sur un disque dur, que le systme dexploitation considre comme tant un disque distinct et quil gre en consquence. 153 - Glossaire Priphrique quipement qui effectue une fonction spcifique associe un ordinateur mais qui ne fait pas partie de cet ordinateur. Exemples: imprimante, modem, CD-ROM. Pas de touche (clavier) La distance entre les centres des touches de lettres dun clavier. Pixel Le plus petit lment daffichage, point de couleur lcran. Plus la densit de pixels est leve, plus limage est nette. POST (Power On Self Test) Auto-diagnostic (ou auto-test) de mise sous tension. Programme faisant partie du BIOS, qui vrifie la configuration et les conditions de fonctionnement de votre matriel chaque fois que votre PC Tablette est allum. Des messages dtat et derreur peuvent tre affichs avant que le systme dexploitation ne se charge. Si lautotest dtecte une panne qui est si importante que le fonctionnement ne peut pas continuer, le systme dexploitation ne sera pas charg. PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) Littralement, Protocole Ethernet Point Point Protocole Ethernet faisant appel au protocole point point (PPP) et utilis pour la connexion une ligne tlphonique. Programme Ensemble de commandes codes indiquant lordinateur ce qui doit tre fait, ainsi que quand et comment le faire. Protocole Ensemble de procdures et de rgles rgissant la rception et lenvoi de donnes entre ordinateurs.
- Mthode denvoi et de rception de donnes
- Processus utilis pour traiter les erreurs de communication Pour assurer un transfert correct des informations, les conditions requises pour la communication sont organises dans des procdures. 154 - Glossaire RAM (Random Access Memory) Mmoire accs direct, ou mmoire vive. Composant matriel de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK qui stocke des informations binaires (programme et donnes) tant quil est aliment par une source de courant. Module RAM ou module de mmoire vive Carte de circuit imprim avec mmoire et circuit associ qui permet lutilisateur dajouter de la mmoire supplmentaire lordinateur sans outil spcial. Rinitialisation Le fait de charger nouveau le systme dexploitation. Une rinitialisation efface toutes les informations stockes dans la mmoire vive. Reprise Continuer aprs une interruption. Dans le cas de votre PC Tablette, ceci signifie la reprise des activits normales partir de lun des modes de veille. ROM (Read Only Memory) Mmoire en lecture seule, ou mmoire morte. Type de mmoire o les donnes sont stockes par transformation physique de la matire. Les donnes stockes de cette faon ne peuvent pas tre modifies par lordinateur et leur conservation nexige pas de source de courant. SDRAM Mmoire vive dynamique synchrone. Cest un type de mmoire vive. Authentification cl partage Mthode dauthentification rseau tablie par la spcification 802.11, selon laquelle le point daccs transmet au client un paquet texte que le client doit crypter avec la bonne cl de rseau et renvoyer au point daccs. Si le client possde la mauvaise cl ou sil nen a pas, lauthentification chouera et il ne sera pas autoris sassocier au point daccs. Lauthentification cl partage nest pas considre comme une mthode sre, car un pirate qui accde au texte en clair et au texte crypt avec la cl WEP pourrait dchiffrer celle-ci. 155 - Glossaire SSID (Service Set Identifier) Identificateur de services 32 caractres ajout lentte des paquets transmis sur un rseau sans fil, qui sert de mot de passe lorsquun priphrique mobile tente de se connecter lensemble de services de base (BSS, ou Basic Service Set en anglais). Lidentifiant SSID distingue un rseau sans fil dun autre, de telle manire que tous les points daccs et priphriques qui tentent de se connecter un rseau donn doivent utiliser le mme identifiant. Un priphrique ne peut tre autoris accder au BSS que sil fournit le SSID unique. Le SSID tant diffus en texte clair, il nassure aucune scurit du rseau. Voyant dtat Voyant indiquant ltat de certains composants de votre systme. Sur votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK, il sagit dun cran cristaux liquides situ juste au-dessus du clavier. Stro (audio) Systme qui utilise deux canaux pour traiter le son provenant de deux sources diffrentes. Masque de sous-rseau Le rseau TCP/IP est command laide dune division en plusieurs sous-rseaux. Une adresse IP se compose dune adresse de sous-rseau et de ladresse de lordinateur. Le masque de sous-rseau dtermine le nombre de bits formant ladresse de sous-rseau dans ladresse IP. La mme valeur doit tre utilise pour tous les ordinateurs qui doivent communiquer sur le rseau. SVGA Super VGA. S-Vido Super Vido. Systme vido composantes servant grer un cran de tlviseur ou dordinateur. Horloge systme Oscillateur frquence prcise qui synchronise le fonctionnement du systme et tablit lheure et la date. TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) Littralement, Protocole de Contrle de Transmission/Protocole Internet. Protocole Internet standard le plus utilis. 156 - Glossaire TFT (Thin Film Transistor) Abrviation de Thin Film Transistor. Technologie dcrans plats qui utilise une mince matrice de transistors pour commander individuellement chaque pixel de lcran. UL (Underwriters Laboratories) L Underwriters Laboratories est un organisme indpendant qui effectue les tests de scurit lectrique des appareils et accorde les homologations correspondantes. USB Bus srie universel. Norme permettant de connecter simultanment un ordinateur jusqu 127 priphriques USB comme des manettes de jeu, des dispositifs de pointage, des imprimantes ou des claviers. VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) Mmoire vive vido. Mmoire rserve aux donnes et au contrle daffichage vido. WFM (Wired for Management) Abrviation de Wired for Management . Vaste programme dIntel visant rduire les cots globaux de linformatique de gestion, sans sacrifier la puissance et la souplesse. Compatibilit Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity). Une conformit Wi-Fi indique que le produit a russi le test dinteroprabilit de la WECA
(Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance), ce qui garantit linteroprabilit de produits de rseau sans fil IEEE 802.11. WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) Rseau local sans fil. Interconnexion sans fil dordinateurs et de priphriques dans un emplacement gographiquement dlimit et permettant lchange de programmes et de donnes. 157 - Glossaire Renseignements sur la rglementation Avis Les changements ou modifications qui ne sont pas expressment approuvs par Fujitsu pourraient interdire aux utilisateurs dutiliser le matriel. AVIS DE LA FCC Avis aux utilisateurs de postes radio et de tlviseurs Cet appareil a t test et jug conforme aux limites tablies pour le matriel numrique de classe B, selon la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences nuisibles dans un environnement rsidentiel. Cet appareil gnre, utilise et met de lnergie radiofrquence et, si son installation et son utilisation ne sont pas conformes aux instructions, il peut tre la cause de parasites nuisibles aux communications radio. Il nest toutefois pas garanti quaucune interfrence ne sera observe dans un environnement particulier. Si ce matriel cause des interfrences nuisibles la rception des ondes de radio ou de tlvision, ce qui peut tre vrifi en le mettant hors tension puis sous tension, lutilisateur devra tenter de les corriger en procdant comme suit:
Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice. Accrotre la distance entre lappareil et le rcepteur. Brancher lappareil sur une prise relie un circuit diffrent de celui sur lequel le rcepteur est branch. Consulter le vendeur ou un technicien radio/tlvision expriment pour obtenir de laide. Des cbles de liaison paires torsades blindes doivent tre utiliss pour assurer la conformit aux limites dmission RF qui gouvernent ce dispositif. AVIS DOC (INDUSTRIE CANADA) Avis aux utilisateurs de postes radio et de tlviseurs Cet appareil numrique de classe B respecte toutes les exigences de la Rglementation canadienne sur le matriel brouilleur. 158 - Renseignements sur la rglementation Annexe A: Guide dutilisation de la carte de rseau local sans fil Renseignements sur la rglementation de la FCC Veuillez prendre note des renseignements suivants sur la rglementation relative la carte rseau sans fil en option. Remarques et dclarations rglementaires Sant et autorisation dutilisation Carte rseau sans fil Une carte rseau sans fil met de lnergie lectromagntique radiofrquence. Les niveaux dnergie de ces missions sont toutefois beaucoup moins levs que ceux dautres appareils sans fil, tels que les tlphones cellulaires. La carte rseau sans fil peut tre utilise en toute scurit car son fonctionnement est conforme aux recommandations et aux normes de scurit en matire de radiofrquences. Lusage dune carte rseau sans fil peut tre limit dans certaines situations ou certains environnements, notamment:
bord dun avion;
dans un lieu contenant des matires explosives;
dans des situations o le risque dinterfrence avec dautres appareils ou services est jug dangereux. Lorsque la politique dutilisation des cartes rseaux sans fil de certains lieux risque nest pas bien dfinie (par exemple, dans les aroports, les hpitaux, les usines de produits chimiques, les raffineries de ptrole ou de gaz et dans les difices privs), obtenez dabord une autorisation. Renseignements sur la rglementation et avis de non-responsabilit Cette carte rseau sans fil doit tre installe et utilise conformment aux instructions de la documentation livre avec le produit. Toute modification apporte sans lapprobation expresse du fabricant peut annuler le droit de lutilisateur de sen servir. Le fabricant nest pas responsable des interfrences avec la rception des ondes de radio ou de tlvision causes par une modification non autorise ou par le remplacement ou le raccord de cbles et de matriel de connexion autres que ceux prescrits par le fabricant. Il incombe lutilisateur de remdier aux interfrences causes par une telle modification, substitution ou connexion non autorise. Le fabricant et ses revendeurs ou distributeurs autoriss ne peuvent tre tenus responsables des dommages ni de toute infraction la rglementation gouvernementale rsultant du non-respect de ces directives. 159 Cet appareil ne doit pas tre utilis avec ou proximit immdiate dune antenne ou dun metteur. Avis concernant les rseaux sans fil IEEE 802.11a: Le matriel destin un usage sur la bande 5,15~5,25 GHz doit tre utilis uniquement lintrieur et son antenne doit tre intgrale. Dclarations concernant la rglementation de la FCC Ce matriel est conforme aux limites dfinies dans la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible; (2) cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris celles pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement de lappareil. Dclaration concernant les dispositions de la FCC sur les interfrences Cet appareil a t test et reconnu conforme aux limites tablies pour le matriel numrique de classe B, selon la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences nuisibles dans un environnement rsidentiel. Cet appareil gnre, utilise et peut mettre de lnergie radiofrquence. Sil nest pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut causer des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Il nest toutefois pas garanti quaucune interfrence ne sera observe dans un environnement particulier. Si ce matriel cause des interfrences nuisibles la rception des ondes de radio ou de tlvision, ce qui peut tre vrifi en le mettant hors tension puis sous tension, lutilisateur devra tenter de les corriger en procdant comme suit:
1 Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice. 2 loigner le matriel du rcepteur. 3 Brancher le matriel sur une prise alimente par un circuit diffrent de celui du rcepteur. 4 Consulter le vendeur ou un technicien radio/tlvision expriment pour obtenir de laide. Dclaration concernant la rglementation de la FCC sur lexposition aux frquences radio Selon les donnes scientifiques disponibles, il nexiste pas de problmes de sant lis lutilisation des priphriques sans fil de faible puissance. En revanche il nexiste pas non plus de preuves qui dmontrent que ces priphriques sont absolument dpourvus de risques. Les priphriques sans fil de faible puissance mettent, lors de leur utilisation, une faible nergie de frquences radio dans la plage des micro-ondes. Alors que des niveaux levs de frquences radio risquent dentraner des effets nfastes sur la sant (en chauffant les tissus), lexposition un faible niveau de frquences radio ne provoque pas les effets calorifiques qui ont un effet adverse sur la sant. De nombreuses tudes portant sur lexposition de faibles niveaux de frquences radio nindiquent aucun effet biologique. Certaines tudes laissent entendre que des effets biologiques sont possibles, mais ces conclusions nont pas t confirmes par des recherches supplmentaires. La carte de rseau local sans fil a t teste et les rsultats obtenus sont conformes aux limites tablies par la FCC en matire dexposition au rayonnement dun quipement non contrl; ainsi que les directives de la FCC en matire dexposition aux radiofrquences selon le Supplment C du Bulletin lOET65. 160 -
Restrictions concernant lexportation Ce produit ou logiciel contient du code de chiffrement qui ne peut tre export ou transfr du Canada ou des tats-Unis sans un permis dexportation du dpartement du commerce des tats-Unis. Ce matriel est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC, ainsi qu la norme ICES 003 B/NMB 003 B. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible; (2) cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris celles pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement de lappareil. Toute modification nayant pas t expressment approuve par la socit Fujitsu America, Inc. peut annuler le droit de lutilisateur de se servir du matriel. Avis pour le Canada Le matriel destin un usage sur la bande 5 150 - 5 250 MHz doit tre utilis uniquement lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage nuisible caus aux systmes mobiles par satellite fonctionnant sur un mme canal. Un gain dantenne de 6 dBi est autoris (pour le matriel utilisant les bandes 5 250 - 5 350 MHz, 5 470 - 5 725 MHz et 5 725 - 5 825 MHz), conformment la limite p.i.r.e. maximale permise selon lannexe A9.2 affrent aux priphriques RSS210. En outre, les utilisateurs doivent prendre garde au fait que les radars de grande puissance sont considrs comme des utilisateurs principaux
(ce qui signifie quils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5 250 - 5 350 MHz et 5 650 - 5 850 MHz et quils pourraient causer des interfrences ou des dommages aux appareils de rseau exempts de licence. 161 -
Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil optionnelle Ce guide explique comment installer et configurer correctement la carte rseau sans fil mini-PCI intgre (disponible en option), ci-aprs dsigne sous le nom de carte rseau sans fil. Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil, lisez attentivement le prsent guide afin de bien comprendre son fonctionnement. Conservez ce guide en lieu sr afin de pouvoir vous y rfrer ultrieurement. Cartes rseau sans fil prsentes dans ce document Ce document sapplique aux systmes quips de lun des deux composants suivants en option:
Carte intgre Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Caractristiques de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil est une carte au format Mini-PCI connecte la carte mre de lordinateur portable. Elle fonctionne dans les bandes RF pouvant tre utilises sans autorisation spciale, ce qui limine le besoin dobtenir une licence de la FCC pour les radiocommunications. Elle fonctionne dans la bande industrielle, scientifique et mdicale (ISM) de 2,4 GHz et dans les bandes UNII (Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure) infrieures, intermdiaires et suprieures (5 GHz). Les cartes rseau sans fil peuvent tre utilises selon quatre modes de fonctionnement: IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g et IEEE 802.11n (version prliminaire). Les cartes rseau sans fil sont certifies Wi-Fi et fonctionnent un dbit maximal thorique de 450 Mbit/s en mode IEEE 802.11n (version prliminaire), de 54 Mbit/s en mode IEEE 802.11a ou IEEE 802.11g, et de 11 Mbit/s en mode IEEE 802.11b. La carte rseau sans fil prend en charge les modes de chiffrement WEP, TKIP, CKIP et AES. La carte rseau sans fil est conforme aux normes suivantes: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0 et CCX4.0. 162 - Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil optionnelle Modes de rseau sans fil compatibles avec cette carte Mode Ad Hoc Le mode Ad hoc dsigne une topologie de rseau sans fil dans laquelle la connectivit entre les divers ordinateurs est tablie sans priphrique central de rseau sans fil, ou point daccs. La connectivit est tablie uniquement laide de priphriques clients dans une configuration gal gal. Les rseaux Ad hoc sont donc galement connus sous le nom de rseaux dgal gal. Un rseau Ad hoc est une mthode aise et peu coteuse de relier plusieurs ordinateurs en rseau. Le mode Ad hoc exige que les paramtres de nom de rseau SSID, dauthentification rseau et de cl de chiffrement soient configurs de faon identique sur tous les ordinateurs du rseau. Figure 54. Rseau en mode Ad hoc 163 - Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil optionnelle Mode point daccs (Infrastructure) Le mode Infrastructure dsigne une topologie de rseau sans fil dans laquelle les appareils communiquent au sein dun rseau sans fil ou cbl par lintermdiaire dun point daccs. En mode Infrastructure, les appareils sans fil peuvent communiquer directement entre eux ou sur un rseau cbl. Les rseaux sans fil dentreprise fonctionnent en mode Infrastructure car ils ncessitent une connexion au rseau local sans fil pour accder aux ordinateurs, aux priphriques et aux services (par exemple, serveurs de fichier, imprimantes et bases de donnes). Internet Modem ADSL modem cble, ou similaire Rseau local cbl Point daccs*
Rseau local sans fil
*Un concentrateur en option pour rseau local peut tre requis selon le type de point daccs utilis. Figure 55. Rseau en mode point daccs (Infrastructure) 164 - Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil optionnelle Manipulation de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau local sans fil est un dispositif en option qui peut tre fourni avec votre ordinateur portable. Normalement, vous ne devriez pas avoir besoin de la retirer ou de la rinstaller. Le systme dexploitation de lordinateur est dj configur pour utiliser la carte rseau sans fil. Le rseau local sans fil fonctionne dans les modes IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g et IEEE802.11n. Elles fonctionnent dans la bande ISM de 2,4 GHz et dans les bandes UNII infrieures, intermdiaires et suprieures (5 GHz). Les fours micro-ondes peuvent interfrer avec la carte rseau sans fil car ils utilisent la mme bande de frquences
(2,4 GHz) que les spcifications IEEE 802.11b/g/n. Les fours micro-ondes ne causent aucune interfrence en mode IEEE 802.11a car celui-ci utilise la bande radiofrquence de 5 GHz. Les appareils sans fil qui mettent dans la bande de frquences de 2,4 GHz peuvent nuire au fonctionnement des priphriques IEEE 802.11b/g/n. Les symptmes associs aux interfrences incluent une rduction du dbit, des coupures intermittentes de connexion et un nombre important derreurs de trames. Il est FORTEMENT recommand de mettre hors tension les appareils gnrant des interfrences afin dassurer le bon fonctionnement de la carte rseau sans fil. Dsactivation/dconnexion de la carte rseau sans fil La dsactivation de la carte rseau sans fil peut tre souhaitable dans certaines circonstances (pour prolonger la vie de la batterie) ou dans des endroits o lutilisation des appareils lectroniques est rglemente (par exemple: hpitaux, cliniques, avions, etc.). La carte rseau sans fil peut tre dsactive avec le commutateur marche/arrt correspondant ou avec Windows, en utilisant licne correspondante dans la zone de notification (Remarque: cette deuxime procdure nteindra pas la radio: lmission et la rception continueront bien que la carte rseau ait t dsactive). 165 - Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil optionnelle Dsactivation avec le commutateur de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil peut tre dsactive rapidement et efficacement en mettant le commutateur correspondant en position OFF (arrt). le commutateur de la carte rseau sans fil na aucun effet sur les modles pour rseau local cbl. Commutateur de dispositif sans fil Figure 56. Emplacement du commutateur de dispositif sans fil Dsactivation par licne dans la zone de notification Notez quavec cette procdure, la radio ne sera pas teinte, lmission et la rception sont toujours actives bien que la carte ne soit plus connecte. 1 Faites un clic droit sur licne Carte rseau sans fil dans la zone de notification en bas droite de lcran. 2 Choisir Se dconnecter dun rseau. Activation de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil peut tre active de la mme faon que pour sa dsactivation. Avec le commutateur correspondant Sous Windows, en cliquant laide du bouton droit de la souris licne de la carte rseau sans fil puis en cliquant sur Connexion un rseau 166 - Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil optionnelle Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil peut tre configure pour tablir la connectivit du rseau sans fil en utilisant le logiciel intgr dans le systme dexploitation. Il prend galement en charge la plupart des solutions de scurit standard. Certains paramtres prdfinis seront requis pour cette procdure. Pour les obtenir, consulter votre administrateur de rseau:
1 Allez lcran de dmarrage moderne, appuyez sur [Windows]+[X], puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration dans le menu. 2 Si le Panneau de configuration nest pas en affichage classique, slectionnez Basculer vers laffichage classique sur le panneau de gauche. Double-cliquez sur licne du Centre de rseau et partage. 3 Slectionnez Configurer une nouvelle connexion ou un nouveau rseau . 4 Selon le type de connexion que vous souhaitez faire, faites une slection. Pour un rseau en mode infrastructure, slectionnez Connecter manuellement un rseau sans fil . 5 Entrez les informations requises. Il se peut que vous deviez consulter votre administrateur de rseau pour certaines informations. 6 Si vous avez besoin daide, allez la fentre du Centre de rseau et partage (Panneau de configuration >
Centre de rseau et partage) et entrez les mots-cls dans la bote Recherche. Se connecter un rseau Aprs avoir configur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez vous connecter un rseau actif en ralisant les tapes suivantes:
1 Cliquez sur licne de la carte rseau sans fil de la zone de notification. 2 Slectionnez Connexion un rseau. 3 Slectionnez un rseau dans la liste qui apparat et cliquez sur le bouton [Connexion]
Connexion au rseau Une fois la configuration effectue, vous pouvez vous connecter un rseau actif en cliquant sur licne Connexion rseau sans fil de la zone de notification. 167 - Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil Dpannage Le tableau ci-dessous prsente les causes possibles et les mesures correctives pour diffrents problmes de rseau sans fil. Si les tapes raliser ne vous sont pas connues, consultez votre administrateur systme ou allez dans
[Dmarrer] -> Aide et soutien (ou support) -> Gestion du rseau et Web. Problme Cause possible Solution possible Connexion rseau indisponible Nom de rseau (SSID) ou cl WEP non valide Connexion en mode Ad hoc: Assurez-vous que le SSID et la cl WEP de tous les ordinateurs du rseau ont t configurs correctement. Les noms de rseau et les valeurs de la cl WEP ou WPA/WPA2 prpartage doivent tre identiques sur chaque ordinateur. Connexion en mode point daccs (Infrastructure): Attribuez aux ordinateurs le mme SSID et la mme cl WEP que ceux du point daccs. Attribuez la mme valeur dauthentification rseau que celle du point daccs. Consultez votre administrateur de rseau si cette valeur est requise. Signal faible et/ou mauvaise qualit de la liaison Connexion en mode Ad hoc: Essayez de rtablir la connexion aprs avoir rapproch lordinateur ou retir les ventuels obstacles. Connexion en mode point daccs (Infrastructure): Essayez de rtablir la connexion aprs avoir rapproch le point daccs ou retir les ventuels obstacles. La carte rseau sans fil est dsactive Assurez-vous que linterrupteur de la carte rseau sans fil est sur ON. Allez dans Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration, puis double-cliquez sur Centre de mobilit Windows. Si le rseau sans fil est teint, cliquez sur le bouton Allumer le rseau sans fil. Lordinateur connecter est teint. Vrifiez si lordinateur est allum. 168 - Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil Problme Cause possible Solution possible Connexion rseau indisponible
(suite) Interfrences RF provenant de points daccs ou dautres rseaux sans fil Lutilisation de canaux RF identiques ou se chevauchant peut nuire au fonctionnement de la carte rseau sans fil. Changez le canal de votre point daccs en tenant compte du canal du priphrique nuisible. chec de lauthentification de la carte rseau sans fil Vrifiez les paramtres dauthentification rseau, de chiffrement et de scurit. Si les paramtres de scurit sont mal configurs, en raison, par exemple, dune cl WEP comportant une faute de frappe, dun nom dutilisateur/mot de passe LEAP incorrect ou dun mauvais choix de mthode dauthentification, la carte rseau sans fil sassociera au rseau sans fil mais ne sy authentifiera pas. Paramtres rseau mal configurs Configuration incorrecte de ladresse IP Vrifiez la configuration des paramtres rseau. Ceci sapplique uniquement aux rseaux qui utilisent des adresses IP statiques. Pour obtenir les paramtres appropris, consultez votre administrateur de rseau. 169 - Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil Spcifications de la carte de rseau local sans fil Spcifications lment Spcification Type de rseau Dbit Frquence active Porte nominale**
Nombre de canaux Les cartes rseau sans fil intgresIntel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 respectent les normes IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g et 802.11n*.
(Commutation automatique) dbit maximum de 54 Mbit/s (IEEE 802.11n dterminer) 802.11n: 2,4 GHz ou 5 GHz 802.11b/g: 2 400 ~ 2 473 MHz 802.11a: 4 900 ~ 5 850 MHz 802.11a: 12 mtres (40 pi) 54 Mbit/s; 91 mtres (300 pi) 6 Mbit/s 802.11b: 30 mtres (100 pi) 11 Mbit/s; 91 mtres (300 pi) 1 Mbit/s 802.11g: 30 mtres (100 pi) 54 Mbit/s; 91 mtres (300 pi) 1 Mbit/s 802.11n: selon les estimations, les portes des modes 802.11g et 802.11a, dans leurs frquences 802.11a: 8, indpendants 802.11b/g: 11, dont 3 sans chevauchement 802.11n: 2,4 GHz - 3 sans chevauchement si la liaison entre canaux nest pas utilise, 2 sans respectives, sont multiplies par deux. chevauchement si la liaison entre canaux est utilise. 5 GHz - 12 canaux UNII sans chevauchement avec ou sans utilisation de la liaison entre canaux Scurit Types de chiffrement compatible avec WEP, TKIP, AES***, CKIP, WPA 1.0 et WPA 2.0 Nombre maximum recommand dordinateurs connects au rseau local sans fil (en mode Ad hoc) 10 ou moins****
Type Wi-Fi indique que le test dinterconnectivit de la Wi-Fi Alliance (organisation garantissant linterconnectivit des rseaux sans fil) a russi. La porte peut varier selon certains facteurs (par exemple, nombre de murs, rflectivit des matriaux ou interfrences provenant dautres sources de radiofrquences). Le chiffrement par cl de rseau (WEP) est effectu avec le nombre de bits indiqu ci-dessus, mais lutilisateur peut dfinir une cl de 40 ou 104 bits aprs avoir soustrait la longueur fixe de 24 bits.
**** Selon lenvironnement, le nombre maximum dordinateurs peut tre infrieur. 170 - Spcifications de la carte de rseau local sans fil Utilisation de Bluetooth Le module Bluetooth intgr est un composant offert en option pour les ordinateurs portables Fujitsu. Prsentation de Bluetooth La technologie Bluetooth est conue pour assurer la liaison sans fil faible porte entre divers appareils mobiles, tels que tlphones, ordinateurs portables, imprimantes et camras. La technologie Bluetooth permet dtablir des rseaux personnels (PAN) entre des appareils situs courte distance les uns des autres. LUTILISATION DES TOUCHES [FN] + [F5] PERMET DACTIVER/DSACTIVER SIMULTANMENT LES INTERFACES RSEAU SANS FIL ET BLUETOOTH. POUR ACTIVER OU DSACTIVER SPARMENT LUN OU LAUTRE, PROCDEZ COMME SUIT:
ENFONCEZ SIMULTANMENT LES TOUCHES [FN] ET [F5] DU CLAVIER. VRIFIEZ LE TABLEAU DE VOYANTS DTAT POUR VOUS ASSURER QUE LE DISPOSITIF SANS FIL EST ACTIV. ALLEZ LCRAN DE DMARRAGE MODERNE -> ICNES -> PARAMTRES -> MODIFIER LES PARAMTRES DE LORDINATEUR -> SANS FIL. SOUS SANS FIL->APPAREILS SANS FIL, CLIQUEZ SUR BLUETOOTH POUR ACTIVER CETTE FONCTION. Sources dinformations supplmentaires sur Bluetooth Pour en savoir davantage sur la technologie Bluetooth, visitez le site Web: www.bluetooth.com. 171 - Utilisation de Bluetooth nonc de la FCC relatif lexposition aux rayonnements Cet quipement respecte les normes de la FCC relatives lexposition aux rayonnements, dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Lantenne Bluetooth est exempte des critres de distance minimale cause de sa faible puissance. Les metteurs de ce priphrique ne doivent pas tre utiliss avec ou proximit immdiate dune antenne ou dun autre metteur. Avis pour le Canada Pour viter que ce service fourni sous licence soit perturb par des interfrences radio, ce matriel doit tre utilis lintrieur et distance des fentres. Si lquipement (ou lantenne de transmission) est install lextrieur, une licence peut tre ncessaire. Garantie Les utilisateurs ne sont pas autoriss modifier ce produit. Toute modification annule la garantie. Cet quipement ne peut tre modifi, altr ou chang en aucune faon sans lautorisation crite de Fujitsu. Toute modification non autorise annulera les autorisations dquipement de la FCC et dIndustrie Canada, de mme que la garantie. 172 - Utilisation de Bluetooth Annexe B: Capteur dempreintes digitales Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Votre systme est dot dun dispositif de reconnaissance des empreintes digitales, situ en bas gauche de lcran. Capteur dempreintes digitales Figure 57. Capteur dempreintes digitales Grce au capteur dempreintes digitales, il nest plus ncessaire de saisir votre nom dutilisateur et votre mot de passe chaque fois que vous voulez:
Ouvrir une session dans Windows Annuler un conomiseur dcran protg par mot de passe Ouvrir une session dans des pages daccueil ncessitant un nom dutilisateur et un mot de passe 173 Aprs avoir inscrit ou enregistr votre empreinte digitale, il vous suffit de glisser le bout de votre doigt sur le capteur pour que le systme vous reconnaisse. Le capteur dempreintes digitales utilise le logiciel Softex OmniPass qui fournit des fonctions de gestion de mot de passe aux systmes dexploitation Microsoft Windows. OmniPass vous permet dutiliser un mot de passe principal pour tous les crans en ligne, toutes les applications Windows et dautres applications demandant un mot de passe. OmniPass demande aux utilisateurs de sauthentifier laide du capteur dempreintes digitales avant de leur donner accs au bureau Windows. Ce priphrique comporte un systme dauthentification scuris qui limite laccs votre ordinateur, vos applications, vos sites Web et aux autres ressources protges par mot de passe. OmniPass prsente une interface graphique conviviale, qui permet de grer de faon scuritaire les mots de passe, les comptes utilisateur et les identits multiples pour chaque utilisateur. CERTAINS MODLES PRENNENT EN CHARGE LA FONCTION DAUTHENTIFICATION AU DMARRAGE (OU PBA: PRE-BOOT AUTHENTICATION). LA PBA VOUS PERMET DE VOUS CONNECTER AVANT QUE LE MCANISME DAUTHENTIFICATION PROPRE WINDOWS NE COMMENCE. LENVIRONNEMENT PBA FONCTIONNE COMME UNE EXTENSION DU BIOS OU DU PROGRAMMA DE DMARRAGE DTERMIN (BOOT FIRMWARE), CE QUI VOUS PERMET DE TRAVAILLER DANS UN ENVIRONNEMENT PLUS SCURIS, INDPENDANT DU SYSTME DEXPLOITATION. Premire mise en marche Cette section vous montre comment prparer votre systme linstallation de lapplication de reconnaissance dempreintes digitales OmniPass. Vous y trouverez des conseils qui vous guideront au long de la procdure dinstallation. Elle indique galement de faon dtaille comment enregistrer votre premier utilisateur dans OmniPass. Installer OmniPass Si lapplication OmniPass a dj t installe sur votre systme, sautez cette section et allez directement Enregistrement des utilisateurs en page 177. Pour savoir si lapplication OmniPass est dj installe, vrifiez si les lments suivants sont prsents:
Une icne OmniPass, dore et en forme de cl, figure dans la zone de notification, dans le coin infrieur droit de lcran. Lapplication Softex apparat dans le groupe de Programmes du menu Dmarrer. 174 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Configuration de systme ncessaire Lapplication OmniPass ncessite de lespace sur votre disque dur ainsi quun systme dexploitation (SE) spcifique. Les exigences minimales sont les suivantes:
Systme dexploitation Windows XP Professionnel ou ultrieur Au moins 35 Mo despace disque disponible Installation de lapplication OmniPass Si lapplication OmniPass est dj installe sur votre systme, allez directement Enregistrement des utilisateurs en page 177. Autrement, continuez suivre les instructions de cette section concernant linstallation du logiciel. POUR INSTALLER LE LOGICIEL, VOUS DEVEZ AVOIR UN LECTEUR OPTIQUE EXTERNE RACCORD VOTRE ORDINATEUR. LUTILISATEUR DSIRANT INSTALLER OMNIPASS DOIT DISPOSER DE DROITS DADMINISTRATEUR DANS LE SYSTME. SI VOUS NAVEZ PAS DE TELS DROITS, FERMEZ LA SESSION ET OUVREZ-EN UNE AUTRE AVEC UN NOM DUTILISATEUR POSSDANT CES DROITS AVANT DE POURSUIVRE LINSTALLATION DOMNIPASS. Pour installer OmniPass dans votre systme, vous devez excuter les oprations suivantes:
1 Lapplication OmniPass est disponible dans les applications supplmentaires de Fujitsu (Fujitsu Bonus Apps). Pour installer OmniPass, cliquez sur licne Fujitsu Bonus Apps qui se trouve sur le bureau, slectionnez Softex OmniPass puis cliquez sur [Installer]. 2 Une fois linstallation dOmniPass termine, vous serez invit redmarrer votre systme. Vous pourrez ensuite utiliser OmniPass. Si vous dcidez de ne pas redmarrer votre systme immdiatement aprs linstallation, OmniPass ne sera pas disponible avant le prochain redmarrage. 3 Le programme dinstallation place automatiquement une icne (Softex OmniPass) dans le panneau de configuration Windows, ainsi quune icne dore en forme de cl dans la zone de notification. Vrification des informations concernant votre version dOmniPass Aprs avoir install OmniPass et redmarr votre systme, vous pouvez dcider de vrifier la version du logiciel. 175 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Pour vrifier votre version dOmniPass:
1 Double-cliquez sur licne en forme de cl OmniPass de votre barre de tches Windows (gnralement en bas droite de lcran), ou Windows 7 : Cliquez sur Dmarrer dans la barre des tches. Slectionnez Panneau de configuration. Windows 8 : Sur lcran Dmarrage moderne, cliquez droite et slectionnez Toutes les applications , puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration. Double-cliquez sur Softex OmniPass dans le panneau de configuration et vous verrez apparatre le Centre de contrle OmniPass. Sil ne saffiche pas, cela signifie que le programme nest pas install correctement, ou Cliquez sur le bouton Dmarrer, slectionnez Tous les programmes, puis le groupe de programmes Softex et enfin, dans ce sous-menu, cliquez sur Centre de contrle OmniPass. 2 Les informations sur la version apparaitront dans le volet gauche de la fentre du Centre de contrle OmniPass. Dsinstallation dOmniPass LUTILISATEUR DSIRANT DSINSTALLER OMNIPASS DOIT DISPOSER DE DROITS DADMINISTRATEUR DANS LE SYSTME. SI VOUS NAVEZ PAS DE TELS DROITS, FERMEZ LA SESSION ET OUVREZ-EN UNE AUTRE AVEC UN NOM DUTILISATEUR POSSDANT CES DROITS AVANT DE POURSUIVRE LA DSINSTALLATION DOMNIPASS. Pour supprimer lapplication OmniPass de votre systme:
1 Windows 7 : Cliquez sur Dmarrer dans la barre des tches. Slectionnez Panneau de configuration. Windows 8 : Sur lcran Dmarrage moderne, cliquez droite et slectionnez Toutes les applications , puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des Programmes (Windows 7: Programmes et fonctions). 3 Slectionnez OmniPass, puis cliquez sur Modifier/Supprimer. 4 Suivez les instructions de dsinstallation de lapplication OmniPass. 5 Aprs la dsinstallation dOmniPass, redmarrez votre systme lorsque vous y tes invit. 176 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Enregistrement des utilisateurs Avant de pouvoir utiliser les fonctions dOmniPass, vous devez dabord enregistrer un utilisateur dans ce programme. Concept du mot de passe principal Les ressources dun ordinateur sont souvent protges par des mots de passe. Lorsque vous connectez votre ordinateur, que vous consultez vos courriels, que vous effectuez des oprations bancaires sur Internet, que vous payez des factures en ligne ou que vous accdez aux ressources dun rseau, il vous est souvent demand de vous identifier. Il se peut alors que vous ayez besoin de dizaines de mots de passe dont vous devez vous rappeler. Lors de lenregistrement dun utilisateur, un mot de passe principal est cr son intention. Ce mot de passe remplace tous les autres mots de passe des sites sur lesquels lutilisateur senregistre avec OmniPass. Exemple: Un utilisateur, Jean, installe OmniPass sur son systme (son ordinateur de maison) et inscrit un utilisateur OmniPass avec le nom dutilisateur Jean_01 et mot de passe freq14. Il se rend ensuite sur son site Internet de courriel pour ouvrir une session dans son compte. Il entre, comme dhabitude, son nom dutilisateur et son mot de passe (par exemple, Jean_02 et lifebook ), mais demande OmniPass de Mmoriser le mot de passe au lieu de cliquer sur Ouvrir session. Dornavant, chaque fois quil retournera sur ce site, OmniPass linvitera fournir ses informations didentification. Jean saisira alors les informations OmniPass (Jean_01 et freq14) dans linvite dauthentification dOmniPass et pourra accder son compte de courriel. Il peut rpter cette opration avec autant de sites Web ou de ressources protges par mot de passe quil le souhaite et pourra accder tous ces sites laide de ses informations didentification dutilisateur OmniPass (Jean_01 et freq14). Pour ce faire, il devra utiliser le systme sur lequel il sest enregistr titre dutilisateur OmniPass. En fait, OmniPass ne change pas les informations didentification de la ressource protge par mot de passe. Si Jean veut accder son courriel depuis un ordinateur sur lequel le compte OmniPass nexiste pas, il devra saisir ses informations didentification originales (Jean_02 et lifebook). Dans ce cas, sil tente dutiliser ses informations didentification OmniPass, laccs au site lui sera refus. CETTE PROCDURE DENREGISTREMENT REPOSE SUR LHYPOTHSE QUE VOUS NE VOULEZ INTGRER OMNIPASS AUCUN PRIPHRIQUE DAUTHENTIFICATION OU AUTRE EMPLACEMENT DE STOCKAGE. SI VOUS SOUHAITEZ DISPOSER DE CETTE FONCTIONNALIT, CONSULTEZ LES SECTIONS CORRESPONDANTES DU PRSENT DOCUMENT. 177 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Enregistrement de base LAssistant denregistrement vous guidera travers les tapes denregistrement dun utilisateur. Sauf indication contraire de votre part, lAssistant denregistrement sera lanc aprs linstallation dOmniPass au moment de louverture dune session Windows. Si lassistant napparat pas, vous pouvez le lancer en cliquant sur Dmarrer dans la barre de tches Windows. Slectionnez ensuite Programmes, puis Softex et cliquez sur Enregistrer un nouvel utilisateur. 1 Cliquez sur Enregistrement pour procder la vrification de lutilisateur et du mot de passe. Par dfaut, lAssistant denregistrement entre les informations didentification de lutilisateur Windows actuellement connect. 2 Entrez le mot de passe qui vous sert ouvrir une session dans Windows. Celui-ci deviendra le mot de passe principal pour cet utilisateur OmniPass. Dans la plupart des cas, la valeur de Domaine: correspondra au nom de votre ordinateur Windows. Dans un environnement dentreprise, ou lorsque vous accdez des ressources professionnelles, il se peut que Domaine: ne corresponde pas au nom de votre ordinateur. Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour continuer. 3 Au cours de cette tape, OmniPass prend votre empreinte digitale. Pour de plus amples informations, voir Capteur dempreintes digitales en page 178. 4 Un cran de flicitations, indiquant que lenregistrement de lutilisateur est termin, apparatra. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] pour quitter lAssistant denregistrement OmniPass. Il vous sera demand si vous voulez vous connecter OmniPass avec les informations dutilisateur nouvellement enregistres. Cliquez sur [Oui]. Capteur dempreintes digitales Lenregistrement dune empreinte digitale augmentera la scurit de votre systme et simplifiera la procdure dauthentification. Lenregistrement des empreintes digitales se fait partir du Centre de contrle OmniPass. Une fois lutilisateur OmniPass connect, cliquez sur le bouton Dmarrer > slectionnez Tous les programmes > Softex > puis cliquez sur Enregistrer un nouvel utilisateur. 1 Pendant la procdure denregistrement initial de lutilisateur, vous serez invit slectionner le doigt qui sera enregistr. Les doigts dj enregistrs seront marqus dun crochet vert. Le doigt slectionn pour lenregistrement sera marqu dune flche rouge. OmniPass vous permet de renregistrer un doigt. Si vous choisissez un doigt qui a dj t enregistr et que vous poursuivez la procdure denregistrement, OmniPass enregistre lempreinte digitale actuelle la place de lancienne empreinte. Slectionnez un doigt enregistrer et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 178 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales 2 Il est temps pour OmniPass de prendre lempreinte que vous avez choisie. Plusieurs tentatives peuvent tre ncessaires avant quOmniPass prenne votre empreinte digitale. Si OmniPass ny parvient pas ou si lcran de capture de lempreinte digitale expire, cliquez sur [Prcdent] pour redmarrer le processus denregistrement dempreinte digitale. Votre systme est quip dun capteur dempreintes digitales glissement. Les capteurs glissement sont de taille rduite et ressemblent un mince rectangle allong. Pour prendre une empreinte digitale, faites glisser ou tirez doucement vers vous le bout de votre doigt sur le capteur ( partir de la deuxime articulation). Un glissement trop rapide ou trop lent pourrait faire chouer la prise dempreintes. Lcran Choisir un doigt dispose dun bouton [Pratique]; cliquez dessus pour pratiquer la prise de votre empreinte digitale. Lorsque vous matrisez la prise dempreintes digitales, vous pouvez procder lenregistrement dun doigt. 3 Lorsque OmniPass a correctement pris lempreinte digitale, lcran Vrifier lempreinte digitale saffiche automatiquement. Pour vrifier lenregistrement de votre empreinte, placez le bout de votre doigt sur le capteur comme lors dune prise dempreinte digitale. Si lempreinte a t vrifie avec succs, une empreinte digitale verte apparat dans la fentre de prise et le texte Vrification russie saffiche en dessous. 4 Aprs avoir enregistr et vrifi votre empreinte digitale, vous aurez la possibilit dActiver la PBA avec le doigt enregistr (Enable PBA with enrolled finger). Si vous activez cette option, vous devez choisir deux doigts qui seront enregistrs dans la procdure PBA. Si lenregistrement est russi, lcran Statut denregistrement du doigt dans la procdure PBA indiquera Enregistrement du doigt russi pour la procdure PBA . SI VOUS ACTIVEZ LA PBA SUR VOTRE SYSTME, VOUS DEVEZ DFINIR UN MOT DE PASSE UTILISATEUR ET UN MOT DE PASSE SUPERVISEUR DANS LES PARAMTRES DE DMARRAGE. POUR DE PLUS AMPLES INFORMATIONS, REPORTEZ-VOUS SEE DFINIR DES MOTS DE PASSE ON PAGE 53. Utilisation dOmniPass Vous pouvez maintenant commencer utiliser OmniPass. Son utilisation rgulire vous permettra de simplifier vos procdures dauthentification. 179 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Remplacement du mot de passe Vous utiliserez souvent la fonction de remplacement du mot de passe. Lorsque vous allez sur un site Internet accs restreint (par exemple, de votre banque, de votre courrier lectronique, de paiement ou denchres en ligne), vous serez toujours invit entrer vos rfrences de connexion. OmniPass peut dtecter ces invites et vous pouvez lui enseigner enregistrer vos rfrences. La prochaine fois que vous visiterez un de ces sites, vous pourrez vous authentifier laide de votre empreinte digitale pour y accder. Barre doutils dauthentification OmniPass Aprs avoir install OmniPass et redmarr votre ordinateur, vous remarquerez la prsence dune nouvelle bote de dialogue au dbut de votre session Windows. Il sagit de la barre doutils dauthentification OmniPass. Celle-ci saffiche chaque fois que le systme dauthentification est appel. Ce systme peut tre appel frquemment: pendant louverture dune session Windows, lors de la connexion OmniPass, lorsque vous dverrouillez votre poste de travail, lorsque vous reprenez le systme depuis le mode veille prolonge, lorsque vous dverrouillez un conomiseur dcran activ par mot de passe, lors du remplacement du mot de passe dun site mmoris ou des noms de connexion dapplications, etc. Lorsque cette barre doutils saffiche, OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier. La fentre Authentification de la connexion indique la fonction restreinte par OmniPass laquelle vous tentez de vous connecter. Les icnes en bas gauche (empreinte digitale et cl) indiquent les mthodes dauthentification disponibles. Les mthodes slectionnes sont en surbrillance, contrairement aux mthodes non slectionnes. Lorsque vous cliquez sur licne pour obtenir une mthode dauthentification non slectionne, linvite dauthentification associe cette mthode saffiche. linvite dauthentification, vous devez fournir les informations didentification appropries: un doigt enregistr dans la fentre dempreintes digitales ou votre mot de passe principal dans la case de mot de passe principal
(licne en forme de cl). Mmorisation dun mot de passe OmniPass peut mmoriser toute application, toute interface graphique ou toute autre ressource protge par un mot de passe. laide de la procdure suivante, vous pourrez sauvegarder dans OmniPass toutes les informations permettant de vous identifier. Ces informations seront ensuite associes votre mot de passe principal ou votre empreinte digitale. 180 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Allez sur un site comportant une procdure de connexion (nom dutilisateur et mot de passe), mais ne vous connectez pas tout de suite. linvite de connexion au site, entrez votre nom dutilisateur et votre mot de passe dans les champs appropris, mais nentrez pas sur le site (nappuyez pas sur [Entrer], [Soumettre], [OK], ou Connexion). Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur licne OmniPass de la zone de notification et slectionnez Mmoriser le mot de passe dans le sous-menu. Le curseur flch Windows devient un curseur OmniPass en forme de cl dore. Cliquez sur ce curseur dans la zone dinvite de connexion, mais ne cliquez pas sur le bouton [Connexion] ou [Envoyer]. Association dun nom convivial Aprs avoir cliqu sur le curseur en forme de cl prs de linvite de connexion, OmniPass vous invitera entrer un nom convivial pour ce site. Vous devez entrer un terme qui vous rappelle le site Internet, la socit ou le service auquel vous vous connectez. Dans sa base de donnes scurise, OmniPass associe ce nom convivial au site Internet. Paramtres supplmentaires pour mmoriser un site Lorsque vous tes invit entrer un nom convivial, vous pouvez dfinir la manire dont OmniPass vous authentifie sur ce site. Trois choix sont votre disposition pour chaque site mmoris par OmniPass. Le paramtre par dfaut est Cliquer automatiquement sur le bouton OK ou Soumettre pour ce site protg par mot de passe une fois lutilisateur authentifi. Avec ce paramtre, chaque fois que vous accdez ce site, OmniPass vous demandera votre mot de passe principal ou votre priphrique dauthentification dempreintes digitales. Lorsque votre authentification est complte par OmniPass, vous tes automatiquement connect au site. La deuxime option est moins scuritaire: Entrer automatiquement sur ce site protg par mot de passe lorsquil est activ. Ne pas demander dauthentification. Cochez la case suprieure pour slectionner ce choix. Ensuite, chaque fois que vous vous connectez ce site, OmniPass vous donnera accs sans vous demander de vous authentifier. CE PARAMTRE EST PLUS PRATIQUE CAR DS QUE VOUS DEMANDEZ UN SITE QUI Y EST ASSOCI, VOUS SAUTEZ LA PROCDURE DAUTHENTIFICATION ET VOUS ACCDEZ INSTANTANMENT AU SITE. CEPENDANT, SI VOUS LAISSEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR SANS SURVEILLANCE AVEC VOTRE CONNEXION OMNIPASS ACTIVE, TOUTE PERSONNE UTILISANT VOTRE SYSTME PEUT ENTRER SUR LES SITES PROTGS EN USURPANT VOTRE IDENTIT. 181 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Si vous dslectionnez les deux cases dans Paramtres pour ce site protg par mot de passe, OmniPass vous demande votre mot de passe principal ou votre priphrique dauthentification. Lorsque votre authentification est complte par OmniPass, vos informations didentification saffichent linvite de connexion du site. Toutefois, vous devez cliquer sur le bouton [OK], [Envoyer] ou [Connexion] pour accder au site. Cliquez sur Terminer pour achever la procdure de mmorisation du mot de passe. Lemplacement du site, les informations didentification pour y accder et les paramtres dauthentification OmniPass correspondant ce site sont dsormais sauvegards dans la base de donnes scurise dOmniPass. Les paramtres dauthentification dOmniPass
(Paramtres pour ce site protg par mot de passe) peuvent toujours tre modifis dans Gestion du coffre-fort. Connexion un site mmoris Selon les informations contenues dans Paramtres pour ce site protg par mot de passe, OmniPass vous invitera ou non vous authentifier lorsque vous retournerez un site mmoris. Ces informations peuvent tre modifies dans Gestion du coffre-fort. Les cas suivants sappliquent lutilisation dOmniPass pour se connecter : Windows, aux sites mmoriss et toutes les autres ressources protges par mot de passe. Avec mot de passe principal Lorsque vous retournez un site mmoris avec OmniPass, il se peut que le systme vous demande un mot de passe principal. Entrez votre mot de passe principal et vous serez autoris accder au site. Connexion Windows avec un capteur dempreintes digitales Lorsque vous vous connectez Windows laide dun capteur dempreintes, la fentre de prise dempreintes digitales apparat ct de lcran de connexion Windows. Placez votre doigt enregistr sur le capteur pour que le systme vous identifie. Vous serez simultanment connect Windows et OmniPass. La fentre de prise dempreinte saffiche galement si vous avez utilis Ctrl-Alt-Suppr pour verrouiller le systme. En outre, le capteur dempreintes peut tre utilis pour vous reconnecter, comme indiqu ci-dessus. 182 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales SI UN ORDINATEUR EST VERROUILL ET QUOMNIPASS DTECTE UN UTILISATEUR DIFFRENT SE RECONNECTANT AVEC SON EMPREINTE DIGITALE, LE PREMIER UTILISATEUR SERA DCONNECT ET LE SECOND CONNECT. Gestion des mots de passe OmniPass propose une interface qui vous permet de grer vos mots de passe. Pour accder cette interface graphique, cliquez deux fois sur la cl OmniPass dans la zone de notification. Cliquez sur Gestion du coffre-fort; vous serez invit vous authentifier. Lorsque vous avez accd Gestion du coffre-fort, cliquez sur Grer les mots de passe sous Paramtres du coffre-fort. Linterface Grer les mots de passe apparat avec une liste de noms conviviaux. Si vous dsirez afficher les informations didentification sauvegardes pour un site Internet mmoris, mettez en surbrillance la ressource souhaite sous Bote de dialogue Protection par mot de passe et cliquez sur Afficher les valeurs. En cas de rinitialisation dun mot de passe ou dexpiration dun compte, vous pouvez supprimer les informations didentification sauvegardes dans OmniPass. Mettez en surbrillance la ressource souhaite sous Bote de dialogue Protection par mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Supprimer la page. Vous serez invit confirmer la suppression du mot de passe. Les deux cases cocher dans Grer les mots de passe dterminent si OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier ou vous connecte directement au site mmoris. Si vous tentez dutiliser Mmoriser le mot de passe sur un site dj connu, OmniPass efface les anciennes informations didentification. Le remplacement de votre mot de passe Windows constitue lexception la rgle ci-dessus. Si votre mot de passe est rinitialis dans Windows, le changement sera dtect par OmniPass qui vous invitera Mettre jour ou Reconfirmer le mot de passe. Entrez votre nouveau mot de passe Windows dans linvite, puis cliquez sur OK. Votre mot de passe principal Omnipass sera toujours votre mot de passe Windows. 183 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Identits dutilisateur OmniPass Les identits permettent aux utilisateurs OmniPass de possder plusieurs comptes sur un mme site (par exemple, claude@biblomail.com et claudepicard@biblomail.com). Si OmniPass ne vous a pas fourni didentits, vous ne pourrez mmoriser quun seul compte par site. Pour crer et grer des identits, cliquez deux fois sur la cl OmniPass dans la zone de notification. Cliquez sur Gestion du coffre-fort. OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier. Lorsque vous avez accd Gestion du coffre-fort, cliquez sur Grer les identits sous Paramtres du coffre-fort. Vous pouvez seulement grer les identits de lutilisateur OmniPass actuellement connect. Pour ajouter une nouvelle identit, cliquez sur Nouvelle identit ou double-cliquez sur Cliquer ici pour ajouter une nouvelle identit. Nommez la nouvelle identit et cliquez sur [OK], puis sur [Appliquer]. Vous pouvez dsormais basculer vers la nouvelle identit et dmarrer la mmorisation des mots de passe. Pour supprimer une identit, mettez en surbrillance lidentit supprimer et cliquez sur [Supprimer lidentit], puis cliquez sur [Appliquer]. LORSQUE VOUS SUPPRIMEZ UNE IDENTIT, TOUS LES SITES MMORISS ET LES BOTES DE DIALOGUE PROTECTION PAR MOT DE PASSE ASSOCIS LIDENTIT SONT PERDUS. Pour dfinir lidentit par dfaut, mettez en surbrillance lidentit souhaite puis cliquez sur [Dfinir par dfaut]
et cliquez sur [Appliquer] pour vrifier que les paramtres sont bien enregistrs. Si vous accdez OmniPass laide dun capteur dempreintes digitales, vous serez automatiquement connect lidentit par dfaut de lutilisateur OmniPass associ lempreinte. Si vous utilisez la procdure de connexion laide du mot de passe principal, vous pouvez choisir lidentit avec laquelle vous vous connectez. Choix de lidentit de lutilisateur lors de la connexion Pour choisir votre identit lors de la connexion, tapez votre nom dutilisateur dans le champ Nom dutilisateur :
Appuyez sur [Tab] et assurez-vous que le champ Domaine: se remplit automatiquement. Cliquez sur le champ Mot de passe: pour pointer le curseur dessus et vous verrez le menu droulant dans le champ Identit :
Slectionnez lidentit souhaite puis cliquez sur OK. 184 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Changement didentit de lutilisateur Pour changer les identits tout moment, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur licne OmniPass dans la zone de notification, puis cliquez sur Changer lidentit de lutilisateur dans le sous-menu. La bote de dialogue Changer didentit apparat. Slectionnez lidentit souhaite puis cliquez sur OK. Gestion des mots de passe et des identits Sur linterface Grer les mots de passe de longlet Gestion du coffre-fort du Centre de contrle OmniPass, il existe une liste de slection droulante nomme Identit. Ce champ vous permet de choisir lidentit pour laquelle vous dsirez grer les mots de passe. Lorsque vous slectionnez une identit dans cette liste, le systme affiche seulement les botes de dialogue Protection par mot de passe associes cette identit. Vous pouvez effectuer toutes les fonctions expliques dans Gestion des mots de passe en page 183. Configuration dOmniPass Cette section vous donne un aperu de la fonction Exportation/Importation et du Centre de contrle OmniPass. Exportation et importation dutilisateurs VOUS NE POUVEZ PAS IMPORTER UN UTILISATEUR DANS OMNIPASS SI UN UTILISATEUR PORTANT LE MME NOM Y EST DJ ENREGISTR. Vous pouvez importer et exporter des utilisateurs dans et hors dOmniPass laide du Centre de contrle. Le processus dexportation permet de sauvegarder tous les sites mmoriss, les informations didentification et les empreintes enregistres dun utilisateur OmniPass. Toutes les donnes OmniPass dun utilisateur sont sauvegardes dans un fichier de base de donnes crypt unique. Durant le processus dimportation, vous devez utiliser les informations de connexion Windows de lutilisateur export. Si les informations didentification appropries ne sont pas fournies, le profil utilisateur ne sera pas import. 185 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales
. VOUS DEVEZ EXPORTER PRIODIQUEMENT VOTRE PROFIL UTILISATEUR ET LE SAUVEGARDER DANS UN ENDROIT SR. SIL DEVAIT ARRIVER QUELQUE CHOSE VOTRE SYSTME, VOUS POUVEZ IMPORTER VOTRE PROFIL OMNIPASS SUR UN NOUVEAU SYSTME ET DISPOSER INSTANTANMENT DE TOUS VOS PARAMTRES ET EMPREINTES DIGITALES MMORISS. NOUBLIEZ PAS VOS INFORMATIONS DIDENTIFICATION WINDOWS UTILISES LORS DE LEXPORTATION. LORSQUE VOUS PROCDEZ LIMPORTATION DUN PROFIL UTILISATEUR, OMNIPASS VOUS INVITE VOUS AUTHENTIFIER. LES INFORMATIONS DIDENTIFICATION PERMETTANT DIMPORTER UN PROFIL SONT LES RFRENCES DE CONNEXION WINDOWS DE LUTILISATEUR EXPORT. CES RFRENCES SONT CELLES QUIL FALLAIT SOUMETTRE LORSQUE LE PROFIL DUTILISATEUR A T EXPORT. VOUS AUREZ BESOIN DU NOM DUTILISATEUR, DU MOT DE PASSE ET DU DOMAINE. Exporter un profil dutilisateur OmniPass Pour exporter un utilisateur, ouvrez le Centre de contrle OmniPass puis cliquez sur Activer lassistant de gestion de lutilisateur. Cliquez sur Sauvegarder un profil OmniPass de lutilisateur. OmniPass vous invitera vous authentifier. Une fois lauthentification russie, vous devez nommer le profil utilisateur OmniPass et dcider o lenregistrer. Un fichier
.opi est gnr et vous devez en sauvegarder une copie dans un endroit sr. Ce fichier .opi contient toutes vos donnes dutilisateur OmniPass. Il est crypt et protg par mot de passe. Ce profil utilisateur ne contient AUCUN de vos fichiers de donnes crypts. Importer un profil dutilisateur OmniPass Pour importer un utilisateur OmniPass, ouvrez le Centre de contrle OmniPass puis cliquez sur Activer lassistant de gestion de lutilisateur. Cliquez sur Restaurer un profil OmniPass de lutilisateur. OmniPass vous invite ensuite rechercher le fichier export auparavant (fichier .opi). Lorsque vous slectionnez le fichier .opi pour limporter, OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier. Les informations didentification permettant dimporter un profil sont les rfrences de connexion Windows de lutilisateur export. Ces rfrences sont celles quil fallait soumettre lorsque le profil dutilisateur a t export. Vous aurez besoin du Nom dutilisateur, du Mot de passe et du Domaine. Si vous avez oubli la valeur pour Domaine, celle-ci doit correspondre au nom de votre ordinateur dans un environnement PC ou SOHO. OmniPass vous informe si le profil utilisateur a t correctement import. 186 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Informations importantes sur les oprations dimportation et dexportation Supposons que vous exportez un profil dutilisateur Windows local depuis OmniPass. Vous voulez importer ce profil sur un autre ordinateur dot dOmniPass. Avant de pouvoir importer le profil, un utilisateur Windows avec les mmes rfrences de connexion doit tre cr sur lordinateur important le profil. Exemple: Jai un utilisateur Windows avec le nom dutilisateur Thomas et le mot de passe Soleil sur mon systme. Jai enregistr Thomas dans OmniPass et mmoris des mots de passe. Je veux transfrer tous mes mots de passe vers le nouveau systme. Jexporte le profil utilisateur OmniPass de Thomas. Jaccde mon nouveau systme et laide du panneau de configuration, je cre un utilisateur avec le nom dutilisateur Thomas et le mot de passe Soleil. Je peux maintenant importer les donnes utilisateur OmniPass dans le nouveau systme. Si vous exportez un utilisateur propre OmniPass, vous pouvez importer cet utilisateur dans tout ordinateur excutant OmniPass, condition quun utilisateur portant le mme nom ny soit pas dj enregistr. Si vous tentez dimporter un profil utilisateur portant le mme nom quun utilisateur dj enregistr dans OmniPass, le processus dimportation choue. Centre de contrle OmniPass Le Centre de contrle OmniPass vous permet dexcuter un certain nombre de tches interne . Pour plus dinformations sur les fonctions fournies par le Centre de contrle :
1 Aller Dmarrer > Tous les programmes > Softex > Centre de contrle Omnipass. 2 Lorsque le Centre de contrle OmniPass souvre, cliquez sur le lien Aide au ct gauche de la fentre du Centre de contrle. Dpannage Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser OmniPass pour crer des utilisateurs Windows. Vous devez dabord crer lutilisateur Windows, ce qui ncessite des droits dadministrateur. Une fois lutilisateur Windows cr, vous pouvez lajouter dans OmniPass avec le mme nom dutilisateur et le mme mot de passe. 187 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Impossible dajouter des utilisateurs Windows dans OmniPass Si vous rencontrez des difficults pour ajouter un utilisateur Windows dans OmniPass, vous devrez peut-tre modifier vos paramtres de scurit locale. Pour ce faire, allez Dmarrer, Panneau de configuration, Outils dadministration et Paramtres de scurit locale. Ouvrez Stratgies locales et Options de scurit, puis double-cliquez sur Accs rseau: Modle de partage et de scurit pour les comptes locaux. La configuration correcte doit tre Classique Les utilisateurs locaux sauthentifient eux-mmes. Impossible dajouter un utilisateur avec un mot de passe vide dans OmniPass Si vous rencontrez des difficults pour ajouter un utilisateur avec un mot de passe vide dans OmniPass, vous devrez peut-tre modifier vos paramtres de scurit locale. Essayez dabord la procdure explique dans la section Impossible dajouter un utilisateur Windows dans OmniPass. Si le problme persiste, essayez la procdure suivante. Cliquez sur Dmarrer, Panneau de configuration, Outils dadministration et Paramtres de scurit locale. Ouvrez Stratgies locales et Options de scurit, puis double-cliquez sur Comptes: restreindre lutilisation de mots de passe vierges par le compte local louverture de session console. Ce paramtre doit tre configur sur Dsactiv. Durant la procdure douverture dune session Windows, une bote de dialogue saffiche aprs lauthentification OmniPass Aprs avoir install OmniPass sur votre systme, vous pouvez choisir de vous connecter Windows laide dOmniPass. Vous vous authentifiez avec OmniPass ( laide du mot de passe principal ou dun priphrique de scurit enregistr) et OmniPass vous connecte Windows. Au cours du processus dauthentification, il se peut que la bote de dialogue Erreur de connexion saffiche. Cette bote de dialogue apparat si OmniPass na pas russi vous connecter Windows laide des informations didentification fournies (nom dutilisateur et mot de passe). Ceci peut arriver dans les circonstances suivantes:
Votre mot de passe Windows a chang. Votre compte Windows a t dsactiv. 188 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Si vous rencontrez des difficults cause de la premire raison, vous devrez mettre jour OmniPass avec votre mot de passe de compte Windows modifi. Cliquez sur Mettre jour le mot de passe et une bote de dialogue vous invitera reconfirmer votre mot de passe. Entrez le nouveau mot de passe Windows et cliquez sur OK. Si lerreur persiste, il est peu probable que le problme soit d la modification de votre mot de passe Windows. 189 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Annexe C: Utilisation de laffichage Intel Wireless Display Utilisation de la technologie Wireless Display La nouvelle technologie Intel Wireless Display (WiDi) est offerte en option sur certains ordinateurs Fujitsu LIFEBOOK. Si votre systme est dot de la technologie Intel WiDi, veuillez lire ces informations sur son utilisation. La technologie Intel WiDi vous permet dafficher et de partager sur un tlviseur grand cran les images dun ordinateur microprocesseur Intel Core. La technologie Intel WiDi permet donc dafficher sur un tlviseur grand cran les donnes et les applications disponibles sur votre disque dur, sur votre rseau maison ou sur Internet. Votre famille et vos amis nauront plus se bousculer autour de lordinateur pour profiter pleinement des images stockes. Comme son nom lindique, la technologie Intel WiDi fonctionne sans fil. Veuillez cependant prendre note que pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez vous procurer un adaptateur daffichage produit par une autre entreprise. Ladaptateur daffichage est reli au tlviseur via le port HDMI (prfrable) ou avec des cble A/V composite. LES PREMIERS ADAPTATEURS DAFFICHAGE SONT DISPONIBLES CHEZ LES DTAILLANTS DE PRODUITS LECTRONIQUES. VOUS POUVEZ UTILISER NIMPORTE QUEL ADAPTATEUR DAFFICHAGE COMPATIBLE AVEC INTEL WIRELESS DISPLAY. SI VOTRE TLVISEUR POSSDE DES PORTS HDMI, CETTE MTHODE DE CONNEXION EST PRFRABLE UNE CONNEXION PAR CBLES COMPOSITES. 190 SI VOUS AVEZ ACHET UN SYSTME AVEC CARTE RSEAU LOCAL SANS FIL INTEL ET TECHNOLOGIE INTEL WIDI EN OPTION, IL POSSIBLE QUE LAPPLICATION WIDI SOIT PR-INSTALLE (SELON LA CONFIGURATION DE VOTRE SYSTME). LES SYSTMES AYANT LA FONCTION INTEL WIDI PR-INSTALLE AFFICHENT UN ICNE WIDI SUR LEUR BUREAU WINDOWS. SI CETTE ICNE NEST PAS AFFICHE, LA FONCTIONNALIT INTEL WIDI PEUT TRE TLCHARGE DEPUIS LE SITE WEB DASSISTANCE FUJITSU. LA FONCTIONNALIT INTEL WIDI NE PEUT FONCTIONNER QUAVEC UNE CARTE DE RSEAU LOCAL SANS FIL INTEL. SEUL LE LECTEUR WINDOWS MEDIA PEUT TRE UTILIS POUR LIRE DES DOCUMENTS AVEC WIDI 3.0. AVANT DUTILISER LA FONCTIONNALIT INTEL WIDI, VRIFIEZ SI LE COMMUTATEUR DE RSEAU SANS FIL EST LA POSITION DE MARCHE. VEUILLEZ PRENDRE NOTE QUE LE CONTENU SCURIS NE PEUT TRE AFFICH AVEC INTEL WIDI 3.0. LES DOCUMENTS AVEC PROTECTION DE LECTURE DE CONTENU, COMME LES DISQUES BLU-RAY ET LES FILMS SUR DVD, NE SONT PAS PRIS EN CHARGE PAR WIDI. EN MODE DAFFICHAGE WIDI, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS OBSERVIEZ UN LGER DCALAGE LORSQUE VOUS DPLACEZ LA SOURIS OU QUE VOUS TAPEZ DU TEXTE. LA PREMIRE FOIS QUE VOUS UTILISEZ LAFFICHAGE WIDI, LA RSOLUTION DAFFICHAGE CHOISIE PAR DFAUT EST 1280X720. SI VOUS DSIREZ CHOISIR UNE AUTRE RSOLUTION, ALLEZ PANNEAU DE CONFIGURATION - PROPRITS DAFFICHAGE, SOUS LONGLET PARAMTRES. LORSQUE VOUS CHOISISSEZ UNE RSOLUTION, ELLE CONTINUE SAPPLIQUER PAR DFAUT JUSQU CE QUE VOUS CHOISISSIEZ UNE AUTRE RSOLUTION. Dmarrer lapplication WiDi Pour activer laffichage Intel WiDi, excutez les oprations suivantes:
1 Assurez-vous quun adaptateur daffichage appropri est connect au tlviseur sur lequel vous dsirez utiliser laffichage WiDi et allumez le tlviseur. 2 Si vous navez pas encore activ le commutateur de communication sans fil sur votre PC Tablette, faites-le maintenant. 3 Cliquez sur licne WiDi de votre bureau Windows ou sur le raccourci correspondant de votre menu Dmarrer. 4 Limage de lordinateur est automatiquement affiche sur le tlviseur grand cran. Aprs le jumelage initial entre lordinateur portable et un adaptateur daffichage compatible, vous pouvez paramtrer ladaptateur pour quil soit automatiquement connect par dfaut. Dans le futur, vous naurez plus qu ouvrir lapplication pour connecter les deux appareils. Si vous dsirez des informations dtailles sur lutilisation et le dpannage de la fonctionnalit WiDi, cliquez sur licne WiDi, puis cliquez sur le bouton [Aide] dans le coin suprieur droit afin douvrir le fichier daide daffichage sans fil. 191 - Utilisation de la technologie Wireless Display Index A propos de ce guide 1, 8 Adaptateur secteur 58 Adaptateur auto/avion 58, 59 de fiches 133 Alimentation adaptateur auto/avion 58 adaptateur secteur 58 allumer 60 dfectuosit 96 teindre 68 gestion 65 problmes 98 sources 58 voyant 24 Auto-diagnostic de mise sous tension 61, 103 B Baie modulaire 47 installation 47 remplacement hors tension 48 retrait 47 Batterie 71 augmentation de la longvit 134 batterie au lithium 71 conservation de l'nergie 65 court-circuite 73 192 dfectueuse 97 entretien 133 puise 97 faible 73 mode veille 73 niveau de charge 25 problmes 97, 98 remplacement 74 remplacement hors tension 74 remplacement sous tension 74 guide 63 utilitaire de configuration 62 BIOS Bluetooth informations supplmentaires 174 Bouton d'alimentation/veille/reprise 60, 65 Bouton de veille/reprise 13 Bouton droit 17 Boutons de scurit fonctions 49 Boutons de scurit/PC Tablette LIFEBOOK 15, 49 C Cble de sortie c.c. 58 Capteur d'empreintes digitales barre doutils dauthentification OmniPass 183 connexion un site mmoris 185 dsinstallation dOmniPass 179 enregistrement dune empreinte digitale 181 enregistrement des utilisateurs 180 mmorisation dun mot de passe 183 premire mise en marche 177 remplacement du mot de passe 183 utilisation dOmniPass 182 Capteur dempreintes digitales 17, 176 Carte rseau ans fil connexion au rseau 167 Carte rseau sans fil avant d'utiliser la carte rseau sans fil 162 configuration 162 dpannage 168 dsactivation/dconnexion 165 modes 163 spcifications 170 Carte SD installation 77 Cartes Secure Digital 76 installation 77 CD-ROM 93 Clavier 16, 33 problmes 94 Commandes du pav tactile Touchpad 44 Commandes et connecteurs 12 Compartiment de mmoire 22, 78 Compartiment de batterie au lithium 23 Configuration Tablette 28 Conventions utilises dans ce guide 8 Coordonnes 9 Coordonnes pour contacter Fujitsu 9 Cordon du stylet 45 D DEL d'accs la camra Web 15 Dpannage 89 DIMM 78 Dispositif de pointage rapide 36 Disque dur problmes 94 Double-cliquer 37 Duplicateur de ports 86 composants de la face arrire 86 connecteur 23 dsinstallation 88 installation 88 problmes 94 E cran 15, 27 cran tactile problmes 100, 101 cliquer 41 talonner 42 glisser 42 cran tactile capacitif 43 Emplacement 12 Enregistrement 64 Enregistrement sur le disque 67 tiquette de configuration 136 F Fente d'antivol 13 Fente de dispositif antivol 21 Fente pour carte SD 12 Fente pour carte Smart Card 12 Fonction de veille prolonge 67 193 Fonctions des boutons de post-identification 51 Fonctions des boutons PC Tablette changer 52 G Garantie 10 Glisser 37, 38 Glissire d'alimentation/veille/reprise 15 Glossaire 145 Grilles de ventilation 23 H Haut-parleurs incorpors 92 I Icnes de bouton 50 Interrupteur de communications sans fil 13 L Lecteur de DVD problmes 93 Lecteur multimdia entretien 135 Logiciels pr-installs 142 Logiciels prinstalls Adobe Acrobat Reader 143 barre doutils Google 143, 144 manuels 143 Loquets de la batterie 23 Luminosit de l'cran 30 M Mmoire capacit 80 installation 78 module de mmoire additionnelle 78 problmes 95 retrait 80 vrifier la capacit 80 Messages d'erreurs 103 Microphones intgrs doubles 17 Mode sommeil (veille) 65 Mouvements 43 N Numriseur 39 O Ordinateur Fujitsu LIFEBOOK stockage 131 voyager 132 Ouverture de l'cran 27 P Pav numrique du clavier 33 Pav tactile Touchpad 36 Priphriques modulaires 47 installation 47 retrait 47 Priphriques pour baie modulaire 47 Point d'attache du cordon du stylet 19 Port de connexion 81 Port HDMI 17 194 Port IEEE 1394 19, 83, 84 Port vido externe 13, 22, 84 Ports de priphriques 81 Ports USB 2.0 12, 18, 21, 82, 95 Prise d'alimentation c.c. 58 Prise dcouteurs 12, 18, 83 Prise de micro 12, 19, 83 Prise de rseau local Gigabit (RJ-45) 21 Prise de rseau local interne 81 Problmes de souris 94 R Recharge des batteries 72 Redmarrage 67 Rglage des commandes du pav Touchpad 38 Rglage du volume 46 Remplacement hors tension 48 Renseignements sur la rglementation 158 Rseau local 13 Restaurer vos logiciels pr-installs 105, 115 RJ-45 81 S SDRAM 22, 78 Spcifications 136 alimentation 140 audio 137 clavier 140 dimensions et poids 141 environnement requis 141 mmoire 136 microprocesseur 136 options de mmoire de masse 137 ports de priphriques 139 puce 136 vido 137 195 T Tableau de scurit LIFEBOOK dsinstaller 56 mots de passe 53 utilisation 55 Tableau de scurit LifeBook configuration 53 Tableau de voyants d'tat 15, 24 Touche de fonction F10 35 F3 35 F4 35 F6 35 F7 35 F8 35, 46 F9 35, 46 FN 35 Touches de dfilement 34 Touches de dfilement du Touches de fonction du clavier 34 clavier 34 Touches Windows 34 Touche dapplication 34 Touches Windows du clavier 34 V Veille prolonge Verr dfil 26 Verr maj 26 Verr num 26 Voyant daccs au disque dur 26 activation/dsactivation 67
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.80 MiB | December 09 2014 / November 03 2015 |
Operating Manual System FUJITSU LIFEBOOK T904 Contact address in North America FUJITSU AMERICA INC:
1250 East Arques Avenue Sunnyvale CA 94085-3470, U.S.A. Telephone: 800 831 3183 or 408 746 6000
"http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com"
"http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/contact"
Have a question? Email us at: "AskFujitsu@us.fujitsu.com"
Copyright 2014 Fujitsu America, Inc. All rights reserved. B5FK-2451-01ENZ0 FUJITSU LIFEBOOK T904 Operating Manual Fujitsu Contact Information Notational conventions Ports and controls Important notes First-time setup of your device Working with the notebook Security functions Connecting external devices Removing and installing components during servicing Settings in BIOS Setup Utility Troubleshooting and tips Technical data Manufacturers notes Appendix Index 7 8 9 12 17 21 63 72 78 79 81 90 95 101 117 Copyright and Trademark Information Fujitsu America, Incorporated has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document; however, as ongoing development efforts are continually improving the capabilities of our products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes. Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo and LIFEBOOK are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Intel and Intel Core are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The ExpressCard word mark and logo are owned by the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) and any use of such marks by Fujitsu America, Incorporated is under license. Google is a trademark or registered trademark of Google Incorporated. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., USA. OmniPass is a trademark of Softex, Inc. Roxio is a trademark of Roxio, a division of Sonic Solutions. PowerDirector, PowerDVD, YouCam, and MakeDisc are trademarks of CyberLink Corp. Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are either a reg istered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Made under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS and the symbol are registered trademarks and
& DTS Boost is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product contains software. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved. The DVD player found in some models of the LIFEBOOK notebook incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights users. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. All other trademarks specified here are the property of their respective owners. Contents Contents Fujitsu Contact Information ........................................................................................................................ 7 Notational conventions ................................................................................................................................ 8 Ports and controls ........................................................................................................................................ 9 Important notes ........................................................................................................................................... 12 Safety instructions ......................................................................................................................................... 12 Additional safety notes for devices with radio components ..................................................................... 13 Energy saving ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Energy saving under Windows ............................................................................................................. 13 Traveling with your notebook ....................................................................................................................... 14 Before you travel .................................................................................................................................... 14 Transporting the Tablet PC ................................................................................................................... 15 Storing your Tablet PC .................................................................................................................................. 15 Cleaning the Tablet PC ................................................................................................................................. 16 Further information on cleaning the Tablet PC ................................................................................... 16 First-time setup of your device ................................................................................................................ 17 Unpacking and checking the device ........................................................................................................... 17 Choose a location ......................................................................................................................................... 18 Connecting the AC adapter ......................................................................................................................... 18 Switching on the device for the first time ................................................................................................... 19 Installing Bonus Apps ............................................................................................................................ 20 Working with the notebook ...................................................................................................................... 21 Status indicators ............................................................................................................................................ 21 Opening the notebook .................................................................................................................................. 23 Switching the notebook on ........................................................................................................................... 24 Programing the ON/OFF button ........................................................................................................... 24 Different ways to use your notebook .......................................................................................................... 25 From notebook to Tablet PC ................................................................................................................. 25 Select display orientation (portrait or landscape format) .................................................................. 27 From Tablet PC to notebook ................................................................................................................. 28 Switching off the notebook ........................................................................................................................... 29 Closing the notebook .................................................................................................................................... 30 Handwriting recognition ................................................................................................................................ 30 LCD screen .................................................................................................................................................... 31 Ambient light sensor .............................................................................................................................. 31 Using a device as a tablet PC ..................................................................................................................... 32 Using your fingers .................................................................................................................................. 32 Using the stylus ...................................................................................................................................... 35 Using the device as a notebook .................................................................................................................. 39 Clickpad and Clickpad buttons ............................................................................................................. 39 Keyboard ........................................................................................................................................................ 41 Virtual number keys ............................................................................................................................... 43 Country and keyboard settings............................................................................................................. 43 Key combinations ................................................................................................................................... 44 Tablet buttons ................................................................................................................................................. 46 Webcam.......................................................................................................................................................... 47 Rechargeable battery ................................................................................................................................... 48 Charging, caring for and maintaining the battery ............................................................................... 48 Fujitsu 3 Contents Removing and installing the battery ..................................................................................................... 48 Using the energy saving functions .............................................................................................................. 52 Memory cards ................................................................................................................................................ 53 Supported format .................................................................................................................................... 53 Inserting the memory card ..................................................................................................................... 53 Removing the memory card .................................................................................................................. 53 Speaker and microphone ............................................................................................................................. 54 SIM card .......................................................................................................................................................... 54 Inserting a SIM card ............................................................................................................................... 54 Removing a SIM card ............................................................................................................................ 55 Optional wireless LAN/Bluetooth/4G radio components .......................................................................... 55 Switching the wireless components on and off .................................................................................. 55 Setting up WLAN access ....................................................................................................................... 56 Further information on WLAN and Bluetooth ...................................................................................... 56 Access via 4G ......................................................................................................................................... 56 Ethernet and LAN .......................................................................................................................................... 57 Your port replicator (optional) ....................................................................................................................... 58 Ports on the port replicator .................................................................................................................... 58 Setting up the port replicator ................................................................................................................. 59 Connecting the notebook to the port replicator .................................................................................. 60 Switching on the notebook via the port replicator .............................................................................. 61 Switching off notebook via port replicator ........................................................................................... 61 Disconnecting the notebook from the port replicator ......................................................................... 62 Security functions ....................................................................................................................................... 63 Brief overview of the security functions ...................................................................................................... 64 Configuring the fingerprint sensor ............................................................................................................... 65 Using the Security Lock ................................................................................................................................ 65 Configuring password protection in BIOS Setup Utility ............................................................................ 66 Protecting BIOS Setup Utility (supervisor HDD password and user HDD password) ................... 66 Password protection for booting the operating system ..................................................................... 67 Password protection for the hard disk ................................................................................................. 68 SmartCard reader .......................................................................................................................................... 69 Inserting the SmartCard ......................................................................................................................... 69 Using the security function of the tablet buttons ....................................................................................... 69 Assigning the supervisor password ...................................................................................................... 69 Assigning the user password ................................................................................................................ 70 Entering passwords via the tablet buttons .......................................................................................... 70 Trusted Platform Module - TPM (device dependent) ................................................................................ 71 Enabling TPM .......................................................................................................................................... 71 Disabling TPM ......................................................................................................................................... 71 Connecting external devices .................................................................................................................... 72 HDMI port ....................................................................................................................................................... 73 Connecting an external monitor to the port replicator .............................................................................. 74 Connecting USB devices .............................................................................................................................. 75 USB port with charging function (Anytime USB charge) ................................................................... 76 How to remove USB devices correctly ................................................................................................ 76 Headphones port ........................................................................................................................................... 77 Removing and installing components during servicing .................................................................... 78 Settings in BIOS Setup Utility .................................................................................................................. 79 Starting the BIOS Setup Utility ..................................................................................................................... 79 4 Fujitsu Contents BIOS Setup Utility operation ........................................................................................................................ 79 Exiting BIOS Setup Utility ............................................................................................................................. 80 Exit Saving Changes - save changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility .................................................. 80 Exit Discarding Changes - Reject changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility ......................................... 80 Load Setup Defaults load default values ......................................................................................... 80 Discard Changes - Discard Changes without exiting BIOS Setup Utility ........................................ 80 Save Changes - save changes without exiting the BIOS Setup Utility ........................................... 80 Save changes and power off ................................................................................................................ 80 Troubleshooting and tips .......................................................................................................................... 81 Help if problems occur .................................................................................................................................. 81 Recovering your Factory Image .................................................................................................................. 81 The notebooks date or time is incorrect .................................................................................................... 82 Battery indicator does not illuminate ........................................................................................................... 82 When certain characters are entered on the keyboard, only numerals are written.............................. 82 The notebooks LCD screen remains blank ............................................................................................... 82 The LCD screen of the notebook is difficult to read ................................................................................. 83 The external monitor remains blank ........................................................................................................... 83 The external monitor is blank or the image is unstable ........................................................................... 83 The cursor does not correctly follow the stylus movements .................................................................... 84 Stylus input not working ............................................................................................................................... 84 The notebook does not start after switching it on ..................................................................................... 84 The notebook stops working ........................................................................................................................ 85 The printer does not print ............................................................................................................................. 85 The wireless connection to a network does not work .............................................................................. 85 The battery discharges too quickly ............................................................................................................. 86 SmartCard reader is not recognized ........................................................................................................... 86 SmartCard PIN forgotten .............................................................................................................................. 86 SmartCard lost ............................................................................................................................................... 86 User and/or supervisor SmartCard lost ...................................................................................................... 87 Acoustic warning ........................................................................................................................................... 87 Error messages on the screen .................................................................................................................... 88 Technical data .............................................................................................................................................. 90 Notebook ........................................................................................................................................................ 90 WLAN specifications ..................................................................................................................................... 92 Port replicator (optional) ............................................................................................................................... 93 Rechargeable battery ................................................................................................................................... 93 AC adapter for use with notebook and port replicator ............................................................................. 94 Manufacturers notes ................................................................................................................................. 95 Disposal and recycling .................................................................................................................................. 95 Recycling your battery ........................................................................................................................... 95 DOC (Industry CANADA) Notices ............................................................................................................... 95 UL Notice ................................................................................................................................................. 96 ENERGY STAR Compliance ....................................................................................................................... 97 Declarations of Conformity ........................................................................................................................... 97 FCC and IC Regulatory Information ........................................................................................................... 98 Regulatory Notes and Statements ....................................................................................................... 98 Appendix ..................................................................................................................................................... 101 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN ................................................................................................. 101 Wireless LAN Devices Covered by this Document ......................................................................... 101 Characteristics of the WLAN Device ................................................................................................. 101 Fujitsu 5 Contents Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device ............................................................................................102 Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device .................................................................................104 Configuring the Wireless LAN ....................................................................................................................104 Configuring the WLAN Using Windows .............................................................................................104 Connection to the network ...................................................................................................................104 Troubleshooting the WLAN .................................................................................................................105 Using the Bluetooth Device ........................................................................................................................107 Image Backup and Recovery Procedures ...............................................................................................108 Creating a Backup of Bootable Disk and Recovery Image .............................................................108 RECOVER YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE HARD DRIVE IS STILL ACCESSIBLE .............................109 Using the Recovery and Utility Tools .............................................................................................................. 109 Restore the Recovery Image from Hidden Partition ........................................................................ 111 RECOVER YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE HARD DRIVE IS NOT BOOTABLE .................................. 112 Restore the Recovery Image for Full Hard Drive ............................................................................. 112 Recovering Your Recovery Image Using Recovery and Utility (for new hard drive or non-bootable hard drive) ..................................................................................................................... 113 Installing the Software after the Recovery Image is Restored ....................................................... 114 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 117 6 Fujitsu Fujitsu Contact Information Fujitsu Contact Information Service and Support You can contact Fujitsu Service and Support in the following ways:
Toll free phone: 1-800-Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) Website: "http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php"
Before you place the call, have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:
Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any Fujitsu Shopping Online Please go to "http://www.shopfujitsu.com/store/ ". Maintaining Latest Configuration To ensure that you always have the most current driver updates related to your system, occasionally access the Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility. The FSDM utility is available from the Fujitsu Support site. FSDM will allow you to view a list of the most current drivers, utilities, and applications to determine whether you have the latest versions. If you have a Windows 7 or Windows 8/8.1 operating system, you will need to go to the Support Site to download the FSDM Utility: "http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS". Limited Warranty Your LIFEBOOK notebook is backed by a Fujitsu International Limited Warranty. Check the service kit that came with your notebook for the Limited Warranty period and terms and conditions. Fujitsu 7 Notational conventions Notational conventions Pay particular attention to text marked with this symbol. Failure to observe these warnings could pose a risk to health, damage the device or lead to loss of data. The warranty will be invalidated if the device becomes defective through failure to observe these warnings. Indicates important information for the proper use of the device. This font This font This font
"This font"
Indicates an activity that must be performed. Indicates a result. Indicates data entered using the keyboard in a program dialog or at the command line, e.g. your password (Name123) or a command used to start a program (start.exe) Indicates information that is displayed on the screen by a program, e.g.:
Installation is complete. Indicates Indicates terms and texts used in a software interface, e.g.: Click on Save names of programs or files, e.g. Windows or setup.exe. cross-references to another section, e.g. "Safety information"
cross-references to an external source, e.g. a web address: For more information, go to "http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/"
names of CDs, DVDs and titles or designations for other materials, e.g.:
"CD/DVD Drivers & Utilities" or "Safety/Regulations" manual Key This font Indicates a key on the keyboard, e.g: F10 . Indicates terms and texts that are emphasized or highlighted, e.g.: Do not switch off the device. 8 Fujitsu Ports and controls Ports and controls This chapter presents the individual hardware components of your device. It gives an overview of the indicators and connections of the device. Please familiarize yourself with these items before you start to work with the device. Notebook open 1 2 3 1 8 7 6 4 5 1 = Microphone 2 = Webcam 3 = Webcam LED 4 = Windows button 5 = Ambient light sensor 6 = Clickpad 7 = Clickpad buttons 8 = Fingerprint sensor Fujitsu 9 Ports and controls Left-hand side 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 = DC jack (DC IN) 2 = Security Lock device 3 = USB port with charging function (Anytime USB charge, USB 3.0) 4 = Memory card slot 5 = SmartCard reader 6 = Status indicators Right-hand side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 = Headphones port 2 = USB port 3.0 3 = HDMI port 4 = ON/OFF button 5 = Power-on indicator 6 = LAN connector (removable) 7 = Attachment eye for the stylus tether 8 = Stylus slot 10 Fujitsu Bottom 3 Ports and controls 1 2 3 1 4 1 = Speakers 2 = Battery compartment with SIM card slot under the battery 3 = Battery Lock slider switch 4 = Port for port replicator Fujitsu 11 Important notes Important notes This chapter contains essential safety information which must be followed when working with your notebook. Other notes also provide useful information which will help you with your notebook. Safety instructions Please observe the following safety information. Please pay special attention to the sections in the manual marked with the symbol on the left. When connecting and disconnecting cables, observe the relevant notes in this operating manual. Read the information on the ambient conditions in the "Technical data", Page 90 chapter and the "First-time setup of your device", Page 17 chapter before preparing your notebook for use and switching it on for the first time. When cleaning the device, please observe the relevant notes in the section . Pay attention to the additional safety notes for devices with radio components provided in the "Safety/Regulations" manual. Please refer to the notes in the chapter "Removing and installing components during servicing", Page 78. When handling this device, you will come into contact with lead, a chemical which in California is held to be a possible cause of birth defects and other damage to fertility. Wash your hands after using the device. This notebook complies with the relevant safety regulations for data processing equipment. If you have any questions about setting up your notebook in the intended environment, please contact your sales outlet or our Hotline/Service Desk. 12 Fujitsu Important notes Additional safety notes for devices with radio components If a radio component (Wireless LAN, Bluetooth, 4G) is incorporated in your notebook, you must be sure to observe the following safety notes when using your notebook:
Switch off the radio components when you are in an aircraft or driving in a car. Switch off the radio components when you are in a hospital, an operating room or near a medical electronics system. The transmitted radio waves can impair the operation of medical devices. Switch off the radio components, when you let the device get near flammable gases or into hazardous environments (e.g. gas station, paintshops), as the transmitted radio waves can cause an explosion or a fire. For further information on how to switch the radio components on and off, refer to chapter "Switching the wireless components on and off", Page 55. Energy saving Switch the notebook off when it is not in use. Switch off any connected external devices when they are not in use. If you use the energy saving functions, the notebook uses less power. You will then be able to work for longer before having to recharge the battery. The energy efficiency is increased and environmental pollution is reduced. You save money and help protect the environment. Energy saving under Windows Make use of the available energy saving functions as described in chapter
"Using the energy saving functions", Page 52. Fujitsu 13 Important notes Traveling with your notebook Please observe the points listed below when traveling with your notebook. Before you travel Back up important data stored on your hard disk. Switch off the radio component for data security reasons. With data traffic via a wireless connection, it is also possible for unauthorized third parties to receive data. Information on activating data encryption is provided in the documentation for your radio component. If you wish to use your notebook during a flight, check with the flight attendants if its use is safe. When traveling in other countries If you are traveling abroad, check that the AC adapter can be operated with the local AC voltage. If this is not the case, obtain the appropriate AC adapter for your notebook. Do not use any other converter!
Check whether the local AC voltage and the AC cable are compatible. If this is not the case, buy an AC cable that suits the local conditions. Enquire with the corresponding government office of the country you will be traveling to, whether you may use your notebook with its integrated radio component there. Take the necessary travel adapters with you when traveling abroad. Check the following table to see which travel adapters you will need, or ask your travel organizer. Power connection 14 Travel destination United States, Canada, Mexico, parts of Latin America, Japan, Korea, Philippines, Taiwan Russia and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), much of Europe, parts of Latin America, the Middle East, parts of Africa, Hong Kong, India, much of south-east Asia United Kingdom, Ireland, Malaya, Singapore, parts of Africa China, Australia, New Zealand Fujitsu Important notes Transporting the Tablet PC Protect the Tablet PC from severe shocks and extreme temperatures
(e.g. direct sunlight in a car). Do not transport your Tablet PC while it is turned on. Carry your Tablet PC with you while traveling, rather than checking it in as baggage. Never put your Tablet PC through a metal detector; have it hand-inspected by security personnel. You can however, put your Tablet PC through a properly tuned X-ray machine. To avoid problems, place it close to the entrance of the machine and remove it as soon as possible or have it hand-inspected by security personnel. Security officials may require you to turn your Tablet PC on, so make sure you have a charged battery on hand. Switch the Tablet PC off. Unplug the AC plug of the AC adapter and all external devices from the power outlets. Disconnect the AC adapter cable and the data cables for all external devices. To protect the Tablet PC against damaging jolts and bumps, use a suitable Tablet PC carrying case to transport your Tablet PC. Storing your Tablet PC If storing your Tablet PC for a month or longer, turn it off, fully charge the battery, then remove and store all Lithium Polymer batteries. Store your Tablet PC in a cool, dry location. Temperatures should remain between 13F / -25C and 140F / 60C. Store your Tablet PC and batteries separately. If you store your Tablet PC with a battery installed, the battery will discharge, and battery life will be reduced. In addition, a faulty battery might damage your Tablet PC. Always power off the Tablet PC before transporting and/or packaging it. After shutting down the Tablet PC, wait until the status led panel indicates power off condition (i.e., no lights are illuminated). It is possible that the Tablet PC may not automatically go to power-off or hibernate mode when you close the lid. This situation may occur due to pre-operating system boot password security settings or some other application running on the Tablet PC. Attempting to transport the Tablet PC while power is on may damage the Tablet PC due to shock or overheating. Fujitsu 15 Important notes Cleaning the Tablet PC Use of incorrect cleaners can result in optical impairment of the LCD and / or damage to the computer. Always refer to the cleaner manufacturers guidelines and material safety data sheets fo proper handling and use of the products. Never use ammonia, acidic, or alkaline cleaners or organic chemicals such as paint thinner, acetone or kerosene. It may damage surface finishes and the coating of the LCD screen. Never use compressed air for cleaning your computer. If your Tablet PC has a Smart Card slot, be very careful to avoid any liquid entering the slot as this can damage the unit. Further information on cleaning the Tablet PC The Tablet PC does not float. If the Tablet PC is exposed to water or other liquids with its connections open, liquid can penetrate the Tablet PC and cause a malfunction. Do not continue to use the Tablet PC. Switch it off and contact our hotline / our service desk (see enclosed list of service desks or visit our website at: "http://www.fujitsu.com/us/support/"). 16 Fujitsu First-time setup of your device First-time setup of your device Please read the chapter "Important notes", Page 12. If your device is equipped with a Windows operating system, the necessary hardware drivers and supplied software are already pre-installed. Before switching it on for the first time, connect the device to the AC voltage using the AC adapter, see "Connecting the AC adapter", Page 18. The AC adapter must remain connected during the whole of the installation process. A system test is performed when your device is first switched on. Various messages can appear. The display may remain dark for a short time or may flicker. Please follow the instructions on the screen. NEVER switch off your device during the first-time setup process. On delivery, the battery can be found in the battery compartment or in the accessories kit. The battery must be charged if you want to operate your device using the battery. When used on the move, the built-in battery provides the device with the necessary power. You can increase the operating time by using the available energy saving functions. For instructions on how to connect external devices (e.g. mouse, printer) to your device, please refer to the operating manual for your device. Unpacking and checking the device If you find that damage has occurred during transport, please notify your local sales outlet immediately!
Unpack all the individual parts. Check your device for any visible damage which may have occurred during transportation. You may need to reuse the packaging in future, for example if you need to transport your device. Fujitsu 17 First-time setup of your device Choose a location Choose a suitable location for the device before setting it up. In doing so, please follow these instructions:
Never place the device or the AC adapter on a heat-sensitive surface. The surface could be damaged as a result. Never place the device on a soft surface (e.g. carpeting, upholstered furniture, bed). This can block the air vents and cause overheating and damage. The underside of the device heats up during normal operation. Prolonged contact with the skin can become unpleasant or even result in burns. Place the device on a stable, flat, non-slippery surface. Please note that the rubber feet of the device may mark certain types of delicate surfaces. Keep other objects at least 100 mm / 3.97 inches away from the device and its AC adapter to ensure adequate ventilation. Never cover the ventilation openings of the device. Do not expose the device to extreme environmental conditions. Protect the device against dust, humidity and heat. Connecting the AC adapter Observe the safety notes in the enclosed "Safety/Regulations" manual. The supplied AC cable conforms to the requirements of the country in which you purchased your device. Make sure that the AC cable is approved for use in the country in which you intend to use it. 18 Connect the AC cable (1) to the AC adapter. Plug the AC cable (2) into a power outlet. Connect the AC adapter cable (3) to the DC jack (DC IN) of the device. 3 1 2 Fujitsu First-time setup of your device Switching on the device for the first time To make it easier to use your device for the first time, the operating system is pre-installed on the hard disk. 1 Slide the ON/OFF button (1) to the right to switch on the notebook. The ON/OFF button returns automatically to its original position. During the installation process, follow the on-screen instructions. You can find information and help on the Windows operating system functions on the Internet at "http://windows.microsoft.com". 19 Fujitsu First-time setup of your device Installing Bonus Apps After you have started your system the first time, you will see a Bonus Apps icon on your desktop. Click on the icon to see which additional applications are available for you to install. Applications that are already installed appear in grey, those that are available for installation appear in blue. Select the applications you wish to install by selecting the checkbox adjacent to your selection. or Click Select All if you would like to install all available applications To confirm your selection click Install. Note that in some cases (depending upon which application was selected for installation) after installation completes, the system will prompt you to reboot. There are also cases in which if multiple applications are selected to install but one of them needs a reboot, the system will reboot and continue installing the rest of the selected applications. 20 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Working with the notebook This chapter describes the basics for operating your notebook. Please refer to
"Connecting external devices", Page 72 for instructions on how to connect external devices such as a mouse and a printer to the notebook. Please refer to the notes in the chapter "Important notes", Page 12. Status indicators The status indicators provide information about the status of the power supply, the drives and the keyboard functions, etc. Fujitsu 21 Working with the notebook Status indicator Description Num Num Lock indicator The indicator is illuminated: The key has been pressed. The virtual number keys have been activated. You can output the characters indicated on the upper right of the keys. Caps Lock indicator The indicator is illuminated: The Caps Lock key has been pressed. All characters are displayed in upper case. In the case of overlay keys, the character printed on the upper left of the key will appear when that key is pressed. Scroll Lock indicator The indicator is illuminated: The key combination pressed. The effect that this key has varies between applications. Power-on indicator The indicator is illuminated: The notebook is switched on. The indicator flashes: The notebook is in sleep mode (Save-to-RAM). The indicator is not lit up: The notebook is switched off or the notebook is has been Rol FN
in Save-to-Disk mode. Battery charging indicator/AC connection The charging state of the battery is shown by the rechargeable battery indicator. With AC adapter connected:
The indicator lights up white: The battery is fully charged. The indicator light is orange: The battery is being charged. The indicator is flashing orange: The AC adapter is connected but the battery cannot be charged as the battery is too hot or too cold for charging. The charging process is continued as soon as the battery has reached a permissible temperature again. Indicator is off: The system is operating under battery power and the AC adapter is not connected. Battery indicator The battery indicator shows the battery charge of the two installed batteries. The indicator lights up white: The battery is between 51% and 100%
charged. The indicator light is orange: The battery is between 13% and 50%
charged. The indicator lights up red: The battery is between 0% and 12% charged. The indicator is flashing orange: The battery state of charge is being checked (for four seconds after battery installation). The indicator is flashing red: The battery is faulty. The indicator is not lit up: There is no battery installed. Drive indicator The indicator is illuminated: The hard disk drive is being accessed. Radio components indicator The indicator is illuminated: The radio components are switched on. Indicator is off: The radio components are switched off. Fujitsu 22 Opening the notebook Working with the notebook Fold the LCD screen upwards. Fujitsu 23 Working with the notebook Switching the notebook on Slide the ON/OFF button (1) to the right to switch on the notebook. The ON/OFF button returns automatically to its original position. The ON/OFF button (1) lights up whenever the system is switched on. 1 Programing the ON/OFF button You can program the ON/OFF button:
Operating system Windows 7 Windows 8.1 Menu Start - (Settings) - Control Panel - System and Security - Power Options Windows 8.1 Desktop - Control Panel - Hardware and Sound - Power Options If you have assigned a password, you must enter this when requested to do so in order to start the operating system. Detailed information can be found in the chapter "Security functions", Page 63. 24 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Different ways to use your notebook During your daily work, you can use your notebook as a tablet PC or as a notebook, just as you wish. You must note that the screen cannot be turned completely on its own axis!
Stop turning the screen when you feel resistance. No guarantee claims can be met for damage caused by wrong turning. From notebook to Tablet PC Raise the LCD screen into a vertical position. Fujitsu 25 Working with the notebook Hold the screen as low as possible on both sides. Turn the screen to the left or right in the direction of the arrow. At first you will feel some slight resistance, then the screen will turn easily and without friction. Turn the screen further until it has turned 180 and the hinge latches in. 26 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Fujitsu Now fold the screen down until the back of the screen is almost flat on top of the keyboard. The screen is now secured in the tablet position. Select display orientation (portrait or landscape format) You can choose to use either portrait or landscape format for the display. Windows 7 You can change these settings in the Fujitsu menu or under Start - (Settings -) Control Panel - Hardware and Sound - Display - Settings. Windows 8.1 You can change these settings under Windows 8.1 Desktop - Control Panel -
Hardware and Sound - Windows Mobility Center / Rotate screen. WARNING: If you have a system with a wireless WAN module installed, please note the following while holding the system horizontally with the Web camera at the bottom, WWAN must not be operated with the antenna open. Operating in this position could result in damage to the WWAN antenna. In the Fujitsu Tablet Controls settings, profiles are saved for operation with different screen orientations. These profiles have preset standard configurations that can be modified as desired. These settings do not just affect the screen settings on the Tablet PC, but also on external monitors that are connected. 27 Working with the notebook From Tablet PC to notebook Raise the LCD screen into a vertical position. 28 Fujitsu Fujitsu Working with the notebook You must note that the screen cannot be turned completely on its own axis!
Stop turning the screen when you feel resistance. No guarantee claims can be met for damage caused by wrong turning. Hold the screen on both sides as far down as possible and then turn the screen. It will turn easily and without resistance. Turn or move the screen further until it has turned 180 and the hinge latches in. Switching off the notebook Close all applications and then shut down your operating system (please refer to the "Operating system manual"). Slide the ON/OFF button towards the right. The ON/OFF button returns automatically to its original position. 29 Working with the notebook Closing the notebook Fold the LCD screen onto the bottom part of the notebook so that it locks into place. Handwriting recognition For detailed information on handwriting recognition, see the documentation for your operating system. At present, handwriting recognition under Windows 7 or Window 8.1 supports the following languages:
English, German, French, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Chinese (traditional and simplified), Dutch, Portuguese, Spanish, Brazilian, Norwegian (Bokml and Nynorsk), Swedish, Finnish, Danish, Polish, Rumanian, Serbian (Cyrillic and Latin script), Catalan, Russian, Czech and Croatian. Under Windows 8.1 you can set the required language under Control Panel Time, Language and Region Language. 30 Fujitsu Working with the notebook LCD screen High-quality LCD screens (TFT) are installed in Fujitsu notebooks. For technical reasons, these screens are manufactured for a specific resolution. An optimal, clear picture can only be ensured in the resolution intended for the particular screen. A screen resolution which differs from the specification can result in an unclear picture. The resolution of the screen of your notebook is optimally set at the factory. Current production technology cannot guarantee an absolutely fault-free screen display. A few isolated constantly lit or unlit pixels (picture elements) may be present. The maximum permitted number of such faulty pixels is specified in the international standard ISO 9241-307 (Class II). Example:
A screen with a resolution of 1280 x 800 has 1280 x 800 = 1024000 pixels. Each pixel consists of three subpixels (red, green and blue), so there are almost 3 million subpixels in total. According to ISO 9241-307 (class II), a maximum of 2 light and 2 dark pixels and in addition 5 light or 10 dark subpixels or an equivalent mix (1 light subpixel counts as 2 dark subpixels) are allowed to be defective. At a resolution of 1600 x 900 = 1440000 pixels, a maximum of 3 light and 3 dark pixels and in addition 7 light or 14 dark subpixels are allowed to be defective. Pixel A pixel consists of 3 subpixels, normally red, green and blue. A pixel is the smallest element that can be generated by complete functionality of the display. A subpixel is a separately addressable internal structure within a pixel that enhances the pixel function. A cluster contains two or more defective pixels or subpixels in a 5 x 5 pixel block. Subpixel Cluster Background lighting LCD screens are operated with background lighting. The luminosity of the background lighting can decrease during the period of use of the notebook. However, you can set the brightness of your monitor individually. Synchronizing the display on the LCD screen and an external monitor For more information, please refer to Chapter "Key combinations", Page 44 under "Switching between screen output". Ambient light sensor If your notebook was shipped with a Windows operating system, the screen brightness is regulated by the ambient light sensor and is dependent on the particular light conditions. This results in optimum readability and longer battery life at the same time. Fujitsu 31 Working with the notebook Using a device as a tablet PC You can execute commands as follows:
using the stylus (supplied with your device). using your finger Using your fingers You can execute certain commands by using your finger tip on the touchscreen of your device. Alternatively, everything which you can select or activate using your finger tip can also be selected or activated using the stylus. Calibrating the Dual Digitizer for finger-based operation of the device Please see the appropriate supplementary sheet for instructions on how to calibrate your device to use Dual Digitizer Technology. Please note: There are separate calibration programs available for calibrating the stylus and for calibrating finger-based operation. In each case, use the calibration tool described in the supplementary sheet. Do not use the calibration tool for the stylus to calibrate finger-based operation. 32 Fujitsu Actions with one finger Action Selecting objects (click with the left mouse button) Starting programs (double-click with the left mouse button) Moving objects/windows (while holding the left mouse button pressed, drag & drop) Opening a context menu (click with the right mouse button) Moving the cursor Working with the notebook Description Tap once briefly on the object with your finger. Use one finger to tap twice in quick succession on the program symbol. Place a finger on the object/window, keep your fingertip pressed against the touchscreen and move the desired object/window. Tap on the desired item with your finger. Keep your fingertip pressed against the touchscreen. The context menu appears. Position one finger on the touchscreen and move the finger in the desired direction. Fujitsu 33 Working with the notebook Actions using two fingers Action Scrolling Rotating Description Place two fingers on the touchscreen. Move the fingers up to scroll up. or Move the fingers down to scroll down. Position your thumb on the touchscreen and rotate the image clockwise or anticlockwise using your index finger. 34 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Action Increasing or decreasing view Description Place two fingers on the touchscreen and move them apart to increase the size of the view. or Place two fingers on the touchscreen and move them together to decrease the size of the view. Use two fingers to tap twice in quick succession on the touch screen. 1 = stylus tip 2 = stylus button (right mouse button) 3 = eyelet for stylus tether 3 Locking context-sensitive menus Using the stylus 2 1 Fujitsu 35 Working with the notebook You can use the stylus on your Tablet PC as an electronic writing tool, to select menu items and to navigate through the programs. Programs that support handwriting recognition also allow you to write directly on the screen with the stylus. You can also use the stylus as a drawing tool. The Tablet PC is supplied with a stylus tether which you can attach to the eyelets on the stylus and on the Tablet PC. Use only the stylus that was provided with your Tablet PC. Do not use any other pointed object as a substitute, that was not specially designed for your Tablet PC. Replace the stylus tip if it is worn. The warranty does not cover a scratched screen. While writing, take care that you do not scratch the surface of the display (e.g. with a wristwatch or bracelet). The stylus of the Tablet PC is an electronic instrument that can be damaged if used improperly. Handle the stylus with care. Our recommendations for proper handling of the stylus are as follows:
Do not gesture with the stylus. Do not use the stylus as a pointer. Do not use the stylus on surfaces other than the screen of the Tablet PC. Do not try to turn the grip of the stylus. The grip is used to put the stylus into its slot and to take it out of its slot. Never store the stylus with its weight on the tip (e.g. with the tip down in a pen container). If the stylus is stored with the tip pointing down, this may have an adverse effect on the stylus mechanism (particularly under high temperatures). In this case the stylus tip may react as though it is constantly being pressed down. To avoid damage, the stylus should be stored in the stylus slot when not in use. The stylus can be influenced by electromagnetic fields (cursor quivers or jumps). There may be a few areas on the screen where the cursor quivers slightly in spite of pressing the stylus down firmly. The screen responds to entries made with the tip of the finger or the stylus when the tip of the finger or the stylus directly touches the screen. You can use the stylus to perform almost all functions for which you would otherwise use a mouse. Delete functions are not supported by the stylus. Action Selecting menu items Starting programs Double-click with the left mouse Mouse Click with the left mouse button. Moving an object or window button. Drag with the left mouse button pressed. Stylus Tap on the menu entry with the tip of the stylus. Tap on the program symbol twice in rapid succession using the stylus tip. Place the stylus tip directly on the object or window. Keep the stylus tip held against the screen. Drag the desired object or window. 36 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Opening a context menu Click with the right mouse button. Moving the cursor Move the mouse Tap on the desired element with the stylus and keep the stylus pressed against the screen. Place the tip of the stylus directly on the screen. Adjusting the stylus Operating system Windows 7 Windows 8.1 Menu Under Hardware and Sound - Pen and Input Devices, you can make various settings for the stylus in the control panel (assignment and function of the stylus button). Under Windows 8.1 Desktop - Control Panel - Hardware and Sound - Pen and Input Devices you can make various settings for the stylus (assignment and function of the stylus button). Calibrating the stylus If Windows 8.1 is installed on your Tablet PC, your Tablet PC is already calibrated at initial setup. If a different operating system is installed on your Tablet PC, you must calibrate it with the stylus before first use, so that it recognizes the stylus as accurately as possible. You should also always repeat the calibration if the coordination between the stylus and the cursor movement deteriorates. Operating system Windows 7 /
Windows 8.1 Desktop Menu To calibrate, run the Hardware and Sound / Tablet PC Settings function in the Control Panel. You need to calibrate both portrait and landscape formats. Fujitsu 37 Working with the notebook Securing a stylus tether You can secure the stylus with a stylus tether to prevent accidentally dropping it or losing it. Secure the end of the stylus tether with the smaller loop to your stylus. Secure the end of the stylus tether with the larger loop to your notebook. 38 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Using the device as a notebook Clickpad and Clickpad buttons Keep the Clickpad clean. Protect it from dirt, liquids, and grease. Do not use the Clickpad if your fingers are dirty. Do not rest heavy objects (e.g. books) on the Clickpad or the Clickpad buttons. 1 = Clickpad 2 = Clickpad buttons 1 2 The Clickpad enables you to move the mouse pointer on the screen. The Clickpad buttons allow the selection and execution of commands. They correspond to the buttons on a conventional mouse. You can also deactivate the Clickpad via a keyboard shortcut, so that you cannot move the pointer on the screen unintentionally (see chapter "Key combinations", Page 44). Moving the pointer Move your finger on the Clickpad. The pointer will move. Selecting an item Move the pointer to the item you wish to select. Tap the Clickpad once or press the left button once. The item is selected. Executing commands Move the pointer to the field you wish to select. Tap the Clickpad twice or press the left button twice. The command is executed. Fujitsu 39 Working with the notebook Dragging items Select the desired item. Press and hold the left button and drag the item to the desired position with the finger on the Clickpad. The item will be moved. Switching the Clickpad on and off You can switch the Clickpad on and off using a key combination, see "Key combinations", Page 44. 40 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Keyboard The keyboard of your notebook is subject to continuous wear through normal use. The key markings are especially prone to wear. The key markings are liable to wear away over the life of the notebook. The keyboard has been designed to provide all the functions of an enhanced keyboard. Some enhanced keyboard functions are mapped with key combinations. The following description of the keys applies to the Windows operating system. Additional functions supported by the keys are described in the relevant manuals supplied with your application programs. The following illustration shows how to access the different characters on keys with overlaid functions. The example applies when the Caps Lock key has not been activated. The illustration may differ from your device variant. Num
0
0
0
0
Alt Gr
0
41 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Key Description Backspace key The Backspace key deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Caps Lock Tab key The Tab key moves the cursor to the next tab stop. Enter key (return) The Enter key terminates a command line. The command you have entered is executed when you press this key. Caps Lock key The Caps Lock key activates uppercase mode. In Caps Lock mode, all of the characters you type appear in upper case. In the case of overlay keys, the character printed on the upper left of the key will appear when that key is pressed. To cancel the Caps Lock function, simply press the Caps Lock key again. Shift key The Shift key causes uppercase characters to appear. In the case of overlay keys, the character printed on the upper left of the key will appear when that key is pressed. Fn key The Fn key enables the special functions indicated on overlay keys (see
"Key combinations", Page 44). Cursor keys The cursor keys move the cursor in the direction of the arrow, i.e. up, down, left, or right. Windows key The Windows key switches between the start screen and the last used application. Menu key The Menu key opens the menu for the active application. 42 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Virtual number keys Virtual number keys are provided so that the keys of a number keypad can be used for certain applications. The virtual number keys are recognizable on the keyboard by the numbers and symbols printed in the upper right corner of each key. If you have switched on the virtual number keys, you can output the characters shown on the upper right of the keys. The key assignment shown below may be different from the keyboard layout of your device variant.
7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2
0
3 ; +
7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3
1 = Character valid when the key is not active Num 2 = Character valid when the key is active Num Further information about the status indicators can be found in chapter "Status indicators", Page 21. Country and keyboard settings Make the country and keyboard settings as described in the documentation for your operating system. Fujitsu 43 Working with the notebook Key combinations The following description of key combinations applies to Windows operating systems. Some of the following key combinations may not function in other operating systems or with certain device drivers. Other key combinations are described in the relevant manuals supplied with your application programs. Key combinations are entered as follows:
Press the first key in the combination and keep it pressed. While holding the first key down, press the other key or keys in the combination. Combination Description Activate/deactivate keyboard backlight On backlit keyboards, this key combination activates or deactivates the backlight. Sequence:
Background lighting off Low brightness High brightness Background lighting off Switching the speakers on and off This key combination switches your notebooks speakers off and on. Activate/deactivate mouse and Clickpad buttons This key combination switches the Clickpad and the Clickpad buttons on or off. Wireless components This key combination switches the wireless components off or on. Decreasing the screen brightness This key combination decreases the brightness of the screen. Increasing the screen brightness This key combination increases the brightness of the screen. Decrease the volume This key combination reduces the volume of the internal speakers. 44 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Combination Description Increase volume This key combination increases the volume of the internal speakers. Switching between screen outputs Use this key combination to select which screen(s) is/are used for display if an external monitor is connected. The screen output is possible in the following sequence:
only on the notebooks LCD screen on the LCD screen of the notebook and the external monitor at the same time only on the external monitor This setting is useful if you would like a high resolution and a high refresh rate on an external monitor. D M Ctrl
+ Alt
+ Del Switch between open applications Use this key combination to switch between several open applications. Switching over to Windows 8 Desktop (Windows 8 only) With this key combination, you can switch from Windows 8 Modern to Windows 8 Desktop. Switching over to Windows 8 Desktop and minimizing applications (Windows 8 only) With this key combination, you can switch from Windows 8 Modern to Windows 8 Desktop and at the same time minimize the applications. Windows security/Task-Manager This key combination opens the Windows Security/Task Manager window. Back tab This key combination moves the cursor back to the previous tab stop. Key combinations using the Windows keys are detailed in the manual for your operating system. Fujitsu 45 Working with the notebook Tablet buttons Your notebook is equipped with a Windows button and two volume buttons.
_ Button
_ Function Windows button This button has the same function as the Windows Start key on the keyboard. If the button is pressed in combination with the ON/OFF button, the function is the same as for the Ctrl + Alt + Del key combination. Increase volume This button increases the volume of the internal speakers. Decrease the volume This button decreases the volume of the internal speakers. 46 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Webcam Depending on the software used, you can use your webcam to take pictures, record video clips or take part in web chats. The webcam has its own status indicator. The indicator lights up when the webcam is active. The picture quality depends on the lighting conditions and the software being used. You can only operate the webcam with a particular application (e.g. an Internet telephony program or a video conferencing program which supports a webcam). When using the webcam, the notebook base must not wobble. The webcam automatically adjusts itself to the current light level. For this reason the LCD display may flicker while the light level is adjusted. Further information on use of the webcam and additional settings for your webcam can be found in the help function of the program using the webcam. Fujitsu 47 Working with the notebook Rechargeable battery During mobile use, the notebook runs on its built-in battery. You can increase the service life of the battery by caring for the battery properly. The average battery service life is around 800 charge/discharge cycles. You can extend the battery service life by taking advantage of the available energy saving functions. Charging, caring for and maintaining the battery The notebook battery can only be charged if the ambient temperature is between 5C / 41F and a maximum of 35C / 95F. You can charge the battery by connecting the notebook to the AC adapter
(see "Connecting the AC adapter", Page 18). If the battery is running low you will hear a warning alarm. If you do not connect the AC adapter within five minutes of the warning alarm described above, your notebook will automatically switch off. Monitoring the battery state of charge Windows also has a "Battery charge meter" in the taskbar for monitoring the battery capacity. When you place the mouse pointer on the battery symbol, the system displays the state of charge of the battery. Battery storage The battery should be stored in a dry environment at a temperature between 0C / 32F and 30C / 86F. The lower the storage temperature, the lower the rate of self-discharge. If you will be storing batteries for a longer period (more than two months), the battery charge level should be approx. 30%. To prevent exhaustive discharge which would permanently damage the battery, check the level of charge of the battery at regular intervals. To be able to make use of the optimum capacity of the battery, you should allow the battery to fully discharge and then recharge it. If you will not use batteries for long periods, remove them from the notebook. Never store batteries in the device. Removing and installing the battery Only use batteries approved by Fujitsu for your notebook. Never use force when fitting or removing a battery. Make sure that no foreign bodies get into the battery connections. Never store a battery for longer periods in the discharged state. This can make it impossible to recharge. 48 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Removing a battery Please observe the safety information in chapter "Important notes", Page 12. Remove the power plug from the power outlet!
Switch the device off. The device must not be in energy saving mode. Close the LCD screen. Remove all the cables from the device. Turn the device over and place it on a stable, flat and clean surface. If necessary, lay an anti-slip cloth on this surface to prevent the device from being scratched. Fujitsu 49 Working with the notebook 3 1 2 4 Slide the Battery Lock slider switch in the direction of the arrow (1) and hold it in place. Slide the Battery Lock slider switch in direction of the arrow (2). Remove the battery compartment cover (3). Remove the battery from the battery compartment (4). 50 Fujitsu Installing a battery Working with the notebook 1 2 3 Insert the battery in the battery compartment (1). Close the battery compartment cover (2). Slide the Battery Lock slider switch in direction of the arrow (3). The battery is secured. Turn the notebook the right way up again and place it on a flat surface. Reconnect the cables that were previously disconnected. Fujitsu 51 Working with the notebook Using the energy saving functions The notebook uses less power when the available energy-saving functions are used. You will then be able to work longer when using the battery before having to recharge it. The energy efficiency is increased and environmental pollution is reduced. By choosing the best power options, you can make significant savings and at the same time help protect the environment. When you fold down and close the LCD screen, depending on the setting in Windows, the notebook automatically enters a power saving mode. Set the energy saving functions in your Control Panel. Set the screen saver in your Control Panel. or Right-click on the desktop. Activate the screen saver by clicking on Personalize Change Screen Saver. If you need further information about an option, you can get help with most settings by pressing to open the Microsoft Help. F1 When the notebook is in energy saving mode, the following must be remembered:
During energy saving mode, open data is held in main memory or in a swap file on the hard disk. Never switch the notebook off while it is in an energy saving mode. If the built-in battery is nearly flat, close all open files and do not go into energy saving mode. If you do not intend to use your notebook for a long period of time:
Exit energy saving mode if necessary by moving the mouse, making an entry at the keyboard or by switching on the notebook. Close all opened programs and completely shut down the notebook. 52 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Memory cards Your notebook is equipped with an integrated memory card reader. Follow the manufacturers instructions when handling the memory cards. Supported format The memory card reader supports the following format:
Secure Digital (SDTM Card) SDHC SDXC Inserting the memory card Carefully slide the memory card into the slot. The label should be facing upward. Do not apply excessive force, as otherwise the delicate contact surfaces could be damaged. Depending on the particular type used, the memory card may protrude slightly from the slot. Removing the memory card To avoid any loss of data, always follow the correct procedure for removing the card (see the documentation for your operating system). 1 2 On devices with card locking: Press on the memory card (1). The memory card is released and can now be removed. Pull the memory card out of the slot (2). Fujitsu 53 Working with the notebook Speaker and microphone You can find information about the exact position of the speaker and microphone in chapter "Ports and controls", Page 9. Please refer to chapter "Key combinations", Page 44 for information on setting the volume and also enabling/disabling the speakers using key combinations. If you attach an external microphone, the built-in microphone is disabled. When you connect headphones or external speakers, the built-in speakers are disabled. You can find information on connecting headphones and a microphone in chapter "Connecting external devices", Page 72. SIM card A SIM Card (Subscriber Identity Module) is a chip card which is inserted in a mobile telephone or notebook and, together with an integrated 4G module, enables access to a mobile radio network. Follow the instructions supplied by the provider of the SIM card. Inserting a SIM card Remove the battery, see Chapter "Removing a battery", Page 49. 1 Slide the SIM card into the slot (1), as shown in the battery compartment, until you feel it engage. Install the battery again, see Chapter "Installing a battery", Page 51. 54 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Removing a SIM card Remove the battery, see Chapter "Removing a battery", Page 49. 1 Press on the edge of the SIM card so that it jumps up slightly out of the slot. Pull the SIM card out of the slot in the direction of the arrow (1). Install the battery again, see Chapter "Installing a battery", Page 51. Optional wireless LAN/Bluetooth/4G radio components The installation of radio components not approved by Fujitsu will invalidate the certifications issued for this device. Depending on the device configuration you ordered, your device will be equipped with wireless LAN, Bluetooth or 4G. Switching the wireless components on and off Press the key combination The wireless component indicator will illuminate when one or more wireless to start the WirelessSelector. F5 Fn
components are switched on. The Bluetooth and 4G modules and the wireless LAN transmission unit (antenna) will all be switched off when you switch off the wireless components. Pay attention to the additional safety notes for devices with wireless components provided in the "Safety" manual. Details on using a wireless LAN can be found in the online help system included in the wireless LAN software. You can obtain more information on 4G from your service provider. Fujitsu 55 Working with the notebook Setting up WLAN access Requirement: A WLAN must be available and you must have the corresponding access information. Information on configuring the WLAN access can be found in the documentation for your operating system. Further information on WLAN and Bluetooth For further information about WLAN or Bluetooth, see the Appendix of this manual. For WLAN specifications, see chapter "WLAN specifications", Page 92. Access via 4G If you have ordered a 4G module, your device will already be prepared when you receive it. You will find information on establishing the connection with the 4G network in the documentation for the hardware you plan to use. You will find information on establishing the connection with the UMTS / LTE network in the documentation for the hardware used. You device can connect to the internet via UMTS / LTE. To do this, use one of the following types of connection. Integrated UMTS / LTE module (availability dependent on your model variant A USB dongle (a USB stick with your mobile phone providers SIM card) a mobile end-device (e.g. mobile phone with Bluetooth or cable connection) UMTS ExpressCard (fits into the ExpressCard slot on your device) UMTS/LTE antenna To improve the signal strength of the UMTS/LTE, fold out the UMTS/LTE antenna in the direction of the arrow (1). Note:
When your device is in tablet mode, it should not be used in Secondary Landscape position with the antenna in the open position. 56 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Ethernet and LAN You can use an Ethernet LAN when you use a LAN adapter, which can be obtained as an option. You can use it to establish a connection to a local network (LAN = Local Area Network). Pull the LAN adapter out of the LAN port on the notebook in the direction of the arrow. 1 2 Push the LAN adapter upwards in the direction of the arrow (1). Plug the network cable into the LAN adapter (2). Connect the network cable to your network port. Your network administrator can help you to configure and use the LAN connections. The network cable is not included in the delivery scope. This type of cable can be obtained from a specialist dealer. Fujitsu 57 Working with the notebook Your port replicator (optional) Your port replicator is a device that helps you to quickly connect your notebook to your peripheral devices, such as a monitor, printer, etc. The features offered by the port replicator include standard ports for monitor, audio, mouse and keyboard. You need only dock the notebook in order to work with your peripheral devices. Ports on the port replicator 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 10 9 7 = DC input connector (DC IN) 8 = Connector on the port replicator for the docking port on the bottom of the notebook 9 = Release 10 = ON/OFF button 1 = Security Lock 2 = USB ports 3 = LAN port 4 = DisplayPort 5 = DVI port 6 = VGA monitor port 58 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Setting up the port replicator Select a suitable location for the port replicator before setting it up. In doing so, please follow these instructions:
Never place the port replicator on a soft surface (e.g. carpeting, upholstered furniture, bed). This can block the air vents of the notebook and cause overheating and damage. Place the port replicator on a stable, flat and anti-slip surface. Please note that the rubber feet may mark certain types of surfaces. Never place the port replicator and the AC adapter on a heat-sensitive surface. Do not expose the port replicator to extreme environmental conditions. Protect the port replicator from dust, humidity and heat. Fujitsu 59 Working with the notebook Connecting the notebook to the port replicator Disconnect the AC adapter cable from the DC jack (DC IN) of the notebook. 2 2 3 1 4 5 Place the notebook on the port replicator so that the connector on the underside of the notebook aligns with the connector on the Port Replicator (1). Press down on the notebooks rear corners so that it locks into position (2). Connect the AC adapter cable to the DC jack (DC IN) of the Port Replicator (3). Connect the AC cable to the AC adapter (4). Plug the AC cable into the power outlet (5). 60 Fujitsu Fujitsu Switching on the notebook via the port replicator Working with the notebook Press the ON/OFF button on the port replicator to switch the notebook on. Switching off notebook via port replicator Close all applications and then shut down your operating system (please refer to the manual for the operating system). If the notebook cannot be shut down properly, press the ON/OFF button on the port replicator for approx. four seconds. The notebook will switch off. However, any unsaved data may be lost in the process. 61 Working with the notebook Disconnecting the notebook from the port replicator 2 1 Pull the unlocking lever in the direction of the arrow (1), until you hear the notebook unlatch. Lift off the notebook (2). 62 Fujitsu Security functions Security functions Your notebook has a variety of security functions that you can use to protect your system and your personal data from unauthorized access. This chapter explains how to use these functions, and what the benefits are. Please remember that in some cases, for example, forgetting your password, you may be locked out of the system and unable to access your data. Therefore, please note the following information:
Make regular backups to external optical disks such as external hard drives, CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs. Some security functions need you to choose passwords. Make a note of the passwords and keep them in a safe place. If you forget your passwords you will need to contact our Service Desk. Deletion or resetting of passwords are not covered by your warranty and a charge will be made for assistance. Fujitsu 63 Security functions Brief overview of the security functions Detailed information about the security equipment of your device can be found in the "Professional Notebook" manual, on the "Drivers & Utilities" CD/DVD or on our website at "http://www.fujitsu.com/us/support/". Security function Security Lock Fingerprint sensor (device dependent) BIOS password protection Boot from Removable Media Owner Information SmartCard reader (device dependent) Type of protection Mechanical Biometric Password protection for the BIOS Setup, operating system and hard disk with supervisor and user password. The passwords consist of a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters. Prevents unauthorized booting of an operating system from external media (e.g. USB stick, USB CD-ROM drive, etc.). Display service desk or owner information during the boot process. PIN and SmartCard protection for the operating system Trusted Platform Module
(device dependent) Identification and authentication of the notebook Preparation Fit and lock the Kensington Lock Cable (accessory). Install the supplied fingerprint software. Specify at least one supervisor password in the BIOS Setup and activate the password protection for the operating system and hard disk as desired. In the BIOS Setup, go to the Security menu and edit the Boot from Removable Media option. In the BIOS Setup, go to the Security menu and edit the Owner Information option. To use the SmartCard reader functions, install the supplied
(or other suitable) software. Define a supervisor password in the BIOS Setup and enable the TPM (Security Chip). 64 Fujitsu Security functions Configuring the fingerprint sensor The fingerprint sensor can record the image of a fingerprint. With additional fingerprint software, this image can be processed and used instead of a password. 1 Install the fingerprint software to be able to use the fingerprint sensor (1). Using the Security Lock Your device comes with a Security Lock mechanism for the Kensington Lock Cable. You can use the Kensington Lock Cable, a sturdy steel cable, to help protect your notebook from theft. The Kensington Lock Cable is available as an accessory. Fujitsu recommends the use of a combination lock. Fit the Kensington Lock Cable to the mechanism on your notebook. Attach another Kensington Lock Cable to your port replicator to protect your port replicator from theft as well. There are two security lock devices on your port replicator. Fujitsu 65 Security functions Configuring password protection in BIOS Setup Utility Before using the various options for password protection in the BIOS Setup Utility, please proceed as follows to increase data security:
Make a note of the passwords and keep them in a safe place. If you forget your supervisor HDD password you will not be able to access your notebook. Passwords are not covered by your warranty and a charge will be made for assistance. Your password can be up to eight characters long and can contain letters and numbers. No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase. Protecting BIOS Setup Utility (supervisor HDD password and user HDD password) If you have opened these operating instructions on the screen, we recommend that you print them out. You cannot call up the instructions on the screen while you are setting up the password. The supervisor HDD password and the user HDD password both prevent unauthorized use of the BIOS Setup Utility. The supervisor HDD password allows you to access all of the functions of the BIOS Setup Utility, while the user HDD password will only give you access to some of the functions. You can only set a user HDD password when a supervisor HDD password has already been assigned. Calling and using the BIOS Setup Utility is described in the chapter
"Settings in BIOS Setup Utility", Page 79. Assigning the supervisor and user HDD passwords Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Select the Set Supervisor Password field and press the Enter key. With Enter new Password: you are asked to enter a password. Enter the password and press the Enter key. Confirm new Password requires you to confirm the password. Enter the password again and press the Enter key. Changes have been saved is displayed as a confirmation that the new password has been saved. To set the user HDD password, select Set User Password and proceed exactly as when configuring the supervisor HDD password. If you do not want to change any other settings, you can exit BIOS Setup Utility. In the Exit menu, select the option Save Changes & Exit. Select Yes and press the Enter key. The notebook is then rebooted and the new password comes into effect. It will now be necessary to first enter your supervisor or user HDD password in order to open the BIOS Setup Utility. Please note that the user HDD password only provides access to a few of the BIOS settings. 66 Fujitsu Security functions Changing the supervisor HDD password or user HDD password You can only change the supervisor HDD password when you have logged into the BIOS Setup Utility with the supervisor HDD password. Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. When changing the password, proceed exactly as when assigning a password. Removing passwords To remove a password (without setting a new password) perform the following steps:
Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Highlight the Set Supervisor Password or Set User Password field and press the Enter key. You will be requested to enter the current password by the Enter Current Password prompt. Enter New Password will appear and you will be requested to enter a new password. Press the Enter key twice at this request. In the Exit menu, select the option Save Changes & Exit. Select Yes and press the Enter key. The notebook will now reboot with the password removed. With the supervisor HDD password, you simultaneously deactivate the user password. Password protection for booting the operating system You can also prevent booting of the operating system with the supervisor HDD password you have set in the BIOS Setup Utility (see section "Assigning the supervisor and user HDD passwords", Page 66). Activating system protection Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Select the Password on Boot option and press the Enter key. Select the option you require (Disabled, First Boot or Every Boot) and press the enter key Select the Save Changes & Exit option under Exit. The notebook will reboot. You will be prompted to enter your password
(the supervisor HDD password). Deactivating system protection Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Select the Password on Boot option and press the Enter key. Select the Disabled option and press the Enter key. If you do not want to change any other settings, you can exit BIOS Setup Utility. Select the Save Changes & Exit option under Exit. The notebook will reboot. The system is no longer password-protected. Fujitsu 67 Security functions Password protection for the hard disk The hard disk password prevents unauthorized access to the hard disk drives and is checked internally each time the system is booted. The condition for this is that you have assigned at least the supervisor HDD password. Activating hard disk protection Call up the BIOS Setup and select the Security menu. If you have not assigned BIOS passwords yet, define the supervisor and the user HDD password now, if desired (see "Security functions", Page 63). Mark the Hard Disk Security field and press the Enter key. In the area Drive0, mark the field Set Master Password and press the Enter key. Enter new Password then appears and you are asked to enter a password. Enter the password and press the Enter key. Confirm new Password requires you to confirm the password. Enter the password again and press the Enter key. With Setup Notice: Changes have been saved you receive confirmation that the new password has been saved. If you wish to enter a password for a second hard disk (Drive1), in the area Drive1 mark the field Set Master Password and proceed in exactly the same way as for the set up of the first hard disk (Drive0). The field Password Entry on Boot is set to Enabled by default. You can exit the BIOS Setup once you have finished changing the settings. From the Exit menu, choose the option Exit Saving Changes. Press the Enter key and select Yes. The notebook reboots and your hard disk is now protected with a password. The password prompt is enabled as soon as the notebook has rebooted. Deactivating hard disk protection To cancel a password (without setting a new password) proceed as follows:
Call up the BIOS Setup and select the Security menu. Mark the Hard Disk Security field and press the Enter key. In the area Drive0, mark the field Set Master Password and press the Enter key. With the prompt Enter current Password you are first asked to enter the old password again. With Enter new Password you are then prompted to enter a new password. After the request, press the Enter key three times. From the Exit menu, choose the option Exit Saving Changes. Press the Enter key and select Yes. The notebook reboots and there is no longer any password protection for this hard disk. If you wish to remove a password for a second hard disk (Drive1), in the area Drive1 mark the field Set Master Password and proceed in exactly the same way as for the removal of the first hard disk (Drive0). 68 Fujitsu Security functions SmartCard reader SmartCards are not supplied as standard equipment. You can use all SmartCards that comply with the ISO standard 7816-1, -2 or -3. These SmartCards are available from various manufacturers. With the appropriate software you can use your SmartCard as an alternative to password protection, but also as a digital signature, for encrypting your e-mails or for home banking. We recommend that you always use two SmartCards. Always keep one of the SmartCards in a safe place if you are carrying the other SmartCard with you. Inserting the SmartCard Do not use force when inserting and removing the SmartCard. Make sure that foreign objects do not fall into the SmartCard reader. Slide the SmartCard into the SmartCard reader with the chip facing upwards (or downwards depending on the device) and to the front. Using the security function of the tablet buttons If you have allotted a supervisor and/or user HDD password in the form of tablet button combinations as described below, you can use the tablet buttons to enter this when you start your device. Assigning the supervisor password Select Start - Run. Enter the following information in the prompt: C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\Security Confirm with Enter . Follow the instructions on the screen. Panel Application\Supervisor\FJSECS.EXE. Fujitsu 69 Security functions Assigning the user password Select Start - All Programs. Select Security Panel Application - Security Panel Application. Follow the instructions on the screen. Entering passwords via the tablet buttons The passwords for entry via the tablet buttons usually consist of a combination of buttons, e.g. button Enter your password using buttons Confirm with ENT . The device will be unlocked.
+ button 3 , followed by button and button ENT . 1 to 4 . 2 1 70 Fujitsu Security functions Trusted Platform Module - TPM (device dependent) To use the TPM, you must enable the TPM in the BIOS Setup before the software is installed. The requirement for this is that you have assigned at least the supervisor HDD password (see "Security functions", Page 63). Enabling TPM Requirement: You have assigned a supervisor HDD password (see "Security functions", Page 63). Call BIOS Setup and select the Security menu. Mark the TPM Security Chip Setting field and press the Enter key. Select the entry Enabled to enable the TPM Once you have enabled the TPM the Clear Security Chip menu item appears. You can clear the holder in the TPM using Clear Security Chip. With Enabled, all secret keys (e.g. SRK - Storage Root Keys, AIK - Attestation Identity Keys etc.) generated by applications are deleted. Take note that you can then no longer access the data you have encrypted on the holder-based keys!
Select the Exit Saving Changes option in the Exit menu. Press the Enter key and select Yes. The notebook restarts and the TPM is switched on after the reboot. Disabling TPM Requirement: You have assigned a supervisor HDD password (see "Security functions", Page 63). Call BIOS Setup and select the Security menu. Mark the TPM Security Chip Setting field and press the Enter key. Select the entry Disabled to disable the TPM. From the Exit menu, choose the option Exit Saving Changes. Press the Enter key and select Yes. The notebook will now reboot with TPM deactivated. Fujitsu 71 Connecting external devices Connecting external devices Under all circumstances, please observe the safety notes provided in the
"Important notes", Page 12 chapter before connecting or disconnecting any devices to or from your notebook. Always read the documentation supplied with the device you wish to connect. Never connect or disconnect cables during a thunderstorm. Never pull at a cable when disconnecting it. Always grasp the plug. Follow the steps in the sequence below when connecting or disconnecting devices to your notebook:
With some devices such as USB devices, it is not necessary to switch off the notebook and the device before connecting/disconnecting. For more information about whether or not devices need to be switched off, please refer to the documentation supplied with the external device. Some of the external devices require special drivers (see the operating system and external device documentation). Connecting devices to the notebook 1. Switch the notebook and all external devices off. 2. Unplug the AC plug of the notebook and all affected devices from the power outlets. 3. Connect the cables for all the external devices according to the instructions. 4. Plug all the AC plugs into the power outlets. Disconnecting devices from the notebook 1. Switch off the notebook and all external devices. 2. Unplug the AC plug of the notebook and all affected devices from the power outlets. 3. Disconnect the cables for all the external devices following the instructions. 72 Fujitsu Connecting external devices HDMI port The HDMI port on your notebook can be used to connect an external amplifier, LCD TV or a plasma TV with an HDMI connection. Connect the data cable to the external device. Connect the data cable to the HDMI port of the notebook. Fujitsu 73 Connecting external devices Connecting an external monitor to the port replicator An analog monitor is connected to the analog VGA monitor port, a digital monitor to the DisplayPort or to the DVI-D monitor port on the optional port replicator. Monitor output is limited to a maximum of two monitors at any one time (see "Key combinations", Page 44, section "Toggle output monitor"). Digital DisplayPort Analog VGA monitor port Digital DVI-D monitor port Switch off the notebook and the external monitor. Plug the data cable of the external monitor into the monitor port. First switch on the external monitor and then the notebook. You can also switch back and forth between the external screen and the LCD screen of the notebook, see chapter "Key combinations", Page 44. You can display the same picture on the external monitor and the notebook LCD screen simultaneously. 74 Fujitsu Connecting external devices Connecting USB devices On the USB ports you can connect external devices that also have a USB port
(e.g. a DVD drive, a printer, a scanner or a modem). USB devices are hot-pluggable. This means you can connect and disconnect the cables of USB devices while the operating system is running. USB 1.x has a maximum data transfer rate of 12 Mbps. USB 2.0 has a data transfer rate of up to 480 Mbps. USB 3.0 has a data transfer rate of up to 5 Gbps. Additional information can be found in the documentation for the USB devices. Connect the data cable to the external device. Connect the data cable to a USB port of the notebook. Device drivers USB devices will be automatically recognized and installed by your operating system. Fujitsu 75 Connecting external devices USB port with charging function (Anytime USB charge) It is recommended that the notebook be operated with the AC adapter connected whenever the USB port with charging function is in use, as this function will drain the battery more quickly if an external USB device is being charged. The AC adapter must already be connected when the notebook is switched off, as otherwise the USB charging function will be disabled and the connected USB devices will not be charged. Some USB devices (e.g. mobile telephony) require a driver in order to utilize the USB charging function. In this case the USB charging function will not work when the notebook is switched off, as no drivers are active when the notebook is switched off. You can use this USB port to charge or supply power to a USB device (e.g. to charge a PDA or a mobile phone or to connect a USB lamp), even if the notebook is switched off. How to remove USB devices correctly Always correctly remove the device according to the rules described below, to ensure that none of your data is lost. With the left mouse button, click on the symbol in the taskbar for safe removal of hardware. Select the device you wish to shut down and remove. Press the "Enter" key. Wait for the dialog box which tells you that it is now safe to remove the device. 76 Fujitsu Connecting external devices Headphones port You can connect headphones or external speakers to your notebook via the headphones port. Connect the audio cable to the external device. Connect the audio cable to the headphones port of the notebook. The internal speakers are disabled. If you buy a cable from a retailer, please note the following information:
The headphones port on your notebook is a "3.5 mm jack". If you want to connect headphones or speakers you will need a "3.5 mm jack plug". Fujitsu 77 Removing and installing components during servicing Removing and installing components during servicing Only qualified technicians should repair your notebook. Unauthorized opening or incorrect repair may greatly endanger the user (electric shock, fire risk) and will invalidate your warranty. 78 Fujitsu Settings in BIOS Setup Utility Settings in BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS Setup Utility allows you to set the system functions and the hardware configuration for the notebook. When a notebook is delivered, the factory default settings are effective. You can change these settings in the menus of the BIOS Setup Utility. Any changes you make take effect as soon as you save and exit the BIOS Setup Utility. The BIOS Setup Utility program contains the following menus:
About System Advanced Displays information relating to the BIOS, processor and notebook Advanced system settings Configuration of various hardware components, such as mouse, keyboard, processor Password settings and security functions Configuration of the start-up sequence Exits the BIOS Setup Utility Security Boot Exit Starting the BIOS Setup Utility Reboot the device (switch off/on or reboot the operating system). The following message (or similar) appears on the screen briefly at startup:
<F2> BIOS Setup <F12> Boot Menu Press the function key F2 . If a password has been assigned, enter the password and press the Enter key. If you have forgotten the password, contact your system administrator or contact our customer service center. The BIOS Setup Utility starts. BIOS Setup Utility operation Press the F1 key to display help about operation of the BIOS Setup Utility. The description of the individual settings is shown in the right-hand window of the BIOS Setup Utility. With the key you can load the default settings of the BIOS Setup Utility. F9 or to select the menu you wish to access to make changes. Use the cursor keys The menu is displayed on the screen. Select the option you want to change with the cursor keys Press the "Enter" key. Press the For future reference, make a note of the changes you have made (for example, in this manual). key to exit the selected menu. or . ESC Fujitsu 79 Settings in BIOS Setup Utility Exiting BIOS Setup Utility You need to select the desired option in the Exit menu and activate it by pressing the Enter key:
Exit Saving Changes - save changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility To save the current menu settings and exit the BIOS Setup Utility, select Exit Saving Changes and Yes. The notebook is rebooted and the new settings come into effect. Exit Discarding Changes - Reject changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility To discard the changes, select Exit Discarding Changes and Yes. The settings in place when BIOS Setup Utility was called remain effective. BIOS Setup Utility is terminated and the notebook is rebooted. Load Setup Defaults load default values To copy the standard entries for all menus of the BIOS Setup Utility, choose Load Setup Defaults and Yes. Discard Changes - Discard Changes without exiting BIOS Setup Utility To discard the changes you have made, select Discard Changes and Yes. The settings in place when BIOS Setup Utility was called remain effective. You can now make additional settings in the BIOS Setup Utility. If you want to exit the BIOS Setup Utility with these settings, select Exit Saving Changes and Yes. Save Changes - save changes without exiting the BIOS Setup Utility To save the changes, select Save Changes and Yes. The changes are saved. You can now make additional settings in the BIOS Setup Utility. If you want to exit BIOS Setup Utility with these settings, choose Exit Saving Changes and Yes. Save changes and power off To save the changes and switch off your device, select Save Changes and Power Off and Yes. The changes are saved. Your device is shut down. 80 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips Troubleshooting and tips If a fault occurs, try to correct it as described. If you are unable to correct the problem, proceed as follows:
Make a note of the steps and the circumstances that led to the fault. Also make a note of any error messages displayed. Switch the notebook off. Please contact the Hotline/Service Desk. You can contact Fujitsu Service and Support in the following ways:
Toll free number: 1-800-Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) Website: "http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php"
Please have the following information ready when you call:
The model name and serial number of the notebook. The serial number is located on a sticker on the underside of the notebook. Notes of any messages that appear on the screen and information on acoustic signals. Any changes you have made to the hardware or software since receiving the notebook. Any changes you have made to the BIOS Setup settings since receiving the notebook. Your system configuration and all peripheral devices connected to your system. Your sales contract. Our notebooks have been designed primarily with mobile applications in mind. This means that considerable effort has been made to optimize components and equipment in terms of weight, space and energy requirements. Depending on the particular configuration you have purchased, it is possible that functionality may be slightly reduced compared to a desktop PC if you are running processor-intensive gaming software, e.g. games with intensive 3D graphics. Updating your hardware with drivers which have not been approved by Fujitsu may result in performance losses, data losses or malfunction of the equipment. A list of approved drivers and current BIOS versions can be downloaded from: "http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com"
Help if problems occur Should you encounter a problem with your computer that you cannot resolve yourself:
Note the ID number of your device. The ID number is found on the type rating plate on the back or underside of the casing. For further clarification of the problem, contact the Fujitsu Service Desk. When you do this, please have ready the ID number and serial number of your system. Recovering your Factory Image In the event you need to restore your original Factory Image refer to the steps in the Appendix of this manual. Fujitsu 81 Troubleshooting and tips The notebooks date or time is incorrect Cause Time and date are wrongly set. Troubleshooting With the BIOS-Setup-Utility, you can set the date and time in the Main menu. Date and time are still set incorrectly after switching on the notebook. Please contact your sales outlet or our hotline/service desk. Battery indicator does not illuminate Troubleshooting Cause The battery is not installed correctly. Switch the notebook off. Check whether the battery is installed correctly in its compartment. The battery is discharged. Switch the notebook on. Charge the battery. or Install a charged battery. or Connect the notebook to a AC outlet using the AC adapter. When certain characters are entered on the keyboard, only numerals are written Troubleshooting Cause Press the Num button. The virtual number keys of your device are activated, see "Virtual number keys", Page 43 The notebooks LCD screen remains blank Cause Screen is switched off. External monitor or television set connected. Troubleshooting Press a key or touch the Clickpad. Press the key combination for changing over the screen output, see "Key combinations", Page 44. 82 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips The LCD screen of the notebook is difficult to read Cause Reflected glare Troubleshooting Turn the notebook or alter the tilt of the LCD screen. Increase the brightness of the screen. The external monitor remains blank Troubleshooting Cause Switch the external monitor on. Monitor is switched off. Press any key to continue. Power saving has been activated (monitor is blank). Brightness is set to dark. Screen output is set to the notebooks LCD screen Adjust the brightness of the monitor. Press the key combination for changing over the screen output, see "Key combinations", Page 44. The external monitors AC cable or data cable is not connected properly. Switch off the external monitor and the notebook. Check whether the AC cable is plugged properly into the external monitor and into the power outlet. Check whether the data cable is properly connected to the notebook and the external monitor (if it is plugged in with a connector). Switch on the external monitor and the notebook. The external monitor is blank or the image is unstable Cause The wrong external monitor has been selected or the wrong screen resolution has been set for the application program. Troubleshooting Terminate the application program under Windows by pressing Alt + F4 . If the error persists after terminating the program, use the key combination for switching the screen output (see "Key combinations", Page 44), in order to switch to the LCD screen of the notebook. Change the following setting:
Set the screen resolution: Set the screen resolution as described in the documentation for your operating system. Select monitor: Select monitor 1 or 2 as described in the documentation for your operating system. Fujitsu 83 Troubleshooting and tips The cursor does not correctly follow the stylus movements Cause Stylus incorrectly calibrated. Troubleshooting Calibrate the stylus as shown under Hardware and Sound / Tablet PC Settings in the Control Panel, see "Adjusting the stylus", Page 37 and "Calibrating the stylus", Page 37. Stylus input not working Cause Incorrect driver installed. Troubleshooting If your device is one which can only be operated using the stylus, install the driver for the standard model. or If your device is one which can be operated using the stylus and by finger, install the driver for the "Dual Digitizer"
model. The notebook does not start after switching it on Cause The battery is not installed correctly. Troubleshooting Check whether the battery is installed correctly in its compartment. The battery is discharged. The AC adapter is not properly connected. Switch the notebook on. Charge the battery. or Insert a charged battery. or Connect the AC adapter to the notebook. Check whether the AC adapter is properly connected to the notebook. Switch the notebook on. 84 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips The notebook stops working Cause The notebook is in energy saving mode. An application program has caused the malfunction. Troubleshooting End energy saving mode. Close the application program or restart the notebook (by restarting the operating system or switching the device off and back on again). The battery is discharged. Charge the battery. or Insert a charged battery. or Connect the AC adapter to the notebook. The printer does not print Cause The printer is not switched on. The printer is not connected correctly. The printer driver is faulty or not correctly installed, or it is the wrong printer driver. Troubleshooting Make sure that the printer is switched on and ready for operation (refer to the documentation supplied with the printer). Check that the data cable connecting the notebook to the printer is properly connected. Check that the data cable connecting the notebook to the printer is properly connected. Check whether the correct printer driver is loaded (refer to the printer documentation). The wireless connection to a network does not work Cause The wireless component is switched off. Troubleshooting Switch the wireless component on (see
"Switching the wireless components on and off", Page 55). The wireless component is switched on. Despite this, the wireless connection to a network does not work. Check whether the wireless connection is enabled by the software. Further information on using the wireless component can be found in the help files. Fujitsu 85 Troubleshooting and tips The battery discharges too quickly Troubleshooting Cause Move the notebook so that its temperature The battery is either too hot or too cold. In this case the battery indicator flashes. returns to within the normal range. You may have an application running that consumes a great deal of power due to frequent accessing of the hard disk or optical drive. The maximum brightness may have been set for the screen. If the operating time of the battery life is extremely short, the battery is probably too old. Replace the battery if necessary. Use the AC adapter whenever possible. Set the screen slightly darker with the key combination for Decreasing the screen brightness in order to reduce the amount of power being drawn. SmartCard reader is not recognized Troubleshooting Cause Make sure you have inserted your Chip card inserted incorrectly. SmartCard into the SmartCard reader with the chip facing upwards. Check whether the SmartCard you are using is supported. Your SmartCard must comply with the ISO standard 7816-1, -2, -3 and -4. SmartCard PIN forgotten Cause PIN forgotten SmartCard lost Cause SmartCard lost. Troubleshooting If you are working in a network, contact your system administrator, who can unlock your notebook with a Supervisor PIN. Troubleshooting If you are working in a network, contact your system administrator, who can boot your notebook with a Supervisor SmartCard. 86 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips User and/or supervisor SmartCard lost Cause User and/or supervisor SmartCard lost Troubleshooting If you have lost your user SmartCard, you can continue working with the supervisor SmartCard. If you have lost the supervisor SmartCard, you can also continue working, but you no longer have all rights and cannot initialize another supervisor SmartCard. Acoustic warning Cause A beep sounds every few seconds. The battery is almost flat. Troubleshooting Charge the battery. Fujitsu 87 Troubleshooting and tips Error messages on the screen This section describes the error messages generated by the BIOS Setup. Error messages displayed by the operating system or programs are described in the documentation for these programs. If the error message appears repeatedly despite troubleshooting measures, contact the place of purchase or our customer service center. Error message/cause CMOS Battery Bad If the error message occurs repeatedly, the back-up battery in the notebook is flat. System CMOS checksum bad - Default configuration used The system configuration information is incorrect. Extended memory failed at offset: xxxx Failing Bits:
zzzz zzzz When testing the extended memory. an error has resulted at the address xxxx. Failure Fixed Disk n The settings of the hard disk drive are incorrect. Keyboard controller error Keyboard error nn Stuck key Operating system not found Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP This error message appears if an error occurs during the self-test before starting the operating system. Troubleshooting Contact your sales outlet or our customer service center. Switch the notebook off. Switch the notebook on. Press the function key F2 to access the BIOS Setup. In the BIOS Setup, select the Exit menu. Select the entry Load Setup Defaults. Select OK and press the Enter key. Check whether the additional memory module has been inserted correctly. Start the BIOS Setup (Primary Master submenu) and select the correct settings. Switch the notebook off with the ON/OFF button. Wait 3 - 5 seconds and switch on the notebook again. If you use an external keyboard:
Check the connection and reboot the notebook. Make sure that no key is pressed. Check in the BIOS Setup whether your hard disk has been set correctly. Make sure that the operating system is installed on the corresponding drive. Press the F1 operating system. Press the function BIOS Setup. function key to start the the access to key F2 88 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips Error message/cause Previous boot incomplete - Default configuration used Default values have been set for certain settings because of an error which occurred in the previous system boot. Check the settings in the BIOS Setup. Real time clock error nnnnK Shadow RAM failed at offset: xxxx Failing Bits: zzzz System battery is dead - Replace and run SETUP System cache error - Cache disabled System timer error Troubleshooting Press the F1 to do so. function key when prompted Contact your sales outlet or our customer service center. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service center. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service center. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service center. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service center. Fujitsu 89 Technical data Technical data Notebook General Processor 4400 memory (SO DIMM) Electrical data Safety regulations complied with Protection class Maximum power draw (when the notebook is switched on and the battery is charged):
LCD screen Size Resolution Pixel class Brightness control Technology Digitizer and glass panel Webcam Display adapter Chip Maximum resolution of external monitor:
Dimensions Width x Depth x Height Weight depending on configuration Input devices Keyboard Clickpad Tablet buttons Stylus Slots Storage card slot SmartCard slot SIM card slot 4th Generation Intel Core with vPro technology (depending on the CPU) Maximum 8 GB DDR3 1 fixed slot for 4 GB or 8 GB modules CE, GS (optional) II 65 W (without port replicator) /
80 W (with port replicator) 33.78 cm / 13.3" TFT WQHD 2560 x 1440 pixels / 32-bit II 12 levels Wide-View High-Bright WXGA Display with LED Background Lighting Dual Digitizer Hardened glass FHD, 30 fps, (optional) with status indicator Intel HD Graphics 4400 4096 x 2304 pixels 320.8 mm x 235 mm x 17.1-19.3 mm /
12.63 inch x 9.25 inch x 0.67-0.76 inch from 1.5 kg / 3.3 lbs 85 keys, with backlit keyboard 2 keys 1 Windows button, 2 volume buttons 1 freely programmable rocker button 1 x SD Card 1 x 1 x 90 Fujitsu Technical data Ports HDMI port LAN port Microphone port / Line In / Headphones port /
Line Out Docking port USB (Universal Serial Bus) Security Lock Ambient conditions Environment class DIN IEC 721 Mechanism class DIN IEC 721 Operating temperature Transit temperature (2K2) 1 x Socket, RJ45 3.5 mm stereo mini jack Socket, 54-pin Total: 2x USB (1 x USB 3.0, 1 x USB 3.0 with charging function (Anytime USB charge) 1 x 7K1 7M2 5 .... 35 / 41F .... 95F 15C .... 60C / 5F .... 140F Fujitsu 91 Technical data WLAN specifications Type of network Transfer rate Active frequency Typical operating distances**
Number of channels Security Integrated Dual-Band Wireless-N 7260 device conforms to IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g, and 802.11n, Wi-Fi based*.
(Automatic switching) IEEE802.11 a and g: 54 Mbps max. data rate; IEEE802.11n:
300 Mbps max. data rate 802.11a: 40 ft. (12 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. 802.11n: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz 802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz 802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz
(91 m) @ 6 Mbps 802.11b: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 11 Mbps; 300 ft.
(91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11g: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft.
(91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11n: Estimated double the operating distance of 802.11g and 802.11a in their respective frequencies. 802.11a: 8 independent channels 802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels 802.11n: Channel bonding takes two of the non-overlapping 20MHz channels and combines it into one 40MHz channel. It is actually 12 non-overlapping channels with channel bonding and 24 without. Also, it is 1 non-overlapping channel in 2.4GHz when channel bonding is used Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES***, WPA 1.0 and WPA 2.0 compliant Encryption Key lengths Supported: 64 bits and 128 bits 10 units or less ****
Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection)
* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.
** The communication ranges shown above will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or interference from external RF sources.
*** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/ 104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.
**** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 92 Fujitsu Technical data Port replicator (optional) Electrical data Safety regulations complied with Protection class Ports Monitor port (analog) Monitor port (digital) DisplayPort LAN port USB (Universal Serial Bus) Audio Docking port Security Lock Ambient conditions Environment class DIN IEC 721 Mechanism class DIN IEC 721 Operating temperature Transit temperature Rechargeable battery CE II 15-pin 25-pin, DVI-D 1 x RJ45 4x USB 3.0 Headphones port 100-pin 1 x 7K1 7M2 5 .... 35 / 41F .... 95F 15C .... 60C / 5F .... 140F For information on the batteries used in your device, please see
"http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php". Rated voltage Rated capacity Rated power 14.4 V 45 Wh 3150 mAh The operating time depends on the device configuration, the active applications and the energy saving settings. Fujitsu 93 Technical data AC adapter for use with notebook and port replicator The following technical data applies to the AC adapter included in the scope of delivery of the notebook and the optionally available port replicator. Primary Rated voltage Rated frequency Max. rated current Secondary Rated power Rated voltage Max. rated current 100 V to 240 V (automatic) 50 Hz to 60 Hz (automatic) 0.7 A to 1.2 A 100 W 19 V 5.27 A An additional AC adapter or AC cable can be ordered at any time. 94 Fujitsu Manufacturers notes Manufacturers notes Disposal and recycling You can find information on this subject on your notebook or on our website
("http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/products/trade-in_program/"). Recycling your battery Over time, the batteries that run your mobile computer will begin to hold a charge for a shorter amount of time; this is a natural occurrence for all batteries. When this occurs, you may want to replace the battery with a fresh one*. If you replace it, it is important that you dispose of the old battery properly because batteries contain materials that could cause environmental damage if disposed of improperly. Fujitsu is very concerned with environmental protection, and has enlisted the services of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation (RBRC)**, a nonprofit public service organization dedicated to protecting our environment by recycling old batteries at no cost to you. RBRC has drop-off points at tens of thousands of locations throughout the United States and Canada. To find the location nearest you, go to "www.RBRC.org" or call 1-800-822-8837. If there are no convenient RBRC locations near you, you can also go to the EIA Consumer Education Initiative website "http://EIAE.org/ " and search for a convenient disposal location. Remember protecting the environment is a cooperative effort, and we must make every effort to protect it for current and future generations.
* To order a new battery for your Fujitsu mobile computer, go to the Fujitsu shopping site at "www.shopfujitsu.com" in the US or "www.fujitsu.ca/products/notebooks" in Canada.
** RBRC is an independent third party to which Fujitsu provides funding for battery recycling; RBRC is in no way affiliated with Fujitsu. DOC (Industry CANADA) Notices Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. Fujitsu 95 Manufacturers notes UL Notice IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Only use UL Listed I.T.E. adapters with an output rating of 19 VDC, with a minimum current of 3.16A (60W). The correct output rating is indicated on the AC adapter label. Refer to the illustration below for the correct AC Adapter output polarity:
When using your notebook equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS For Authorized Repair Technicians Only CAUTION:
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with the same type and rating fuse. WARNING:
Danger of explosion if Lithium (CMOS) battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instruction. 96 Fujitsu Manufacturers notes ENERGY STAR Compliance Your Fujitsu system is an ENERGY STAR qualified mobile PC. By choosing a computer with the latest energy-saving technology, youre helping to preserve our environment for future generations. ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, U.S. Department of Energy, Natural Resources Canada, and other governments around the world helping us save money while protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. With energy costs and global warming top-of-mind for consumers, Fujitsu is committed to offering solutions that help consumers conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. Sleep Mode:
You will notice that your computer is initially set so that the display turns off after 15 minutes of user inactivity, and the computer goes into Sleep mode after 20 minutes of user inactivity. When going into Sleep mode, the computer also reduces the speed of any active Ethernet network links. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, press the Suspend/Resume Button. Energy saving benefits:
Fujitsu ENERGY STAR qualified mobile PCs use about half as much electricity as standard equipment saving half in utility costs. But more than that, ENERGY STAR also makes a difference for the environment. Did you know that the average house can be responsible for twice the greenhouse gas emissions as the average car? Thats because every time you flip on a light switch, run your dishwasher, or turn on your PC, you use energy, which means more greenhouse gas emissions from power plants. So the more energy we can save through energy efficiency, the more we help to reduce greenhouse gases and the risks of global warming. To learn more about the important ENERGY STAR program, visit:"www.energystar.gov". To read about how Fujitsu is supporting Sustainable Management along with several other environmental activities, visit the Fujitsu Corporate Citizenship page at:
"http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/aboutus/environmental/environment.php". Declarations of Conformity This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations are subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Fujitsu 97 Manufacturers notes FCC and IC Regulatory Information Please note the following regulatory information related to the wireless LAN device. Regulatory Notes and Statements Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wireless LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however, are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as:
On board an airplane, or In an explosive environment, or In situations where the interference risk to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports, hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private buildings), obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the equipment. Regulatory Information/Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failure to comply with these guidelines. This device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN: For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of this device must be integral. Federal Communications Commission and Industry Canada statement:
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. 98 Fujitsu Manufacturers notes Dclaration dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil est conforme la Section 15 des Rgles de la FC C et la ( aux) norme(s) RSS concernant les appareils exempt s de licence par Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux condition s suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisib le; (2) cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris celles pouvan t causer un mauvais fonctionnement de lappareil. FCC Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2. 3. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the one the receiver is connected to. 4. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The wireless LAN radio device has been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. The exposure standard for wireless devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg, and 1.6W/kg by Industry Canada. This device is compliant with SAR for general population /uncontrolled exposure limits in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1992 and Canada RSS 102, and had been tested in accordance with the measurement methods and procedures specified in OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C, and Canada RSS 102. This device has been tested, and meets the FCC, IC RF exposure guidelines when tested with the device operating conditions. Fujitsu 99 Manufacturers notes Dclaration de la FCC/dIndustrie Canada sur lexposition aux radiofrquences La norme rgissant lexposition des appareils sans fil aux radiofrquences emploie une unit de mesure dnomme Taux dabsorption spcifique, ou TAS. La FCC et Industrie Canada ont dfini la mme limite de TAS : 1,6 W/kg. Cet appareil est conforme au TAS pour les limites dexposition gnrales de la population/non contrles dfinies par les rgles C95.1-1992 de lANSI/IEEE et RSS 102 dIndustrie Canada ; il a t test en conformit avec les mthodes et procdures de mesure spcifies dans le supplment C du bulletin 65 de lOET (Office dingnierie et de technologie) et la rgle RSS 102 dIndustrie Canada. Cet appareil a t test selon les directives de la FCC et dIC concernant lexposition aux radiofrquences et sest rvl conforme ces dernires lorsquil a t test en contact direct avec le corps. Export restrictions This product or software contains encryption code which may not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003 B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation. Modifications not expressly authorized by Fujitsu America, Inc. may invalidate the users right to operate this equipment. Canadian Notice The device for the 5150 - 5250 MHz band is only for indoor usage to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. The maximum antenna gain of 6 dBi permitted (for devices in the 5250 - 5350 MHz, 5470 - 5725 MHz and 5725 - 5825 MHz bands) to comply with the e.i.r.p. limit as stated in A9.2 of RSS210. In addition, users are cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 - 5350 MHz and 5650 - 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avis pour le Canada Le matriel destin un usage sur la bande 5 150 - 5 250 MHz doit tre utilis uniquement lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage nuisible caus aux systmes mobiles par satellite fonctionnant sur un mme canal. Un gain dantenne de 6 dBi est autoris (pour le matriel utilisant les bandes 5 250 - 5 350 MHz, 5 470 - 5 725 MHz et 5 725 - 5 825 MHz), conformment la limite p.i.r.e. maximale permise selon lannexe A9.2 affrent aux priphriques RSS210. En outre, les utilisateurs doivent prendre garde au fait que les radars de grande puissance sont considrs comme des utilisateurs principaux (ce qui signifie quils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5 250 - 5 350 MHz et 5 650 - 5 850 MHz et quils pourraient causer des interfrences et/ou des dommages aux appareils de rseau exempts de licence. 100 Fujitsu Appendix Appendix Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to properly set up and configure the optional integrated Wireless LAN Mini-PCI device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure its correct operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Wireless LAN Devices Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing the following device:
Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Characteristics of the WLAN Device The WLAN devices are PCI Express Mini cards attached to the main board of the mobile computer. The WLAN devices operate in license-free RF bands, eliminating the need to procure an FCC operating license. The WLAN operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band and the lower, middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands. The WLAN devices are capable of four operating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n. The WLAN device is Wi-Fi certified and operates (as applicable) at the maximum data rate of 450 Mbps in IEEE802.11n mode (300 Mbps in this configuration); 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11g mode; and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode. The WLAN devices support the following encryption methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption. The Wireless LAN devices are compliant with the following standards: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0, and CCX4.0. Fujitsu 101 Appendix Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device Ad Hoc Mode
"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authentication, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network architecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infrastructure mode because they require access to the WLAN in order to access services, devices, and computers (e.g., file servers, printers, databases). 102 Fujitsu Appendix
* = An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used.
** = ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar How to Handle This Device The WLAN device is an optional device that may come pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The Operating System that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device. Integrated Intel Centrino wireless LAN devices support IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n. The WLAN device operates in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands. Microwave ovens may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices since they operate in the same 2.4 GHz frequency range as IEEE802.11b/g/n devices. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band. Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4 GHz range may interfere with operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g/n modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and many frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure proper operation of the WLAN device. Fujitsu 103 Appendix Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device Disconnecting the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). The WLAN device can be disconnected in Windows using the WLAN icon in the system tray
(Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected.) Press the key combination The wireless component indicator will go off when the wireless components are switched off. to deactivate the Wireless Device Fn F5
Configuring the Wireless LAN The optional WLAN device can be configured to establish wireless network connectivity using the software that is built into Windows. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this software. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network administrator for these parameters:
Configuring the WLAN Using Windows The WLAN device can be configured to establish wireless network connectivity using the software that is built into Windows Vista. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this software. Pre-defined parameters are required for this procedure. Consult your network administrator for these parameters:
1. From the Modern Start screen, press Windows + X , then select Control Panel from the menu. 2. If the Control Panel is not in Classic View, select Classic View from the left panel. Double-click the Network and Sharing Center icon. 3. Select Setup a new connection or network. 4. Depending upon what type of connection you would like to make, make a selection. For an infrastructure network, select Manually connect to a wireless network. 5. Enter the required information. It may be necessary to consult with your network administrator for some of the information. In the event you require assistance, go to the Network and Sharing Center window (Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center), and type in relevant keywords in the Search box. 6. Connection to the network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by performing the following steps:
1. Click on the WLAN icon in the system tray. 2. Select Connect to a network. 3. Select a network from the list that appears, and click the Connect button. 104 Fujitsu Troubleshooting the WLAN Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. Possible Cause Problem Unavailable network connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Appendix Possible Solution Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys (WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set the network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better sight. Weak received signal strength and/or link quality Fujitsu 105 Appendix Problem Unavailable network connection
(continued) Possible Cause The WLAN device was deactivated or is disabled The computer to be connected is turned off Incorrectly configured network settings RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks Wireless network authentication has failed Incorrect IP address configuration Possible Solution Check if the wireless switch is turned On. Go to Start >
Control Panel, and doubleclick on Windows Mobility Center. If the wireless network is off, click the Turn wireless on button. Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. Recheck the configuration of your network settings. The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a mis-configured LEAP username, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 106 Fujitsu Appendix Using the Bluetooth Device Bluetooth is integrated into the Wireless LAN module. The Bluetooth capabilities are Bluetooth Basic, EDR and Bluetooth Low Energy (BT v4.0) operational modes. What is Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is designed as a short-range wireless link between mobile devices, such as laptop computers, phones, printers, and cameras. Bluetooth technology is used to create Personal Area Networks (PANs) between devices in short-range of each other. To enable or disable either the wireless LAN or Bluetooth devices individually, perform the following steps:
1. Turn on the WLAN/Bluetooth using the 2. Go to the Modern Start screen and select Charms > Settings >
keys. and Fn F5 Change PC Settings > Wireless. 3. Under Wireless > Wireless Devices, click on the Bluetooth switch to turn it on. Where to Find Information About Bluetooth For additional information about Bluetooth Technology, visit the Bluetooth Web site at: "www.bluetooth.com". FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The Bluetooth antenna is located on the top edge of the LCD screen and is exempt from minimum distance criteria due to its low power. The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Notice To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Warranty Users are not authorized to modify this product. Any modifications invalidate the warranty. This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without signed written permission from Fujitsu. Unauthorized modification will void the equipment authorization from the FCC and Industry Canada and the warranty. Fujitsu 107 Appendix Image Backup and Recovery Procedures Thank you for purchasing a Fujitsu computer. Fujitsu is committed to bringing you the best computing experience with your new system. It is very important that you create DVD copies of your Recovery Image and Bootable Disk before beginning to use your system. To do so, follow the instructions in the Creating a Backup of Bootable Disk and Recovery Image section of this document. It is also important that you create a copy of the software that is essential for your system to access the internet (hereafter called essential access software) to external writable media or an external drive. To do so, follow the instructions in the Creating a Backup of the System-Specific Software Drivers. Creating a Backup of Bootable Disk and Recovery Image When you purchased your new system, a copy of the recovery image was loaded into a hidden partition on your hard disk drive. Having a copy of the recovery image available to you means that in the event of system failure, you will be able to restore it and re-install the essential access software using Fujitsu Software Auto Installer. To make a copy of the recovery image to DVD disks, you will need three or four blank disks to create the copy. After creating the copy, be sure to label the disks and keep them in a safe place to ensure they do not get damaged. Note: If your system does not have an internal writable DVD drive, connect your system to an external drive* before beginning the following steps. 1. Launch System Restore and Recovery from the desktop icon. It will allow you to create the Bootable Disk and the Recovery Image Disk Set. 2. On Step 1: Select the Bootable Disk from the list:
a. Select a media type. b. Notice the number of disks that are needed for the set. c. Click Next to proceed. 3. On Step 2: Confirm your Recovery Disk, click Next. 4. On Step 3: follow the on-screen instructions to make the disk or disk set, then click Start. It takes approximately 20 minutes to make one disk. 5. On Step 4, when the disk creation is completed, a message appears. Click Finish to exit the program. 6. Repeat Step 1: Select Recovery Disk from the list and repeat the above steps 2(a), 2(b), 2(c), 3, 4 and 5.
* DEPENDING UPON YOUR OPTICAL DRIVE AND MEDIA FORMAT USED, SOME MEDIA TYPES MAY BE INCOMPATIBLE FOR CREATING IMAGE BACKUPS. 108 Fujitsu Appendix Creating a Backup of Essential Access Software When you purchased your new system, a Fujitsu Software Extractor shortcut was loaded to C:\Fujitsu\Drivers\AutoInstaller\. This shortcut allows you to save the software driver packages along with the extracted Auto Installer software package to a selected location. It is recommended that you save these packages to writable media or an external drive. This ensures that in the event of system failure you will be able to re-install the essential access software. 1. Open the C:\Fujitsu\Drivers\AutoInstaller\ folder 2. Run Fujitsu Software Extractor as an Administrator a. Right-click on Fujitsu Software Extractor. b. Select the Run as Administrator option from the menu that is displayed. 3. The default save location is C:\Fujitsu\ AutoInstaller\ Drivers\. You can change the location by clicking on the Browse button and selecting your preferred location. Note: It is recommended that you change the default location and save the software packages to the external writable media or drive. 4. Click on the Save Packages button. 5. Fujitsu Software Extractor copies the zipped software packages and Readme files, and extracts the Auto Installer folder to the selected location. Note: The extracted Auto Installer will later be used to install the software automatically on the system in the event of generic image restoration when the software is not pre-installed in the image. RECOVER YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE HARD DRIVE IS STILL ACCESSIBLE Using the Recovery and Utility Tools The Recovery and Utility tools consist of a variety of tools that will help you recover your recovery image and system images, and delete the data from your hard disk. Methods for accessing the utilities Recovery and Utility Tools are preinstalled in a hidden partition by the factory, or they can be accessed by using the bootable disk. Note: The Recovery and Utility tools may be deleted from your hard disk drive if you modify the partitions. If that occurs, you will not be able to use the hidden partition for booting to Recovery and Utility Tools, but you will still be able to boot from the Bootable Disk. Fujitsu 109 6. 7. Appendix Determining whether Recovery and Utility is pre-loaded 1. Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press the 2. Use the 3. Check whether the Recovery and Utility option is present. If it is not present, it means key to get to the Application Menu. key. Tab that the utility must be used from the Bootable Disk. Proceed to Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable Disk if Recovery and Utility is unavailable. F12 Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk 1. Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press the 2. Use the key to get to the Application Menu. 3. Cursor down to Recovery and Utility and press the 4. Choose your language, if necessary. Select Recovery and Utility to proceed. 5. Three tool options appear: Diagnostics, Recovery, and Utility (refer to the Recovery and key. key. Enter Tab Utility tools section below for instructions on how to use these tools). If this was successful please skip the next step and go to Recovery and Utility tools. If this was NOT successful, please go to the next step. F12 Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable disk To verify/change the boot-up priority (rather than booting-up from the hard drive or an external media drive), perform the following steps:
1. Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen, press the 2. 3. Highlight the CD/DVD option from the Boot menu, then press Enter . 4. Click OK. 5. Select CD/DVD boot mode: UEFI Mode, if applicable, and then press Insert the bootable disk into the drive tray. Enter
. While the files are being loaded from the disk, the Fujitsu logo screen will appear followed by a progress bar at the bottom of the screen. F12 key. 110 Fujitsu Appendix Recovery and Utility tools Note: Recovery and Utility tools may not be available on your system depending on the region from which the system was shipped. Diagnostics tool: The Diagnostics tool is designed for use by IT professionals. It is not likely you will need to use this tool. If you should need to use this tool, perform the following steps:
1. Press the Diagnostics Tool button to start the Diagnostics tool. 2. Read the note, and then click OK. 3. Choose one or more of the following options for diagnostics on the Fujitsu Hardware Diagnostics Tool window: CPU, Memory, Display, Hard Disk, CD/DVD/BD, Floppy Disk, Keyboard, and Mouse. 4. Click the Option button in the Tool menu to specify how many times the tool should run diagnostics on each selected component. 5. Press Execute to start the Diagnostics tool. 6. After the execution is completed, the selected components are circled in red to indicate that they have been diagnosed and the result dialog window opens. Click Close to close the window. 7. Click End to close the Diagnostics tool, and then click Yes to confirm the end of diagnostics session. Recovery tool: The Recovery tool contains two options:
Restore C Drive: Restore recovery image (only C: drive) Restore Full Hard Drive: Restore recovery image (full hard drive). You can use these tools to restore the Recovery Image from the hidden partition, and perform a full hard drive recovery. Please refer to instructions above for details on how to create a Recovery Image. Restore the Recovery Image from Hidden Partition 1. Click [Restore C: drive] from Recovery and Utility tools 2. The progress bar is followed by Restore Recovery image (only C: drive) screen confirming that the Image will be restored to the C: drive. Click Next. 3. Read the instruction screen and select Agree, then click Next. 4. Click OK to acknowledge the warning message to restore recovery image to the C: drive. 5. When the progress bar appears, wait for the process to complete. 6. Click Finish when the process completes; the computer will restart to Windows. 7. Follow the steps listed in the Auto Installation support for software packages from hidden partition section. 8. Download FSDM (Fujitsu Software Download Manager) from the support site and download all the software applicable to the model and OS using FSDM. 9. Follow the steps listed in Auto Installation support for software packages downloaded from support website section. Fujitsu 111 Appendix RECOVER YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE HARD DRIVE IS NOT BOOTABLE Restore the Recovery Image for Full Hard Drive Follow the steps in the Recovering your Recovery Image using Recovery and Utility (for new hard drive or non-bootable hard drive) section. You will need the Bootable Disk and the Recovery Disk Set for this task. Utility tool: If applicable for your region, the Utility tool contains two options:
Hard Disk Data Delete and Partition Creation. The Hard Disk Data Delete utility is used to delete all data on the hard disk and prevent the data from being reused. NOTE: Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions. To delete hard disk data:
1. Click the Hard Disk Data Delete button. The progress bar appears, followed by the EULA screen. 2. Agree to the EULA and click Next. 3. Choose the hard disk from which the data should be deleted in the list of hard disks and click Next. The Partition Creation utility is used to change the C: and D: drive partition sizes. To run this utility: (This is not an option when using Windows 7.) 1. Click the Partition Creation button. 2. A progress bar appears, followed by the EULA screen. Agree to the EULA. 3. On the Recovery Tool - Partition Creation screen, move the slider to set disk size, and then click OK. 4. Click Yes in the Partition Creation confirmation dialog. WARNING: It is highly recommended that you send your product to Fujitsu Service to replace a hard drive. A mistake could possibly destroy your computer, your new hard drive or both. 112 Fujitsu Appendix Recovering Your Recovery Image Using Recovery and Utility
(for new hard drive or non-bootable hard drive) If you have installed a new hard drive or your hard drive is not bootable, perform the following steps. Note: You will need the Bootable disk and Recovery Image disk set for this recovery. Enter key. Insert the bootable disk in your DVD drive, then click OK. 1. Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen, press the 2. 3. Highlight the CD/DVD option from the Boot Menu and press Enter . 4. Select CD/DVD boot mode: Select UEFI Mode, if applicable and press Enter . While the files are being loaded from the disk, the Fujitsu logo screen appears followed by a progress bar at the bottom of the screen. 5. Choose your language, if necessary. 6. Three tool options appear: Diagnostics, Recovery and Utility. Select Recovery. For Windows 8.1: Select Restore full hard drive For Windows 7: Select Restoring the Factory Image (full hard drive recovery) 7. Click Next to confirm full hard drive restoration. All data on HDD will be deleted. 8. Agree to EULA by selecting Agree option and clicking Next. 9. Click Next on the Recovery Disk Check screen to verify that the bootable disk has been inserted into the optical drive. 10. The Checking for Recovery Disk screen appears followed by the prompt to insert the first disk. Click OK to continue. Repeat this step for all disks. After all recovery disks have been checked and the check has been completed, click Next. 11. Follow the prompt to reinsert the first recovery disk and click Next. 12. Click OK when you receive the final warning informing you that all data on drive C will be lost. This starts the recovery process. 13. Follow the prompts to insert the next recovery disks and click OK. 14. After the copying of the image to the HDD completes the restore process is complete, click Finish to restart the system. The computer will restart automatically and then go through the first boot process. 15. Follow the steps listed in Auto Installation support for essential access software from backup location section. 16. Download FSDM (Fujitsu Software Download Manager) from support site and download all the software applicable to the model and OS using FSDM. 17. Follow the steps listed in Auto Installation support for essential access software downloaded from support website. Fujitsu 113 Appendix Installing the Software after the Recovery Image is Restored Auto-installation support for essential access software from hidden partition The below listed steps are applicable only in cases in which the recovery image restore and hidden partition contents have not been wiped out. 1. After the recovery image is restored, launch the desktop icon Fujitsu Software Auto Installer. 2. Double-click on Fujitsu Software Auto Installer desktop icon. 3. Click Yes on User Account Control Dialog box. This will take some time to process the software packages. A message will be displayed during this time, Please wait while the content is being processed. If EULA is displayed for Fujitsu Software Auto Installer, accept the EULA, otherwise continue. 4. 5. Then Fujitsu Software Auto Installer user interface will be launched providing ability 6. to auto-install the essential access software on the system. It is recommended that you install all the software in the listed order. You can Select All, to install the software in the order listed. 7. Click Install to start the installation. 8. After installing all the selected drivers, Installation Results window will be displayed. Click OK. 9. You must restart the system for the settings to take effect. Do you wish to reboot now? message appears. Select Yes. 10. The system will now reboot. 11. You can now connect to the internet and download FSDM (Fujitsu Software Download Manager) from the support site and download all the software applicable to the model and OS using FSDM if they are not downloaded yet. 114 Fujitsu Appendix Auto-installation support for essential access software from backup location The below listed steps are applicable in cases in which a backup copy was created as mentioned in the section Creating a Backup of essential access software. 1. It is important to have the extracted Auto installer software package folder and Readme file in the same location as other software folders. Otherwise auto-installation of the software will not be supported. Inside the Auto Installer software package, launch FjAutoinstall.exe as an Administrator. 2. 3. Click Yes on the User Account Control dialog box. This will take some time to process the software packages. A message will be displayed during this time stating, Please wait while the content is being processed. If EULA is displayed for Fujitsu Software Auto Installer, accept the EULA, otherwise continue. 4. 5. The Fujitsu Software Auto Installer user interface will be launched providing ability 6. to auto install the essential access software on the system. It is recommended that you install all the software in the listed order. You can Select All, to install the software in the order listed. 7. Click the Install button to start the installation. 8. After installing all the selected drivers, Installation Results window is be displayed. Click OK. 9. You must restart the system for the settings to take effect. Do you wish to reboot now? message appears. Select Yes. 10. The system will now reboot. Auto Installation support for the software downloaded from support website 1. Download FSDM (Fujitsu Software Download Manager) from the support site and download all the drivers applicable to the model and OS using FSDM if they are not downloaded yet. 3. 2. When the software packages are downloaded from web, it is important to download the Auto Installer Software package and the model/language- specific Readme file if you prefer to auto install the software. It is important to have the extracted Auto Installer software package folder and Readme file in the same location as other software folders. Otherwise auto-installation of the software will not be supported. Inside the Auto Installer software package, launch FjAutoinstall.exe as administrator. 4. 5. Click Yes on the User Account Control dialog box. This will take some time to process the software packages. A message will be displayed during this time stating Please wait while the content is being processed. If EULA is displayed for Fujitsu Software Auto Installer, accept the EULA, otherwise continue. 6. 7. The Fujitsu Software Auto Installer user interface will be launched providing the ability 8. to auto install the software downloaded from support site. It is recommended that you install all the software in the listed order. You can Select All, to install the software in the order listed. 9. Click the Install button to start the installation. 10. After installing all the selected drivers, the Installation Results window is displayed. Click OK. 11. You must restart the system for the settings to take effect. Do you wish to reboot now? message appears. Select Yes. 12. The system will now reboot. Fujitsu 115 Appendix Downloading Driver Updates To ensure that you always have the most current driver updates related to your system, occasionally access the Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility. The FSDM utility is available from the Fujitsu Support site. FSDM will allow you to view and download a list of the most current drivers, utilities, and applications to determine whether you have the latest versions. To download the FSDM Utility, go to the Support Site:
"http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS". If you are planning on downgrading, upgrading or changing versions of your operating system during this process please see the Users Guide for more information at "http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com". 116 Fujitsu Index A A beep sounds every second 82 AC adapter connecting 18 Set up 18 Acoustic warnings 87 Activate keyboard backlight 44 Alt+Tab 45 Anti-theft protection 65 Audio connections 77 B Back tab 45 Backspace 42 Backspace key 42 Battery 48 battery charge 52 Caring for and maintaining 48 charge level 48 Charging 48 Discharges too quickly 86 see Rechargeable battery 48 Self-discharge 48 Service life 48 Storing 48 battery charge meter 48 BIOS Setup Utility
, protecting with password 66 calling 79 exiting 80 operation 79 Settings 79 Blank LCD screen 82 Bluetooth switching module off 55, 104 switching module on 55, 104 Bluetooth, Safety notes 13 C Caps Lock 42 Caps Lock key 42 Charge capacity, battery 48 Charging back-up battery 82 Choose a location 18 Clickpad 39, 44 buttons 39 Deactivating 44 Dragging items 40 Executing commands 39 Index Moving the pointer 39 Selecting an item 39 Clickpad buttons 44 Components Installing/Removing 78 Configuration, BIOS Setup Utility 79 Configuring hardware 79 Configuring system 79 Connecting audio devices 77 Connecting headphones 77 Ctrl+Alt+Del 45 Cursor control 42 Cursor keys 42 D Date not correct 82 Deactivate keyboard backlight 44 Declaration of conformity 97 Devices, connecting 72 disconnecting 72 Display orientation select 27 DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES 95 E Ending Energy energy saving mode 85 Energy consumption 52 Energy saving 13 Energy saving functions 52 Enter 42 Enter key 42 Error messages on the screen 88 Errors Acoustic warnings 87 Screen messages 88 Ethernet LAN 57 F Factory Image 81 Fault correction 81 Fingerprint sensor 65 configuring 65 First-time setup 17 Fn key 42 Fujitsu 117 Index Fn+F10 45 Fn+F2 44 Fn+F3 44 Fn+F4 44 Fn+F5 44 Fn+F6 44 Fn+F7 44 Fn+F8 44 Fn+F9 45 G Getting started 17 H Hard disk:
restoring the contents 81 HDMI port 73 I Important notes 12 In case of service 78 Incorrect time 82 Information, safety 12 K Kensington Lock Cable 65 Key combinations 44 Keyboard 41 keys 41 L Landscape format display 27 LCD screen Decrease brightness 44 difficult to read 83 Notes 31 reflected glare 83 Remains blank 82 Line feed 42 M Making ready to use 18 Mechanical security 65 Memory card handling 53 inserting 53 removing 53 Microphone 54 Mobile operation 14 Monitor connection 74 no image 83 remains blank 83 unstable image 83 Monitor connection see VGA socket 74 N Notebook before traveling 14 does not start 84 not working 85 operating 21 switching off 29 transporting 14 Notebook: switching on 24 Notes 12 disposal / recycling 95 Energy saving 13 LCD screen 31 Transport 14 Num Lock indicator 43 Number keypad 41 Numeric keypad 41 see Virtual number keys 43 O Operating system activating system protection 67 cancel system protection 67 Protecting with password 67 Operating system, recovering 81 Operation, notebook 21 P Packaging 17 Password changing 67 entering 66 removing 67 Password protection 66 hard disk 68 Pen 35 Peripherals, connecting 72 disconnecting 72 Port replicator Ports 58 118 Fujitsu Portrait format display 27 Ports Port replicator 58 Power saving 13 Power-on indicator 24 Printer does not print 85 R Radio components Safety notes 13 Rechargeable battery see battery 48 Return 42 S Safety information 12 Screen brightness Decrease 44 Increase 44 Screen connection see VGA socket 74 Security functions 63 SmartCard 69 SystemLock 69 Self-discharge, battery 48 Service life, battery 48 Set up Device 18 Setup Shift 42 Shift key 42 Shift+Tab 45 Slot Memory cards 53 Speaker 54 Status indicators 21 Subwoofer 54 Summer time 82 Supervisor HDD password changing 67 Supervisor password entering 66 removing 67 Suspend/Resume button 24 Switch off speakers 44 Switch on speakers 44 see BIOS Setup Utility 79 Index Switching between screen outputs 45 Switching on for the first time 19 Symbols Indicators 21 System settings, BIOS Setup Utility 79 T Tab key 42 The wireless connection to a network does not work 85 Time not correct 82 Tips 81 TPM 71 Transport 14 Damage during transportation 17 Traveling, notebook 14 Troubleshooting 81 Trusted Platform Module 71 U USB charging function 76 USB ports 75 User HDD password changing 67 User password entering 66 removing 67 Using the security lock 65 V VGA socket 74 Virtual number keys 43 Volume increase 45 reduce 44 Volume control 54 W Webcam 47 Windows key 42 Winter time 82 Wireless components 44 Wireless LAN Safety notes 13 switching module off 55, 104 switching module on 55, 104 Wrong date/time 82 Fujitsu 119
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2014-09-15 | 5755 ~ 5795 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
3 | 5650 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
4 | 2013-12-04 | 5755 ~ 5795 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
5 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
6 | 5650 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Effective |
2014-09-15
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2013-12-04
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Fujitsu Client Computing Limited (FCCL)
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0009379173
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
1-1, Kamikodanaka 4-chome
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Nakahara-ku, Kawasaki, N/A 211-8588
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Grantee Code |
EJE
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Equipment Product Code |
WB0088
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
M******** U********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Title |
Engineer
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
+81-4********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
+81-4********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
u******@jp.fujitsu.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 03/11/2015 | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 06/02/2014 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | FUJITSU LIFEBOOK T series T904 | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | FUJITSU LIFEBOOK T SERIES T904 WITH INTEL WP2 | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Grant Comments | Power listed is conducted. SAR compliance for portable use conditions has been evaluated as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. The highest reported SAR value for stand-alone and simultaneous transmission conditions are 0.36W/kg and 0.52W/kg, respectively. This device has a 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth mode. This class II permissive change is to address the antenna modification. | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Power listed is conducted. This class II permissive change is to address the antenna modification. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Power listed is conducted. Operations in the band 5.15-5.25GHz are restricted to indoor use only. SAR compliance for portable use conditions has been evaluated as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. The highest reported SAR values for stand-alone and simultaneous transmission conditions are 0.76W/kg and 0.92W/kg respectively. This device has a 20, 40, and 80 MHz bandwidth mode. This class II permissive change is to address the antenna modification. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Power listed is conducted. SAR compliance for portable use conditions has been evaluated as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. The highest reported SAR value for stand-alone and simultaneous transmission conditions are 0.36W/kg and 0.52W/kg, respectively. This device has a 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth mode. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Power listed is conducted. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Power listed is conducted. Operations in the band 5.15-5.25GHz are restricted to indoor use only. SAR compliance for portable use conditions has been evaluated as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. The highest reported SAR values for stand-alone and simultaneous transmission conditions are 0.76W/kg and 0.92W/kg respectively. This device has a 20, 40, and 80 MHz bandwidth mode. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
Sporton International Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
EMC Technologies Pty. Ltd.
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
A******** C******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
C******** Z******
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
61-3-********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
61-3-********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
a******@sporton.com.tw
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
c******@emctech.com.au
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.397 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15C | CC MO | 2422 | 2452 | 0.476 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 15C | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.486 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 15C | CC MO | 5755 | 5795 | 0.523 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 15C | CC MO | 2402 | 2480 | 0.003 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0030000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.033 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15E | CC MO | 5190 | 5230 | 0.037 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 3 | 15E | CC MO ND | 5260 | 5320 | 0.041 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 4 | 15E | CC MO ND | 5270 | 5310 | 0.013 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 5 | 15E | CC MO ND | 5500 | 5600 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 6 | 15E | CC MO ND | 5650 | 5700 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.397 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 15C | CC MO | 2422 | 2452 | 0.476 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 15C | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.486 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 4 | 15C | CC MO | 5755 | 5795 | 0.523 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 5 | 15C | CC MO | 2402 | 2480 | 0.003 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0030000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.033 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 2 | 15E | CC MO | 5190 | 5230 | 0.037 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 3 | 15E | CC MO ND | 5260 | 5320 | 0.041 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 4 | 15E | CC MO ND | 5270 | 5310 | 0.013 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 5 | 15E | CC MO ND | 5500 | 5600 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 6 | 15E | CC MO ND | 5650 | 5700 | 0.053 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC